item

Index

PDF- Catalog »item MB Building Kit System«

Instruction Manual

Adobe Acrobat Instruction

MB Building Kit System

Parts Container 80x40Window, PC, transparent / blacka = 80 mm b = 40 mm m = 152 gPA-GF, black1 piece 0.0.432.73

AntistaticPA-GF ELS, black1 pce. 0.0.432.76

Parts Container 120x40Window, PC, transparent / blacka = 120 mm b = 40 mm m = 200 gPA-GF, black1 piece 0.0.432.74


Information onusing theCatalogue andOrdering Products

This catalogue provides detailed information on all theproducts in the MB Building Kit System. It can be usedfor making orders, but the detailed product informationand numerous illustrations mean it is also a usefuldesign and planning tool.The following details must always be provided whenordering: product name, order unit and order number.

Unless stated otherwise, the order units used in thiscatalogue are always the smallest unit for a product, i.e.piece, set or cut-off per metre. Details of alternativessuch as ordering in packaging units etc. can be found inthe current price list.Please contact your dealer if you have any questions ontechnical matters or other aspects.

6. Special Elements 6.5 Work Bench Design

A black heading gives thename of the product, theproduct family or the productgroup.A grey heading provides anadditional explanation orrepeats the name if the productis continued to a new page.

The header is used for overall orientation andshows the current section together with theproduct group name and product family name.

The product description provides informationon the application and design features.

Key to page layout

1st column:• Product group name(optional)• Product family name(optional)• Product name

The Line symbols provideinformation on the suitabilityof the product for the ProfileLine (black figures = suitable,grey figures = not suitable).

The product photograph showsthe product in a typicalapplication or in its installedstate.

3rd column:• Product description• Additional photos (optional), functional drawing(s) (optional)• Product name• Technical data• Order unit

4th column:• Ordernumber(s)

Any technical data which is specified relates to all products listed afterwards.

The optical orientation aid helpsyou find your way around thecatalogue. It shows thebackground of the current productgroup photo.

This sets out the technical dataspecific to the product.

The product view shows allimportant dimensions anddesign details such as DINnumbers, screw sizes etc.

The antistatic symbol indicatesproducts that do not build upelectrostatic charges.

Functional drawing(s) and additionalphoto(s) explain the function of theproduct or provide notes on its use.

3

March 2001 Edition

MB Building KitSystem

item Industrietechnikund Maschinenbau GmbHFriedenstraße 107-109D-42699 SolingenPostbox 12 01 64D-42676 SolingenPhone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]

© item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH 2001Technical modifications and errors reserved. All rightsreserved. Use of texts and illustrations or reprints of anykind only permitted with our prior written consent. Thisalso applies for reproduction, translation or use inelectronic systems.

is a registered trademark of item Industrietechnikund Maschinenbau GmbH.

Basic Elements

Page 48 - 135

Floor Elements

Page 136 - 155

Fastening Elements

Page 156 - 229

Handles and Locks

Page 230 - 245

Panel Elements

Page 246 - 257

Special Elements

Page 258 - 303

Installation Elements

04 - 329

Dynamic Elements

Page 330 - 431

Auxiliary Elements

Page 432 - 449

4

1. Basic Elements

1.1 Profiles

1.2 Accessories for Profiles

1.3 Fasteners

2. Floor Elements

2.1 Adjustable Feet

2.2 Castors

2.3 Accessories for Floor Elements

3. Fastening Elements

3.1 T-Slot Nuts

3.2 Screws and Nuts

3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners

3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners

4. Handles and Locks

4.1 Handles

4.2 Grip Systems

4.3 Locks and Catches

4

Product Overview 6

Practical Applications 14

20

Mechanical Engineering 28

Enclosure and Guard Systems 34

Work Bench Systems 40

Special Applications and Solutions 44

48

49

1.1.1 Profiles 5 68

1.1.2 Profiles 6 72

1.1.3 Profiles 8 75

1.1.4 Angled and Flat Profiles 86

1.2.1 Caps for Profile End Faces 89

1.2.2 Cover for Profile Groove 96

1.2.3 Cover for Holes and Bores 101

102

1.3.1 Right-Angled Connections 106

1.3.2 Angled Connections 122

1.3.3 Cross-Profile Connections 126

1.3.4 Butt Connections 129

1.3.5 Parallel-Profile Connections 132

1.3.6 Secure Connections 135

136

2.1.1 Adjustable Feet, Threaded 137

2.1.2 Accessories for Adjustable Feet, Threaded 140

2.1.3 Special Adjustable Feet 143

150

2.3.1 Floor-Fastening Sets 153

2.3.2 Base Plates / Transport Plates 154

156

157

3.1.1 T-Slot Nuts 159

3.1.2 T-Slot Nut Profiles 165

3.2.1 Screws and Nuts 168

3.2.2 Special Fastening Elements 176

179

3.3.1 Fastening Panels in the Groove 180

3.3.2 Fastening Panels on the Groove 182

3.3.3 Fastening Panels in Special Profiles 196

3.4.1 Hinges 209

3.4.2 Movable Fasteners 216

230

231

234

4.3.1 Door Catches 238

4.3.2 Locking Systems 240

4.3.3 Door Locks 241

Contents

General Information Contents Index

Index

The Company

Applications for MB Building Kit System

5

5. Panel Elements

5.1 Closed Panels

5.2 Mesh Panels

5.3 Panels for Work Bench Design

5.4 Accessories for Panel Elements

6. Special Elements

6.1 Electrical Discharge

6.2 Pneumatic Applications

6.3 Door Security

6.4 Conveyors and Material Flow

6.5 Work Bench Design

6.6 Lighting

6.7 General Accessories

7. Installation Elements

7.1 Conduits

7.2 Profiles with Integrated Conduit

7.3 Electronic Boxes

7.4 Fasteners for Cables, Hoses and Switches

8. Dynamic Elements

8.1 Linear Slides

8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements

8.3 Accessories for Mechanical Drive Elements

9. Auxiliary Elements

9.1 Design and Ordering Software

9.2 Jigs and Tools

9.3 Services

Alphabetic Register

246

247

5.1.1 Transparent Panels 248

5.1.2 Non-Transparent Panels 249

5.1.3 Modular Panels 251

253

256

257

258

259

261

268

270

278

290

295

304

7.1.1 Conduits E 305

7.1.2 Modular Conduit System 309

7.1.3 Accessories for Conduits 316

321

323

326

330

8.1.1 Roller Guides 331

8.1.2 C-Rail Systems 351

8.1.3 Linear Guide Systems 362

8.1.4 Ball-Bearing Guide Bushes 367

8.1.5 Ball-Bush Block Guides 373

8.1.6 Shafts 381

8.1.7 Accessories for Linear Slides 382

8.2.1 Timing-Belt Drives 386

8.2.2 Chain Drives 401

8.2.3 Ball Screw Units 406

8.2.4 Bevel Gearbox 409

8.2.5 Accessories for Bevel Gearbox 411

8.3.1 Couplings 415

8.3.2 Miscellaneous 422

432

433

9.2.1 Connections for Basic Elements 435

9.2.2 Connections for Fastening Elements 438

9.2.3 Connections for Dynamic Elements 440

9.2.4 General Tools 442

445

9.3.1 Saw Cuts 446

9.3.2 Connection Processing 446

9.3.3 Counter Boring and Tapping 449

9.3.4 Processing of Shafts 450

452

6

Page 106 Page 108 Page 110

Page 100Page 96 Page 97

Page 121

Page 126

Page 112

Page 122

Page 129

Page 115

Page 127

Page 124

Page 89

Basic ElementsPage 48 onwards

Page 728 Page 75

General Information Index Product Overview

Page 86

Page 119

Page 135

Page 132Page 130

7

Floor ElementsPage 136 onwards

Fastening ElementsPage 156 onwards


Page 142 Page 143 Page 145Page 144

Page 148 Page 149 Page 150Page 147

Page 145

Page 154


8

Page 181 Page 182

Page 193 Page 194 Page 195 Page 197

Page 200 Page 208

Page 209 Page 212

Page 205

Page 222 Page 224

Page 198

Page 216 Page 218

Page 226


Page 165

Page 177 Page 180

Page 168 Page 176Page 167

Page 189

Page 204Page 202

Page 220

Page 164

Page 225

Page 214

9

Handles and LocksPage 230 onwards


Page 236 Page 237 Page 238 Page 239 Page 240

Page 241 Page 243

Panel ElementsPage 246 onwards


Page 242

10


Page 259

Page 265Page 264 Page 266 Page 268

Page 269

Page 260


Page 279

Special ElementsPage 258 onwards



Page 263

Page 257

Page 262

Page 277

Page 274

11

Page 286 Page 287


Page 283

Page 295

Page 292

Page 297

Installation ElementsPage 304 onwards

Page 305

Page 282


Page 313

Page 290

Page 309Page 308


Page 284

12

Page 373

Page 390 Page 398

Page 362

Dynamic ElementsPage 330 onwards

Page 338 Page 341




Page 326

Page 399

Page 340

Page 327

Page 381 Page 396

Page 328

13

Page 409

Page 422 Page 428Page 427Page 426

Auxiliary ElementsPage 432 onwards



Page 406

Page 437


Page 429

14

Where can I findMB Elements for:Mechanical Engineering

The elements of the MB Building Kit System are used ina wide range of combinations for constructing machines,jigs and equipment. The various components aregrouped together in this catalogue according to theirfunction.The frame structures for mechanical engineeringapplications are essentially built using components fromthe Basic Elements product group. Profiles of differentproduct lines and sizes can be combined into basicframes with the aid of special connectors. As well aswithstanding applied forces, these basic frames can alsobe used for the direct attachment of panels or safetyguards / enclosures from the Panel Elements productgroup in order to provide passive protection againstunauthorized access or moving components. The panelelements making up the machine frame can also take theform of swing, sliding or lifting doors.Stable adjustable feet from the Floor Elements productgroup provide a safe and reliable support capable ofaccomodating the loads which arise and also provide ameans for compensating for unevenness in the floor.

Various forms of fastening elements are used to connectfunctional units and accessories which can be integratedwith ease thanks to the flexibility of the system elements.Dynamic elements such as guides and drives assistautomation. These are built directly onto the basicelements, making intelligent use of existing systemelements.Electrical and pneumatic power can be supplied reliablyand easily through the installation elements.

General Information Index Practical Applications: Mechanical Engineering

Hinges, Heavy Duty (Basic Elements)

Aluminium profiles (Basic Elements)

Adjustable Feet (Floor Elements)

Angle Elements (Basic Elements)

Anti-Vibration Inserts (Floor Elements)

Fasteners (Basic Elements)

Grips (Handles and Locks)

Angled/Flat Profiles (Basic Elements)

15

Roller Guides (Dynamic Elements)

Timing-Belt Reverse Units (DynamicElements)

Synchroniser Shafts (DynamicElements)

Floor Fastener (Floor Elements)

Conduits (Installation Elements)

Holders for Cables and Hoses(Installation Elements)

Conveyor Rollers (Special Elements)

Panels (Panel Elements)

16

Enclosure and guard system elements cover a broadspectrum of frames and frame constructions to preventunauthorised access by personnel to an ongoingproduction process or contact with moving components.They also prevent unauthorised access to products etc.Enclosures and guards are constructed from systemelements of various product groups. By combining basicelements, floor elements and, in particular, elements forrigid and movable panel fasteners or panel elementsthemselves, it is possible to create enclosure and guardsystems which comply with relevant safety standardsand can also be customised to the user‘s specific needs.A whole range of components facilitate the process ofconnecting panels to frame structures, constructinglifting, sliding and swing doors and providing electricalsecurity for these doors. The complete compatibility ofthe products in the MB Building Kit System is reflectedin the functionality of the actual handling systemmerging seamlessly with the enclosure and guardfunction. Machine safety systems employ the profiles ofthe machine base as support for the panels and frameswhich are either fixed or suspended or are attached bynormal or heavy-duty hinges.In contrast, guard systems which are installed at aspecific distance from the particular production facility(e.g. cell guarding) or are used as room partitioning

elements use independent stand profiles for attachingpanels and frames. Special components are available forthese guard units.

General Information Index Practical Applications: Enclosure and Guard Systems

Where can I findMB Elements for:Enclosure and GuardSystems

Hinges (Fastening Elements)

Security Limit Switch (Special Elements)

C-Rail (Dynamic Elements)

Slide Guide Strips (Special Elements)

Grips (Handles and Locks)

Locking Systems (Handles and Locks)

17

Acrylic Glass (Panel Elements) Clamp Profiles (Fastening Elements)

Sealing Profiles (Fastening Elements)

Adjustable Feet (Floor Elements)

Aluminium Profiles (Basic Elements)

Hangers (Fastening Elements)


18

The item MB System provides the ideal basis forconstructing state-of-the-art work benches. The MBBuilding Kit System can be used to design a wholerange of work benches - from simple standard benchesto special ergonomic solutions to meet specificrequirements.The design requirements for ergonomic workingenvironments in manufacturing, assembly and admini-strative areas range from provision of a simple workingsurface to a semi-automated production environmentwhere the work bench is integrated into a productionfacility.Basic elements can be used to create a simple workbench to provide a basis for jigs or function as aworking surface. The range of possibilities also extendsto the ergonomically designed TRIGO 272 Work BenchSystem, which can be integrated into the productionflow and customised to the operator and his specificneeds.The item MB Building Kit System can also be used toprovide flexible, cost-effective solutions in non-production areas. Special elements are used fordesigning work benches for offices and storage areas,but also in material flow processes.

General Information Index Practical Applications: Work Bench Systems

Where can I findMB Elements for:Work Bench Systems

The compatibility of all products in the MB Building KitSystem supports a whole range of solutions with diffe-rent requirements and degrees of automation. Workbenches are constructed using components from theBasic Elements, Panel Elements and Installation Ele-ments product groups or in combination with otherproduct groups.

19

Sockets (Installation Elements)Light Fittings (Special Elements)

Conduits (Installation Elements)

Caps (Basic Elements)

Rests (Special Elements)

Aluminium Profiles (Basic Elements)

Runners (Special Elements)

Table Tops (Panel Elements)

Parts Containers (Special Elements) TRIGO 272 Work Bench


20Corporate Headquarters, main building / item international Solingen

21

��

1

3

2

4

When item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbHwas established in 1976 in Solingen, its initial areas ofoperation were the design and construction ofcustomised machines and assembly equipment.From the very outset, item set itself a prime goal -to reduce the cost of building machines in our owncompany by rationalising machining and assemblyoperations and by standardising components.This resulted directly in the item MB Building KitSystem - a machine-building kit for labour-saving andcost-cutting constructions of various kinds, fromassembly work benches and facilities to automatedproduction equipment.Functional, economic and flexible in use - these are justsome of the many requirements which need to be met byan industrial building kit system covering the widespectrum of modern plant and production installations.

The CompanyThe modular design of the MB Building Kit Systemensures that the elements of the individual productgroups can be combined at will.Over the years, item has become the market leader onthe market for modular building kit systems. Thestandard values which item defined for e.g. modulardimensions and system grooves are now acceptedworldwide and are often copied.By constantly developing the MB Building Kit Systemand its range of products, we are ensuring that item willmaintain its technological lead in the years ahead.

1 Main entrance and reception / iteminternational Solingen

2 Training facilities / item internationalSolingen

3 Exhibition / item internationalSolingen

4 Purchases and Distribution / iteminternational Hilden

item international

22

2 3

1

4

ProductPhilosophy

All products in the MB Building Kit System aredeveloped, manufactured and supplied using thestrictest quality criteria.The permissible production tolerances are extremelytight and in some cases lie well below industry standardtolerance levels. By using physical principles to besteffect, item has optimized the relationship betweenmaterial usage and system element stability.Systematic quality management ensures completecompliance with agreed standard values. And our highquality naturally also extends to the service portfolio ofeach individual item sales partner.In developing the MB Building Kit System, item paysparticular attention to ensuring the environmentalcompatibility of all products. The system elements canbe reused and, where the technology allows, areproduced from only single materials.This means that the individual components of thevarious units can be disassembled later for recycling. Allaluminium profiles can be recycled using procedureswhich are entirely eco-friendly. Plastic and metal partsall bear details of the materials used.

General Information The Company Product Philosophy

Details of all materials can be found under the individualproduct descriptions.The extremely high level of innovation is reflected in thenumerous patented products in the MB Building KitSystem.

When developing new products, particular emphasis isplaced on innovation and design.The products in the MB Building Kit System havereceived many international design awards over theyears.item‘s design credentials do not stop with thedevelopment and design of industrial components, butalso include highly successful design products for theconsumer goods market.

1 Champagne glasses

2 Cover profile system

3 Parts Containers

4 Ladies‘ and gentlemen‘s watches

23

8

76

5

5 TRIGO 272 Work Bench from theTRIGO Work Bench System

6 Bevel Gear Box

7 Servo motors 90/250W

8 Ball-bearing guide bushes

item design awards from 1986 to 2000:> if ’86 / Die gute Industrieformfor elements in the item MB Building Kit System> if ’89 / Industrieform Hanoverfor item ladies’ and gentlemen’s watches> Design Innovations ’90 / Award for exceptionaldesign quality, North-Rhine Westphalia Design Centrefor item servomotors 90/250W> if ’91 / Industrial Design Forum Hanoverfor item ball-bearing guide bushes> if ’93 / Industrial Design Forum Hanoverfor the item HITRAIN 200 modular transfer system> if ’94 / Industrial Design Forum Hanoverfor item Bevel Gearbox> if ’95 / Industrial Design Forum Hanoverfor the TRIGO Work Bench System> if ’96 / Industrial Design Forum Hanoverfor the item cover profile system> if ’97 / Industrial Design Forum Hanoverfor item Parts Containers

24

6

1

4

2

6

3

5

Service Spectrumand Sales Germany

Numerous local service centres provide users with abroad spectrum of services:> Fast delivery of all system elements> Elements machined ready for assembly> CAD-assisted project engineering, tendering anddesign of installations and equipment> Provision of construction kits> Turnkey solutions with system elements> Turnkey installation and commissioning> Tools, jigs and machines> CAD software for project management> User support in resolving special needs> Provision of technical documentation> Internal and external training courses

General Information The Company Service Spectrum and Sales Germany

1 CAD-assisted project management

2 Training in the MB Building KitSystem

3 Aluminium profile cut-off unit

4 High-bay warehouse for MB BuildingKit system elements

5 Assembly service

6 User consultancy and serviceseither at item or at the customer’s

25

78

11

10

9

7

9

10 11

8

item has a decentralised sales structure in Germany.Local sales and service centres provide customers witha full range of services to provide optimum support inall situations.

7 item Industrietechnik undMaschinenbau GmbH, Solingen

8 item Nossen

9 item Industrietechnik undMaschinenbau GmbH, Ulm

10 item Ölbronn

11 item Freiburg

26

1

2

InternationalSales

With branches, sales partners and a comprehensivenetwork of service centres worldwide, item can assureusers of continuous support and rapid availability ofproducts in their direct vicinity.You can find item sales partners in the followingcountries:

> Australia

> Austria

> Belgium

> Brazil

> Canada

> Czech Republic

> Denmark

> Finland

> France

> Greece

> Hungary

> Ireland

> Israel

> Italy

> Japan

> Netherlands

> New Zealand

> Norway

> Poland

> Singapore

> Slovenia

> South Africa

> Spain

> Sweden

> Switzerland

> UK

> USA

For details of where to find your local service partner,refer to our web site at www.item-international.com.

General Information The Company International Sales

1 Italy

2 UK

3 Japan

4 USA

5 Austria

6 Belgium

7 Spain

27

4

5

3

6

7

2929

1

2

Modular components from the MB Building Kit Systemfor system solutions in the field of mechanicalengineering.The MB Building Kit System is a cost-effective and flexi-ble solution for producing a whole range of fixtures andequipment up to and including automated handlingsystems. The products of the MB Building Kit Systemmake the perfect solution for everything from simplebasic frames and testing stations to complex handlingunits.The frame structures for mechanical engineeringapplications are essentially built using components fromthe Basic Elements product group. Profiles of differentproduct lines and sizes can be combined into basicframes with the aid of special connectors. As well aswithstanding applied forces, these basic frames can alsobe used for the direct attachment of panels or safetyguards / enclosures from the Panel Elements product

group in order to provide passive protection againstunauthorised access or moving components. The panelelements making up the machine frame can also take theform of swing, sliding or lifting doors.Stable adjustable feet from the Floor Elements productgroup provide a safe and reliable support capable ofaccommodating the loads which arise and also provide ameans of compensating for uneven floors.The structures can then be combined into fullyfunctional, automated units using dynamic componentscreated from elements in fhe Dynamic Elements productgroup.

1 Handling system for removingcomponents

2 Elevator unit for a workpiece storein an indexing transport system

Applications for MBBuilding Kit System

Mechanical Engineering

General Information Applications for MB Building Kit System Mechanical Engineering

306

4 5

3

3 Workpiece carrier transport system

4 Integrated inspection station forelectrical tools

5 Vertical store for workpiece carriers

6 Workpiece carrier transport systemfor feeding workstations


31

7 8

9

10

7 Engine assembly line

8 Horizontal and vertical axes forhigh loads

9 Handling system for removing ironmesh from a welding machine

10 Automatic storage and assemblysystem

32

11

12

13 14

11 Fully automatic station forassembling gear boxes

12 Fully automatic de-palletisingsystem with integrated sorting station

13 Automatic thread tapping station(detail) for inserting threads in the endfaces of aluminium profiles

14 Fully automatic assembly systemfor kitchen appliances


33

15

16 17

18

19

15 Loading and unloading station forwood laminating press

16 Device for machining the ends ofaluminum profiles

17 Protected loading / unloadingstation in an automated warehouse

18 Engine assembly line

19 Handling system for lengthyproducts

3535

2

1

Modular components from the MB Building Kit Systemfor system solutions in the field of enclosure and guardsystems.Both guard units for machine and production equipmentand room partitioning elements in offices and salesareas can be created quickly and cheaply using the MBBuilding Kit System.Enclosure and guard system elements cover a broadspectrum of frame constructions to prevent unauthorisedaccess by personnel to an ongoing production processor contact with moving components. They also preventunauthorised access to products etc.A whole range of components facilitate the process ofconnecting panels to frame structures, constructinglifting, sliding and swing doors and providing electricalsecurity for these doors. The complete compatibility ofthe products in the MB Building Kit System is reflected

in the functionality of the actual handling systemmerging seamlessly with the enclosure and guardfunction. Machine safety systems employ the profiles ofthe machine base as support for the panels and frameswhich are either fixed or suspended or are attached bynormal or heavy-duty hinges.In contrast, guard systems which are installed at aspecific distance from the particular production facility(e.g. cell guarding) or are used as room partitioningelements use independent stand profiles for attachingpanels and frames.

1 Large-capacity security enclosurefor a storage area

2 Elevator unit for workpiece carrier


Enclosure and GuardSystems

General Information Applications for MB Building Kit System Enclosure and Guard Systems

36

4

3

5

6

3 Automatic palletising system withtransparent protective enclosureproviding a full view of the productionprocess

4 Automatic handling system withintegrated safety guard

5 Security enclosure for a largestorage area


6 Protection of a production facilityagainst unauthorised access andcontamination

37

7

8

9

7 Display case with transparentpanels

8 Protected machine for mechanicalprocessing of armature commutatorsfor electric motors

9 Separating off an access route forheavy forklift trucks

38

10 11

12

13

10 Lifting door guarding a processingmachine

11 Flexible modular stations withdirect integration into a transfer system

12 Deep drawing press with integratedguard unit

13 Automatic storage for aluminiumprofiles with handling system andintegrated protective mesh frame


3917

14 15

16

14 Palletising station for stacking printproducts on a transport pallet, withintegrated guard unit

15 Automatic assembly station withintegrated guard areas

16 Loading and unloading unit formulti-level wood laminating press

17 Fencing off the danger zones on arobot assembly line

40TRIGO 272 Work Bench System with ergonomically designed table top geometry and independent power-adjusted levels for the footrest, table top and tool rails

41

1 2

Modular components from the MB Building Kit Systemfor system solutions in the field of work bench systems.The MB Building Kit System can be used to design awhole range of work benches - from simple standardbenches to special ergonomic solutions to meet specificrequirements.The design requirements for ergonomic workingenvironments in manufacturing, assembly and admini-strative areas range from provision of a simple workingsurface to a semi-automated production environmentwhere the work bench is integrated into a productionfacility.The compatibility of all products in the MB Building KitSystem supports a whole range of solutions with diffe-rent requirements and degrees of automation.

Work benches are constructed using components fromthe Basic Elements, Panel Elements and Installation Ele-ments product groups or in combination with otherproduct groups.The MB Building Kit System also includes variousspecial products for exclusive use in work benchsystems which have been designed with ergonomicneeds in mind.

1 Work bench system in a helicopterproduction facility

2 Grouped work benches forstanding or sitting in the assemblyarea

General Information Applications for MB Building Kit System Work Bench Systems


Work Bench Systems

42

3

7

4

8

65

3 Work benches integrated into aproduction workflow

4 Work bench with tool rail

5 Work benches for standing orsitting in the assembly area

6 TRIGO 272 Work Bench equippedfor office use

7 Work benches in an assembly cell

8 Work bench with pull-out drawer ata CNC milling machine

General Information Applications for MB Building Kit System Work Bench Systems

43

9

10

11 12

9 Work benches integrated into aproduction line, with materialssupplied on special trolleys adapted tothe specific transport and work benchrequirements

10 Assembly work bench with materialfeed and conveyance of the assembledproducts by means of roller conveyors

11 Mobile order-picking bench withintegrated scales in a small partswarehouse

12 Laptop assembly line

44Digital length measuring system on a roller conveyor

45

1

2

3

Modular components from the MB Building Kit Systemfor system applications in the field of specialapplications and solutions.This is where the tremendous versatility of the elementsin the MB Building Kit System comes to the fore.The system elements can be used to develop solutionsthat go far beyond standard applications in the fields ofmechanical engineering, enclosure and guard systemsand work bench systems.MB Building Kit System components can be used toconstruct laboratory appliances, systems for producingelectronic components or packaging machines, but alsofor highly complex constructions for use in clean rooms.In the office furniture sector, MB system componentscan be used to create a whole range of interesting,customised system furniture such as filing cabinets,sideboards, etc.

1 Application in the electrical /electronics industry

2 Fitting out a wheelchair

3 Laboratory apparatus in thefoodstuffs research sector

For exhibitions and presentations, elements such asbrochure stands, display cases and other sales aids canbe produced cheaply and flexibly.This great diversity is also ideal for private use, wherethe solutions are only limited by the customer’s imagi-nation. A perfect, customised solution can be found foralmost all applications. The following pages show a fewexamples.

General Information Applications for MB Building Kit System Special Applications and Solutions


Special Applications andSolutions

46

4

6

5

7

8

9 10

4 Picture frame from aluminiumprofiles from the MB Building Kit System

5 Garage door guide using C-Rail

6 Filing cabinet for office applications

7 Garden steps from aluminium profiles

8 Fitted kitchen

9 Socket strip from conduit elements

10 Brochure stand

General Information Applications for MB Building Kit System Special Applications and Solutions

47

11 12

1413

16 17

15

11 Handrail in private household

12 Sand pit

13 Office furniture

14 Stand for outboard motors

15 Kickboard

16 Office cabinet systems

17 Aluminium ladder and roof rackmade from MB system elements

49

Core Bore and GrooveSystem

1. Basic Elements 1.1 Profiles

T-Slot Nut in the profile groove

Standard Fastener in the core bore Mounting an Adjustable Foot

Using high-tensile aluminium profiles, any type ofstructure can be assembled cleanly and rapidly withoutfurther surface processing. All profiles are anodized andare produced with modular dimensions to ensure thatthey are compatible with specific Lines. In practice, theyare re-usable and the material is suitable for recycling.The MB Building Kit System contains constructionprofiles with very small sections from only 20x10 mmand weights of 0.35 kg/m to profiles with externaldimensions and weights of up to 160x80 mm and13.52 kg/m respectively.Profiles are also available for special applications. Youcan find details of these in the corresponding sections ofthe catalogue.The aluminium profiles are produced in three Lines ofdifferent sizes, the width of groove being used for thedesignation:Line 5: Groove width = 5 mm; Modular dim. 20 mmLine 6: Groove width = 6 mm; Modular dim. 30 mmLine 8: Groove width = 8 mm; Modular dim. 40 mm .Within the Lines, uniform modular dimensions meanthat the accessory elements and combinations ofprofiles are fully interchangeable.All the profiles feature longitudinal grooves toaccommodate connecting elements and for attachingaccessories at any position. The profile grooves are alsosuitable for holding cables or hoses.The profiles are also characterised by through corebores for use with standard fastening elements and toaccommodate accessory components. All the core boresand profile cavities can also be used as compressed airducts.

Mounting with Multiblock

Panel retention

Guiding movable elementsGuiding shaft assembly

Groove cover with Cover Profile Al

The basic elements of the MB Building Kit Systemconsist of profiles, connecting elements and caps.

Selection of Profile Line When selecting the appropriate profile Line, you need toconsider the maximum profile load anticipated. Themaximum load of the profiles in the selected Line shouldbe taken into account along with the deflection andmaterial stress, and sufficient safety reserves should beallowed for.

For areas with lower loads, “light duty” profiles areavailable in Line 6 and “light duty” and “E” (Economy)profiles in Line 8. This ensures that all components canstill be used throughout, and that the construction is notonly cost-effective, but can also accommodate theappropriate stresses.

The extruded aluminium construction profiles areprovided with grooves which can be used in conjunctionwith connecting elements and can also perform a wholerange of additional functions.

The aluminium alloy is resistant to weathering and manychemicals.The surface of the profiles has been specially treated tomake it permanently scratch-proof and has also beencorrosion-protected.All profiles have been designed to deliver maximumstrength for the materials used.

1. Basic Elements

1.1 Profiles

50

F

F

F

Technical Data Extruded ProfileSymbol Al Mg Si 0.5 F 25Material number 3.3206.72Status: Artificially agedMechanical details(Values apply only in press direction)Tensile strength Rm: min. 245 N/mm2

0.2 limit Rp 0.2 min. 195 N/mm2

Density 2.7 kg/dm3

Ductile yield A5 min.10 %Ductile yield A10 min. 8 %Linear coefficient ofexpansion: 23.6x10-6 1/KMod. of elasticity approx. 70,000 N/mm2

Modulus of rigidity approx. 25,000 N/mm2

Hardness approx. 75 HB - 2.5/187.5

TolerancesOuter dimensions depending on size ± 0.2 mm to 0.5 mmDeformations such as straightness and flatnesstolerance to DIN 17615 Part 3.Total length of profiles in packaging units:6000 mm, effectively 6010 + 100 mm3000 mm, effectively 3010 + 100 mm2000 mm, effectively 2010 + 100 mmSurfaceThe aluminium profiles are natural or black anodizedand are therefore permanently resistant to scratchingand corrosion.Surface with matt finish (E 6), anodized and compressedoxidation.Minimum layer thickness 10 μm, layer hardness 250 -350 HV.This all-round hard anodized surface covering makes thesaw cut virtually burr-free, so that it does not requireremachining.


Recommended AssemblyConfigurations

Where possible, the vertical profiles should extendthrough the entire height; this simplifies connection ofthe floor elements and improves the overall appearance.

Structures should be designed to withstand the loadslikely to be placed on them, i.e. by avoiding torsionalstress at the connection points and by giving preferenceto positive locking over friction resistance in thedirection of applied force in all the connections.Where possible, profiles should be installed so that thelargest section dimension opposes the load in order toachieve the maximum flexural strength.Avoid breaks in the supporting profile when installingadditional attachments; the benefits include greaterstability, fewer cuts, fewer connections and reducedassembly time.Extend the profiles only with the aid of the correspondingfastening elements and, where possible, support them atthe joints.

Vertical through profiles

Preferred orientation of profile

Attachment on the profile

Support for a jointAnodized surfaces mounted on eachother

Load-resistant support

All standard Profiles, Profiles light and Profiles E of allLines feature defined points of support on the profileexterior and inclined groove flanks.The defined points of support ensure a firm and stableconnection with all other components. The controlledelastic deformation of the groove flanks pre-tensions thefastening screw in all operating states and protects theconnection against vibration.

If anodized surfaces are mounted in contact with eachother, we recommend that these surfaces be lubricated inorder to prevent any noise being generated by frictionbetween the anodized surfaces.If profile-based structures are likely to be exposed toextremes of stress, e.g. impact loads, which might causedisplacement at the points of attachment, pin elementsshould be installed in order to provide additionalsupport.

51

The ø 4.3 mm core bore for M5 is reborable up to max.ø 6 mm or M6.

Modular dimension/position and dimensional andpositional tolerances of grooves and core bores as afunction of the profile‘s exterior dimension.

Positional tolerance

Groove [n] Core bore [m]

Profiles 5 20x20 0.15 0.20

40x20, 40x40, 60x20, 60x40, 80x20 0.15 0.30


Incline of groove flank:Profiles 5 = 0.10 mm

Tensile Loading

Geometry

Profiles 5 Profiles 5 with closed grooves

Profiles 5

52

The following equations apply for calculating deflection f:

Example load 1

f =F x l3

______________________

3 x E x � x 104

Example load 2

f =F x l3

______________________

48 x E x � x 104

Example load 3

f =F x l3

______________________

192 x E x � x 104

The following equations are to be used for calculatingthe deflection caused by the dead weight:As example load 1

f =F x l3

______________________

8 x E x � x 104

As example load 2

f =5 x F x l3

______________________

384 x E x � x 104

As example load 3

f = F x l3

______________________

384 x E x � x 104

F = Load in Nl = Free profile length in mm� = Moment of inertia in cm4

E = Modulus of elasticity in N/mm2

EAI = 70,000 N/mm2

Profiles 5Determination of the ProfileDeflection

Check of the bending stress

� =Mb

________________________

W x 103

� = Bending stress in N/mm2

Mb = Max. bending moment in NmmW = Resistance moment in cm3

The calculated bending stress ��must be compared withthe permissible bending stress �perm.

�perm=Rp 0.2

________________________

S

The safety factor S must be selected depending on therequired application conditions.


An approximate calculation of the deflection is possiblewith the help of the nomogram shown on the right. Theexample shown is worked through in the direction of thearrow to determine the deflection.Based on the given allowable maximum deflection, thenomogram calculation procedure can be reversed inorder to determine the required profile sizes ormaximum permissible loads.

Example:

Given:F = 1000 Nl = 500 mm�y = 5.14 cm4 (Profile 5 40x20, edgewise)Find:f = Deflection in mmResults:Example load 1f � 11.6 mmExample load 2f � 0.72 mmExample load 3f � 0.18 mm

For an approximate calculation of the deflection causedby the dead weight, the dead weight is entered as F inthe nomogram and the resulting values should be halved.

54

Profiles 5Determination of theTorsion Angle

The following equations apply for calculating the torsionangle �:Example load 1

� =180° x Mt x l

_________________________

� x G x �t x 104

Example load 2

� =180° x Mt x l

_________________________

� x 4 x G x �t x 104

Where:Mt = Torsional moment in Nmml = Free profile length in mm�t = Moment of inertia in cm4

(Values determined by experiment)G = Modulus of rigidity in N/mm2

GAI = 25,000 N/mm2

� = Torsion angle in decimal degrees


The example shown on the nomogram opposite is basedon the free profile length and a given torsional moment.The result is the torsion angle as a deformation of Profile5 40x40.It is naturally also possible to use the nomogram inreverse and begin with a maximum permissible torsionto calculate the required profile sizes or the maximumloading moments for a specified profile length.

Example:

Given:Mt = 20 Nml = 500 mm�t = 5.42 cm4 (Profile 5 40x40)Find:� = Torsion angle in decimal degreesResults:Example load 1� � 0.42°Example load 2� � 0.11°

Check of the torsional stress

In practice, the criterion for a profile to fail under atorsional load is less the fact that the permissibletorsional stress is exceeded, but rather the presence ofexcessive twist (torsion angle) even though it is stillwithin the elastic limit. This deformation greatly impairscorrect functioning of the components. Consequently, amore torsionally rigid profile must be selected longbefore the permissible stress values are reached.

56


Profiles 6

Core Bore andGroove System

The ø 5 mm core bore for M6 is reborable up tomax. ø 8 mm or M8. Positional tolerance


Profiles 6

30x30 0.15 0.20

30x30-45°, 60x30 60x60, 120x30 0.15 0.30

120x60 0.20 0.40

Profiles 6with closed grooves 30x30 0.15 0.30

60x30 0.20 0.40


57


Profiles 6 Profiles 6 light

Tensile Loading

Profiles 6

Geometry

Profiles 6 light Profiles 6 light with closed grooves

58


Profiles 6Determination of theProfile Deflection


� =Mb

________________________

W x 103



The calculated bending stress ��must be compared withthe permissible bending stress �perm .

�perm=Rp 0.2

________________________

S

The safely factor S must be selected depending on therequired application conditions.

The following equations apply for calculatingdeflection f:Example load 1

f =F x l3

______________________

3 x E x��x 104

Example load 2

f =F x l3

______________________

48 x E x��x 104

Example load 3

f =F x l3

______________________

192 x E x � x 104


f =F x l3

______________________

8 x E x � x 104

As example load 2

f =5 x F x l3

______________________

384 x E x � x 104

As example load 3

f = F x l3

______________________

384 x E x � x 104



EAI = 70,000 N/mm2


Example:

Given:F = 4500 Nl = 500 mmIy = 21.22 cm4 (Profile 6 60x30 light, edgewise)

Find:f = Deflection in mmResults:Example load 1f � 12.6 mm

Example load 2f � 0.79 mm

Example load 3f � 0.20 mm

For an approximate calculation of the deflection causedby the dead weight, the dead weight is entered as F inthe nomogram and the resulting values should be halved.

60




� =180° x Mt x l

________________________

� x G x �t x 104

Example load 2

� =180° x Mt x l

____________________________

� x 4 x G x �t x 104



GAI = 25,000 N/mm2



Example:

Given:Mt = 5 Nml = 1000 mm�t = 12.23 cm4 (Profiles 6 120x30)

Find:� = Torsion angle in decimal degrees

Results:Example load 1� � 0.09°

Example load 2� � 0.02°

Checking the torsional stress

In practice, the criterion for a profile to fail under atorsional load is less the fact that the permissibletorsional stress is exceeded, but rather the presence ofexcessive deformation in the area of elasticity (torsionangle). This deformation greatly impairs correctfunctioning of the components. Consequently, a moretorsionally rigid profile must be selected long before thepermissible stress values are reached.

62


Profiles 8



The ø 6.8 mm core bore for M8 of Profiles 8 and Profiles8 light is reborable up to max. ø 13 mm or M12. Positional tolerance


Profiles 8

40x40 0.15 0.2040x40-45°, 80x40 0.15 0.30

80x80-45°, 80x80, 120x40 0.20 0.40 160x40 0.20 0.50120x80, 160x80 0.20 0.60

Profiles 8with closed grooves40x40, 80x40, 80x80 0.15 0.3080x80-45°,160x40,160x80 0.30 0.60

63


Profiles 8

Tensile Loading

Profiles 8 light

Profiles 8 E

Profiles 8

Geometry

Profiles 8 light Profiles 8 E

Profiles 8 light with closed grooves Profiles 8 E with closed grooves

64




� =Mb

________________________

W x 103



The calculated bending stress � must be compared withthe permissible bending stress �perm .

�perm=Rp 0.2

________________________

S


The following equations apply for calculatingdeflection f:Example load 1

f =F x l3

______________________

3 x E x��x 104

Example load 2

f =F x l3

______________________

48 x E x��x 104

Example load 3

f =F x l3

______________________

192 x E x��x 104


f =F x l3

______________________

8 x E x��x 104

As example load 2

f =5 x F x l3

______________________

384 x E x��x 104

As example load 3

f = F x l3

______________________

384 x E x��x 104



EAI = 70,000 N/mm2


Example:

Given:F = 10,000 Nl = 500 mm�y = 69.44 cm4 (Profile 8 80x40 light, edgewise)

Find:f = Deflection in mm

Results:Example load 1f � 8.56 mmExample load 2f � 0.53 mmExample load 3f � 0.13 mmFor an approximate calculation of the deflection causedby the dead weight, the dead weight is entered as F inthe nomogram and the resulting values should be halved.

66




� =180° x Mt x l

________________________

� x G x �t x 104

Example load 2

� =180° x Mt x l

________________________

� x 4 x G x �t x 104



GAI = 25,000 N/mm2



Example:

Given:Mt = 20 Nml = 2000 mm�t = 136.98 cm4 (Profile 8 80x80)

Find:� = Torsion angle in decimal degrees

Results:Example load 1� � 0.07°

Example load 2� � 0.02°

Checking the torsional stress

In practice, the criterion for a profile to fail under atorsional load is less the fact that the permissible torsionalstress is exceeded, but rather the presence of excessivedeformation in the area of elasticity (torsion angle). Thisdeformation greatly impairs correct functioning of thecomponents. Consequently, a more torsionally rigidprofile must be selected long before the permissiblestress values are reached.

68

Profiles 5 are ideal for lightweight constructions of allkinds. The small exterior dimensions ensure particularlycompact jigs, covers and handling equipment. The fullfunctionality of the building kit is retained.

1.1.1 Profiles 5ModularDimensions(Basis 20 mm),Open and ClosedGrooves

Profiles with closed grooves are suitable forconstructions where particular emphasis is placed onappearance and ease of cleaning.

1. Basic Elements 1.1 Profiles 1.1.1 Profiles 5

Profile 5 20x20A = 1.80 cm2 I = 0.72 cm4

It = 0.13 cm4

m = 0.48 kg/m W = 0.72 cm3

Cut-off max. 3000 mm, natural 0.0.370.03

Cut-off max. 3000 mm, black 0.0.370.15

Profile 5 20x20 1NA = 1.85 cm2 Ix = 0.74 cm4 Iy = 0.77 cm4

It = 0.20 cm4

m = 0.50 kg/m Wx = 0.74 cm3 Wy = 0.74 cm3


Profile 5 20x20 2N90A = 1.91 cm2 Ix = 0.78 cm4 Iy = 0.78 cm4

It = 0.42 cm4

m = 0.51 kg/m Wx = 0.76 cm3 Wy = 0.76 cm3



It = 0.32 cm4

m = 0.51 kg/m Wx = 0.74 cm3 Wy = 0.82 cm3


Profile 5 40x20A = 3.32 cm2 Ix = 1.41 cm4 Iy = 5.14 cm4

It = 0.97 cm4

m = 0.89 kg/m Wx = 1.41 cm3 Wy = 2.57 cm3



Profile 5 40x20 2NA = 3.38 cm2 Ix = 1.47 cm4 Iy = 5.21 cm4

It = 1.41 cm4

m = 0.91 kg/m Wx = 1.44 cm3 Wy = 2.61 cm3


69


It = 1.11 cm4

m = 0.91 kg/m Wx = 1.40 cm3 Wy = 2.73 cm3



It = 1.64 cm4

m = 0.92 kg/m Wx = 1.44 cm3 Wy = 2.66 cm3



It = 2.17 cm4

m = 0.93 kg/m Wx = 1.56 cm3 Wy = 2.65 cm3


Profile 5 40x40A = 5.14 cm2 I = 9.30 cm4

It = 5.42 cm4

m = 1.39 kg/m W = 4.65 cm3




It = 1.54 cm4

m = 1.28 kg/m Wx = 2.06 cm3 Wy = 5.36 cm3


Profile 5 60x40A = 7.67 cm2 Ix =13.52 cm4 Iy = 28.40 cm4

It = 8.15 cm4

m = 2.07 kg/m Wx = 6.76 cm3 Wy = 9.09 cm3



It = 2.38 cm4

m = 1.67 kg/m Wx = 2.72 cm3 Wy = 9.02 cm3


70

Profiles 5Flat Cross-Sections

Profile 5 20x10 can be used as a grip rail or edge strip.Profile 5 40x10 and 80x14 can be used as a lightweightclamping and mounting surface or as a supportingprofile for the Bearing Units of linear slides.


Profile 5 16x8,5A = 0.82 cm2 Ix = 0.06 cm4 Iy = 0.23 cm4

It = 0.04 cm4

m = 0.22 kg/m Wx = 0.12 cm3 Wy = 0.28 cm3



It = 0.07 cm4

m = 0.35 kg/m Wx = 0.22 cm3 Wy = 0.53 cm3



It = 0.27 cm4

m = 0.65 kg/m Wx = 0.44 cm3 Wy = 1.81 cm3



It = 0.86 cm4

m = 1.79 kg/m Wx = 1.54 cm3 Wy = 10.17 cm3


71

These profiles are ideal for constructing angledprotective hoods, frames, tables or other fixtures.The closed outside surface is particularly attractive andeasy to clean.

Calculation of the strut length30°: 1 Profile 5 R20/40-30° or R20/40-60°45°: 2 Profiles 5 R20/40-45°.

Profiles 5 RClosed,RadiusedOutside Surface

Profile 5 R20-90°A = 1.71 cm2 I = 0.58 cm4

It = 0.41 cm4

m = 0.46 kg/m Wx = 0.53 cm3


Profile 5 R20/40-30°A = 1.68 cm2 Ix = 0.43 cm4 Iy = 0.68 cm4

It = 0.22 cm4

m = 0.45 kg/m Wx = 0.38 cm3 Wy = 0.57 cm3



It = 0.43 cm4

m = 0.64 kg/m Wx = 0.79 cm3 Wy = 0.75 cm3



It = 1.14 cm4

m = 0.85 kg/m Wx = 1.31 cm3 Wy = 1.09 cm3


Profile 5 R20/40-90°A = 4.38 cm2 I = 5.38 cm4

It = 2.14 cm4

m = 1.18 kg/m W = 2.68 cm3


72



Profiles 6 are suitable for weight-optimised constructionsof all kinds. With the choice of either Profiles 6 orProfiles 6 light the most suitable material for a givenconstruction task can be selected.

Profiles with closed grooves are suitable forconstructions where special emphasis is placed onappearance and ease of cleaning.

Profile 6 30x30 lightA = 3.43 cm2 I = 2.90 cm4

It = 0.27 cm4

m = 0.93 kg/m W = 1.94 cm3


Profile 6 30x30A = 4.67 cm2 I = 4.15 cm4

It = 0.40 cm4

m = 1.26 kg/m W = 2.77 cm3


Profile 6 30x30 1N lightA = 3.49 cm2 Ix = 2.91 cm4 Iy = 3.01 cm4

It = 0.73 cm4

m = 0.94 kg/m Wx = 1.94 cm3 Wy = 1.98 cm3


Profile 6 30x30 2N90 lightA = 3.54 cm2 I = 3.02 cm4

It = 1.68 cm4

m = 0.96 kg/m W = 1.98 cm3


Profile 6 30x30 2N180 lightA = 3.54 cm2 Ix = 2.90 cm4 Iy = 3.14 cm4

It = 1.41 cm4

m = 0.96 kg/m Wx = 1.93 cm3 Wy = 2.09 cm3


Profile 6 60x30 lightA = 6.13 cm2 Ix = 5.54 cm4 Iy = 21.22 cm4

It = 3.02 cm4

m = 1.65 kg/m Wx = 3.69 cm3 Wy = 7.07 cm3


73


It = 4.81 cm4

m = 2.29 kg/m Wx = 5.28 cm3 Wy = 9.77 cm3



It = 5.32 cm4

m = 1.68 kg/m Wx = 3.78 cm3 Wy = 7.16 cm3



It = 4.03 cm4

m = 1.69 kg/m Wx = 3.69 cm3 Wy = 7.40 cm3



It = 6.26 cm4

m = 1.70 kg/m Wx = 3.78 cm3 Wy = 7.26 cm3



It = 7.88 cm4

m = 1.72 kg/m Wx = 4.00 cm3 Wy = 7.25 cm3



It = 20.43 cm4

m = 2.70 kg/m W = 13.16 cm3


Profile 6 60x60A = 13.33 cm2 I = 53.77 cm4

It = 29.27 cm4

m = 3.60 kg/m W = 17.92 cm3



It = 9.29 cm4

m = 3.11 kg/m Wx = 7.21 cm3 Wy = 25.44 cm3



It = 12.23 cm4

m = 4.32 kg/m Wx = 10.28 cm3 Wy = 35.16 cm3



It = 62.87 cm4

m = 5.05 kg/m Wx = 25.54 cm3 Wy = 43.27 cm3


Profile 6 120x60A = 24.84 cm2 Ix =102.71 cm4 Iy = 347.62 cm4

It = 84.85 cm4

m = 6.71 kg/m Wx = 34.24 cm3 Wy = 57.94 cm3


74


Universal profile for constructing attractive tables, coverhoods, display cases or other fixtures.

Profiles 645° Angle

Profile 6 30x30-45° lightA = 3.12 cm2 I = 2.21 cm4

It = 0.72 cm4

m = 0.84 kg/m W = 1.33 cm3


Fastening Set 6 30x30-45° can be used to connect twoor three profiles at angles of 90° (Section 1.3.1Fasteners).

Profile 6 R30-90° lightA = 3.07 cm2 I = 2.16 cm4

It = 0.83 cm4

m = 0.83 kg/m W = 1.32 cm3



This profile is ideal for constructing angled protectivehoods, frames, tables or other fixtures.

75


Profiles 8 are suitable for constructions of all kinds.The choice of Profiles 8, Profiles 8 light and Profiles 8 Eenable the most suitable material to be selected for agiven construction task.


Profiles with closed grooves are suitable forconstructions where particular emphasis is placed onappearance and ease of cleaning.

Profile 8 40x40 EA = 5.07 cm2 I = 7.38 cm4

It = 0.99 cm4

m = 1.37 kg/m W = 3.69 cm3



It = 1.12 cm4

m = 1.74 kg/m W = 4.50 cm3



Profile 8 40x40A = 9.16 cm2 I = 13.96 cm4

It = 1.93 cm4

m = 2.47 kg/m W = 6.98 cm3



It = 2.99 cm4

m = 1.78 kg/m Wx = 4.66 cm3 Wy = 4.50 cm3


Profile 8 40x40 2N90 EA = 4.83 cm2 I = 8.06 cm4

It = 4.33 cm4

m = 1.30 kg/m W = 3.87 cm3



It = 4.91 cm4

m = 1.84 kg/m W = 4.70 cm3



76

Profiles 8ModularDimensions(Basis 40 mm),Open and ClosedGrooves


Profile 8 40x40 2N180 EA = 4.95 cm2 Ix = 8.10 cm4 Iy = 8.40 cm4

It = 3.86 cm4

m = 1.33 kg/m Wx = 4.05 cm3 Wy = 4.30 cm3



It = 4.88 cm4

m = 1.83 kg/m Wx = 5.05 cm3 Wy = 4.51 cm3



Profile 8 80x40 EA = 8.93 cm2 Ix = 15.15 cm4 Iy = 57.81 cm4

It = 8.77 cm4

m = 2.42 kg/m Wx = 7.58 cm3 Wy = 14.45 cm3



It = 10.05 cm4

m = 3.04 kg/m Wx = 8.30 cm3 Wy = 17.38 cm3




It = 20.84 cm4

m = 4.53 kg/m Wx = 13.44 cm3 Wy = 25.29 cm3



It = 18.51 cm4

m = 3.13 kg/m Wx = 8.63 cm3 Wy = 17.72 cm3



It = 21.82 cm4

m = 2.28 kg/m Wx = 7.93 cm3 Wy = 13.63 cm3



It = 16.53 cm4

m = 2.22 kg/m Wx = 7.51 cm3 Wy = 13.40 cm3



It = 11.89 cm4

m = 2.17 kg/m Wx = 7.56 cm3 Wy = 13.85 cm3


Profile 8 80x80 EA = 14.86 cm2 I = 100.69 cm4

It = 46.35 cm4

m = 4.01 kg/m W = 25.17 cm3


77


It = 82.91 cm4

m = 5.33 kg/m W = 33.51 cm3


Profile 8 80x80A = 26.66 cm2 I = 187.70 cm4

It = 136.98 cm4

m = 7.19 kg/m W = 46.92 cm3



It = 104.97 cm4

m = 5.42 kg/m Wx = 34.25 cm3 Wy = 33.68 cm3



It = 122.46 cm4

m = 5.50 kg/m W = 34.48 cm3



It = 18.14 cm4

m = 4.35 kg/m Wx = 12.11 cm3 Wy = 36.76 cm3



It = 35.15 cm4

m = 6.58 kg/m Wx = 19.90 cm3 Wy = 53.77 cm3



It =128.39 cm4

m = 8.13 kg/m Wx = 50.47 cm3 Wy = 68.34 cm3



It =255.63 cm4

m = 10.81 kg/m Wx = 68.71 cm3 Wy = 92.72 cm3



It = 29.19 cm4

m = 5.64 kg/m Wx = 15.90 cm3 Wy = 62.54 cm3



It = 51.34 cm4

m = 8.64 kg/m Wx = 26.36 cm3 Wy = 92.45 cm3


78


It = 55.98 cm4

m = 5.80 kg/m Wx = 16.52 cm3 Wy = 64.08 cm3



It = 261.72 cm4

m = 10.21 kg/m Wx = 66.77 cm3 Wy = 113.48 cm3


Profile 8 160x80A = 50.07 cm2 Ix = 360.89 cm4 Iy =1228.33 cm4

it = 398.58 cm4

m = 13.52 kg/m Wx = 90.22 cm3 Wy = 153.54 cm3



It = 315.79 cm4

m = 10.35 kg/m Wx = 68.97 cm3 Wy = 114.97 cm3


Profiles 8ModularDimensions(Basis 40 mm),Open and ClosedGrooves


Profiles 8 40x16 and 40x16 E are ideal for attachingelements such as valves or limit switches.

Profiles 8Flat Cross-Sections

Profile 8 40x16 E can be used in conjunction with HandGrip Element 8 to construct grip rails and handles.

Profiles 8 80x16 and 160x28 are perfect forconstructing guide slides of Roller Guides 8 D6 or D14.When using the centre groove of Profile 8 80x16, anaccess hole must be provided at the envisaged fasteningposition.

79

Profile 8 160x28 can also be used as a clamping andmounting surface or edgewise as a heavy-duty supportingprofile.

Profile 8 160x16 can be used as a mounting and frontplate, particularly for switch box systems.


It = 0.35 cm4

m = 0.64 kg/m Wx = 0.81 cm3 Wy = 1.83 cm3



It = 1.09 cm4

m = 1.13 kg/m Wx = 1.22 cm3 Wy = 3.45 cm3




It = 1.53 cm4

m = 1.31 kg/m Wx = 1.78 cm3 Wy = 7.32 cm3



It = 2.20 cm4

m = 2.20 kg/m Wx = 2.69 cm3 Wy = 12.69 cm3




It = 2.37 cm4

m = 3.75 kg/m Wx = 4.25 cm3 Wy = 38.48 cm3



It = 21.81 cm4

m = 8.35 kg/m Wx = 14.16 cm3 Wy = 90.47 cm3


80

Bed PlateProfile 8

Bed Plate Profiles 8 for producing areas of any size withgroove 8 and modular dimension 40 mm.The Bed Plate Profile can be secured to all types ofsubstructures.

Options for connecting the plate to the frame structure(using Button-Head Screw M8x16, washer DIN 125-8.4and T-Slot Nut 8 St M8).


Bed Plate Profile 8 152x20Al, anodizedA = 18.39 cm2 Ix = 7.39 cm4 Iy = 350.50 cm4

m= 4.97 kg/m Wx = 7.20 cm3 Wy = 46.12 cm3


Bed Plate Connection Profile 8 55x20Al, anodizedA = 5.71 cm2 Ix = 2.12 cm4 Iy = 11.30 cm4

m = 1.54 kg/m Wx = 1.98 cm3 Wy = 4.10 cm3


81

Universal profiles for constructing attractive tables,cover hoods, display cases or other fixtures.


Fastening Set 8 40x40-45° can be used to connect twoor three profiles at angles of 90° (Section 1.3.1Fasteners).

Profile 8 40x40-45° EA = 4.35 cm2 I = 5.70 cm4

It = 2.49 cm4

m = 1.17 kg/m Wx = 2.51 cm3



It = 2.59 cm4

m = 1.50 kg/m W = 2.90 cm3



Profile 8 40x40-45°A = 7.30 cm2 I = 9.39 cm4

It = 2.70 cm4

m = 1.97 kg/m W = 4.08 cm3



82



It = 68.71 cm4

m = 5.09 kg/m W = 24.97 cm3



Profile 8 80x80-45° 4N90 lightA = 19.48 cm2 I = 106.20 cm4

It = 78.54 cm4

m = 5.25 kg/m W = 24.69 cm3



Profile 8 80x80 D40 is ideal for mounting bearings orfor accommodating shafts, spindles, axles and similarcomponents.

Profiles 8 Dwith InternalDiameter

Profile 8 80x80-45° D60 is the basis for CouplingHousings 8 D30 and 8 D55, Profile 8 120x120-45°D87 is used for Coupling Housing 8 D80. The profilescan be used to produce Coupling Housings of speciallengths or housings for synchronising shafts betweenmechanical drive elements.

83

Profile 8 80x80 D40A = 37.20 cm2 I = 222.00 cm4

It = 189.65 cm4

m = 10.04 kg/m W = 55.50 cm3



Profile 8 80x80-45° D60Al, anodizedA = 15.26 cm2 I = 109.56 cm4

It = 98.17 cm4

m = 4.12 kg/m W = 27.39 cm3



Profile 8 120x120-45° D87Al, anodizedA = 31.29 cm2 I = 465.86 cm4

It = 647.23 cm4

m = 8.45 kg/m W = 77.64 cm3



These profiles are ideal for constructing angledprotective hoods, frames, tables or other fixtures. Theyare both attractive and easy to clean.


84


Calculation of strut length30°: 1 Profile 8 R40/80-30° or R40/80-60°45°: 2 Profiles 8 40/80-45°.


Profile 8 R40-90° lightA = 5.72 cm2 I = 6.65 cm4

It = 2.93 cm4

m = 1.54 kg/m W = 3.04 cm3



It = 3.18 cm4

m = 1.67 kg/m Wx = 2.84 cm3 Wy = 3.80 cm3



It = 12.41 cm4

m = 2.76 kg/m Wx = 6.74 cm3 Wy = 6.14 cm3



It = 19.18 cm4

m = 2.83 kg/m Wx = 5.96 cm3 Wy = 11.56 cm3


Profile 8 R40/80-90°A = 15.00 cm2 I = 76.25 cm4

It = 45.84 cm4

m = 4.05 kg/m W = 18.69 cm3


85

Profiles 8 WAngle Geometry

Angled profiles for supporting shelves, as simple panel-fixing strips or simple guides and similar applications.

The inside corner of the angled profiles is provided withan undercut. This means that attachments can thereforebe bolted flush with the surface.

Profile 8 W40x40 EA = 4.09 cm2 I = 5.40 cm4

It = 0.71 cm4

m = 1.10 kg/m W = 2.22 cm3


Profile 8 W80x80 EA = 8.82 cm2 I = 51.87 cm4

It = 3.05 cm4

m = 2.38 kg/m W = 9.61 cm3


Profile 8 W80x80x40 lightA = 17.77 cm2 I = 95.32 cm4

It = 31.41 cm4

m = 4.79 kg/m W = 20.54 cm3


86

1.1.4 Angled andFlat Profiles

In order to mount a wide variety of bought-incomponents to the profile frame, some elements whichcan be easily adapted to suit them are often required.> Angled and flat profiles from aluminium, anodized, insystem dimensions of the MB Building Kit System forcustomised processing.

Can be used as a grip rail or edging and for stabilisingpanel elements.

Profile Edging

1. Basic Elements 1.1 Profiles 1.1.4 Angled and Flat Profiles

Profile Edging 15x8A = 0.56 cm2 Ix = 0.09 cm4 Iy = 0.16 cm4

m = 0.15 kg/m Wx = 0.16 cm3 Wy = 0.17 cm3


Profile Edging 19x11,5A = 1.14 cm2 Ix = 0.41 cm4 Iy = 0.13 cm4

m = 0.30 kg/m Wx = 0.30 cm3 Wy = 0.17 cm3


87

Profiles M andM W

Highly versatile, e.g. can be used for edging any panelelements, as a terminating strip or support strip, as aspecial construction without profile grooves or as aguide strip etc.

Profile M 20x4 EA = 0.78 cm2 Ix = 0.24 cm4 Iy = 0.01 cm4

R = 2.00 mmm = 0.21 kg/m Wx = 0.24 cm3 Wy = 0.05 cm3

1 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 7.0.002.62

Profile M 20x4 R0 EA = 0.79 cm2 Ix = 0.26 cm4 Iy = 0.01 cm4















88

Other profiles of the MB Building Kit System have beenspecially developed for special applications. You canfind these in the respective product groups for specificapplications, e.g.> Clamp Profiles (Sections 3.3 and 3.4 Rigid andMovable Panel Fasteners)> Stand Profiles (Section 7.2 Profiles with IntegratedConduit)> Roller Profiles, Shaft-Clamp Profiles (Section 8.1.1Roller Guides)

1. Basic Elements 1.1 Profiles 1.1.4 Angled and Flat Profiles

Profiles M andM W

Profile M W20x20x4 EA = 1.41 cm2 I = 0.48 cm4

R = 2.00 mmm = 0.38 kg/m Wx = 0.35 cm3


Profile M W40x20x4 EA = 2.21 cm2 Ix = 0.59 cm4 Iy = 3.52 cm4




R = 2.00 mmm = 0.81 kg/m Wx = 1.58 cm3


Profile M W80x40x8 EA = 8.85 cm2 Ix = 9.48 cm4 Iy = 56.54 cm4




R = 4.00 mmm = 3.25 kg/m Wx = 12.66 cm3


89

1.2 Accessoriesfor Profiles

1. Basic Elements 1.2 Accessories for Profiles 1.2.1 Caps for Profile End Faces

Cap PA for round profilesCap with Fastening Screw

Cap PA

Radiused caps for the end faces of the various profilegeometries; the cut face does not need to be deburred.

PA-GF, black

Cap 5 20x20m = 1.2 g1 pce. 0.0.370.09

Cap 5 40x20m = 2.2 g1 pce. 0.0.370.11

Cap 5 40x40m = 5 g1 pce. 0.0.370.13

Cap 5 60x20m = 3.3 g1 pce. 0.0.425.53

Cap 5 60x40m = 7.0 g1 pce. 0.0.425.56

Cap 5 80x20m = 4.4 g1 pce. 0.0.370.92

Caps 5for Profiles 5ModularDimensions(Basis 20 mm)

Plastic caps are secured by pressing/knocking them intothe core bores.

1.2.1 Caps forProfile End Faces

The profile accessories consist of caps and cover profileswhich are ideal for sealing side/end faces and bores/holes.

90


Caps 5for Profiles 5Flat Cross-Sections

PA-GF, black

Cap 5 16x8.5m = 0.7 g

1 pce. 0.0.364.60

Cap 5 20x10m = 0.6 g1 pce. 0.0.391.12

Cap 5 40x10m = 1.0 g1 pce. 0.0.391.14

Cap 5 80x14m = 3.4 g1 pce. 0.0.370.91

PA-GF, black

Cap 5 R20-90°m = 0.9 g

1 pce. 0.0.425.71

Cap 5 R20/40-30°��= 30° m = 0.7 g1 pce. 0.0.425.59

Cap 5 R20/40-45°��= 45° m = 1.2 g1 pce. 0.0.425.62

Cap 5 R20/40-60°��= 60° m = 1.5 g1 pce. 0.0.425.65

Cap 5 R20/40-90°��= 90° m = 2.7 g1 pce. 0.0.425.68

Caps 5RadiusedOutside Surface

91

PA-GF, black

Cap 6 30x30m = 2.6 g1 pce. 0.0.419.22

Cap 6 60x30m = 5.2 g1 pce. 0.0.419.23

Cap 6 60x60m = 9.4 g1 pce. 0.0.419.24

Cap 6 120x30m = 10.2 g1 pce. 0.0.419.25

Cap 6 120x60m = 20.8 g1 pce. 0.0.419.26


Cap 6 30x30-45°PA-GF, blackm = 1.9 g1 pce. 0.0.434.74

Caps 645° Angle

Cap 6 R30-90°PA-GF, blackm = 2.0 g

1 pce. 0.0.434.75

Caps 6Radiused OutsideSurface

92

PA-GF, black

Cap 8 40x16m = 2.5 g1 pce. 0.0.026.79

Cap 8 80x16m = 4.6 g1 pce. 0.0.265.98

Cap 8 160x16m = 8.6 g1 pce. 0.0.373.00

Cap 8 160x28m = 16.1 g1 pce. 0.0.026.80

PA-GF, black

Cap 8 40x40m = 4.8 g1 pce. 0.0.026.01

Cap 8 80x40m = 9.6 g1 pce. 0.0.026.02

Cap 8 80x80m = 19.4 g1 pce. 0.0.026.37

Cap 8 120x40m = 15.2 g1 pce. 0.0.418.54

Cap 8 120x80m = 30.4 g1 pce. 0.0.418.57

Cap 8 160x40m = 21.4 g1 pce. 0.0.265.39

Cap 8 160x80m = 37.0 g1 pce. 0.0.265.40

Caps 8for Profiles 8Flat Cross-Sections



93

Caps 8RadiusedOutside Surface PA-GF, black

Cap 8 R40-90°m = 4.4 g

1 pce. 0.0.436.34

Cap 8 R40/80-30°��= 30° m = 4.2 g1 pce. 0.0.427.69

Cap 8 R40/80-45°��= 45° m = 5.8 g1 pce. 0.0.409.15

Cap 8 R40/80-60°��= 60° m = 7.8 g1 pce. 0.0.427.70

Cap 8 R40/80-90°��= 90° m = 11.0 g1 pce. 0.0.427.71

Caps 845° Angle



94

Fastening Screw 8 5x14St, blackm = 160 g/100

100 pce., black 0.0.422.22


Cap 8 W40x40 EPA-GF, blackm = 4.2 g

1 pce. 0.0.429.51

Cap 8 W80x80 EPA-GF, blackm = 9.2 g

1 pce. 0.0.429.54

Cap 8 W80x80x40PA-GF, blackm = 14.0 g

1 pce. 0.0.465.50

Caps 8for Profiles 8 WAngle Geometry

Screw for reinforcing the retention force of Caps 8 (PA-GF)in the core bores of Profiles 8.

Fastening Screw

The machining required is limited to counter boring andcountersinking of the Caps.

95

x

Caps 8 Znfor Profiles 8ModularDimensions(Basis 40 mm)

Cap 8 40x40 ZnGD-Zn, powder-coated or chrome-platedm = 26 g1 pce., black RAL9005 0.0.427.09

100 pce., special colour 0.0.428.11

1 pce., chrome-plated 0.0.427.10







Self-threading screw for securing Caps Zn in the corebore of Profiles 8.

Countersunk Screw 8 SF M7,1St, black, slide-coatingHead shape to DIN 7991 (M6)m = 430 g/100

100 pce. 0.0.428.06

CountersunkScrew SF

Caps made of zinc, chrome-plated or powder-coated, aresecured with screws into the core bores.

96

Cover Profile 5 AlAl, anodizedm = 20 g/m


10 pce., length 2000 mm, black 0.0.464.33



Cover Profile 8 AlAl, anodizedm = 32 g/m10 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 0.0.265.50


Cover Profile Al

1. Basic Elements 1.2 Accessories for Profiles 1.2.2 Cover for Profile Groove

1.2.2 Cover forProfile Groove

The profile groove is an important feature for manyfunctions and ensures the versatility of the MB BuildingKit System. It may be necessary when finishing offproduction of fixtures and equipment to cover this profilegroove for various functional and optical reasons and /or to maintain cleanliness.

Aluminium Cover Profile covers over the profile grooveto ensure easy cleaning and prevent dust entering.

97

Cover Profile 5 PPPPa = max. 1.5-2 mmm = 13.5 g/m10 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 0.0.370.79


Cover Profile 6 PPPPa = 2-3.5 mmm = 20.4 g/m10 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 0.0.431.03


Cover Profile 8 PPPPa = 4-5.5 mmm = 26.0 g/m10 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 0.0.422.24


Cover ProfilesPP

The Cover Profile is ideal for covering the profile grooveand holding panel elements.

98

Cover Profile 8 R40 AlAl, anodizedm = 190 g/m


Cover Profile 8 WR40 AlAl, anodizedm = 200 g/m



Cover ProfilesR, WR and F

The round and flat Cover Profiles R, W and F are insertedinto the grooves of Profiles 8 in conjunction with Clip 8 St.

Cover Caps R and F integrate the cap of the basic profile.

Cover Profiles R, WR and F for side faces, both roundand flat, ensure particularly attractive styling.They can be retrofitted to all accessible profile side faces.

Cover Profile WR blends into the profile contour, makingthe assembly appear as a single profile.

InnovationGermanutility model295 16 689

99

CapsR and F

Cap 8 R40PA-GF, blackm = 0.6 g1 pce. 0.0.429.60

Cap 8 R80PA-GF, blackm = 2.3 g

1 pce. 0.0.429.61

Cap 8 F40PA-GF, blackm = 0.4 g1 pce. 0.0.429.62

Cap 8 F80PA-GF, blackm = 0.8 g

1 pce. 0.0.429.63

Cover Profile 8 R80 AlAl, anodizedm = 550 g/m


Cover Profile 8 F40 AlAl, anodizedm = 170 g/m


Cover Profile 8 F80 AlAl, anodizedm = 380 g/m


Clip 8 StSt, bright-zinc platedRecommended amount: 5 pce. on 1 mm = 2.5 g

1 pce. 0.0.428.97

100

Cover ProfilesNBR

Cover Profile 5 16x3 NBRNBR, blackHardness 80° Shore A oil and water resistingm = 57 g/m

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.425.24


1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.439.35


1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.373.63


Cover Profiles provide an elastic cover for the profilegroove or profile side faces. Ideal for non-slip surfacese.g. steps, buffer strip for sliding doors etc.

101

1.2.3 Covers forBores/Holes

Cap for closing bores/holes ø 4.3 mm, ø 5.5 mm andø 7 mm.Ideal for covering connection processing for standardconnections in profiles with closed grooves.

Cap 5 D4.3PA, blackm = 8 g/100

100 pce. 0.0.437.90

Cap 6 D5.5PA, blackm = 14 g/100

100 pce. 0.0.439.88

Cap 6 D5.5-45°PA, blackm = 18 g/100

100 pce. 0.0.439.90

Cap 8 D7PA, blackm = 27 g/100

100 pce. 0.0.429.65

Cap 8 D7-45°PA, blackm = 36 g/100

100 pce. 0.0.436.98

1. Basic Elements 1.2 Accessories for Profiles 1.2.3 Covers for Bores/Holes

102

1.3 Fasteners The elements in the “Fasteners” product group providepower-locking profile connections of extreme rigidity.The flexible screw attachment principle of all thefastening elements is of particular benefit when makingmodifications to the structure at a later date, easilyallowing enlargements or reductions in size.item fastening elements are characterised by:> Screw connections secured by means of the pre-tensioning effect in the flexible area of the groove flanks> The only tools required for assembly are standardhexagon keys> Several fastening elements can be used when largerprofile cross-sections are employedIn addition to the four main types of fastener - Standard,Universal, Automatic and Direct - it is also possible to

use fasteners such as Angle Brackets, sheet materials,etc. Different variants of the range of fasteners make itpossible to combine profiles from different Lines.Pressure-tight fastening elements are available forprofiles which are also intended for use as compressedair lines (Section 6.2 Pneumatic Applications)

1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners

Right-Angled Connections A range of fasteners for right-angled connections withoptimal application of clamping force and preciselypositioned attachment of profiles to each other.The fastening elements vary in terms of the processingeffort required and in the functions for retro-fitting ordisplacement of the fastening along the groove.

Standard Connection

Universal ConnectionAutomatic Connection

Angle Bracket Zn Fastening Sets

Joining Plates Direct-Fastening Set 8 90°

103

Cross-Profile Connections

The Angle Hinge Bracket and Angle Clamp Bracket areideal for connecting two profiles of the same Line whoseside faces are in contact and cross at any angle.

Angle Hinge Bracket

Angled Connections Other special fastening elements are particularly suitablefor the construction of latticework structures or visuallyattractive fixtures or for connecting profiles at any angle.

Hinges, heavy duty

Direct Connection

The Direct Fastener is used to connect profiles whoseexternal surfaces are in contact. In this arrangement, thegrooves may be assembled parallel to each other or theycan cross at any angle.

Angle Elements T1

104

Pin Element

Connection Profile 8

Connection Profile 8 40

Connection Profiles are specially designed forcontinuous connection of several profiles in longitudinaldirection.Connection Profiles can be used to create “compositeprofiles” with large external dimensions but relativelysmall tolerances.

For preventing displacement under the effects of heavyloads or for fixing aligned profiles.

For end-face profile connections, e.g. for extending theprofile lengths.

Universal-Butt Connection Automatic-Butt Connection

Butt Connections

Parallel-Profile Connections

Secure Connections

1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners

Connection Profile Brace 8

105

How to choose the correct fastener

Position of the profiles relative to each other Right-angled Right-angled Right-angled Right-angled

Groove at 3 profiles on Groove at right angles Grooveright angles 3 different to profile end face against profile

to profile planes end face, anyend face rotation

• Position of connection point Specified Specified Movable (along the profile groove) Movable(through (at end of (along the

hole profiles) profile groove)required)

• Fitted subsequently between profiles No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yesof an existing construction

• Profile processing without tools No Yes Yes No Yes No No

• Load bearing capability of connection ++ + + ++ ++ +(rated relative to each other) (used in (used in (used in (used in

pairs) pairs) pairs) pairs)

Fastener selected Standard Fastening Angle Universal Automatic Joining DirectFastener Sets Bracket Zn Fastener Fastener Plates Fastener

90°

Available in Lines

++ very high + high adequate

Positions of the profiles relative to each other Contacting Any Crossing End faces Parallel

at an angle groove against at any angle, contacting to eachof 45° profile end groove over groove other at a

face, any distanceangle

• Position of connection point Movable Movable Movable Fixed Movable(along the (along the (along the profile groove) (at end of profiles) (along the

profile groove) profile groove) profile groove)

• Fitted subsequently between Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yesexisting constructions

• Profile processing without tools Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes

• Load bearing capability of connection + + + + ++(rated relative to each other) (moment (used in (used in (used in

resistance) pairs) pairs) pairs)+

(axial load)

Fastener selected Angle Hinges, Direct Angle Clamp Universal- Automatic- ConnectionElements Heavy Duty Fastener and Angle Butt Butt Profiles

Hinge Brackets Fastener Fastener

Available in Lines

106

Right-angled, power-locking profile connections withhigh-strength and minimum processing requirement.The standard connecting plate ensures optimum loadapplication, with the profiles being correctly fixed relativeto each other.

1.3.1 Right-AngledConnections

1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.1 Right-Angled Connections

Standard-Fastening Sets

Standard-Fastening Set5 6 8 8 E

a ø 4.3 mm ø 5.5 mm ø 7.0 mm ø 7.0 mmb M5, M6, M8, -

12.0 mm deep 15.0 mm deep 16.0 mm deepc 20.0 mm 30.0 mm 40.0 mm 40.0 mmd 10.0 mm 15.0 mm 20.0 mm 20.0 mm

High-load fastening elements for basic frame profiles.

InnovationGerman patentand foreign patentEP 0 136 431

The standard connecting plates can be arranged in therequired direction to match the way in which the profilesare fitted.Large profiles with high load-bearing capabilities can beconnected using a larger number of Standard Fasteners.

107

xFor connections with slightly reduced loading, Line 8features Standard-Fastening Set 8 E with a self-threading special screw which further reduces themachining requirement.

Standard-Fastening Set 8 EStandard connecting plate 8, St, bright zinc-platedSelf-threading, Button-Head Screw, head shape similar toISO 7380-M7,3x20, St, bright zinc-platedM = 20 Nmm = 20 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.421.75

Standard-Fastening Set 5Standard connecting plate 5, St, stainlessButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M5x12,St, stainless or bright zinc-platedMbzp. = 4.5 NmMstainl. = 3.6 Nmm = 4 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.370.08

1 set, stainless 0.0.437.49

Standard-Fastening Set 6Standard connecting plate 6,St, stainless or bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M6x14, St, stainlessor bright zinc-platedMbzp. = 10.0 NmMstainl.= 8.0 Nmm = 9 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.419.14


Standard-Fastening Set 8Standard connecting plate 8,St, stainless or bright zinc-platedSpecial Button-Head Screw similar to ISO 7380-M8x20,St, stainless or bright zinc-platedMbzp. = 25 NmMstainl.= 20 Nmm = 21 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.026.07


108

For universal power-lock connection of all profiles ofone Line. Suitable for profiles which need to be movedsubsequently, since only one profile is processed. TheseFastening Sets can be installed easily into existingconstructions.For connecting profiles used as compressed airconduits, the Universal Fastener is also available in aspecial version (Section 6.2 Pneumatic Applications).

Universal-Fastening Sets


Universal-Fastening Sets should always be used inpairs.

Universal-Fastening Set 5Universal Fastener 5, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedHexigon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M4x14, St, stainlessor bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut St M4, stainless or bright zinc-platedMbzp. = 3.0 NmMstainl.= 2.4 Nmm = 7.0 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.370.27


Universal-Fastening Set5 6 8

a 10.0 mm 15.0 mm 20 mmb ø 12.0 mm ø 16.0 mm ø 20 mmc 8.5 mm 12.7 mm 16 mmd ø 4.3 mm ø 5.5 mm ø 7 mme 5.8 mm 8.7 mm 12 mm

Where required, the anti-torsion pin of the UniversalFastener can be broken off at a specified breakpoint.

InnovationGerman patent34 38 773

109

Universal-Fastening Set 5/8Universal Fastener 5, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M4x18, St,bright zinc-platedSpecial T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M4, bright zinc-platedM = 3 Nmm = 9 g

1 set 0.0.370.34

Universal-Fastening Set 8/5Universal Fastener 8/5, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M5x25, St, bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut 5 St M5, bright zinc-platedM = 3 Nmm = 18 g

1 set 0.0.370.25

For universal power-lock interconnection of Profiles 5and Profiles 8. Suitable for profiles which need to bemoved subsequently, since only one profile isprocessed. These Fastening Sets can be installed easilyinto existing constructions. Connection processing ofthe profiles is the same as for the Universal-FasteningSets.

Universal-Fastening Sets5/8 and 8/5

Universal-Fastening Set 6Universal Fastener 6, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M6x22,St, stainless or bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut 6 St M6, stainless or bright zinc-platedMbzp. = 8.0 NmMstainl. = 6.5 Nmm = 18.0 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.419.52


Universal-Fastening Set 8Universal Fastener 8, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x30,St, stainless or bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut 8 St M8, stainless or bright zinc-platedMbzp. = 25 NmMstainl.= 20 Nmm = 41 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.026.92


Universal-Fastening Sets should always be used inpairs. Where required, the anti-torsion pin of the Univer-sal Fastener can be broken off at a specified breakpoint.

110

1. 2. 3. 4.


Automatic-Fastening Sets For universal power-lock connection of all profiles ofone Line. Suitable for profiles which need to be movedsubsequently, since the Fasteners are only screwed intoone profile. These Fastening Sets can be installed easilyinto existing constructions. The profiles do not need tobe machined in order to use the Automatic-Fastening Sets.

The Fastener is screwed into a profile groove in the endface, the thread being cut automatically. Use of a lubricantis recommended.Note: All Fasteners with a through bore for the fasteningscrew have a counter-clockwise thread on the outside inorder to prevent the Fastener twisting when the screw istightened.

Automatic-Fastening Sets should always be used inpairs.

Automatic-Fastening Set 8 also contains a Cap whichcan be fitted subsequently over the Fastener.

Automatic-Fastening Set 5 should be inserted so that theflattening on the thread is flush with the outer edge ofthe profile.With Automatic-Fastening Sets 6 and 8, twisting can beprevented by screwing out the Fastener (after the profilehas been assembled) until the head of the Fastenerprojects into the other profile groove.

InnovationGerman patentand foreign patentsEP 0 458 069

111

Automatic-Fastening Set 5Automatic Fastener 5, St, stainless or bright zinc-platedScrew M4x30, St, stainless or bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut 5 St M4, stainless or bright zinc-plateds = 4 A/FMbzp. = 2.5 NMstainl. = 2.5 Nmm = 8.0 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.391.60


Automatic-Fastening Set 6Automatic Fastener 6, St, stainless or bright zinc-platedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M5x35, St, stainlessor bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut 6 St M5, stainless or bright zinc-plateds = 5 A/FMbzp. = 8.0 NmMstainl. = 6.5 Nmm = 18.0 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.419.71


Automatic-Fastening Set 8Automatic Fastener 8, St, stainless or bright zinc-platedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x40, St, stainlessor bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut 8 St M6, stainless or bright zinc-platedCap, PA-GF, blacks = 6 A/FMbzp. = 14 NmMstainl. = 11 Nmm = 35 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.388.08


112


Angle Bracket Zn

Angle Bracket 5 20x20 Zn F < 250 N ^ F x l < 5 NmAngle Bracket 5 40x40 Zn F < 500 N ^ F x l < 25 NmAngle Bracket 6 30x30 Zn F < 500 N ^ F x l < 12 NmAngle Bracket 6 60x60 Zn F < 1000 N ^ F x l < 36 NmAngle Bracket 8 40x40 Zn F < 1000 N ^ F x l < 50 NmAngle Bracket 8 80x80 Zn F < 2000 N ^ F x l < 150 NmAngle Bracket 8 160x80 Zn F < 2000 N ^ F x l < 150 Nm

The Angle Bracket is ideal for connecting installationconduits (Section 7.1 Conduits). The rounding of theinside edge prevents damage to the cable.

Note: With Line 8 Angle Brackets, a special washer(13.5x9x1) is used in view of the screw length and toimprove the clamping force.When used to reinforce the joints of large profiles orconduits, several Angle Brackets can be used in parallel.

Angle Bracket 5 20x20 ZnGD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminiumm = 14 g1 pce. 0.0.425.03

Angle Bracket Cap 5 20x20PA-GF, blackm = 1 g1 pce. 0.0.425.04

Set of Angle Brackets 5 20x20Angle Bracket 5 20x20 ZnAngle Bracket Cap 5 20x202 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M5x8, St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 5 St M5, bright zinc-platedm = 23 g1 set 0.0.425.02

For power-lock connection (without machining) betweenprofiles or for reinforcing profile connections or forfastening a range of components to profiles.

The load-bearing capacity must be checked to determinewhether both conditions are met.

113

Angle Bracket 5 40x40 ZnGD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminiumm = 39 g

1 pce. 0.0.425.06

Angle Bracket Cap 5 40x40PA-GF, blackm = 3 g

1 pce. 0.0.425.07

Set of Angle Brackets 5 40x40Angle Bracket 5 40x40 ZnAngle Bracket Cap 5 40x404 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M5x8,St, bright zinc-plated4 T-Slot Nuts 5 St M5, bright zinc-platedm = 58 g1 set 0.0.425.05

Angle Bracket 6 30x30 ZnGD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminiumm = 47 g1 pce. 0.0.419.63

Angle Bracket Cap 6 30x30PA-GF, blackm = 4 g1 pce. 0.0.419.64

Set of Angle Brackets 6 30x30Angle Bracket 6 30x30 ZnAngle Bracket Cap 6 30x302 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x12,St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 6 St M6, bright zinc-platedm = 66 g1 set 0.0.419.67


1 pce. 0.0.419.65


1 pce. 0.0.419.66

Set of Angle Brackets 6 60x60Angle Bracket 6 60x60 ZnAngle Bracket Cap 6 60x604 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380- M6x12,St, bright zinc-plated4 T-Slot Nuts 6 St M6, bright zinc-platedm = 166 g1 set 0.0.419.68

114

Angle Bracket Zn


1 pce. 0.0.411.24


1 pce. 0.0.411.26

Set of Angle Brackets 8 40x40Angle Bracket 8 40x40 ZnAngle Bracket Cap 8 40x402 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16,St, bright zinc-plated2 Washers 13.5x9x1 St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8, bright zinc-platedm = 150 g1 set 0.0.411.15


1 pce. 0.0.411.23


1 pce. 0.0.411.25

Set of Angle Brackets 8 80x80Angle Bracket 8 80x80 ZnAngle Bracket Cap 8 80x804 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16,St, bright zinc-plated4 Washers 13.5x9x1 St, bright zinc-plated4 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8, bright zinc-platedm = 360 g

1 set 0.0.411.32


1 pce. 0.0.436.23


115


1 pce. 0.0.436.25

Set of Angle Brackets 8 160x80Angle Bracket 8 160x80 ZnAngle Bracket Cap 8 160x804 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16,St, bright zinc-plated4 Washers 13.5x9x1 St, bright zinc-plated4 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8, bright zinc-platedm = 662 g

1 set 0.0.436.24

Washer 13.5x9x1St, bright zinc-platedm = 6 g/100100 pce. 0.0.429.11

Fastening Sets Fastening Sets can be used to construct a corner unitwith three profiles or one corner angle with two profilesensuring a continuous profile geometry.Fastening Sets are ideal for constructing attractivedisplay cases, tables, cover hoods etc.The profiles must be provided with threads in the corebores.

116

Fastening Sets

Fastener 5 20x20GD-Zn, blackm = 13 g1 pce. 0.0.425.95

Fastener Cap 5 R20-90°PA-GF, blackm = 0,7 g1 pce. 0.0.425.94

Fastening Set 5 R20-90°Fastener 5 20x20Fastener Cap 5 R20-90°3 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M5x12,St, bright zinc-platedm = 21 g1 set 0.0.425.97

Fastener Cap 5 20x20x20PA-GF, blackm = 1 g1 pce. 0.0.437.73

Fastening Set 5 20x20x20Fastener 5 20x20Fastener Cap 5 20x20x203 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M5x12,St, bright zinc-platedm = 22 g1 set 0.0.437.96


117

Fastener 6 30x30GD-Zn, blackm = 39 g

1 pce. 0.0.434.76

Fastener Cap 6 R30-90°PA-GF, blackm = 3 g

1 pce. 0.0.434.83


Fastener Cap 6 30x30-45°PA-GF, blackm = 3 g

1 pce. 0.0.434.85

Fastening Set 6 30x30-45°Fastener 6 30x30Fastener Cap 6 30x30-45°3 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x16,St, bright zinc-platedm = 54 g1 set 0.0.434.86

Fastener Cap 6 30x30x30PA-GF, blackm = 8 g

1 pce. 0.0.434.84


118

Fastener 8 40x40GD-Zn, blackm = 92 g

1 pce. 0.0.373.51

Fastener Cap 8 R40-90°PA-GF, blackm = 8 g

1 pce. 0.0.436.32


Fastener Cap 8 40x40-2x45°PA-GF, blackm = 10 g

1 pce. 0.0.436.62

Fastening Set 8 40x40-2x45°Fastener 8 40x40Fastener Cap 8 40x40-2x45°3 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x20,St, bright zinc-platedm = 128 g1 set 0.0.436.63

Fastener Cap 8 40x40-45°PA-GF, blackm = 9 g

1 pce. 0.0.373.52

Fastening Set 8 40x40-45°Fastener 8 40x40Fastener Cap 8 40x40-45°3 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x20,St, bright zinc-platedm = 128 g1 set 0.0.388.68

Fastener Cap 8 40x40x40PA-GF, blackm = 16 g

1 pce. 0.0.415.97



Fastening Sets

119

Joining Plates

For connecting profiles to other profiles, the JoiningPlates are fitted with appropriate anti-torsion blocks.When using Joining Plates as fastening elements forProfiles 8, the anti-torsion function does not apply.

Universal fastening element for simple, non-machiningconnections of profiles, conduit elements and similarcomponents with low loads.Bores ø 7 mm (for M6) are provided for fastening.Caps can be subsequently snap-fitted over the heads ofthe Countersunk Screws DIN 7991.

The Joining Plate can be turned around for connectingvarious other components.

Joining Plate 6 30-0°St, bright zinc-platedm = 28 g

1 pce. 0.0.419.89


1 pce. 0.0.419.91


1 pce. 0.0.419.93


1 pce. 0.0.419.95

120


Fastening Set for Joining Plate 61 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M6x14, St, bright zinc-plated1 T-Slot Nut 6 St M6, bright zinc-platedm = 8 g1 set 0.0.434.36

Joining Plates

Joining PlateCaps

Joining Plate Cap 6 30-0°PA-GF, blackm = 4 g

1 pce. 0.0.419.90


1 pce. 0.0.419.92


1 pce. 0.0.419.94


1 pce. 0.0.419.96

121

Direct-Fastening Set8 90°

Direct-Fastening Set 8 90°Fastener, G-St, stainlessCountersunk Screw M8x27, St, stainlessO-ring, NBR, blackHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 7984-M6x14,St, stainlessM = 5.5 Nmm = 30 g1 set, stainless 0.0.388.67

Direct-Fastening Set 8 90° is used for right-angledconnection of Profiles 8. The profile can be secured atthe end face and at any angle. The core bore must havean M8x16 thread.Direct-Fastening Set 8 90° is particularly suitable formovable fastening of profiles, with in part closedgrooves, where Universal or Automatic Fasteners cannotbe used in pairs.


122

Connection elements for fastening a profile at an angleof 45° when working with bracing and latticework. TheAngle Elements are screw-connected with Button-HeadScrews ISO 7380-M8x16 and washers DIN 125-8.4. Theprofile to be connected can be attached using two Uni-versal Fasteners 8 (without anti-torsion pins) and But-ton-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x25.Covering of the profile ends with Caps 8 40x40-45°(Section 1.2 Accessories for Profiles).

1.3.2 AngledConnections

Angle ElementsT1

1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.2 Angled Connections

Angle Element 8 T1-40Al, anodizedm = 73 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.388.00

1 pce., black 0.0.388.04


1 pce., natural 0.0.388.01

1 pce., black 0.0.388.05

Components for connecting profiles at fixed, freelyselectable or adjustable angles.

123


1 pce., natural 0.0.388.02

1 pce., black 0.0.388.06


1 pce., natural 0.0.388.03

1 pce., black 0.0.388.07

Angle BracketElements T2

Connection elements for fastening two profiles at anangle of 45° when working with bracing and latticework.Fastening with Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16.The profiles are screw-connected using two UniversalFasteners 8, two Button-Head Screws M8x30 and aspecial T-Slot Nut 8 St 2xM8-36 or 76 or using twoAutomatic Fasteners 8, two Hexagon Socket Head CapScrews DIN 912-M6x40 and a special T-Slot Nut 8 St2xM6-36 or 76 (Section 3.1 T-Slot Nuts).

Covering of the profile ends with Caps 8 40x40-45°(Section 1.2 Accessories for Profiles).

124

Hinges, heavy-duty For connecting profiles at various angles up to 180° andfor use as heavy-duty hinges (adjustment range ± 90°).When used in conjunction with the spacer rings, theycan be used as freely movable hinges. If the spacer ringsare removed, they can be used as rigid angle elements,e.g. bracing, and can also be pinned.The Hinges with Clamp Lever can be locked in positionor released. Particularly suitable for adjustable holders,swivel-type booms for Parts Containers and othersimilar equipment.

Calculation of the strut length L:L = x2 + y2 - 2z

1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.2 Angled Connections

Hinge, Dowel Button-Head Screw Nut Connectionheavy- DIN 6325 ISO 7380 DIN 439 rigid movableduty a b c d e F1 F2 F1 F26 30x30 4m6x30 10 mm M6x14 M6 3.5 mm 1,750 N 500 N 500 N 500 N

8 40x40 4m6x40 12 mm M8x16 M8 5.0 mm 5,000 N 1,000N 750 N 750 N

8 80x40 6m6x40 24 mm M8x16 M8 5.0 mm 10,000 N 2,000N 1,500 N 1,500 N

125

Hinge 6 30x30, heavy-duty2 hinge halves, GD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium4 fixing elements, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated2 thread bushes M5, St, zinc-plated, black2 spacer rings, St, stainless2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x8, St, black

m = 125 g1 pce. 0.0.419.80

Hinge 6 30x30, heavy-duty with Clamp Lever2 hinge halves, GD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium4 fixing elements, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedThread bush M5, St, zinc-plated, blackBush liner, St, zinc-plated, blackSpacer collar, St, blackClamp lever M5x30, blackMax. holding torque = 10 Nmm = 163 g1 pce. 0.0.419.85

Hinge 8 40x40, heavy-duty2 hinge halves, GD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium4 fixing elements, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated2 thread bushes M8, St, zinc-plated, black2 spacer rings, St, stainless2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M8x12, St, black

m = 320 g1 pce. 0.0.265.31

Hinge 8 40x40, heavy-duty with Clamp Lever2 hinge halves, GD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium4 fixing elements, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedThread bush M8, St, zinc-plated, blackBush liner, St, zinc-plated, blackSpacer collar, St, blackClamp lever M8x40, blackMax. holding torque = 20 Nmm = 410 g1 pce. 0.0.373.93

Hinge 8 80x40, heavy-duty2 hinge halves, GD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium8 fixing elements, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated2 collared bushes, St, zinc-plated, black2 spacer rings, St, stainless2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M8x16, St, blackm = 1020 g

1 pce. 0.0.373.91

126

1.3.3Cross-ProfileConnections

For power-lock connection of two Profiles 8 whosegroove sides are contacting.The profiles can also run parallel to each other for acertain distance. Neither profile needs to be machined,thereby ensuring that the profiles can be moved in bothgrooves. The Direct-Fastening Set is particularlysuitable for connecting the profiles of ball-bush guideblocks with other profiles, so that the profiles can bemoved and no machining is required.Note: Where anodized surfaces are to be fitted together,we recommend greasing the contact points. Thisminimises the level of noise generated.

1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.3 Cross-Profile Connections

Installation note:Slightly loosen the Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw sothat the small wedge (figure on far left) is seatedcorrectly to ensure the maximum clamping distance, andslightly tighten the Countersunk Screw, so that theprofiles can only just be moved by hand.After positioning both profiles, tension the Direct-Fastening Set by tightening the Hexagon Socket HeadCap Screw.

Direct-Fastening Set 8

Direct-Fastening Set 8Fastener, G-St, stainlessCountersunk Screw DIN 7991-M6x20,St, stainless or bright zinc-platedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 7984-M6x14,St, stainless or bright zinc-platedSpacer sleeve, POM, blackT-Slot Nut 8 St M6, stainless or bright zinc-platedMbzp. = 5.5 NmMstainl.= 4.5 Nmm = 37.0 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.388.63


Suitable for connecting profiles which cross at any angle.The connection is made by power-locking the profile endfaces.


127

Angle HingeBrackets, AngleClamp Brackets

The Angle Hinge Bracket serves as a fixed point ofrotation for profiles crossing each other. When thescrews are tight, the rotational position around thebearing bush can still be selected at will.

The Angle Clamp Bracket can be used in combinationwith an Angle Hinge Bracket or a second Angle ClampBracket to provide a simple connection between twocrossing profiles.Loosening the screw or clamp lever releases the tensionin the two profile grooves and allows rotation at anyangle and movement along the grooves.

Combination of Angle Hinge Bracket and Angle ClampBracket, e.g. for adjusting the angle of a rest around afixed point of rotation.Combination of two Angle Clamp Brackets, e.g. foradjusting a rest (in terms of height, lateral location andangle).

Angle Hinge Bracket 5GD-Zn, RAL 9006 white aluminium1 bearing bush, St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 5 St M5, bright zinc-plated1 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M5x8,St, bright zinc-plated1 dome-head screw M5x10, St, bright zinc-plateda = 10 mmm = 20 g1 set 0.0.437.83

The Angle Hinge Brackets and Angle Clamp Brackets areused for connecting two profiles of the same Line whoseside faces are in contact and which cross at an angle.

128

Angle Clamp Bracket 5GD-Zn, RAL 9006 white aluminium1 T-Slot Nut 5 St M5, bright zinc-plated1 dome-head screw M5x8, St, bright zinc-platedm = 19 g1 set 0.0.437.84

Angle Clamp Bracket 5 with Clamp LeverGD-Zn, RAL 9006 white aluminium1 T-Slot Nut 5 St M5, bright zinc-plated1 clamp lever M5x20, black1 sleeve, St, blackm = 51 g1 set 0.0.437.85

Angle Hinge Bracket 6GD-Zn, RAL 9006 white aluminium1 bearing bush, St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 6 St M6, bright zinc-plated2 dome-head screws M6x14, St, bright zinc-plateda = 15 mmm = 65 g1 set 0.0.441.97



Angle Hinge Bracket 8GD-Zn, RAL 9006 white aluminium1 bearing bush, St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8, bright zinc-plated2 dome-head screws M8x18, St, bright zinc-plateda = 20 mmm = 135 g1 set 0.0.457.76



1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.3 Cross-Profile Connections

Angle HingeBracket, AngleClamp Bracket

129

The Universal-Butt-Fastening Sets can be used toconnect the end faces of two profiles from the sameLine. Universal-Butt-Fasfening Sets should always beused in pairs.Depending on the profile size and load, several pairsmay be necessary. Connection processing of the profilesis the same as for the Universal-Fastening Sets.

1.3.4 ButtConnections

Universal-Butt-Fastening Set 52 Universal Fasteners 5, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M4x20,St, stainless or bright zinc-platedHexagon Nut DIN 934-M4, stainless or bright zinc-platedMbzp. = 3 Nm Mstainl.= 2.5 Nmm = 10 g

1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.370.32


Universal-Butt-Fastening Set 62 Universal Fasteners 6, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M6x35, St, stainlessor bright zinc-platedHexagon Nut DIN 934-M6, stainless or bright zinc-platedMbzp. = 8.0 NmMstainl.= 6.5 Nmm =27.4 g



Universal-Butt-Fastening Sets

Connection of profiles end face to end face in order toextend constructions: can also be retrofitted in somecases.

1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.4 Butt Connections

130

Universal-Butt-Fastening Set 81 Universal Fastener 8, GD-Zn, bright zinc-plated1 Universal Fastener 8 with threaded bore,GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x45, St, stainlessor bright zinc-platedMbzp. = 25 NmMstainl.= 20 Nmm = 60 g



1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.4 Butt Connections

Automatic Butt-Fastening Sets

The Automatic Butt-Fastening Sets can be used toconnect the end faces of two profiles from the same Linewithout mechanical processing. Automatic Butt-Fastening Sets should always be used in pairs.Depending on the profile size and load, several pairsmay be necessary.

Note: All Fasteners with a through bore for the fasteningscrew have a counter-clockwise thread on the outside inorder to prevent the Fastener twisting when the screw istightened. The Fasteners with internal threads have aclockwise thread on the outside.

Automatic Butt-Fastening Set 5 should be inserted sothat the flattening on the thread is flush with the outeredge of the profile.


131

Automatic Butt-Fastening Set 51 Automatic Fastener 5 with through bore,St, stainless or bright zinc-plated1 Automatic Fastener 5 with threaded bore,St, stainless or bright zinc-platedScrew M4x40, St, stainless or bright zinc-plateds = 4 A/FMbzp. = 2.5 NmMstainl. = 2.5 Nmm = 11.0 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.464.19


Automatic Butt-Fastening Set 61 Automatic Fastener 6 with through bore,St, stainless or bright zinc-plated1 Automatic Fastener 6 with threaded bore,St, stainless or bright zinc-platedHex. Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M5x45, St, stainlessor bright zinc-plateds = 5 A/FMbzp. = 8.0 NmMstainl. = 6.5 Nmm = 23.0 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.419.74


Automatic Butt-Fastening Set 81 Automatic Fastener 8 with through bore, St,stainless or bright zinc-plated1 Automatic Fastener 8 with threaded bore, St,stainless or bright zinc-platedHex. Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x50, St, stainlessor bright zinc-plated2 Caps, PA-GF, blacks = 6 A/FMbzp. = 14 NmMstainl. = 11 Nmm = 43 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.406.80


Additional anti-torsion protection can be provided byensuring that the Fastener with internal thread is twistedinto the profile only so far till the end of the Fastenerprojects into the groove opposite. The Fastener withthrough bore must be screwed in the appropriatedistance.Automatic Butt-Fastening Set 8 also contains two Capswhich can be fitted subsequently over the Fastening Set.

132

1.3.5Parallel-ProfileConnections

Connection Profile 8 40Al, anodizedA = 8.91 cm2 Ix = 5.65 cm4 Iy = 19.78 cm4

It = 4.53 cm4

m = 2.40 kg/m Wx = 2.84 cm3 Wy = 6.94 cm3

(The values apply for an individual profile sectionand not for a pair)1 pair, cut-off max. 6000 mm, natural 0.0.422.35

Cover Profile 32Al, anodizedm = 0.11 kg/m


Captive Nut M10Cage and square nut, St, bright zinc-platedm = 8 g

1 pce. 8.0.004.02

Connection Profile 8 40 is supplied in pairs andmachined with ø 11 mm bores (bore spacing 200 mm)for the fastening screws.Use of Captive Nuts (designed to fix positions andprevent torsion) allows the Connection Profile to besecured from one side. Hexagon Socket Head CapScrews (tightening torque 34 Nm) DIN 912- M10x60,M10x100 or M10x140 (Section 3.2 Screws and Nuts) ofthe corresponding lengths are used to join ConnectionProfiles.The joint or screw heads and Captive Nuts can be fittedwith a dust-tight Cover Profile 32.

1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.5 Paralllel-Profile Connections

ConnectionProfiles

Profile for the continuous connection of several profilesin longitudinal direction. The Connection Profiles allowthe user to create “composite profiles” with large exter-nal dimensions and corresponding tolerances, but withthe small tolerances needed in the area of the groovegeometry or the core bores. These small tolerancesallow the use of all components in the MB Building KitSystem, in particular fasteners, dynamic elements etc.

The load-carrying capacity of the attached compositeprofiles depends on the construction design and mustbe determined for each case individually.


133


m = 4.76 kg/m Wx = 6.70 cm3 Wy = 67.80 cm3

(The values apply for an individual profile sectionand not for a pair)

1 pair, cut-off max. 6000 mm, natural 0.0.458.03

Connection Profile Brace 8 160-45°Al, anodized1 Brace right1 Brace left2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M8x60, St,bright zinc-plated2 Hexagon Nuts DIN 934-M8, St, bright zinc-platedamin. = 33 mm (recommended 40 mm)bmin. = 65 mm (recommended 80 mm)m = 488 g

1 set 0.0.458.18

Connection Profiles 8 160 and 8 240 are supplied inpairs and machined with bores (bore spacing 160 mm)for the fastening screws DIN 912-M8x60 (tighteningtorque 25 Nm) and Hexagon Nuts DIN 934-M8 (Section3.2 Screws and Nuts).

The Connection Profile Braces (45° sections of theConnection Profiles) are suitable for constructinglightweight, open “composite profiles”. These ConnectionProfile Braces consist of left and right diagonal sectionstogether with the corresponding nuts and bolts. Theycan be retrofitted at any point and any distance(dimension a / b) along the profiles which are beingjoined. With a fixed spacing of 160 or 240 mm, theConnection Profiles Braces represent an inexpensivealternative to the latticework construction.


134


m = 6.97 kg/m Wx = 7.10 cm3 Wy = 139.30 cm3

(The values apply for an individual profile section and not for a pair)

1 pair, cut-off max. 6000 mm, natural 0.0.458.17

Connection Profile Brace 8 240-45°Al, anodized1 Brace right1 Brace left2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M8x60,St, bright zinc-plated2 Hexagon Nuts DIN 934-M8, St, bright zinc-platedamin. = 38 mm (recommended 40 mm)bmin. = 76 mm (recommended 80 mm)m = 846 g

1 set 0.0.458.21

1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.5 Parallel-Profile Connections

ConnectionProfiles

135

1.3.6 SecureConnections

Pin Element 8Basic unit, St, nickel-platedGrub screw DIN 916-M6x12, St, bright zinc-platedDowel DIN 7979-6m6x16, St, hardenedm = 34 g

1 pce. 0.0.265.37

The Pin Element is used for positive locking of power-lock connections, e.g. for horizontal braces ofcontinuous vertical profiles which are subject to heavyload. The Pin Element can be used, preferably in pairs,to provide additional support for Standard, Universaland Automatic Fasteners.

The Pin Element is inserted into the profile groove in theend face and, after applying the Standard, Universal orAutomatic Fasteners, is then pushed against the end ofthe profile and fixed in position. A ø 5.9 mm bore isprovided in the profile for the dowel.The load-bearing capacity of the connection againstmovement is increased to max. 3000 N per element.

Pin Element

1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners 1.3.6 Secure Connections

To reinforce power-lock profile connections, additional,positive-lock devices must be provided under certainloads (e.g. impact).

137

2. Floor ElementsThe Floor Elements product group comprises:> Adjustable Feet for jigs, machines and enclosures> Castors for apparatus, containers and other mobileapplications> Special elements for securing constructions to thefloor or wall> Transport and base plates for connecting adjustablefeet and castors to various applications

When selecting floor elements, it is important to takeinto account the dynamic forces which are anticipated.Floor elements are also used to compensate the heightand angle relative to the fastening face.

2.1 Adjustable Feet

2.1.1 Adjustable Feet,Threaded

The infinitely adjustable feet are suitable for structuresof all kinds. Depending on the particular application, theadjustable feet can be fitted in the core bores of profilesor used in combination with Base Plates / TransportPlates. The range of applications can be extended byappropriate inserts and foot clamps.The minimum foot height is obtained by removing thecounter nut. Slope compensation is by means of balland socket. With Knuckle Foot 17 A/F, M5x36, the slopeis compensated by a spherical supporting surface in theplate. The Foot is thread-locked by a plastic coating.

Adjustable Foot Load F Slope(vertical) �

17 AF, M5x36 750 N 7,5°

D30, M6x45 900 N 15°D30, M6x60 900 N 15°D30, M8x29 AT 1000 N 0°

D40, M8x60 1500 N 15°D40, M8x80 1500 N 15°D40, M10x80 1500 N 15°

D60, M10x75 5000 N 7°D60, M12x75 5000 N 7°D60, M10x120 5000 N 7°D60, M12x120 5000 N 7°

D80, M10x80 10,000 N 7°D80, M12x100 10,000 N 7°D80, M16x100 10,000 N 7°D80, M12x160 10,000 N 7°D80, M16x160 10,000 N 7°

2. Floor Elements 2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.1 Adjustable Feet, Threaded

138

Adjustable Feet,Threaded

Knuckle Foot 17 AF, M5x36Spindle, St, bright zinc-platedFoot plate, PA, blackm = 7 g

1 pce. 0.0.370.81

Knuckle Foot D30, M6x45Spindle, St, bright zinc-platedFoot plate, PA, blackHexagon Nut DIN 934-M6, St, bright zinc-platedm = 16 g

1 pce. 0.0.434.52


1 pce. 0.0.434.51

Knuckle Foot D30, M8x29 ATSpindle, St, bright zinc-platedFoot plate, PA-GF, blackm = 16 g

1 pce. 0.0.433.08


1 pce. 0.0.364.68


1 pce. 0.0.265.69


1 pce. 0.0.265.74

2. Floor Elements 2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.1 Adjustable Feet, Threaded

139

Knuckle Foot D60, M10x75Spindle, St, bright zinc-plated; foot plate, GD-Zn, blackHexagon Nut DIN 934-M10, St, bright zinc-platedm = 140 g1 pce. 0.0.439.29

Knuckle Foot D60, M12x75Spindle, St, bright zinc-plated; foot plate, GD-Zn, blackHexagon Nut DIN 934-M12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 162 g1 pce. 0.0.439.22

Knuckle Foot D60, M10x120Spindle, St, bright zinc-platedFoot plate, GD-Zn, blackHexagon Nut DIN 934-M10, St, bright zinc-platedm = 163 g1 pce. 0.0.439.30


Knuckle Foot D80, M10x80Spindle, St, bright zinc-platedFoot plate, GD-Zn, blackHexagon Nut DIN 934-M10, St, bright zinc-platedm = 263 g

1 pce. 0.0.432.84





140

Rubber Insert D30NBR, black, hardness 80 Sh A,oil and water resistingm = 3 g1 pce. 0.0.434.50

Rubber Insert D40NBR, black, hardness 80 Sh A,oil and water resistingm = 6 g1 pce. 0.0.265.70

Rubber Insert D60NBR, black, hardness 80 Sh A,oil and water resistingm = 18 g

1 pce. 0.0.439.33

Rubber Insert D80NBR, black, hardness 80 Sh A,oil and water resistingm = 42 g

1 pce. 0.0.265.61

2. Floor Elements 2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.2 Accessories for Adjustable Feet, Threaded

The Rubber Inserts are suitable for use as anti-slipdevices and floor protectors.They can be retrofitted to Knuckle Feet D30 (not D30,M8x29 AT), D40, D60 and D80.

2.1.2Accessories forAdjustable Feet,Threaded

Rubber Inserts

The accessories extend the range of applications forthreaded adjustable feet.

Rubber Insert D80 can also be used in combination withAdjustable Foot 8 PA.This increases the overall height of the Adjustable Footby 12 mm.

141

Anti-VibrationInsert

The Anti-Vibration Insert can be inserted into KnuckleFoot D80 to absorb shocks and vibrations by internalfriction.The material is resistant to aging and corrosion as wellas to oils, greases, acids and solvents.

Springdistance

F a

2,000 N 4 mm10,000 N 6 mm

The effective height (h) when not under load is 9 mm.The value of h decreases by the spring distance a as afunction of the force F.

Anti-Vibration Insert D80Woven steel fabrics, stainlessSelf-damping: Approx. 15%Natural frequency: 20-25 HzResonance ratio: Approx. 3.3Static load Fstat: 2000 NMax. dynamic pressure loading Fdyn: 10,000 Nm = 115 g1 pce. 0.0.458.93

The degree of vibration damping depends on theexcitation frequency. Shocks (excitation below thenatural frequency) will be reduced by the self-damping.

142

2. Floor Elements 2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.2 Accessories for Adjustable Feet, Threaded

Foot Clamps are used, particularly in conjunction withthe Floor-Fastening Sets, for floor or wall mounting ofKnuckle Feet D60 and D80.Floor-Fastening Sets 10x110 (Section 2.3 Accessoriesfor Floor Elements) should be used for wall or floormounting.

Foot Clamps

Foot Clamp D60GD-Zn, blackm = 223 g

1 pce. 0.0.439.37

Foot Clamp D80GD-Zn, blackm = 492 g

1 pce. 0.0.265.30

The permissible load for the Foot Clamps at thefastening point is Fperm. = 5000 N.

143

2. Floor Elements 2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.3 Special Adjustable Feet

Adjustable Foot 8 PA is a height-adjustable foot fortables and light equipment.The height can be adjusted without the need for tools bysimply turning the lower part of the foot.

2.1.3 SpecialAdjustable Feet

Adjustable FootPA

These Adjustable Feet and fastenings are designed forspecial applications such as furniture building andprotective walls for conveyor equipment and heavy-dutymachinery.

Various options for fastening to Profiles 8.F = 1500 N

Fastening options on Profiles 5 with Base Plate/TransportPlate 5 40x40, M8.The anti-torsion pins must be removed.

Adjustable Foot 8 PAHousing, PA-GF, blackSpindle, nut and washer St, bright zinc-platedm = 71 g

1 pce. 0.0.196.64

144


Foot Plate8 80x40

Foot Plate 8 80x40Base plate, St, blackCap, PA-GF, blackSupport Plate, St, black2 grub screws DIN 916-M8x12, St, bright zinc-plated1 grub screw DIN 914-M8x80, St, bright zinc-platedm = 372 g

1 pce. 0.0.388.81

Grub screw DIN 914-M8x80 for height adustment can belocated at 4 positions by rotating the support plate.

Foot Plate 8 80x40 is an infinitely height-adjustableelement for stands and other structures used incombination with Profiles 8 80x40 and Stand Profiles8 80x40 K60 or 2xK60 (Section 7.2 InstallationElements).

Fmax. = 1500 N

145

Adjustable Ball Foot 8 80x40 is suitable for securingthe Stand Profiles of cell guarding to the floor. It can beinclined by ±4° and moved horizontally ±6 mm .Profiles can be secured to the floor by using a centralFloor Fastening Set 10x110.The connection holes can be used for securing Profiles8 and 6 to the body of the Adjustable Ball Foot.

Adjustable BallFoot 8 80x40

The ball socket and ring adjust to uneven floors.The Adjustable Ball Foot can also be moved horizontally.F =10,000 NM = 150 Nm

Adjustable Ball Foot 8 80x40Body GD-Zn, black2 Washers St, blackRing St, blackm = 850 g

1 pce. 0.0.458.57

L-Based Feet L-Based Feet are ideal for wall or floor mounting oflight-duty and heavy-duty equipment.They are secured to the profile by a Fastening Screwand T-Slot Nut.Floor Fastening Set 10x110 should be used for wallor floor mounting.

146

L-Based Foot 6 adjustableHousing, GD-Al, blackT-Slot Nut 6 St M6, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M6x12, St, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M6x60, St, bright zinc-plated andslide-coatedSquare nut M6, St, bright zinc-platedamax. = 53.5 mmamin. = 8.5 mmc = 8 - 16 mmFmax. = 3000 Nm = 111 g

1 pce. 0.0.434.71

L-Based Foot 6 non-adjustableHousing, GD-Al, blackT-Slot Nut 6 St M6, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M6x12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 91 g

1 pce. 0.0.434.70

L-Based Feet

The adjustable L-Based Foot provides an easy means ofcompensating for any unevenness of the floor or forheight adjustment.The foot is adjusted by turning the setting screw. Theselected height should be fixed in position by tighteningthe lateral Fastening Screw.


147

L-Based Foot 8 adjustableHousing, GD-Al, blackT-Slot Nut 8 St M8, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x80, St, bright zinc-plated andslide-coatedSquare nut M8, St, bright zinc-platedamax. = 75 mmamin. = 10 mmc = 13 - 25 mmFmax. = 6000 Nm = 272 g

1 pce. 0.0.196.45

L-Based Foot 8 non-adjustableHousing, GD-Al, blackT-Slot Nut 8 St M8, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-platedc = 13 - 25 mmm = 223 g

1 pce. 0.0.265.44

This heavy-duty Foot Plate is ideal for high-loadequipment and can be secured to the floor if necessary.By inverting the Base Plate (offset groove location), it ispossible to connect different sizes of Stand Profiles.

Foot Plate8 280

Foot Plate 8 2801 Base Plate 8 2804 Knuckle Feet D80, M16x1004 washers DIN 125-17, St, bright zinc-platedm = 3.8 kg

1 pce. 0.0.265.58

148

The Floor-Fixing Plate is used for floor mounting andlevelling of machine frames.

Floor-FixingPlate


Floor-Fixing Plate 8GD-AL, blackFmax. = 10,000 Nm = 610 g

1 pce. 0.0.388.12

Fastening Set 8, on profile side for Floor-Fixing Plate 82 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x30, St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8, bright zinc-platedm = 44 g1 set 0.0.404.19

149

Base Plate 8 160Base plate, Al, natural anodized2 Caps 8 160x283 grub screws DIN 915-M10x30, St, bright zinc-plated3 Floor-Fastening Sets 10x110m = 1.6 kg1 pce. 0.0.026.17

Base Plate 8 280Base plate, Al, natural anodized2 Caps 8 160x28m = 2.3 kg

1 pce. 0.0.388.69

Base Plates The Base Plates are used for attaching Stand Profiles tothe floor and levelling them.

By inverting the Base Plate (offset groove location), it ispossible to connect different sizes of Stand Profiles indifferent positions.

150

2.2 CastorsCastors, Swivel and Fixed

Fixed CastorSwivel Castor D65 with brake

The castors can be secured in the end faces of all ProfileLines by means of a thread in the core bore (counterboring and tapping may be required) or by using BasePlates/Transport Plates (Section 2.3 Accessories forFloor Elements).The castors can be fitted to the groove side of theprofiles using appropriate Base Plates/Transport Plates(thread lengths may need to be compensated by washersDIN 125). A combination with Floor-Fastening Plate 8 isalso possible for specific applications.

Castor line D65 (castor diameter 65 mm) consists of thevariants: Swivel Castor and Swivel Castor with brake(brake for wheel axis).Castor lines D75 and D125 consist of the variants:Swivel Castor, Swivel Castor with double-brake (brakefor wheel axis and swivelling axis) and Fixed Castor.

The specified carrying capacities are maximum valuesunder ideal operating conditions, at walking speed(max. 4 km/h) and over smooth and flat surfaces.If the floor is uneven and weight badly distributed, theload per castor should be calculated in accordance withthe following formula:

F = dead weight + load

3

Castors are available in a range of sizes, in the form ofSwivel Castors, Swivel Castors with double brake (brakefor wheel axis and swivelling axis) and Fixed Castors.The castors feature easy movement and high load-bearing capacity. They are capable of withstanding themajority of adverse environmental conditions.

The castors are also available with anti-static properties,with tyres and fully-conductive wheels or housings, foruse in electronics environments. The dischargeresistance of the anti-static version is 105

Resistance of tyring Castor Line D65 Castor Line D75 Castor Line D125PU Anti-Static NBR Anti-Static PU Anti-Static

Water x x x x x xSalt water x x x x x xRoad-salt solution x x x x x xOils x x x x xAnimal and vegetable fats x x x x xDiesel oil x x xPetrol xCleansing agents x x x xSoap solutions up to approx. 50° C x x x

2. Floor Elements 2.2 Castors

151

Radius of Swivel (a) Offset (b) Thickness(t)

Castor D65 swivel 57 mm 20.0 mm -

Castor D65 swivel 68 mm 20.0 mm -with brake

Castor D75 swivel 70 mm 30.5 mm 5 mm

Castor D75 swivel 85 mm 30.5 mm 5 mmwith double-brake

Castor D75 fixed - - 2 mm

Castor D125 swivel 110 mm 42.5 mm 14 mm

Castor D125 swivel 135 mm 42.5 mm 14 mmwith double-brake

Castor D125 fixed - - 14 mm

Housing PA, blackSwivelling axis with ball bearing, wheel axis with slide bearing,threaded pin protected against torsion,dust shield, carrying capacity 50 kg/castor

Castor D65 swivelTwin tyres PU, 80 Sh A, blackm = 167 g1 pce. 0.0.444.94

Antistatic versionTwin tyres PU, 80 Sh A, blackm = 172 g1 pce. 0.0.444.92

Castor D65 swivel with brakeTwin tyres PU, 80 Sh A, blackm = 178 g1 pce. 0.0.444.95

Antistatic versionTwin tyres PU, 80 Sh A, blackm = 183 g1 pce. 0.0.444.93

Sheet-metal housing, bright zinc-plated, blackSwivelling axis with ball bearing, wheel axis with slidebearing, dust shield, carrying capacity 60 kg/castor

Castor D75 swivelTyres NBR, 80 Sh A, greym = 306 g1 pce. 0.0.420.14

Antistatic versionTyres SBR, 80 Sh A, blackm = 285 g1 pce. 0.0.420.15

Castor Line D75

Castor Line D65

152

2. Floor Elements 2.2 Castors

Castor LineD125

Castor Line D75

Castor D75 swivel with double-brakeTyres NBR, 80 Sh A, greym = 340 g1 pce. 0.0.420.16


Castor D75 fixedTyres NBR, 80 Sh A, greym = 260 g1 pce. 0.0.420.12


Sheet-metal casing, bright zinc-plated, blackSwivelling axis with ball bearing, wheel axis with slide bearing,dust shield, carrying capacity 100 kg/castor

Castor D125 swivelTyres PU, 95 Sh A, blackm = 710 g1 pce. 0.0.418.08


Castor D125 swivel with double-brakeTyres PU, 95 Sh A, blackm = 860 g1 pce. 0.0.418.10

Antistatic versionTyres NBR, 80 Sh A, blackm = 1100 g1 pce. 0.0.418.11

Castor D125 fixedTyres PU, 95 Sh A, blackm = 550 g1 pce. 0.0.418.06

Antistatic versionTyres NBR, 80 Sh A, blackm = 780 g1 pce. 0.0.418.07

153

2. Floor Elements 2.3 Accessories for Floor Elements 2.3.1 Floor-Fastening Sets

The Floor-Fastening Sets are used for floor and wallfastening of Adjustable Feet, Base Plates, Floor-FixingPlates, Foot Clamp D80 and other components.

2.3 Accessoriesfor Floor Ele-ments

2.3.1 Floor-Fastening Sets

Accessories for connecting floor elements to profiles orfor wall and floor mounting.

Floor-Fastening Set 8x85St, bright zinc-platedM = 20 Nmm = 39 g

1 pce. 0.0.432.97


1 pce. 0.0.265.79


1 pce. 0.0.364.44

154

GD-Zn, black

Base Plate/Transport Plate 5 40x20, M8m = 56 g

1 pce. 0.0.437.58

Base Plate/Transport Plate 5 40x40, M8m = 112 g1 pce. 0.0.437.59



GD-Zn, black







2.3.2 BasePlates/TransportPlates

2. Floor Elements 2.3 Accessories for Floor Elements 2.3.2 Base Plates/Transport Plates

The Base Plates/Transport Plates, made from zincdiecasting, are powder-coated on all sides and can bescrewed into the core bores of the profile end faces.Threads of different diameters accommodate eyebolts,Adjustable Feet, Castors and other elements.

155

GD-Zn, black








Base Plate/Transport Plate 8 80x80-45°, M12m = 427 g1 pce. 0.0.409.50

Base Plate/Transport Plate 8 80x80-45°, M16m = 412 g1 pce. 0.0.409.51

157

3. FasteningElements

3. Fastening Elements 3.1 T-Slot Nuts 3.1.1 T-Slot Nuts

The Fastening Elements product group contains:> Screws and T-Slot Nuts for securing components tothe profile groove> System elements for securing panels rigidly toprofile structures> Clamping profiles for holding panel elements inprofile frames

> Securing profile frames rigidly to machinery andguard units> Movable panel fastenings for swivelling, sliding andlifting doors, flaps, profile frames and shutters

3.1.1 T-Slot Nuts

The decision which T-Slot Nut to use depends on theloads occurring during operation.

T-Slot Nut Order No. Recommended Permissibletightening torque operating load F

5 St M5 0.0.370.01 4.5 Nm 500 N5 St M5, stainless 0.0.425.11 3.6 Nm 400 N

5 St M4 0.0.370.06 3.0 Nm 500 N5 St M4, stainless 0.0.425.10 2.4 Nm 400 N

5 St M3 0.0.437.19 1.5 Nm 500 N

5 Zn M3 0.0.391.20 1.0 Nm 50 N

5 Zn M2,5 0.0.391.22 0.7 Nm 50 N

5 Zn M2 0.0.391.24 0.5 Nm 50 N

6 St M6 0.0.419.40 14.0 Nm 1750 N *6 St M6, stainless 0.0.439.75 11.0 Nm 1400 N *


6 St M4 0.0.419.46 4.0 Nm 1750 N *

6 Zn M4 0.0.441.45 1.5 Nm 150 N

6 Zn M3 0.0.441.42 1.0 Nm 150 N

Special fastening elements are inserted into the profilegrooves to connect one profile to another or to securecomponents to profile structures. Different types of T-Slot Nuts with threads and groove profiles forcustomised processing generate a counter-bearing forthe screw in the groove.The T-Slot Nuts have different load-bearing capacitiesdepending on their design. These range from light-dutyapplications such as fastening signs to highly stableprofile connections capable of withstanding even highdynamic loading.Where vibration resistance is required, use of T-SlotNuts St is recommended.The profiles of the basic frame must only be connectedusing T-Slot Nuts St.

158

T-Slot Nuts Order No. Recommended Permissibletightening torque operating load

8 St M8 heavy 0.0.420.83 34.0 Nm 5000 N *

8 St M6 heavy 0.0.427.75 14.0 Nm 3500 N *





8 St/PA M6 0.0.416.17 8.0 Nm 1000 N

8 St/PA M5 0.0.416.20 4.5 Nm 1000 N

8 St/PA M4 0.0.416.23 2.0 Nm 500 N

8 St/PA M3 0.0.416.26 1.0 Nm 500 N

8 Zn M5 0.0.373.44 1.5 Nm 250 N

8 Zn M4 0.0.373.58 1.5 Nm 250 N

8 Zn M3 0.0.373.59 1.0 Nm 250 N

8 PA 0.0.436.52 1.5 Nm 150 N

* Maximum load achievable in standard Profile only. Check profile properties if using e.g. Profile Light or Profile E.

The total load of a screw connection comprises the sumof the pre-tensioning force and the operating load!The recommended operating load is based on a safetyfactor of 1.5.

T-Slot Nuts


159

T-Slot Nuts Zn and PA are prefitted (using the screw) tothe component to be secured and are inserted at anyposition in the profile groove.Tightening the screw automatically locks the T-Slot Nutin the groove.Pulling the screw fixes T-Slot Nuts Zn in the groove bymeans of the conical flanks.

T-Slot NutsZn and PA

Fastening of components to T-Slot Nut 8 PA using self-tapping Button-Head Screws T4 (Section 3.2 FasteningElements).

Fastening elements for securing components to theprofile groove with particular ease. When locked in thegroove, this produces a fixed thread. They are notsuitable for connecting profiles to other profiles.

T-Slot Nut 5 Zn M2GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedm = 1 g1 pce. 0.0.391.24

T-Slot Nut 5 Zn M2.5GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedm = 1 g1 pce. 0.0.391.22


160


T-Slot Nut 6 Zn M3GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedm = 2.3 g1 pce. 0.0.441.42

T-Slot Nut 6 Zn M4GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedm = 2.2 g1 pce. 0.0.441.45




T-Slot Nut 8 PAPA-GF, blackm = 1 g

1 pce. 0.0.436.52

T-Slot NutsZn and PA

161

T-Slot Nuts St for heavy-duty applications or for use infastening applications.

T-Slot NutsSt and St/PA

St, bright zinc-plated or stainless

T-Slot Nut 5 St M3m = 2 g1 pce., bright zinc-plated 0.0.437.19


1 pce., stainless 0.0.425.10

T-Slot Nut 5 St M5m = 2 g

1 pce., bright zinc-plated 0.0.370.01





T-Slot Nuts St and St/PA are inserted into the profilegroove where they are secured in position by means ofthrust fingers.

T-Slot Nuts St/PA have the same function, but are onlysuitable for low strength requirements and,consequently, not for connecting one profile to another.

162



















Basic unit PA-GF, blackSquare nut insert St, black

T-Slot Nut 8 St/PA M3m = 2 g1 pce. 0.0.416.26





T-Slot NutsSt and St/PA


163

T-Slot Nuts Stwith 2 Threads

St, bright zinc-plated

T-Slot Nut 8 St 2xM6-36a = M6 b = 36 mm c = 26,4 mmm = 16 g

1 pce. 0.0.406.77

T-Slot Nut 8 St 2xM6-76a = M6 b = 76 mm c = 66,4 mmm = 38 g1 pce. 0.0.406.78

T-Slot Nut 8 St 2xM8-36a = M8 b = 36 mm c = 24 mmm = 14 g1 pce. 0.0.404.21

T-Slot Nut 8 St 2xM8-76a = M8 b = 76 mm c = 64 mmm = 36 g1 pce. 0.0.404.23

T-Slot Nuts 8 St with 2 threads are best used inconjunction with Angle Elements 8 T2 and UniversalFasteners or Automatic Fasteners for securing profiles at45°, but can also be used for all other profileconnections.

164


T-Slot NutsSt, heavy-duty


T-Slot Nut 8 St M6, heavy-dutya = M6 b = 6.5 mmm = 17 g1 pce. 0.0.427.75

T-Slot Nut 8 St M8, heavy-dutya = M8 b = 7.5 mmm = 16 g1 pce. 0.0.420.83

T-Slot Nuts St, heavy-duty, can be used for very heavy-duty fastening applications.They are inserted into the profile groove in the endface where they are secured in position by means of athrust finger.

165

3. Fastening Elements 3.1 T-Slot Nuts 3.1.2 T-Slot Nut Profiles

3.1.2 T-Slot NutProfiles

Fastening elements for easy unit assembly, e.g. valvesand limit switches, or heavy-duty units with modulardimensions which can be customised with bores andcorresponding threads as required.

Groove Profiles and Profile Bars for special applications,e.g. assembling complete modules.

Profile Bars St are inserted into the profile groove. Profi-le Bars St, heavy-duty or Profile Bar 8 Al and GrooveProfiles Al are fitted into the groove profile. Profile Bar 8Al is secured in the Al Profiles by means of its conicalflanks.

Profile Bars andGroove Profiles

Profile Bar 5 StSt, bright zinc-plated or stainlessThreaded bore max. M5m = 89 g1 pce., length 500 mm, bright zinc-plated 0.0.370.56

1 pce., length 500 mm, stainless 0.0.425.18

Groove Profile 5 AlAl, anodizedThreaded bore max. M5m = 178 g


The ability to customise the Profile Bars and GrooveProfiles mean that fastening elements can be producedwhich are geared to the needs of specific applications.

166







Profile Bar 8 St, heavy-dutySt, bright zinc-platedThreaded bore max. M8m = 410 g1 pce., length 500 mm 0.0.427.23

Profile Bar 8 AlAl, anodizedThreaded bore max. M6m = 110 g




Groove Profile 8 StSt, bright zinc-platedThreaded bore max. M8m = 440 g

1 pce., length 500 mm 0.0.444.32

3. Fastening Elements 3.1 T-Slot Nuts 3.1.2 T-Slot Nut Profiles

Profile Bars andGroove Profiles

167

s L to 1 4.2 x 9.5 1 to 4 4.2 x 13 4 to 7 4.2 x 16 7 to 10 4.2 x 19 10 to 13 4.2 x 22 13 to 16 4.2 x 25

Screw Strip 6 AlAl, anodizedm = 70 g/m


Screw Strip 8 AlAl, anodizedm = 130 g/m


Screw Strips Al Screw Strips Al are fastening elements which areparticularly suitable for retrofitting into existingconstructions. The Screw Strips are pressed into theprofile groove from above and provide thread-cuttingscrews (Section. 3.2 Screws and Nuts - Self-TappingScrews DIN 7981 St 4.2) with a screw channel alongtheir entire length.

168

St, black

Button-Head Screw T4x12l = 12 mm m = 100 g/100100 pce. 0.0.440.11





Button-HeadScrews T4

3. Fastening Elements 3.2 Screws and Nuts 3.2.1 Screws and Nuts

Button-Head Screws, Self-Tapping Screws, HexagonSocket Head Cap Screws, Countersunk Screws andHexagon Nuts with metric threads in different diametersand lengths are all available.Note: The galvanic treatment of the surfaces can result inhydrogen induction in high-strength fastening elements.Despite meticulous thermal post-treatment it is notpossible to totally rule out brittle fractures. This shouldbe taken into account in the design phase.

3.2 Screws andNuts

Button-Head Screws T4 are thread-cutting screws forscrew connections in thremoplastics (for core boresof ø 3.2 mm), in particular for T-Slot Nut PA.

3.2.1 Screwsand Nuts

169


Self-Tapping Screw DIN 7981 St 2.2x6.5l = 6.5 mm m = 19 g/100100 pce. 8.0.000.67



Self-Tapping Screw DIN 7981 St 4.2x13l = 13 mm m = 160 g/100100 pce. 8.0.000.34





Self-TappingScrewsDIN 7981 St

170

St, bright zinc-plated; property class 10.9

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912 M4x14l = 14 mm m = 200 g/100100 pce. 0.0.370.60






Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912 M6x100l = 100 mm m = 23 g1 pce. 8.0.004.70

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912 M6x140l = 140 mm m = 31.5 g1 pce. 8.0.004.74

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912 M8x60l = 60 mm m = 2900 g/100

100 pce. 8.0.006.37

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912 M10x60l = 60 mm m = 44 g1 pce. 8.0.003.98



Hexagon SocketHead CapScrews


171


Button-Head Screw M4x8l = 8 mm m = 107 g/100100 pce. 8.0.001.99




Button-HeadScrewsISO 7380



100 pce. 8.0.004.89


100 pce. 8.0.007.44

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912 M3x50l = 50 mm m = 2.9 g1 pce., black 8.0.004.61

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912 M3x60l = 60 mm m = 3.3 g1 pce., black 8.0.004.83

172




















173















174









Button-Head Screw M8x20, stainlessSt, stainlessl = 20 mm m = 850 g/100100 pce. 0.0.388.95











175

CountersunkScrews DIN 7991

Hexagon Nut DIN934

Property class 8

Hexagon Nut DIN 934 M8St, bright zinc-platedm = 500 g/100100 pce. 8.0.006.38

Property class 10.9

Countersunk Screw DIN 7991 M5x10St, blackl = 10 mm m = 180 g/100

100 pce. 8.0.005.64

Countersunk Screw DIN 7991 M6x14St, bright zinc-platedl = 14 mm m = 329 g/100

100 pce. 8.0.005.22

Countersunk Screw DIN 7991 M8x16St, blackl = 16 mm m = 745 g/100100 pce. 8.0.006.16

Countersunk Screw DIN 7991 M8x18St, blackl = 18 mm m = 775 g/100100 pce. 8.0.006.18

176

3. Fastening Elements 3.2 Screws and Nuts 3.2.2 Special Fastening Elements

3.2.2 SpecialFastening Ele-ments

Locating Washers for optimising the application ofscrew forces when using screws in profile grooveswhich are wider than the screw‘s nominal diameter(suitable for Button-Head Screws DIN ISO 7380).The screw can be tightened through a mounting bore(similar to Standard Profile Connection).

Locating Washers can be used to conceal thecomponent securing mechanism (screw head inprofile groove, thread in component). In addition,the Locating Washers allow Standard Connectionsbetween profiles of different Lines.

Locating Washer 5 D3St, bright zinc-platedamin. = ø 3 mm m = 66 g/100100 pce. 0.0.444.63

Locating Washer 5 D4St, bright zinc-platedamin. = ø 3.5 mm m = 63 g/100100 pce. 0.0.444.61


Locating Washer 6 D4St, bright zinc-platedamin. = ø 3.5 mm m = 238 g/100100 pce. 0.0.444.57


LocatingWashers

Components for fastening parts to the profile groove.

177

Bracket flat andAngle Bracketright-angled

Locating Washer 8 D4St, bright zinc-platedamin. = ø 3.5 mmm = 371 g/100100 pce. 0.0.444.53

Locating Washer 8 D5St, bright zinc-platedamin. = ø 4 mmm = 390 g/100100 pce. 0.0.444.51

Locating Washer 8 D6St, bright zinc-platedamin. = ø 5 mmm = 383 g/100100 pce. 0.0.444.49

Fastening elements suitable for connecting andattaching Support and Wall Profiles or any othercomponents.When connecting Bracket flat and Angle Bracketright-angled with components without profile grooves,these must be provided with appropriate throughbores or threads.

Angle Bracket 8 40 right-angled is used to supporta table top on a profile structure.

178

3. Fastening Elements 3.2 Screws and Nuts 3.2.2 Special Fastening Elements

Bracket 5 20 flatSt, blackm = 25 g1 pce. 0.0.464.23

Angle Bracket 5 20 right-angledSt, blackm = 24 g

1 pce. 0.0.464.22

Fastening Set 5 for Bracket /Angle Bracket 5 201 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M5x8, St, black1 T-Slot Nut 5 St M5, bright zinc-platedm = 2.5 g1 set 0.0.370.70

Bracket 6 30 flatSt, blackm = 38 g

1 pce. 0.0.459.11


1 pce. 0.0.459.12

Fastening Set 6 for Bracket /Angle Bracket 6 301 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M6x10, St, black1 T-Slot Nut 6 St M6, bright zinc-platedm = 7 g1 set 0.0.459.26

Bracket 8 40 flatSt, blackm = 90 g

1 pce. 0.0.196.86


1 pce. 0.0.196.87

Fastening Set 8 for Bracket /Angle Bracket 8 40Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M8x14, St, bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut 8 St M8, bright zinc-platedm = 16 g1 set 0.0.350.17

Bracket flat andAngle Bracketright-angled

179

Panel Fasteners There are numerous applications using the MB BuildingKit System where the securing of panel elements to aprofile construction is required:> Construction of enclosures and guard units> Panelling of casings> Shelves, working surfaces, steps> Swing, sliding and lifting doors

3. Fastening Elements 3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners

In conjunction with standard profiles, panel elementscan either be mounted in the profile groove or they canbe attached offset from the groove with the aid ofappropriate components, e.g. Double Panel Profiles orMultiblocks.For example the profiles can form a self-contained framefor the panel element as in the case of machine doors, orthe panels can be fitted directly into the basic frame.The rigid connection is therefore made usingcomponents which differ depending on the requirementsmade on them in terms of strength, installation anddesign. Rigid panels can be formed using profiles orspecial clamping profiles.


The diverse range of functions where rigid and movablepanels are used is made possible by panel fasteningelements.

180

Cover Profile 5 PPPPa = max. 1.5-2 mm m = 13.5 g/m10 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 0.0.370.79


Cover Profile 6 PPPPa = 2-3.5 mm m = 20.4 g/m10 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 0.0.431.03


Cover Profile 8 PPPPa = 4-5.5 mm m = 26.0 g/m10 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 0.0.422.24


3.3.1 FasteningPanels in theGroove

3. Fastening Elements 3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners 3.3.1 Fastening Panels in the Groove

Cover Profile PP can be used as a cover for the profilegroove or as a panel-fixing profile for panel elements.

Cover ProfilesPP

Panel elements are secured in the profile groove usingCover Profile PP or the Lip Seal.The panel elements may need to be notched at theircorners. When fitting / removing, the frame may alsoneed to be partially disassembled.Cover Profiles PP can also be used as a groove cover byturning them through 180°.

181

Lip Seals

Lip Seal 5 2-3mmTPE, blacka = 2-3 mmm = 19 g/m

1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.437.12


1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.439.20


1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.436.85


1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.436.88

For fastening and sealing panel elements of differingthickness which are inserted into profile grooves 5, 6and 8.

182

F

5 PA 100 N

6 PA 150 N

8 PA 250 N

3. Fastening Elements 3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners 3.3.2 Fastening Panels on the Groove

The Multiblocks can be used to provide a secure methodof fastening any panel elements to the groove:> Rapid and secure assembly or disassembly at a laterstage> Fastening at any position on the profile groove and thepanel element> Suitable for various loads> Option of screwless or screw-type fastener> Can be adapted for use with different panel elementthicknesses

3.3.2 Fastening Panels onthe Groove

Multiblocks PA Multiblock PA is inserted into the profile groove at anyposition. Lightweight cladding panels, panel elementsmade of acrylic glass, plastic or composite materialsmust be drilled at the appropriate position and screw-fitted to the Multiblock.The mounting dimensions can be varied throughrepositioning the contact face and through the movableheight adjuster.The panels are secured using either the through bores orthe square nuts in the basic unit. This ensures a widetolerance range for the position of the screw holes relativeto the outer edges of the panel elements, since theinserted square nuts can be positioned freely.The Multiblocks can be moved within the groove inorder to align them with the bore in the panel element.

Recommendation for fitting the panel element.

Subsequent fastening of panel elements onto the profilegroove of an existing frame is made possible by meansof Multiblocks, Clamp Multiblocks, Screw Strips andPanel Clamps etc.

Multiblocks


183

5 PA

Panel elements of thickness 2, 4 and 6 mm can be fittedflush with the outer edge of the profile.

Multiblock 5 PABasic unit and height adjuster, PA-GF, blackSquare nut DIN 562-M4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 2 g

1 pce. 0.0.370.71

Multiblock 6 PABasic unit and height adjuster, PA-GF, blackSquare nut DIN 557-M5, St, bright zinc-platedm = 6 g

1 pce. 0.0.419.58

6 PA

Panel elements of thickness 3, 6 and 9 mm can be fittedflush with the outer edge of the profile.

184

F1 F2

6 Zn 1000 N 500 N

8 Zn 2000 N 1000 N

Multiblocks PA8 PA

Panel elements of thickness 5, 10 and 15 mm can befitted flush with the outer edge of the profile.

Multiblock 8 PABasic unit and height adjuster, PA-GF, blackSquare nut DIN 557-M6, St, bright zinc-platedLeaf spring, St, bright zinc-platedm = 14 g

1 pce. 0.0.026.72

For fixing panel elements to profile grooves, particularlywhere heavy loads are involved.Multiblock Zn is screwed to the profile groove with ascrew and T-Slot Nut. The anti-torsion pin, which isadjustable in millimetre increments, ensures flushattachment for panels of different thicknesses. The panelelements must be drilled in the appropriate position toline up with either the through bore or the square nut(which is secured against falling out by a leaf spring)incorporated in the Multiblock.

Multiblocks Zn

Recommended mounting arrangement and load dataacross and along the groove.


185

To attach a panel element with an M6 screw from above,the existing hole in the Multiblock must be tapped M6.

6 Zn

Multiblock 6 ZnBasic unit and locating lug, GD-Zn, blackSquare nut DIN 557-M5, St, bright zinc-platedLeaf spring, St, stainlessm = 44 g

1 pce. 0.0.439.85

186

Multiblock 8 ZnBasic unit and locating lug, GD-Zn, blackSquare nut DIN 557-M6, St, bright zinc-platedLeaf spring, St, stainlessm = 66 g

1 pce. 0.0.373.23

Multiblocks Zn8 Zn

To attach a panel element with an M8 screw from above,an M8 thread must be cut into the Multiblock core bore.


187

F1 F2

5 PA 100 N 20 N

6 PA 150 N 30 N

8 PA 250 N 50 N

Clamp Multi-blocks PA

The basic unit is twisted into the groove, the panelelement fitted and clamped in position by means of thelocating lug.

5 PA Mounting dimensions can be varied throughrepositioning the contact faces.

Clamp Multiblock 5 PABasic unit and locating lug, PA-GF, blackm = 2 g

1 pce. 0.0.437.24

Clamp Multiblock PA is inserted into the profile groove;a locating lug secures lightweight panel elements ofdifferent thicknesses, such as cladding panels, panelelements made from acrylic glass, etc.Apart from cutting to length, no further processing isrequired on the panel elements.

The locating lug can be detached again by means of ascrewdriver.


188

Clamp Multi-blocks6 PA

8 PA


1 pce. 0.0.196.63


1 pce. 0.0.439.66


189

1.2.

Double PanelProfiles

Double Panel Profile for retrofitting panel elements intoexisting frame constructions using Self-Tapping ScrewsDIN 7981 St 4.2 (Section 3.2 Screws and Nuts).

Double PanelProfile8 Al E

Assembling and disassembling Double Panel Profile 8Al E.

Double Panel Profile 8 Al EAl, anodizedA = 1.35 cm2 Ix = 0.35 cm4 Iy = 0.44 cm4

m = 0.36 kg/m Wx = 0.31 cm3 Wy = 0.43 cm3


s L to 3 4.2 x 9.5 3 to 6 4.2 x 13 6 to 9 4.2 x 16 9 to 12 4.2 x 19 12 to 15 4.2 x 22 15 to 18 4.2 x 25

Double Panel Profile 8 Al E can be locked into thegroove of Profiles 8 without need for screw connections.

The facing screw channels allow the construction ofdouble-walled frame elements. Used in conjunction withSound-Insulating Material 20 (Section 5 Panel Elements)and Sealing Strip 6x3 sk, it is possible to constructelements which are air-tight and noise-reducing.


190


Double Panel Profile in conjunction with Lip Seal 6x3 skor Sound-Insulating Material 20.

Double Panel Profile 8 Al

Assembling and disassembling Double Panel Profile 8Al. Fastening on the profile groove via Clip 8 PA.

Double Panel Profile 8 Al is ideal for profileconstructions with Universal Fasteners and / or Lip Seal6x3 sk is to be used.

s L

to 3 4.2 x 9.53 to 6 4.2 x 13.06 to 9 4.2 x 16.09 to 12 4.2 x 19.0

12 to 15 4.2 x 22.015 to 18 4.2 x 25.0

Double Panel Profile 8 Al can also be screwed directlyonto a panel element etc.


191

Double Panel Profile 8 AlAl, anodizedA = 1.62 cm2 Ix = 0.86 cm4 Iy = 0.44 cm4

m = 0.44 kg/m Wx = 0.72 cm3 Wy = 0.40 cm3


Clip 8 PAPA-GF, blackRecommended number: 4 pce./mm = 3 g1 pce. 0.0.422.38

Sealing Strip Sealing Strip, self-adhesive on one side, for sealingframe elements. Can also be used as a damping elementon mating surfaces, particularly in combination withDouble Panel Profile 8 Al.

Sealing Strip 6x3 skCellular rubber, closed-cell, self-adhesive on one side, blackTemperature range: –30°C to +110°CResistant to many oils, fuels, acids and alkaline solutionsm = 3 g/m1 roll, length 10m 0.0.422.66

192


Panel-Fixing Strip 8PVCm = 55 g/m1 pce., length 2000 mm, black 0.0.429.64

1 pce., length 2000 mm, grey 0.0.440.33

Panel-FixingStrip

Used in conjunction with Double Panel Profile 8 Al andClip 8 PA, the Panel-Fixing Strip is ideal for retrofittingessentially air-tight panel elements into existing frameconstructions.Apart from the cut-off, no additional machining is requiredfor the panel element.

193

Rebate Profile for universal fastening of variouselements to Profiles 8. Suitable as a continuous screwstrip for practically dust and dirt-tight constructions, incombination with panel elements and Sealing Strips oras a rebate strip for doors.

Rebate Profiles

Rebate Profile 8 Al 19“ is used for fixing 19“ front platesor 19“ housings or other panel elements. These aresecured to the Rebate Profile by means of Captive Nuts.1 height unit (HU) corresponds to a length of 44.45 mm

The Rebate Profile is inserted into the groove and fixedin position with grub screws.

Rebate Profile 8 AlAl, anodizedm = 310 g/m


Rebate Profile 8 Al 19“Al, anodizedFully machined with 91 openings and 21 M6 threads incl. grub screwsDIN 913-M6x12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 630 g


194

Captive Nut M4Cage and square nut, St, bright zinc-platedm = 400 g/100

100 pce. 0.0.411.64

Captive Nut M5Cage and square nut, St, bright zinc-platedm = 500 g/100100 pce. 0.0.411.65

Captive Nut M6Cage and square nut, St, bright zinc-platedm = 500 g/100100 pce. 0.0.411.66

Captive Nuts Universal usage for installation in Rebate Profile 8 Al19“ or in panel elements. The Captive Nuts can beinstalled by snapping the latch springs into thecorresponding recess.


The recesses can be either:Square - with anti-torsion blockRound - without anti-torsion block.

195

Panel Clamp For securing panel elements to Profiles 8 without theneed for additional machining. Tightening the clampingscrew fixes the Panel Clamp to both the panel elementand the profile.Particularly suitable for attachment of unframed panelsetc. Not suitable for mesh and corrugated mesh. Thepanel elements of thickness 4-10 mm can be clamped inposition by the asymmetrical spacer washers.Depending on the particular application, it may benecessary to rotate the spacer washers in the housing.

Max. loading for each Panel Clamp without pinning.Fmax = 100 N

Possible pinning position for securing the panel elementagainst movement.

Panel Clamp 82 housing halves, PA-GF, black1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x20, St,bright zinc-plated1 Hexagon Nut DIN 934-M6, St, bright zinc-plated2 spacer washers, NBR, blackm = 56 g

1 set 0.0.388.91

196

3. Fastening Elements 3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners 3.3.3 Fastening Panels in Special Profiles

Handling is enhanced compared with conventionalstructures, partly because of the significantly lowermaterial weight and the optimum static rigidity achievedby clamping the panel element in the profile frame.All enclosure and guard units can be quickly modified,extended at will and re-used at other locations.The benefits for the user:> Substantial reduction in mounting and dismantlingtimes due to easy and clean installation procedures> Low material weight requires less personnel formounting and dismantling> Use of special hangers means frame elements can beremoved quickly> Can be used for all panel elements

Clamp Profiles Any panel element can be clamped in the Clamp Profilesand combined to form stable frame elements. The ClampProfiles are particularly suitable for use with non-inherently stable panels such as corrugated mesh, thinsheet panels etc.The stable frames can be incorporated into the basicframe of a fixture in the form of rigid panels or swing,sliding or lifting doors.Other applications include large-capacity guards andenclosures, installed as free-standing units aroundmachinery at production plants (cell guarding), androom dividers in offices, warehouses or points of sale.

Special Clamp Profiles are particularly suitable for panelelements such as corrugated mesh which are not stablein themselves. The panel elements are secured in theClamp Profiles to produce a stable frame element.The finished frame elements made of standard profilesor special Clamp Profiles can be either fixed to the basicconstruction or can be movable in the form of a door etc.

3.3.3 Fastening Panels inSpecial Profiles

Clamp Profile 8 32x18

Clamp Profile 8 40x40

197

Clamp Profile 8 32x18Al, anodizedA = 2.50 cm2 Ix = 1.89 cm4 Iy = 1.11 cm4

m = 0.67 kg/m Wx = 1.18 cm3 Wy = 1.23 cm3


Cap 8 32x18PA-GF, blackm = 2.2 g

1 pce. 0.0.388.87

Clamping Spring 8St, stainlessm = 5 g

1 pce. 0.0.406.21

Clamp-Profile Fastening Set 8 32x18Fastener, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M5x20, St, bright zinc-platedM = 4.5 Nmm = 11 g1 set 0.0.404.09

Particularly suitable for constructing guards andenclosures, doors and other panelling structures. 10 mmthick panel elements can be fitted into the groovewithout using Clamping Springs.Clamp-Profile Fastening Set 8 32x18 ensures acorrectly positioned corner connection for the profiles.The number of Clamping Springs required depends onthe load and the size of the panel element.

Clamp Profile 8

Instead of Clamping Spring 8, a Lip Seal 8 can also beused for securing inherently stable panel elements.


198

1.

2.

Clamp-Profile System E

Installation sequence:1. Insert the Clamp-Profile Strip into the spring cavity inthe Clamp Profile.2. Press in the panel element.

Producing frames:1. Cut-off of panel element = inside frame dimension + 2x insertion depth (t).2. Fit the Clamp-Profile Fastener loosely onto theupright frame profiles.3. Place the horizontal frame profiles centrally onto thepanel element so as to ensure initial gentle clamping bythe steel strip. The panel element must not yet bepressed all the way into the groove.4. Assemble the frame and tighten the bolts. The panelelement will be pressed into the groove by varyingamounts (depending on the tolerance position) when thebolts are tightened.

Clamp-Profile System E is ideal for easy and fastconstruction of frame elements for enclosure and guardsystems. A stainless steel strip is inserted into theweight-optimised profiles to protect the various panelelements from becoming dislodged from the groove.Securing and clamping the panels increases the overallstrength of the frame elements.


The profiles are connected by means of special cornerblocks which can also assume additional functions whenhooking the frame into the basic construction or canalso serve as hinges.The Clamp-Profile Hangers E which engage in theClamp-Profile Fasteners are used for suspending theframe elements.

By drilling the Clamp-Profile Fastener at a preparedpoint and pressing in a grooved pin, the Fastener andClamp-Profile Hinge E can also be used for attachingswing doors.

The Clamp-Profile Fastener can be combined with anydesired Profiles 6 30x30 or 8 40x40 and also with theexisting Clamp Profiles 6 30x30 or 8 40x40. The factthat the Clamp-Profile Fastener has a special cavitymeans that the panels to be fitted in the profile groovesdo not need to be notched.Connection of Clamp-Profiles E with Clamp-ProfileFasteners E.



199

Clamp Profile 6 30x30 EAl, anodizeda = 2 - 6 mmt = 16 mmA = 3.58 cm2 Ix = 2.77 cm4 Iy = 3.24 cm4

m = 0.97 kg/m Wx = 1.81 cm3 Wy = 2.14 cm3


Clamp-Profile Strip 6 23x0,15 ESt, stainlessm = 27 g/m

1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.441.52

Clamp-Profile Fastener 6 30x30 EGD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6x16, St,bright zinc-platedm = 78 g

1 set 0.0.441.80

Clamp Profile 8 40x40 EAl, anodizeda = 2 - 8.5 mmt = 21 mmA = 6.50 cm2 Ix = 8.79 cm4 Iy =10.67 cm4

m = 1.76 kg/m Wx = 4.29 cm3 Wy = 5.25 cm3


Clamp-Profile Strip 8 30x0,15 ESt, stainlessm = 35 g/m

1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.440.48

Clamp-Profile Fastener 8 40x40 EGD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M8x20, St,bright zinc-platedm = 187 g

1 set 0.0.444.76

200

Clamp-Profile Hangers E can be used to hang frameelements into any desired construction with Clamp-Profile Fasteners E. By integrating the suspensionfacility into the corner areas of the frame element, it ispossible to achieve a very narrow gap (12 mm) betweenthe frame element and the stand.

Clamp-ProfileHangers E

Clamp-Profile Hanger 6 Ea = 4.75 mm4 bolts, St, black4 washers DIN 9021-6.4, St, black4 T-Slot Nuts 6 St M6, bright zinc-platedm = 76 g1 set 0.0.441.11

Clamp-Profile Hanger 8 Ea = 8.25 mm4 bolts, St, black4 washers DIN 9021-8.4, St, black4 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8, bright zinc-platedm = 112 g1 set 0.0.440.05

Suspended frame elements can also be locked ifrequired by subsequently moving the lower Clamp-Profile Hanger.Installation sequence:1. Hook the frame element into the existing construction.2. Fix the height of the frame element using the upperhangers.3. Move the lower Clamp-Profile Hangers to lock theframe element in position.


201

Clamp-ProfileHinges E

Clamp-Profile Hinge E enables frame elements withClamp-Profile Fasteners to be used as swing doors.Clamp-Profile Hinge E can be used in combination withClamp-Profile Fasteners 6 30x30 E and 8 40x40 E.

The Clamp-Profile Fasteners are prepared by drilling thebasic bore to ø 5 mm and then pressing in grooved pinDIN 1474.

The fastening screws for the two halves of the hinge canbe reached easily when the door is open and allow thedoor to be fitted by sliding together the two halves of thehinge.

Clamp-Profile Hinge E2 hinge halves, GD-Zn, black4 Washers DIN 125-5.3, St, black2 grooved pins DIN 1474-5x40, Stm = 202 g

1 set 0.0.444.12

Clamp-Profile Hinge Fastening Set 64 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M6x12, St, black4 T-Slot Nuts 6 St M6, bright zinc-platedm = 36 g1 set 0.0.441.66

Clamp-Profile Hinge Fastening Set 84 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M6x14, St, black4 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M6, bright zinc-platedm = 58 g1 set 0.0.444.11

202

x

M M

The Clamp Profiles are particularly suitable forconstructing and subdividing large-area guards andenclosures as well as swing and sliding doors.Corrugated mesh, sheet material, panels and plasticpanel elements can be clamped into position.The secure clamping of the panel elements reinforcesthe high rigidity of the frame element.

When designing panel frames it is important to ensurethat the vertical profiles are the through profiles, i.e. thatthe horizontal struts run between them. (Section 9.3.2Connection Processing).Where the panels are to be divided by a central strut, thisshould always be run between the outer frame profiles.When the Clamp Profiles are attached to 2 panelelements, this should only be done on the end face ofthe profile.The Profile Edging (i.e. clamping strip) will need to beinterrupted accordingly.

Clamp Profiles


Clamp Profile 6 Clamp Profile 830x30 30x30-180° 40x40 40x40-180°

c - 12-1 mm - 15+1 mm

d 15+1 mm - 20+2 mm -

Mmax. 2 Nm 8 Nm

Button-Head Screw ISO 7380 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380a M6x30 M8x40

b 150 mm 200 mm

s 2 - 6 mm 2 - 8.5 mm

203

Clamp Profile 6 30x30Al, anodizedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M4x12, St,bright zinc-platedA = 4.14 cm2 Ix = 3.20 cm4 Iy = 3.54 cm4

m = 1.27 kg/m Wx = 2.04 cm3 Wy = 2.34 cm3


Clamp Profile 6 30x30-180°Al, anodizedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M4x12, St,bright zinc-platedA = 4.64 cm2 Ix = 3.53 cm4 Iy = 3.88 cm4

m = 1.55 kg/m Wx = 2.35 cm3 Wy = 2.54 cm3


Clamp Profile 8 40x40Al, anodizedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6x16, St,bright zinc-platedA = 7.40 cm2 Ix = 11.96 cm4 Iy = 9.58 cm4

m = 2.30 kg/m Wx = 5.93 cm3 Wy = 4.55 cm3


Clamp Profile 8 40x40-180°Al, anodizedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6x16, St,bright zinc-platedA = 8.38 cm2 Ix = 11.40 cm4 Iy = 13.00 cm4

m = 2.56 kg/m Wx = 5.70 cm3 Wy = 6.20 cm3


204

Clamp-Profile Cross Connector 6 30x30St, RAL 9006 white aluminiuma = 12 -1 mmm = 74 g

1 pce. 0.0.459.09

Clamp-Profile Cross Connector 8 40x40St, RAL 9006 white aluminiuma = 15 +1 mmm = 168 g

1 pce. 0.0.457.92


Inside corner with a Clamp-Profile Cross Connector andtwo Clamp Profile Connectors.Cut-out with two Clamp Profile Cross Connectors andtwo Clamp Profile Connectors.

Central aperture with four Clamp Profile CrossConnectors.

When planning panel element cut-outs, the penetrationdepth (a) specified here must be taken into accountirrespective of the penetration depth specified for theClamp Profiles.

Clamp-ProfileCross Connector

The Clamp-Profile Cross Connector is designed forconnecting Clamp Profiles / Clamp Profiles E of Lines 6and 8.It can be used for the construction of framed panelelements for enclosures and guards which feature insidecorners, cut-outs or internal apertures.In addition, up to 4 Clamp Profiles can be secured at asingle intersection point.

Installation note:The following screws are required for securing theClamp-Profile Cross Connectors to the Clamp Profiles:Clamp Profile 6 30x30: Screw ISO 7380 M6x14Clamp Profile 8 40x40: Screw ISO 7380 M8x20

205

Hanger 6-8 Hanger for securing frame elements to Stand Profiles,including combinations, of Lines 6 and 8.In terms of its function, the hanger is not restricted touse with frame elements and can be used for any modulewhich has to be replaced quickly. If required, theHangers can be screwed together front and rear usinggrub screw DIN 913-M5x10 in order to prevent lifting.

Fastening Frame Elements Rapid assembly or disassembly of frame elements isrequired when enclosure and guard systems are used asan integral part of the fixture itself or as free-standingmachine guards (cell guarding).Quick and simple assembly is facilitated by hangers anddoor rabbets.

206

Profiles 6 and 8 can be combined by turning around theanti-torsion block.Fastening to Profile 6 using Button-Head Screw ISO7380-M6x14 and T-Slot Nut 6 St M6.Fastening to Profile 8 using Button-Head Screw ISO7380-M6x16 and T-Slot Nut 8 St M6.

Hanger 6-82 hangers, GD-Zn, black2 anti-torsion blocks, GD-Zn, black1 grub screw DIN 913-M5x10, blackm = 70 g

1 set 0.0.441.33


Attaching the Hanger from the front ensures that theframe and panel elements can be fitted without space.

Hanger 6-8 can be used to maintain very small gapsbetween the frame and the Stand Profile.F = approx. 400 N

Hanger 6-8

207

Particularly robust version allows frequent attachmentand securing of frame elements to Stand Profiles 8.If required, Hangers 8 can be screw-connected to eachother from the front or rear.Two Hangers 8 and appropriate Fastening Sets arerequired for each attachment point.

Hanger 8

Attaching the Hanger from the front ensures that theframe and panel elements can be fitted without space.F = approx. 750 N

Hanger 8 GD-Zn in conjunction with Clamp Profile 840x40.

Hanger 8 GD-Zn in conjunction with Clamp Profile 832x18.

Hanger 81 Hanger, GD-Zn, black1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x16,St, bright zinc-plated1 Washer DIN 125-6.4 St, bright zinc-platedm = 87 g

1 set 0.0.196.44

Fastening Set 8 for Hanger 81 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x25,St, bright zinc-plated2 spring washers, St, bright zinc-plated1 T-Slot Nut 8 St M8, bright zinc-platedm = 21 g1 set 0.0.265.05

208


Screw-connected rabbet for swing doors, but can alsobe used as a hanger if the frame element needs to bescrew-connected for safety reasons.The frame element cannot be hung without a securingscrew and therefore removal of the screw will bedetected immediately.

Door Rabbet

Door example with Hinges 8 40 Zn (left) and DoorRabbets 8 with Door Lock 8 (right).

Door Rabbet 82 Door Rabbets, GD-Zn, black2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x25,St, bright zinc-plated4 spring washers, St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8, bright zinc-platedm = 190 g

1 set 0.0.265.15

209

3. Fastening Elements 3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners 3.4.1 Hinges

3.4 Movable PanelFasteners

Sliding door from a frame element with Corrugated Mesh Al and Clamp Profile8 32x18

Swing, sliding or lifting doors can be produced with theaid of movable panel fasteners.In this arrangement, the doors can be in the form ofeither inherently stable panels without frames or frameelements with integral panels.

3.4.1 Hinges The Hinges can be used for direct attachment offrameless panel elements, for a movable fasteningbetween two profiles and for attachment of framedpanels to the basic frame. They can also be mounted infront of the profile or panel and even in the spacebetween the panel frame and the main frame or doorpost.

Hinges PA Hinges PA are simple components for lightweight doorsand lids. They are provided with an anti-torsion elementwhich engages on the profile grooves.Panel elements secured with Hinges PA must bemachined with the appropriate holes.

Double Hinges PA can only be used on 20 mm wideprofiles in Line 5, on 30 mm wide profiles in Line 6 andon 40 mm wide profiles in Line 8.

210

PA-GF, black ; cannot be lifted out

Hinge 5 PAm = 6 g

1 pce. 0.0.370.18

Double Hinge 5 PAm = 10 g

1 pce. 0.0.437.33

Fastening Set 5 profile side for Hinge 5 PAT-Slot Nut 5 St M5, bright zinc-platedCountersunk Screw DIN 7991-M5x8, St, blackm = 3 g1 set 0.0.370.70


Hinges PA

Hinge / Double Hinge

5 PA 6 PA 8PA

a = Countersunk Screw DIN 7991 M5x8 M5x14 M6x16

b = T-Slot Nut 5 St M5 6 St M5 8 St M6

c ø 5 mm ø 6.3 mm ø 8.2 mm

d 15 mm 22 mm 24 mm

e 9 mm 14 mm 18 mm

f M5 M5 M6

F 50 N 75 N 100 N

211

Hinge halves, PA-GF, blackDowel, St, bright zinc-platedWasher, PA, black

Hinge 6 PA, rightm = 14 g

1 pce. 0.0.431.23

Hinge 6 PA, leftm = 14 g1 pce. 0.0.431.25


1 pce. 0.0.431.27


Hinge halves, PA-GF, blackDowel, St, bright zinc-platedWasher, PA, black

Washer 8 PA, rightm = 21 g

1 pce. 0.0.026.12

Hinge 8 PA, leftm = 21 g1 pce. 0.0.026.10


1 pce. 0.0.373.42


Door elements of Lines 6 and 8 can be fitted so that theycan either be lifted off subsequently or remain fittedpermanently.With the lift-off version, the door must be fitted with theappropriate right-hand or left-hand hinges.For the non-lift version, right-hand and left-hand hingesmust be combined in each case.

212

Hinge St


Hinge StHinge halves, St, black3 dome-head screws M5x8, St, blackHexagon Nut DIN 934-M5, St, blackWasher DIN 125-5,3, St, blackCup square bolt DIN 603-M5x16, St, blackm = 51 g

1 set 0.0.373.82

This attachment version of Hinge St cannot beunscrewed from the outside.The panel element (door) can be swung around 180°.

Universal hinge for doors and lids. Can be mounted onthe inside or outside of the door (when mounted on theinside it cannot be unscrewed).

F = 250 N

213

Hinges 6 Zn Hinge 6 Zn can be used to construct swing doors withProfiles 6, Profiles 8 or any desired panel elements.The basic unit of the hinge used in conjunction withasymmetric anti-torsion blocks allows a whole range ofcombinations in Lines 6 and 8.The anti-torsion blocks can be removed for makingscrew-connections to panel elements.

Hinge F

6 30 Zn 6/6 300 N

6 30 Zn 6/8 300 N

6 30 Zn 8/8 300 N

Hinge 6 30 Zn 6/6Possibilities for mounting the anti-torsion block with agap width of 6.2 mm.

Hinge 6 30 Zn 6/8Possibilities for mounting the anti-torsion block with agap width of 6.2 mm and 8 mm.

Hinge 6 30 Zn 8/8Possibilities for mounting the anti-torsion block with agap width of 8 mm.

214

Hinge 8 Zn Suitable for higher loads, e.g. large machine doors anddoors for guard units, and as compact connectingelement for profiles positioned at various angles. Hinges8 Zn are suitable for right-hand and left-handapplication. Fastening is possible on the outer surfacesor end faces of profiles (using either long holes or ø 8mm bore).Integrated anti-torsion pins to provide additionalstability in the groove.

If required, e.g. when fitting to a panel element, the anti-torsion pin should be removed with a screwdriver.

Hinges 6 Zn


Hinge 6 30 Zn 6/6Hinge, GD-Zn, black2 anti-torsion blocks 6, GD-Zn, black2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x14, St, blackm = 62 g

1 set 0.0.441.58

Hinge 6 30 Zn 6/8Hinge, GD-Zn, black1 anti-torsion block 6, GD-Zn, black1 anti-torsion block 8, GD-Zn, black1 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M5x14, St, black1 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M5x16, St, blackm = 63 g1 set 0.0.441.61

Hinge 6 30 Zn 8/8Hinge, GD-Zn, black2 anti-torsion blocks 8, GD-Zn, black2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x16, St, blackm = 63 g1 set 0.0.441.81

215

Hinge 8 40 ZnHinge halves, GD-Zn, blackm = 180 g

1 pce. 0.0.196.36

F = 750 N

Attaching Hinge 8 40 Zn to the profile grooves of Line 8.

Hinge 8 40 Zn can be screw-connected to the end faceor to the profile groove.

216

Sliding-Door Guide Set 84 slide pieces (2x right, 2x left), POM, black4 spacer pieces, POM, black8 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x12, St, black8 threaded bushings, St, blackm = 58 g

1 set 0.0.406.66

Sliding-DoorGuide Set 8

There can be either 1 or 2 sliding doors in a single Pro-file 8 groove.The slide pieces function as stops or catches for the se-cond door at the terminal position.

For the construction of sliding doors from unframedpanel elements.One Sliding Door Guide Set 8 is required for eachsliding door. Each slide piece is secured in position bymeans of two Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x12.Panel elements thicker than 5 mm must be secured withCountersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x16.The slide pieces can be fitted from either side to suit theapplication.

3. Fastening Elements 3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners 3.4.2 Movable Fasteners

The maximum permissible weight of one door is 10 kg.

3.4.2 MovableFasteners

The Movable Fasteners product group comprisescomponents which are used for constructing sliding,lifting and folding doors.In addition to slide and rolling elements, a completeRoller Shutter System is also provided for a movablesecured panel.

Heavy sliding doors can be made to move particularlyeasily using C-Rail profiles.These products can be found in Section 8.1 LinearSlides.

217

Sliding-Door Guide Set 8/84 slide pieces (2xright, 2xleft), POM, blackSpring bolt, St, bright zinc-platedSpring, St, stainlessm = 49 g

1 set 0.0.404.87

For the construction of sliding doors in conjunction withClamp Profile 8 32x18.One Sliding-Door Guide Set 8/8 is required for eachsliding door. Fastening is by means of a spring boltlocking into the ø 7 mm mounting bore of Clamp-ProfileFastening Set 8 32x18.Should fastening elements in the guide groove causeobstruction, the slide piece can be fixed at an alternativeposition by drilling an additional ø 7 mm hole in thedoor profile.

There can be either 1 or 2 sliding doors in a single Pro-file 8 groove.The slide pieces function as stops or catches for the se-cond door at the terminal position.

Sliding-DoorGuide Set 8/8

For sliding door constructions with n door elements ofthe same size, the following equation can be used tocalculate the door width l:

An overlap of Caps 8 32x18 of 4 mm is taken intoaccount.

The maximum permissible weight of one door is 10 kg.

l =L + 32 (n-1) - 8________________________

n

218


T-Slot Slider The T-Slot Slider enables elements to slide in the profilegrooves while simultaneously rotating around thefastening point.It can be used to construct simple guides for variouscomponents, e.g. keyboard pull-outs, panels foroperating instructions, or simple lifting, folding andsliding doors in Line 5 or Line 6 profile grooves.

T-Slot Slider 5T-Slot Slider, POM, blackT-Slot Slider hub, St, blackT-Slot Nut 5 St M3Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M3x10, St, bright zinc-plateda = 11 mmF = 30 Nm = 6 g1 set 0.0.437.98

T-Slot Slider 6T-Slot Slider, POM, blackT-Slot Slider hub, St, blackT-Slot Nut 6 St M4Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M4x14, St, bright zinc-plateda = 13 mmF = 40 Nm = 21 g1 set 0.0.459.07

Unrestricted rotation of the T-Slot Slider around the hubalso compensates for possible alignment errors.

Construction of a folding door with T-Slot Sliders 6.

219

T-Slot Roller T-Slot Roller 8 can be used to construct a simple guidefor various components, e.g. keyboard pull-out, panelsfor operating manuals or simple lifting doors in Profile 8grooves.T-Slot Roller 8 F corresponds to a fixed bearing end andcan absorb radial forces and axial forces (only forsecuring position). To prevent strains resulting from sawtolerances, etc., T-Slot Roller 8 L offers a solution whichtransfers only radial forces in the direction of the grooveflanks. As a rule, the two types of roller must be used incombination (e.g. T-Slot Roller 8 F for a keyboard pull-out at the fixed bearing end, T-Slot Roller 8 L as a radialsupport in the groove at the opposite end).

T-Slot Roller 8 L1 floating bearing roller, POM, black1 bearing hub, St, blackm = 4 g

1 set 0.0.457.60

T-Slot Roller 8 F1 fixed bearing roller, POM, black1 bearing hub, St, blackm = 5 g

1 set 0.0.457.51

T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M4eGD-Zn, blackm = 5 g1 pce. 0.0.457.47

The T-Slot Rollers connect Profile 8 with the movingcomponent without any central offset.

F

T-Slot Roller 8 L 50 N

T-Slot Roller 8 F 50 N

The special T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M4e with a central offset of1 mm is available for moving elements made of Line 8components in order to ensure free movement.

220


Slide Guide Strips The Slide Guide Strip can be mounted directly in theprofile groove to create simple slide mechanisms. It canbe screw-connected to the profiles of the surroundingframes or to moving modules.Slide Guides L and F are only suitable for installation onmoving profiles.The offset "e" prevents the moving components fromcolliding with the fixed frame elements.

Slide Guide L (A = floating bearing) and Slide Guide F(B = fixed bearing) as guide elements, secured to amoving component.

Required machining and fastening elements for fixing aSlide Guide Strip of any required length at the floatingbearing end.The distance between the fastening elements should bechosen to reflect the load.

Required machining and fastening elements for fixingthe Slide Guide Strip at the fixed bearing end.Slide Guide Strip 5/5e must be counterbored by c = 2mm in the area of the screw head.

Slide Guide Strip

Line 5 Line 6 Line 8

a M2.5 M3 M4

b M2.5x8 M3x12 M4x16DIN 916 DIN 916 DIN 916

c 2.0 mm - -

d DIN 9021-2.7 DIN 9021-3.2 DIN 9021-4.3

e 0.8 mm 1.0 mm 2.0 mm

f M2.5x8 M3x12 M4x16DIN 912 ISO 7380 ISO 7380

l 7.0 ±0,5 mm 7.5 ±0,5 mm 9.5 ±0,5 mm

221

Slide Guide Strip 5/5ePE-UHMW, blackm = 80 g/m

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.464.24

Slide Guide 5/5e LPE-UHMW, black, with threaded bores2 grub screws DIN 916-M2.5x8, St, bright zinc-platedm = 5 g1 set 0.0.464.29

Slide Guide 5/5e FPE-UHMW, black, with through bores2 T-Slot Nuts 5 St M3, bright zinc-plated2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M3x14, St, bright zinc-plated2 O-rings 3x1m = 8 g1 set 0.0.464.27


1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.459.27

Slide Guide 6/6e LPE-UHMW, black, with threaded bores2 grub screws DIN 916-M3x12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 11 g1 set 0.0.459.32

Slide Guide 6/6e FPE-UHMW, black, with through bores2 T-Slot Nuts 6 St M3, bright zinc-plated2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M3x18, St,bright zinc-plated2 O-rings 3x1m = 19 g1 set 0.0.459.30


1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.458.58

Slide Guide 8/8e LPE-UHMW, black, with threaded bores2 grub screws DIN 916-M4x16, St, bright zinc-platedm = 22 g1 set 0.0.465.26

Slide Guide 8/8e FPE-UHMW, black, with through bores2 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M4, bright zinc-plated2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M4x25, St,bright zinc-plated2 O-rings 4x1.5m = 44 g1 set 0.0.465.24

222

Lifting-Door Guide Set Lifting-Door Guide Set 8 facilitates the construction oflifting doors consisting of frame elements with variouspanel elements which are located between two StandProfiles.


One or two counter-weights which are connected to thelifting door using Timing-Belt Reverse Units and TimingBelts (Section 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements)compensate for the weight of the door. The lifting doorand counter-weights are guided in the grooves of theStand Profiles by means of Guide Sets.In addition, the Guide Sets connect the Timing Belt tothe lifting door and counter-weight. As a rule, fourLifting Door Guide Sets are required for the lifting doorand two for each counter-weight. The size of the counter-weight is determined by the weight of the lifting door.Whether one or two counter-weights are installeddepends on the door weight and the ratio between thedoor width and door height, i.e. guide length.For the construction of the counter-weight, Support Pro-files 80 and 160 with grooves 8 and Wall Profiles 80(Section 7.1 Conduits) are used as well as Counter-Weight Bottom Plates 80x80 and 160x80 with anappropriate filling. Flat or round steel bars, metal scrap,steel-blasting material etc. are suitable for use as fillingmaterial.

The use of Timing-Belt Reverse Units is a basicrequirement for using drive units. The process ofopening and closing lifting doors can thus be automatedand integrated into manufacturing systems or transportsequences.

223

Lifting-Door Guide Set 8Housing halves, POM, blackSteel insert, St, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M6x25, St, bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut 8 St M6, bright zinc-plated3 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6x25, St,bright zinc-plated3 Hexagon Nuts DIN 934-M6, St, bright zinc-platedm = 94 g1 set 0.0.388.70

Counter-Weight Bottom Plate 80x80 for cable conduitBase plate, St, black4 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x30, St, bright zinc-plated4 Universal Fasteners, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedm = 315 g

1 set 0.0.373.76

Counter-Weight Bottom Plate 160x80 for cable conduitBase plate, St, black4 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x30, St, bright zinc-plated4 Universal Fasteners, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedm = 512 g

1 set 0.0.373.75

224

CastorsPOM and PA

Versatile Castors which can be mounted in the profilegrooves.

Castor 5 POMCastor, POM, blackBearing hub, St, blackWasher DIN 125-5.3, St, bright zinc-platedm= 4 g

1 pce. 0.0.370.97

Castor 6 POMCastor, POM, blackBearing hub, St, blackWasher DIN 125-6.4, St, bright zinc-platedm= 16 g

1 pce. 0.0.419.79

Castor 8 PACastor, PA-GF, black2 deep groove ball bearings, sealedm= 32 g

1 pce. 0.0.026.83


Light, intrinsically stable panel elements can be used assliding doors in conjunction with the Castors.

F a b

Castor 5 POM 50 N 5 mm 4 mm

Castor 6 POM 100 N 8.5 mm 5.5 mm

Castor 8 PA 150 N 12.0 mm 10.0 mm

225

Castor Unit 8 PAFlange, PA-GF, blackCap, PA-GF, blackCastor 8 PA, black1 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M6x30, St, bright zinc-plated2 hexagon screws DIN 933-M5x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers, St, bright zinc-platedm = 66 g1 set 0.0.458.85

Castor Unit8 PA

Fully covered Castor running in profile groove 8.The Castor Unit can be secured to Profiles 5, 6 and 8 aswell as directly to any chosen surfaces.

The mounting slots in the flange can be used to adjustthe height of the Castor Unit.Castor 8 is asymmetrical. This means that the offsetbetween the profiles can be altered (0 or 2 mm)depending on how it is installed.

F = max. 75 N

226

Roller Shutter (RS) System Roller Shutters (RS) can be used primarily as movingpanel elements for locking cabinet systems, controlpanels and operating consoles etc. The major advantageof the system is its flexibility, allowing it to be housedwithin the cabinet, and requiring far less space thanswing or sliding doors.The RS System is suitable for constructing manually-operated vertical and horizontal roller shutters on framesbuilt from Profiles 8. The system consists of the RSGuide and the Roller Shutter itself, both of which are ofmodular design. The Roller Shutter is available inaluminium or plastic.RS Systems should be designed so that the width-to-height ratio of the Roller Shutter is less than 2.5. PlasticRoller Shutters should not be made wider than 1000 mmin order to ensure they maintain stability.

View of an RS Guide positioned behind a fixed panelelement.

Example of an RS System in a system cabinet. The RSGuide has been matched to the contour of the cabinet.


227

RS Guide The RS Guide is of modular design and consists of anRS Guide Profile and RS Curved Guides 45°. The RSGuide Strip is mounted onto the guide elements in orderto ensure that the Roller Shutter glides smoothly andsecurely.The process of assembling the guide begins withdefining the position of all the guide elements. Thelengths required for the RS Guide Profiles are shown inthe following table.The total length of the guide must allow the RollerShutter to be moved to each terminal position.

RS Guide Profile 8Al, anodizedA = 2.28 cm2

m = 613 g/m


Clip 8 StSt, bright zinc-platedRecommended number: 5 per 1 mm = 2.5 g

1 pce. 0.0.428.97

RS Curved Guide Set 45°2 Curved Guide 45°, PA, black4 Countersunk Screws DIN 965 M2.5x5, St, bright zinc-platedm = 135 g

1 set 0.0.465.70

RS Slide StripPE-HD, blackA = 45.7 mm2

m = 880 g/20m1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.458.64

Lengths a and b are used for measuring the lengths ofthe RS Guide Profiles. The dimension L designates thelength of the Guide Profile required between CurvedGuides 45°.Example:Guide for Roller Shutter from groove 1 into groove 5L = 140 mma = 125 mmb = 125 mm

Guide routing options

5 6 7 8

L = 140 L = 120 L = 80 L = 601 a = 125 a = 125.5 a =122.5 a =123.5

b = 125 b = 110.5 b = 82.5 b = 68L = 120 L = 140 L = 100 L = 80

2 a = 110.5 a = 125 a =121.5 a =122.5b = 125.5 b = 125 b = 95 b = 82.5L = 80 L = 60 L = 20 L = 0

3 a = 82.5 a = 83.5 a = 80 a = 80.5b = 122.5 b = 108 b = 80 b = 65.5L = 60 L = 80 L = 0 L = 20

4 a = 68 a = 82.5 a = 65.5 a = 80b = 123.5 b = 122.5 b = 80.5 b = 80

Groo

ve

228

RS Slat Profile KPVC, grey, aluminium-coloured coatingm = 465 g/m

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.458.91

Plastic RollerShutters

RS Slat Profile K is connected to a Roller Shutter bymeans of the integrated locking segments. No SlatInsulators or Slat Sliding Shoes are required.Weight of plastic Roller Shutter: 3.7 kg / m2

Length of plastic RS Slats: X-16 mm


Aluminium Roller Shutters are constructed as Slat Profi-les Al with Slat Insulators between them. Each slat mustbe provided with Slat Sliding Shoes at each end. Weightof aluminium Roller Shutter: 8 kg / m2

Length of aluminium RS Slats: X-24 mm

RS Slat Profile AlAl, anodizedA = 0.58 cm2

m = 157 g/m


RS Slat InsulatorPA, transparentRecommended usage: 4 per 1mm = 40 g/100100 pce. 0.0.465.68

RS Slat Sliding ShoePA, blackm = 60 g/100100 pce. 0.0.465.62

AluminiumRoller Shutters

229

RS End StripAl, anodizedA = 2.95 cm2

m = 796 g/m


RS End Strip Guide Set1 RS End Strip cap, left, PA, black1 RS End Strip cap, right, PA, black2 RS End Strip rollers, POM/St, blackm = 8 g

1 set 0.0.465.58

RS Locking System 8Cylinder Lock, all keys identicalKey, locking bar, nabHeadless screwm = 105 g

1 set 0.0.465.57

The RS End Strip is used to terminate the Roller Shutter.The Locking System and any desired handles can besecured in the End Strip.If two End Strips are to interlock (two Roller Shuttersmeeting), one of the End Strips must be fitted with aheadless screw in order to engage the locking bar.

RS End Strip

Length of the RS End Strip: X-50 mm

231

4. Handles and Locks 4.1 Handles

4.1. Handles

The Handles and Locks product group contains:> Handles> Grip systems> Locks and door locksThey therefore augment the movable panel fasteningelements used for constructing guards and enclosures.Grip systems can also be used, however, forconstructing handling and transport devices.


Swing, sliding and lifting doors are operated withhandles or grip systems. The grips are either screweddirectly into an inherently stable panel element or theyare attached to the profile of the panel frame.

Handles PA Handles PA for highly versatile application; they can beattached from the front or rear (concealed) and areparticularly suitable for sliding and swing doors.

232

4. Handles and Locks 4.1 Handles

Handles of straight and angled design.Handles Al

Angled handles are particularly suitable for sliding andswing doors.

Handles PA

Handle PA 80PA-GF, blackm = 9 g1 pce. 0.0.391.34

Handle PA 120PA-GF, blackm = 30 g

1 pce. 0.0.391.35

Handle PA 160PA-GF, blackm = 93 g

1 pce. 0.0.196.57

233

Can be rear-mounted (concealed). Can also be front-mounted in conjunction with Fastening Sets.

Handle Al 120Al, blackm = 37 g

1 pce. 0.0.416.85

Handle Al 120 crankedAl, blackm = 43 g

1 pce. 0.0.416.87

Fastening Set for Handle Al 1202 connection elements 120, GD-Zn, black2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x10, St, blackm = 21 g1 set 0.0.418.81

Handle Al 200Al, blackm = 261 g

1 pce. 0.0.416.81

Handle Al 200 crankedAl, blackm = 312 g

1 pce. 0.0.416.83

Fastening Set for Handle Al 2002 connection elements 200, GD-Zn, black2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M8x18, St, blackm = 130 g

1 set 0.0.418.82

234

4.2 Grip Systems

4. Handles and Locks 4.2 Grip Systems

Lightweight handle for universal application.

Handle, light dutyAl, anodizedm = 87 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.026.44

Can be rear-mounted (concealed) using M5 screws.

Grip systems or grip rails contribute to the rigidity offrameless panel elements.

Handle, lightduty

235

Hand-Grip Elements, in conjunction with profiles andCaps, can be used to construct handles which, when thepanel elements are attached, have a supplementarystabilising effect.

Hand-GripElements

Hand-Grip Element5 8

a 10 mm 20 mm

b ø 4.3 mm ø 7.0 mm

c Button-Head Screw Button-Head ScrewISO 7380 ISO 7380M5x40 M8x60

d Washer DIN 125 Washer DIN 125ø 5.3 mm ø 8.4 mm

e Button-Head Screw Button-Head ScrewISO 7380 ISO 7380

M5x(t+38 mm) M8x(t+56 mm)

Hand-Grip Element 5PA-GF, blackm = 7 g

1 pce. 0.0.391.19

Hand-Grip Element 8PA-GF, blackm = 28 g

1 pce. 0.0.196.60

236

Grip Rail Profile Grip Rail Profile for universal application on swing andsliding doors, drawers etc.Particularly suitable for applications where injuries mayotherwise occur.When attached to panel elements, the Grip Rail Profilealso has a stabilising effect.

4. Handles and Locks 4.2 Grip Systems

Grip Rail ProfileAl, anodizedA =2.80 cm2 Ix = 5.56 cm4 Iy = 2.66 cm4

m =0.76 kg/m Wx = 2.24cm3 Wy = 1.62 cm3


Grip Rail Cap SetGrip Rail Cap, right, PA-GF, blackGrip Rail Cap, left, PA-GF, blackm = 3,5 g1 set 0.0.432.28

237

Grip System Grip system for constructing handles from Profiles 5 or 6.The Grip End Cap must be screw-connected in theprofile‘s core bore with Countersunk Screw DIN 7991.Grip system 6 is ideal for heavy doors etc.

Discontinuation of the Grip Cover Profile for right-angled profile connections.

Grip Cover Profile 5 20x4TPE, blackHardness 73 Sh AOil, UV and water resistingm = 78.2 g/m

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.437.04

Grip End Cap 5 D28PA-GF, blackm = 1.9 g

1 pce. 0.0.437.06

Grip Cover Profile 6 30x6TPE, blackHardness 65 Sh AOil, UV and water resistingm = 170 g/m

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.441.85

Grip End Cap 6 D42PA-GF, blackm = 4 g1 pce. 0.0.441.87

Can be connected using Standard or UniversalFastening Set.Can be connected from the inside of the door using T-SlotNut St and Button-Head Screw ISO 7380.

238

4. Handles and Locks 4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.1 Door Catches

4.3 Locks andCatches

MagneticCatches

Magnetic Catches are particularly suitable for latchingswing and sliding doors.They can be adjusted to the thickness of the panelelements by means of mounting slots. The MagneticCatch can be rotated around 180° for different holdingstrengths.

As well as the latching function, locking systems alsoprovide security against unauthorised entry via swing orsliding doors constructed from inherently stable panelelements.

Magnetic Catch5 8

a Hexagon Socket Hexagon SocketHead Cap Screw Head Cap Screw

DIN 912 DIN 912M4x12 M6x20

b 1 mm -

c - 1 mm

d 7 mm 14 mm

e M4 M5

f 8 mm 10 mm

F1 3 N 10 N

Magnetic Catch 5PA-GF, blackFlat head screw DIN 921-M4x5, St, bright zinc-plated as holding platem= 9 g

1 pce. 0.0.391.32

Magnetic Catch 8PA-GF, blackFlat head screw DIN 921-M5x6, St, bright zinc-plated as holding platem = 34 g

1 pce. 0.0.196.48

4.3.1 DoorCatches

239

Versatile quick-action latch for sliding and swing doors.Can be adjusted to the thickness of the panel element bymeans of the mounting slots. It can be set as a stop forboth sliding and swing doors.New low-wear design with increased holding force.

Ball Latch

Ball Latch 8 PAPA-GF, blackBall pin St, bright zinc-platedHolding forcemax. = 75 Nm = 25 g

1 pce. 0.0.388.20

The mounting slots in the Ball Latch casing means thatthe sliding door and Stand Profile can be offset.Recommended fastening to the profile: Hexagon SocketHead Cap Screw DIN 912 M5 and Washer DIN 125-5.3.Use of Multiblock Zn permits narrow door gap.

240

4. Handles and Locks 4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.2 Locking Systems

Locking System 5, Cylinder LockKey, locking bar, nabCylinder lock (all keys identical)m = 91 g

1 set 0.0.391.16

Locking System 5, Double-Beard LockDouble-beard insertKey, locking bar, nabm = 120 g

1 set 0.0.391.17

Locking System 8, Cylinder LockCylinder lock (all keys identical)Key, locking bar, nabm = 116 g

1 set 0.0.196.61

Locking System 8, Double-Beard LockDouble-beard insertKey, locking bar, nabm = 143 g

1 set 0.0.196.62

As well as the latching function, Locking Systems alsoprovide security against unauthorised entry via swing orsliding doors constructed from inherently stable panelelements.The Locking Systems can be used for left-hand or right-hand application by turning the locking bar.The panel elements will need to be machined forLocking Systems 5 and 8 which are used withunframed doors.

4.3.2 LockingSystems

Nab, with two different mounting positions for slidingand swing doors.

241

Door Lock 8 with Cylinder LockCylinder lock (all keys identical)Housing and anti-torsion blocks, PA-GF, black2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6x25, St,bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M6, bright zinc-platedKey, locking bar, nabm = 204 g

1 set 0.0.265.08

Door Lock 8 with Double-Beard InsertDouble-beard insertHousing and anti-torsion blocks, PA-GF, black2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6x25, St,bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M6, bright zinc-platedKey, locking bar, nabm = 237 g

1 set 0.0.265.09

Depending on the application, the anti-torsion blocks inthe housing can be repositioned.The nabs have two different mounting positions forsliding and swing doors.

4.3.3Door Locks

For locking and securing sliding and swing doors.Frame and Stand Profiles do not need to be machined.

4. Handles and Locks 4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.3 Door Locks

242

Door Locks


For locking and securing swing and sliding doors fromClamp Profiles 8 40x40.The mortise lock is prepared for fitting standard profilecylinders and can be fitted into both right-hand andleft-hand doors.Suitable for integration in MK / GMK suites or for use ofindividual profile cylinders.

The Profile Cylinder can be used with a knob whenconstructing escape doors. Closed doors which areequipped in this way can be opened from the knob sidewithout need for a key.

A specially machined Clamp Profile 8 40 x 40 as part ofthe door frame serves to accommodate the mortise lock.The lock centring pieces are only employed for a slidingdoor.

When the door is closed, the gap between the doorframe and the Stand Profile is 22 mm.

243

Door Lock 8 for Profile CylinderDoor Lock for Profile CylinderMortise lock, St, bright zinc-plated1 locking cam, PA-GF, black2 lock centring pieces, PA-GF, black1 cover, PA-GF, black1 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M5x30, St, bright zinc-plated4 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x20, St, bright zinc-plated4 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M6, bright zinc-plated2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M6x12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 450 g

1 set 0.0.388.27

Profile 8 machined for Door Lock for Profile CylinderPreparation of Clamp Profile 8 40x40 to accommodate the mortise lockand Profile Cylinder

1 pce. 0.0.404.15

Profile Cylinder with Knob, keys identicalCylinder matt nickel-plated, all keys identicalKnob PA, black1 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M5x30, St, bright zinc-plated3 keysm = 217 g1 pce. 0.0.388.36

Lock System6-8

For locking swing and sliding doors from Profiles 6 or 8and a combination of both Lines. The profile frame doesnot need to be machined for holding the Lock System.The screws concealed when the door is locked preventthe Lock System from being dismantled byunauthorised persons.The lock housing is suitable for use with mortise locksto DIN 18251, pin dimension 65 mm.Its versatile fastening options mean that Lock System6-8 can be fitted to both right-opening and left-openingdoors and to the inside and outside of doors.The lock can be chosen to suit the specific function.

244

The lengths of the standard Profile Cylinder on the sidefacing the panel element must be calculated using thethickness of the panel element, the frame profile used

Inward-opening swing door, stop provided by the lockhousing rabbet on the lock case.

Outward-opening swing door, stop provided by the lockhousing rabbet.


Lock System 6-8 fitted to a sliding door.

The panel element may need to be drilled for fitting doorhandles and standard cylinder locks. The lock housingcontains the preformed openings for the holes.The distance to the edge of the door determines theposition of the through holes in the panel element whichare required for the door handle and profile cylinder.

and the combination of stand and frame profiles.

Lock System 6-8

The door gap does not depend on the Profile Line used.

245

Lock System 6-8Lock housing, PA-GF, blackLock case, PA-GF, black with nab, StLock housing rabbet, St, black2 angle brackets, Al, anodized2 door handles, PA, black1 spacer sleeve, PA, black2 drive nuts M4, St, black2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M4x12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 1360 g

1 set 0.0.458.33

Sliding-Door LockLock insert, St, suitable for standard cylinder locks2 drive nuts M4, St, black2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M4x12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 812 g

1 set 0.0.458.34

Swing-Door LockLock insert with movable latch, St, suitable forstandard cylinder locksm = 850 g

1 pce. 0.0.458.35

Profile CylinderCylinder matt nickel-plated, all keys identical1 Countersunk Screw M5x80, St3 keysm = 250 g1 pce. 0.0.458.42

Fastening Set 6 for Lock System 6-82 T-Slot Nuts 6 St M6, bright zinc-plated2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M6x12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 15 g1 set 0.0.459.05

Fastening Set 8 for Lock System 6-82 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M6, bright zinc-plated2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M6x14, St, bright zinc-platedm = 27 g1 set 0.0.458.36

247

5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels

This product group comprises panel elements ofvarious materials.These panel elements are ideal for producing machinecasings, guards, enclosures and housings as well asfor constructing work benches.The specified maximum panel dimensions apply forunmachined panel edges as delivered.The maximum cut-off dimensions are 30 mm less ineach case.Because of the production methods used formanufacturing plastic panel elements, tolerances inmaterial thicknesses are unavoidable.The Roller Shutter is a variable panel element. The entireRoller Shutter System can be found in Section 3.4Movable Panel Fasteners.

5.1 Panels

5. Panel Elements

Acrylic glass, clear or tinted; suitable for translucentcasings or doors, with wear-resistant surface.Polycarbonate, clear or tinted; particularly suitable fortransparent casings or doors, to satisfy demandingfracture-resistance requirements.Plastic (resin-bonded, hot-pressed cellulose); suitablefor heavy-duty working surfaces and casings.Composite material (plastic, coated on both sides withnatural-finish anodized aluminium); particularly suitablefor inherently stable lightweight doors and casings.Aluminium sheet, polished and not degreased, orcolour-coated, used as a panel element for machinecasings; can be painted.The aluminium chequer sheet is particularly suitable forwalk-on platforms or steps.Aluminium panel segments with matching tongue-and-groove geometry; for constructing individually designedpanel elements. The segmented panel elements can betransported and stored with ease and offer virtuallyunlimited options for expansion to a whole range ofpanel forms.

Commutator lathe

248

PMMA, natural or tintedThickness tolerance ± 10%

Acrylic Glass 5mmm = 5.90 kg/m2

Panel dimensions max. 3050x2030 mmCut-off, natural 0.0.428.21

Cut-off, tinted 0.0.388.97

Acrylic Glass 8mmm = 9.44 kg/m2

Panel dimensions max. 3000x2000 mmCut-off, natural 0.0.428.22


PC, natural or tintedThickness tolerance ± 5%Panel dimensions max. 3050x2050 mm

Polycarbonate 5mmm = 6.00 kg/m2

Cut-off, natural 0.0.428.23


Polycarbonate 8mmm = 9.60 kg/m2



5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels 5.1.1 Transparent Panels

5.1.1 TransparentPanelsAcrylic GlassPolycarbonate

Cast Acrylic Glass with hard-wearing surface isparticularly suitable for doors and panelling.High gloss is possible through polishing.Polycarbonate is impact-resistant and shatterproof andis therefore ideal for doors and panelling with highsafety requirements. Long-term use of coolinglubricants with polycarbonate panels can result in thematerial becoming brittle and reduce the strength ofthe safety panel.

249

5.1.2 Non-TransparentPanelsSheet Material

Sheet Material Al 2mmAlMg1Panel dimensions max. 3000x1500 mmm = 5.40 kg/m2

Cut-off, cold rolled (not degreased) 0.0.428.27

Cut-off, one side polyester coated, green RAL6011, 0.0.364.36

Cut-off, natural anodized 0.0.473.08

Sheet Material Al is suitable for machine casingsof all types.

CompoundMaterial

Compound Material consists of two anodized aluminiumouter layers which are bonded together by means of a PEcore. It is ideal for lightweight doors and panelling.

Compound Material 4mmAl-PE compoundPanel dimensions max. 3000x1500 mmm = 5.80 kg/m2

Cut-off, natural anodized 0.0.026.73

5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels 5.1.2 Non-Transparent Panels

250

Resin-bonded cellulose laminate, colour-coated on both sides,similar to RAL colour codeThickness tolerance ± 8%Panel dimensions max. 2800x1850 mm

Plastic 4mmm = 5.72 kg/m2

Cut-off, traffic-white, similar to RAL9016 0.0.473.04

Cut-off, green, similar to RAL6011 0.0.428.41

Cut-off, red, similar to RAL3000 0.0.428.43

Cut-off, yellow, similar to RAL1034 0.0.428.44

Cut-off, blue, similar to RAL5014 0.0.428.45

Cut-off, grey, similar to RAL7035 (light) 0.0.428.46

Cut-off, grey, similar to RAL7030 (medium) 0.0.428.47

Plastic 10mmm = 14.60 kg/m2

Cut-off, traffic-white, similar to RAL9016 0.0.473.06

Cut-off, green, similar to RAL6011 0.0.364.32

Cut-off, red, similar to RAL3000 0.0.428.89

Cut-off, yellow, similar to RAL1034 0.0.428.90

Cut-off, blue, similar to RAL5014 0.0.428.91

Cut-off, grey, similar to RAL7035 (light) 0.0.428.92

Cut-off, grey, similar to RAL7030 (medium) 0.0.428.93

5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels 5.1.2 Non-Transparent Panels

Plastics Plastic is particularly suitable for highly stressedworking surfaces and panelling.

The surfaces are anti-static.

251

Chequer Sheet Aluminium chequer sheet is used for walk-on surfacesor steps.

Chequer Sheet Al 5mmAlMg3, cold rolled (not degreased)“Duett” chequering DIN EN 1386Panel dimensions max. 3000x1500mmm = 9.90 kg/m2

Cut-off 0.0.428.53

The modular segments with corresponding groove-and-tongue geometry can be used for constructingcustomised panel elements. Offset or appropriate buttjoints between the individual segments enable longpanels to be constructed from short individual segmentsand also permit holes and openings to be constructed inthe panel. They also ensure easier handling fortransport, storage and cut-off procedures.Waste can be optimised or avoided altogether.

5.1.3 ModularPanelsPanel Segments

5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels 5.1.3 Modular Panels


252

Panel Segments

Panel Segment 40 EAl, anodizedA = 0.93 cm2 Ix = 2.06 cm4 Iy = 0.02 cm4

m = 0.25 kg/m Wx = 0.83 cm3 Wy = 0.05 cm3


Panel Segment 80 EAl, anodizedA = 1.55 cm2 Ix =11.53 cm4 Iy = 0.02 cm4

m = 0.42 kg/m Wx = 2.58 cm3 Wy = 0.06 cm3


Panel Segment 160 EAl, anodizedA = 2.80 cm2 Ix =72.54 cm4 Iy = 0.03 cm4

m = 0.75 kg/m Wx = 8.56 cm3 Wy = 0.07 cm3


Panel Segment 55 EAl, anodizedA = 1.41 cm2 Ix = 3.51 cm4 Iy = 0.04 cm4

m = 0.38 kg/m Wx = 1.24 cm3 Wy = 0.18 cm3


5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels 5.1.3 Modular Panels

Panel Segment 55 E can be used as an end element forthe Panel Segments with tongue and groove in order toachieve any desired panel element size. It can be cut toany desired point.The resulting panel can be secured in an existing frameusing Cover Profiles PP, screw-connection, etc.

253

Automatisches Handlingsystem

Corrugated Mesh and Steel Mesh are particularlysuitable for guards, enclosures and partitioning inconjunction with Clamp Profiles (Section 3.3 RigidPanel Fasteners).The aluminium Perforated Sheet is an ideal panelelement for air-permeable machine panelling.

5.2 MeshPanels

5. Panel Elements 5.2 Mesh Panels

Al, anodizedmax. 3000x1810 mm

Corrugated Mesh Al 3mm 20x20Mesh: 20 mm Wire thickness: 3 mmm = 1.8 kg/m2


Corrugated Mesh Al 4mm 30x30Mesh: 30 mm Wire thickness: 4 mmm = 2.1 kg/m2


CorrugatedMesh Al

254

Steel Mesh

5. Panel Elements 5.2 Mesh Panels

CorrugatedMesh St

St, electrogalvanized wiresmax. 3000x1810 mm

Corrugated Mesh St 3mm 20x20Mesh: 20 mm Wire thickness: 3 mmm = 2.8 kg/m2

Cut-off 0.0.428.32


Cut-off 0.0.428.34


Cut-off 0.0.428.36

Due to the high inherent stability of the Steel Mesh(straight wires, welded), it is also hightly suitable fordirect use in the profile groove.

255

Steel wire (straight wires)welded, zinc-plated or coatedMax. 2000x1000 mmMesh: 40 mm Wire thickness: 3.8 mm

Steel Mesh 3.8mm 40x40Electrogalvanizedm = 5.1 kg/m2

Cut-off, bright zinc-plated 0.0.428.38

Hot-dip galvanized and powder coatedm = 5.3 kg/m2

Cut-off, black RAL9005 0.0.428.39

PerforatedSheet

Perforated Sheet Al 3mmAlMg3, cold rolled (not degreased) or coatedHole diameter = 10 mm in offset rowsDIN 24041; residual area approx. 60%Panel dimensions max. 3000x1500 mmm = 4.80 kg/m2

Cut-off, cold rolled 0.0.428.29

Cut-off, black powder-coated RAL9005 0.0.428.30

256

5.3 Panels forWork BenchDesign

Beech Multi-Ply panels, 30 mm, with moisture-resistantadhesive, for sturdy, impact-resistant and vibration-damping work surfaces, and 8 mm thickness for sidepanels and shelving in workshops and office areas.Since wood is a natural product, there may be differencesin the grain and tone. Environmental influences(moisture) can also affect dimensions.

Beech Multi-Ply, clear coated on both sides withphenolic resin, oil-resistant, water-repellantAdhesive: AW to DIN 68705T2Wood tone: reddish, grain in longitudinal direction(2000 mm)Panel dimensions max. 2000x1000 mm

Beech Multi-Ply 8mmm = 5.9 kg/m2

Cut-off 0.0.433.35

Beech Multi-Ply 30mmm = 22.1 kg/m2

Cut-off 0.0.433.36

Diagonal Section ds-45°1 pce. 0.2.000.82

A diagonal corner section (45°) is also available whichallows special accessories to be used when designingwork benches.When ordering, specify the dimension of cut-off b x t,the direction of the grain, any processing of the cutedges which is required, and the position and size ofany diagonal sections ds.Ready-to-use Beech Multi-Ply panels in fixed modulardimensions for work benches can be found in Section6.5 Work Bench Design.

5. Panel Elements 5.3 Panels for Work Bench Design

Panel Elements for the construction of shelves, benchesand other fixtures.> Beech Multi-Ply, available in different thicknesses foruse on robust work benches or furniture cladding panelsfor all applications> Ready-made Beech Multi-Ply table tops (30 mm)ergonomically designed

In many cases, panel elements for machine casings areused in work bench design:> Plastic, used as a load-bearing durable table top orside panel> Aluminium Perforated Sheet, used as a leg screen oras a rack for tools> Sheet Materials and Composite Materials used as sidepanels> Aluminium Chequer Sheets in the vicinity of thefootrest

Beech Multi-PlyTRIGO Work Bench, four legs

257

5. Panel Elements 5.4 Accessories for Panel Elements

Sound-Insulating Material for reducing the effect ofsound emission to the environment can be used for bothcomplete encapsulation and individual partitions.It is self-adhesive on one side (rubber-based adhesive,peel-away paper covering).

Sound-Insulating Material 20mmPUR-ester special foam, anthracite, coated withPVC film, perforated, easy to wash down,anthracite-colouredSound absorption as per DIN 52215-63Temperature resistance: -40°C to +100°CThermal conductivity: 0.033 W/mK, DIN 52612Fire characteristics: self-extinguishing to FMVSS 302,DIN 75200Panel dimensions 480x480 mmm = 253 g/panel1 pce. 0.0.440.75

5.4 Accessoriesfor PanelElements

Sound-InsulatingMaterial

The Accessories for Panel Elements are used when thedesign needs to meet special requirements:> Noise-damping casings or noise-dampeneddevices can be produced very easily using Sound-Insulating Material.> Edge Profile S3 Al is particularly suitable for coveringsharp, cut edges on thin-wall panel elements.

Sound-Insulating Material bonded onto a panel elementsecured with Double Panel Profile 8 Al.The sound-insulating effect depends on theexcitation frequency.

Edge ProfileS3 Al

Edge Profile S3 AlAl, anodizedA = 0.33 cm2

m = 89 g/m1 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 0.0.457.45


Edge Profile as edging for 3 mm thick panel elementswhose cut edges require covering, e.g. PerforatedSheet Al etc.The Edge Profile can be machined to provide a right-angled butt joint or a 45° mitre cut.

259

6. Special Elements 6.1 Electrical Discharge

6. Special ElementsThe Special Elements product group contains specialcomponents for:> Discharging electrical currents> Using the profiles as pneumatic lines, andtheir connections> Safeguarding doors, guards and enclosuresof all kinds> Material flow (conveyor technology)> Designing work benches> Lighting> General accessories for special tasks

6.1 Electrical Discharge Unlike conventionally processed, welded steel framesand steel racks, the components of an aluminium profilestructure do not fundamentally form a continuouselectrically conductive entity.The visually attractive and scratchproof anodized surfacecovering, which is also resistant to a variety of environ-mental effects, provides electrical insulation.For this reason, the majority of connections betweenthe electrically conductive profile end faces and aninsulating profile side face are not necessarilyelectrically conductive.

Terminals for earthing profile constructions and forinterconnecting the profiles when the latter areincorporated into a protective circuit.Contact is made by partially destroying the anodizedlayer in the T-slot and on the groove flanks.The Earthing Terminal is installed by twisting the grubscrew into the T-slot and screwing in the hexagon nutwith the earthing line in place. The cable lug must liebetween the washer and the special washer.

Earthing Terminals

260

PotentialEqualiser

Potential Equaliser 8St, bright zinc-platedGrub screw DIN 915-M6x12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 4.7 g

1 pce. 0.0.265.77

Earthing Termi-nals

Earthing Terminal 5T-Slot Nut 5 St M5, bright zinc-platedGrub screw DIN 916-M5x16, St, bright zinc-platedHexagon Nut DIN 934-M5, brassWasher DIN 9021-5.3, brassSpecial washer DIN 6798-A 5.3, St, bright zinc-platedm = 6 g1 set 0.3.001.80

Earthing Terminal 6T-Slot Nut 6 St M6, bright zinc-platedGrub screw DIN 916-M6x25, St, bright zinc-platedHexagon Nut DIN 934-M6, brassWasher DIN 9021-6.4, brassSpecial washer DIN 6798-A 6.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 13 g1 set 0.3.004.62

Earthing Terminal 8T-Slot Nut 8 St/PA M6Grub screw DIN 916-M6x25, St, bright zinc-platedHexagon Nut DIN 934-M6, brassWasher DIN 9021-6.4, brassSpecial washer DIN 6798-A 6.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 12 g1 set 0.3.001.81

The Potential Equaliser ensures voltage equalisationbetween two profiles by partial destruction of theanodized surface covering. This has the effect ofequalising any electrostatic charges.

6. Special Elements 6.1 Electrical Discharge

261

6. Special Elements 6.2 Pneumatic Applications

6.2 Pneumatic Applications In structures made from aluminium profiles, the cavitiesand core bores can also act as compressed air lines(system pressure 10 bar max.):> Compressed air inlet and outlet lines via the end faceor the side face of the profile, complete with PneumaticConnecting or Joining Plates> Profiles can be tapped at any position by fitting thePneumatic Connecting Sets or Pneumatic Connecting orJoining Plates> Airtight, right-angled connections between thecompressed air conducting profiles with the PneumaticUniversal Fastener or the Pneumatic Joining Plates> Airtight extension of the profiles with a specialPneumatic Universal-Butt Fastener> Seals for the various applications; the seals must beinserted between all the joints of profile end faces,Pneumatic Connecting Plates and PneumaticJoining Plates> For use as single-chamber or multi-chamber systemor as control line through a number of self containedcore bores and profile cavities.

Valve group is supplied with compressed air from the profile cavity

Appropriate fastening elements such as Pneumatic Uni-versal Fasteners or Pneumatic Joining Plates are neededin order to use the profile cavities as pneumatic lines.The Automatic-Fastening Set (Section 1.3 Fasteners)is also suitable for connecting profiles used aspneumatic lines.

Practical examples of profiles conductingcompressed air:> Connection of Profile 8 80x80 with PneumaticJoining Plate> Connection of Profile 8 80x40 with PneumaticUniversal-Fastening Sets

262


Pneumatic Universal-Fastening Set 8Pneumatic Universal Fastener 8, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x30, St, bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut 8 St M6, bright zinc-platedMbzp. = 14 NmMstainl.= 11 Nmm = 34 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.364.45


Pneumatic Universal-Butt-Fastening Set 82 Pneumatic Universal Fasteners 8, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x50, St, bright zinc-platedHexagon Nut DIN 934-M6, bright zinc-platedMbzp. = 14 NmMstainl.= 11 Nmm = 45 g1 set, bright zinc-plated 0.0.364.46


These fastening elements are used when the cavitiesof Profiles 8 are used as compressed-air conduits.Pneumatic Fastening Sets should always be usedin pairs.Pneumatic Universal-Fastening Set 8 is used forconnecting two profiles at 90°.

PneumaticUniversal-Fastening Sets

Depending on the profile size and load, several pairs ofFastening Sets may be required. When processing theprofiles, be careful not to damage the cavities.

Pneumatic Universal-Butt-Fastening Sets 8 are used toconnect the end faces of two profiles, e.g. where profilesegments need to be extended.

263

For joining Profiles 8 80x80 or 80x80-45° to Profiles8 80x40 and larger at 90° as a compressed-air conduit.The Joining Plate is attached by means of Button-HeadScrews ISO 7380-M8x20 (M = 25 Nm) fitted into thecore bores in the end face of the profile.The complete unit can therefore be secured to a profileusing Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6x25 (M = 14 Nm) and T-Slot Nuts St M6.

PneumaticJoining Plates

Pneumatic Joining Plate 8 80x80GD-Zn, blackm = 440 g

1 pce. 0.0.406.26

Pneumatic Joining Plate 8 80x80-45°GD-Zn, blackm = 410 g

1 pce. 0.0.409.47

264

Seals PE Seals PE must be located at every connection pointbetween components functioning as pneumatic lines.The settlement of the Seal PE material can result in aninitial reduction in the screw pretension. The screwsmust therefore be tightened after 24 hours.Self-adhesive versions facilitate assembly and eliminatepronounced unevenness (saw cuts, butt joints etc.).

Seal 8 80x40 PEPE-LD soft, naturalself-adhesive on one sidem = 1 g

1 pce. 0.0.420.80

Seal 8 80x80 PEPE-LD soft, naturalself-adhesive on one sidem = 2 g

1 pce. 0.0.420.79

Seal 8 80x80-45° PEPE-LD soft, naturalself-adhesive on one sidem = 2 g

1 pce. 0.0.420.95


Seals PE must be used between all joints.

265

PneumaticConnectingPlates

For sealing the cut end faces of profiles. Connection tocompressed-air supply systems or of compressed-airconsumers to Profiles 8 80x40, 80x80 and 80x80-45°.The Connecting Plate is attached by means of Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x20 (M = 25 Nm) fitted intothe core bores in the end faces of the profile.Pneumatic Universal-Fastening Sets are employed forconnecting profiles used as compressed-air conduits.

Pneumatic Connecting Plate 8 80x40 R½“GD-Zn, blackm = 230 g

1 pce. 0.0.406.34

Pneumatic Connecting Plate 8 80x80 R1“GD-Zn, blackm = 390 g

1 pce. 0.0.406.25

Pneumatic Connecting Plate 8 80x80-45° R½“GD-Zn, blackm = 410 g

1 pce. 0.0.409.48

266

Depending on the type of application, the profile mayneed to be machined.When using a Pneumatic Connector outside the corebores, a standard seal must be used.

When using the Pneumatic Connector (with inner threadc) in conjunction with the core bore, an appropriatethread of length (b) or, in the case of connections madeat 90°, bores of diameter (a) must be provided, anda T-Slot Nut St to retain the fitting.


Supply of compressed air to the profile cavity by meansof a central bore in the T-slot in conjunction with aPneumatic Connecting Set.Supply of compressed air to a central bore by meansof a Pneumatic Connecting Plate with PneumaticConnection fitted to the end face.

Pneumatic Connections For connecting core bores and profile cavities which areto be used as compressed-air conduits.Suitable for connections M5, G1/8 and G1/4.


a b c

Pneumatic Connector

5 M5 5 G1/8 ø 3.0 mm M5x10 6 mm

8 M5 8 G1/8 ø 4.9 mm M8x16 6 mm

8 G1/4 ø 4.9 mm M8x16 8 mm

Pneumatic ConnectingSet

8 M5 8 G1/8 8 G1/4 ø 4.9 mm M8x16

267

St, black

Pneumatic Connector 5 M5M = 3.5 Nm m = 13 g1 pce. 0.0.391.65

Pneumatic Connector 5 G1/8M = 3.5 Nm m = 12 g1 pce. 0.0.391.64

St, black

Pneumatic Connector 8 M5M = 12 Nm m = 19 g1 pce. 0.0.411.70

Pneumatic Connector 8 G1/8M = 12 Nm m = 15 g1 pce. 0.0.411.69

Pneumatic Connector 8 G1/4M = 12 Nm m = 18 g

1 pce. 0.0.411.68

Pneumatic Connector, St, blackCap, PA-GF, blackSeal, NBR, black

Pneumatic Connecting Set 5 M5m = 15 g1 set 0.0.391.68

Pneumatic Connecting Set 5 G1/8m = 14 g1 set 0.0.391.67

Pneumatic Connector, St, blackCap, PA-GF, blackSeal, NBR, black

Pneumatic Connecting Set 8 M5m = 23 g1 set 0.0.411.74



268

Security LimitSwitch

Security Limit Switch with Fastening Set 8Casing, PA-GF, blackActuator, PA-GF/St, corrosion-resistantpositive breakRated voltage: 24 V DC / 230 V ACProtection: IP 65, EN 60529Test certification to BG-GS-ET-15Complete with Fastening Setm = 220 g

1 set 0.0.265.12

Fastening Set 8 for Security Limit SwitchAngle bracket, Al, black2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M5x16, St,bright zinc-plated2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x14, St,bright zinc-plated2 Washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8, bright zinc-plated2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x16, St,bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 Zn M5, bright zinc-platedm = 110 g

1 set 0.0.265.47

Security Limit Switch for electrical monitoring of sliding,swing and lifting doors. Contact established with latchpressed in.

6.3 DoorSecurity

Sliding, swing and lifting doors which are integrated inbasic frames or are used as guards and enclosuresaround machinery (cell guarding) can be monitored andsafeguarded to prevent injury or unauthorised access.

6. Special Elements 6.3 Door Security

The Fastening Set is suitable for securing the SecurityLimit Switch to Profiles 8. It is suitable for constructingboth swing and sliding doors.

269

Security Lock 24 V DC / 230 V ACwith Fastening Set 8Security Limit Switch and mechanical lock:Casing, PA-GF, blackActuator, PA-GF/St, corrosion-resistantRated control supply voltage: 24 V DC or 230 V ACProtection: IP 67, EN 60529Test certification to BG-GS-ET-15 complete withFastening Setm = 1.10 kg

24 V DC, 1 set 0.0.411.75

230 V AC, 1 set 0.0.411.76

Fastening Set 8 for Security LockFastening plate 8, St, blackAngle bracket 8, Al, black2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x14, St,bright zinc-plated2 Washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8, bright zinc-plated3 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M5x16, St,bright zinc-plated3 Washers DIN 125-5.3, St, bright zinc-plated3 Hexagon Nuts DIN 934-M5, St, bright zinc-plated2 dome-head screws M6x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M6, bright zinc-plated4 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x10, St,bright zinc-plated4 Adapter washers DIN 988-5x10x0.3 , Stm = 540 g

1 set 0.0.416.15

Security Lock Security Lock for electrical and mechanical securingof swing, sliding and lifting doors. The Security LimitSwitch has 3 possible line entries and is equipped with3 positive break NO contacts and 3 positive breakNC contacts.The lock ensures that the doors cannot be opened in theevent of a power failure or impermissible operatingstates (zero-current principle), thereby preventing injuryto personnel and damage to equipment.

The Fastening Set is suitable for mounting the SecurityLock on Profiles 8. It can be mounted to swing andsliding doors.

270

The Slide Strips serve as slide elements whentransporting goods or workpiece carriers, for example.They can be fitted into the profile grooves, are hard-wearing and have a low coefficient of sliding friction.

Slide Strip 8 antistatic prevents electrostatic buildup oftransported goods due to friction.

Slide Strips

They can also be used as rebate strips and guide rails orcan be employed as a support base, e.g. in shelves toprotect sensitive products.

6. Special Elements 6.4 Conveyors and Material Flow

6.4 Conveyors andMaterial Flow

Conveying operations can be incorporated into theprofile structure with the aid of specialised accessories.> Slide Strips made of PE-UHMW, Slide Strip Wedgeused as a lead-in piece for the Slide Strip> Roller elements with and without side guide> Conveyor Rollers made of plastic or anodizedaluminium> Driven Conveyor Rollers which, in conjunction withthe chain drive (Section 8.2.2 Chain Drives), create aconveyor unit> Chain transfer for continuous transport of goods orworkpiece carriers.

Work place with intermediate store for supplying components

271

Slide Strip 8 can be held in position by Fixing Pin 8 andcan be combined with Slide Strip Wedge 8 (thisfunctions as an end and lead-in piece).

Slide Strip 5PE-UHMW, blackm = 57 g/m

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.437.27

Slide Strip 6PE-UHMW, blackm = 90 g/m

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.441.08

Slide Strip 8PE-UHMW, blackm =140 g/m1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.418.39

Slide Strip 8 antistaticPE-UHMW, blackm = 150 g/m1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.457.99

Fixing Pin 8POM, blackm = 0.4 g1 pce. 0.0.418.42

Slide Strip Wedge 8PA, blackT-Slot Nut 8 St/PA M5Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M5x14, St, blackm = 11 g

1 set 0.0.422.04

272


For constructing roller conveyors with and without sideguide, in any width and length, with a variable numberof Roller Elements.Can be fastened to Profiles 8 using T-Slot Nuts 8 PA andButton-Head Screws T4x25.

Roller Elements

Roller Element 8 80Lid element, PA-GF, blackBase element, PA-GF, black3 rollers, POM, blackm = 45 g

1 pce. 0.0.436.58

Roller Element 8 80 with side guideLid element with side guide, PA-GF, blackBase element, PA-GF, black3 rollers, POM, blackm = 50 g1 pce. 0.0.436.59

F = 50 N (per element)

273

Bearing Set 8 502 bearing flanges, PA-GF, blackBall-bearing support, sealedBolt, St, black2 centring clips, PA-GF, blackm = 250 g

1 set 0.0.422.63

Multi-functional Conveyor Roller for transport tasksof all kinds.The ball-bearing Conveyor Rollers with aluminium orplastic Tube D50 can be removed from or retrofitted intoexisting structures by means of spring-loaded threadedaxle pins.The axial position of the roller is maintained by twocentring clips.

The circumferential groove in the bearing flanges alsoprepare the Conveyor Rollers to be driven by a roundbelt ø 4 mm.

F Xmin. Xmax.

Tube D50 Al 1000 N 160 mm 800 mm

Tube D50 KU 400 N 160 mm 500 mm

ConveyorRollers

274


Chain-Driven ConveyorRollers

A conveyor with chain-driven rollers is ideal for a wholerange of automated conveyor and transport operations. Itis constructed using a chain drive (8.2.2 Chain Drives).The special Conveyor Rollers are driven on one side bya completely covered chain in the frame profile grooves.The driven roller conveyor can be any length, as can thedistance between the individual rollers.A roller can be up to 800 mm wide. Conveyor Rollers areproduced from Tubes D50 Al or D50 KU and the relevantBearing Set.A Bearing Set consists of two complete bearing flanges,one of which is equipped with a sprocket wheel whichengages with the chain drive. Roller Bearing Sets areavailable in driven and non-driven versions. Non-drivenversions can be used, for example, to incorporateaccumulating rollers into a driven roller conveyor.

The Bearing Blocks are bolted onto the frame profile.The assembled Conveyor Rollers are then simplypushed down onto the Bearing Blocks where they aresecurely retained by a spring finger.The Bearing Block Set consists of a fixed bearing and afloating bearing. The fixed bearing must be positionedon the drive side of the Conveyor Roller.When fitting the Bearing Blocks onto the frame profile,this is best done using a screw connection with grooveprofile 8 Al M8-40 (Order No. 0.0427.72) since thisprovides an easy means of ensuring consistentaxis spacing.After installation, the Bearing Blocks are closed bymeans of the Housing Profile, which is run over theentire length of the roller conveyor. The Housing Profilewith Side Guide guides the goods on the conveyor.A Slide Strip 5 or other guide elements can be fitted intothe integrated groove 5 in the Side Guide.

InnovationGerman patentpending

275

Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven), Driven Bearing SetPA, blackRoller bearing, preassembled1 bearing flange, driven, with sprocket wheel1 bearing flange, not drivenm = 285 g1 set 0.0.463.53

Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven), Bearing SetPA, blackRoller bearing, preassembled2 bearing flanges, not drivenm = 265 g1 set 0.0.463.49

Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven), Bearing Block Set2 Bearing Blocks, PA, black1 fixed bearing cover, PA, black1 floating bearing cover, PA, black2 Button-Head Screws M8x25, St, black2 washers DIN 433-8,4, St, blackm = 152 g

1 set 0.0.463.54

Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven), Housing ProfileAl, anodizedA =2.17 cm2

m =0.58 kg/m


Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven), Housing Profilewith Side GuideAl, anodizedA =3.36 cm2

m =0.90 kg/m


Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven), Housing End Cap SetPA-GF, black2 Caps 5 20x101 TRA 50 housing cap, left1 TRA 50 housing cap, right4 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7981 St 4.2x9.5, St, bright zinc-platedm = 22 g1 set 0.0.463.48

F Xmin. Xmax.

Tube D50 Al 1000 N 150 mm 800 mm

Tube D50 KU 400 N 150 mm 500 mm

The housing of the Chain Reverse Unit is prepared forsecuring a Bearing Block. This Conveyor Roller is notdriven via the chain. If required, the last Conveyor Rollercan also be driven from the last driven roller by meansof a ø 4 mm round belt.

276

Groove Profile 8 Al M8-40 is used to secureConveyor Rollers at a constant distance (modulardimension 40 mm).

Tube D50 AlAl, anodizedl = 8.16 cm4 W = 3.26 cm3

m = 0.76 kg/m


Tube D50 KUPVC, blackTemperature range 0 - 60°Cl = 10.9 cm4 W = 4.36 cm3

m = 0.62 kg/mCut-off max. 3000 mm 0.0.427.63


Tubes D50

Groove Profile 8 Al M8-40Al, anodizedThreaded bore M8 in modular dimension 40 mmm = 500 g


Groove Profile

Groove Profile 8 Al M8-40 is used to secure elements ata constant distance (modular dimension 40 mm) for e.g.Conveyor Rollers etc.

277

Chain Transfer The Chain Transfer is a particularly cost-effectiveconveyor which uses a chain drive and is easy to install(see Section 8.2.2 Chain Drives).The goods or a specially adapted workpiece carrier areplaced directly onto the chains and transported.The weight of the goods provides the necessaryfrictional force. This solution also allows effortlesstransfer of accumulated products.A Chain Transfer Unit consists of at least two chaindrives on parallel frame profiles. The chains are guidedout of the profile groove and over special ChainTransfer Slide Strips.The Chain Transfer Slide Strip is also available witha Side Guide in order to guide the transportedgoods securely.

Start of chain transfer: the chain is guided over the EndRamp onto the Slide Strip.

The maximum permissible load on a Chain Transfer Unitis calculated from the number of supporting links.For each chain link, Fmax. = 6 N.Note the chain‘s operating load!

Chain Transfer End Ramp 8PA, blackButton-Head Screw T4x18, St, blackT-Slot Nut 8 PA, blackm = 38 g1 set 0.0.472.01

Chain Transfer Slide Strip 8PE-UHMW, blackantistaticm = 0.51 kg/m

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.463.95

Chain Transfer Slide Strip 8 with Side GuidePE-UHMW, blackantistaticm = 0.60 kg/m1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.463.98

Calculation of the chain length:The chain length is calculated in the same way as thelength of a chain drive (see Section 8.2.2. Chain Drives).However, the chain length in the Reverse Unit (U‘) varies:Lchain = 2 x L + 490.8 mm

It is advisable to secure the Slide Strips if underhigh load:Screw-connection using Button-Head Screw T4x18 andT-Slot Nut 8 PA (a counter bore must be drilled and thelocation ribs removed locally for the screw).Pinning with ø 4.8 mm bore and insertion of a fixing pin.

278


6.5 Work Bench Design The item MB System is a modular system for a wholerange of fixtures and equipment and opens up numerouspossibilities for customised work bench design. Thecompatibility and suitability of all products is guaran-teed by full integration of the “Work Bench” solution intothe MB Building Kit System.In addition to the use of standard elements forconstructing simple work benches, various specialproducts are also available to ensure increasedfunctionality and ergonomic design:> Moisture-resistant, laminated Beech Multi-Ply panelsfor use in workshops and offices, forming a robust,impact-resistant and vibration-absorbing workingsurface> Wells for the provision or storage of tools, pens, etc.> Table Adapter Sets for making use of spare space onthe table top reduce the machining costs for the tabletop in the vicinity of through table columns> Special profiles for providing installation conduits onwork benches in order to accommodate cables,switches, sockets and compressed-air lines. Labels,working instructions or other documents can be insertedinto the groove on the visible side> Conduit Caps for covering the installation conduits> Stackable Parts Containers with variable attachmentmethods for customising the work area; rapidchangeover of parts by swapping the complete PartsContainer; dust protection in the form of matching lids;can be stacked for transport and use; slot-in labellingcards to identify the contents of Parts Containers;antistatic versions for sensitive components

The TRIGO 272 Work Bench System is available onrequest. It can be equipped with special elements toform a fully integrated work bench offering excellentergonomic features, cost-effectiveness and productivity.

279

Runner Hanger which can be moved along the profile grooveand is used for suspending tools etc. End Stop 8 limitsthe stroke of the runner in the groove.

Runner 8PA-GF, blackFmax. = 50 Nm = 8 g

1 pce. 0.0.026.13

End Stop 8 for Runner 8T-Slot Nut 8 St M6, bright zinc-platedGrub screw DIN 916-M6x10, St, bright zinc-platedm = 12 g1 set 0.0.026.49

Parts Containers Stackable Parts Container for holding small parts withineasy reach at work benches.The Parts Container Covers can be used to seal theParts Containers against dust and enable the Parts Con-tainers to be stacked offset one above the other.

280

Parts Container 80x40Window, PC, transparent / blacka = 80 mm b = 40 mm m = 152 gPA-GF, black1 pce. 0.0.432.73




Parts Containers

Parts Container � = 15° � = 30° � = 45°Width x [mm] y [mm] z [mm]

80 130 174 208

120 164 198 222

160 202 233 250


Parts Containers can be hooked onto the Parts ContainerFasteners (in 15° increments) which themselves locatevia anti-torsion lugs onto profiles or other components(drill ø 7 mm for M6). This allows each user topersonalise his work space and means that parts that areneeded can be put in place quickly.

The window can be used for content labelling cards.It can also be used rotated around 180° (with the blackface to the front).

281



Parts Container Cover 80a = 80 mm m = 51 g

PA-GF, black1 pce. 0.0.429.16








Labelling Cards for Parts ContainersCard, 200 gsm, white

100 pce. 0.0.432.48

Parts Container Fastener 40Parts Container Fastener 40, Al, black anodized1 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M6x16, St, bright zinc-plated1 T-Slot Nut 8 St M6, bright zinc-plated1 anti-torsion pin, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedm = 42 g1 set 0.0.432.07

Parts Container Fastener 80Parts Container Fastener 80, Al, black anodized2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M6, bright zinc-plated2 anti-torsion pins, GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedm = 90 g1 set 0.0.432.54

282


Any kind of containers with wall thicknesses of up to5 mm can be mounted between two profiles.

ContainerMounting

Parts Container 8 110x105PA-GF, black1 Button-Head Screw ISO-M5x12, St, bright zinc-plated1 T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M5a = 110 mmm = 100 g1 set 0.0.026.20

Parts Container 8 210x105PA-GF, black2 Button-Head Screws ISO-M5x12, St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 Zn M5a = 210 mmm = 170 g1 set 0.0.026.21

Suitable for holding small parts within easy reachat work benches. The attachment on the rear allows theParts Container to be secured in the grooves ofProfiles 8.The screw fastening prevents the Parts Containerinadvertently becoming detached.

Parts Containers

283

Container Mounting 8PA-GF, blackm = 3 g

1 pce. 0.0.026.87

PUR with Velcro fastening, black2 fastening pads, self-adhesive, ABS, black

Arm Restm = 130 g1 set 0.0.457.98

Arm Rest antistaticm = 130 g1 set 0.0.465.10

Arm Rests For ergonomic design of work stations. The Arm Restantistatic is ideal for work benches in the field ofelectrical engineering. The antistatic surface prevents thebuild-up of electrostatic charges.

The Arm Rest is secured by means of Velcro fasteners tofastening pads bonded onto the table top or screw-connected to a Profile 8 using T-Slot Nuts 8 PA and But-ton-Head Screws T4x12.

284

Lifting Column 8 200x170 The Lifting Column 8 200x170 is designed forconstructing variable height work benches, and is alsosuitable for many different applications where heightadjustment is required in the factory or office.High capacity Roller Guides in conjunction with rackand pinion drives permit rigid constructions whichemploy only a central telescopic column and have thecapacity to withstand considerable bending momentsfrom any direction.All parts of the drive including the power supplyare integrated into the column and protected againstdust ingress.

The “electronic” and “synchro/memory” versions arecontrolled by means of a Hand Held Control which canbe stored in a special drawer for easy access. In additionto the motor-driven columns, a manual version is alsoavailable (with handle).The “electronic” and “synchro/memory” versions featurea soft-start / soft-stop function.The “synchro/memory” version has an integrated elec-tronic control for parallel operation of several LiftingColumns and a memory function. Up to 9 positions canbe stored and retrieved by the user. The Hand HeldControl of this type includes an LED display whichshows the current height of the column.

Profile groove 8 on all side faces of the basic profilemeans that the Lifting Column can be integrated into anyattachments constructed from elements of the item MBBuilding Kit System.


285

Lifting Column Base h Stroke s Bendingmoment

Fxl

1000N 515 mm 200 mm 220 Nmmanual

1000N 585 mm 490 mm 220 Nmelectronic


1000N 585 mm 490 mm 220 Nmsynchro/memory

Voltage: 230 V AC 50/60 Hz(120 V AC version on request)Operating temperature range: -20°C to 60°CMaximum lifting force: 1000N / 2000NLifting speed: 50 mm/s / 30 mm/sContinuous duty: 15% at rated loadProtection: IP 30Conformity: CE

Lifting Column 8 200x170, 1000N, manualColumn, Al, natural anodizedCap, PA, blackCranked Handle, Stm = 14 kg1 pce. 0.0.471.01

Lifting Column 8 200x170, 1000N, electronicColumn, Al, natural anodizedCap, PA, blackHand Held Control, ABS, blackPower cord 2mm = 21 kg1 pce. 0.0.471.07

Lifting Column 8 200x170, 2000N, electronicColumn, Al, natural anodizedCap, PA, blackHand Held Control, ABS, blackPower cord 2mm = 21 kg1 pce. 0.0.471.05

Lifting Column 8 200x170, 1000N, synchro/memoryColumn, Al, natural anodizedCap, PA, blackPower cord 2m; Connecting cable 6mm = 21 kg1 pce. 0.0.471.04

Hand Held Control synchro/memoryABS, blackm = 150 g1 pce. 0.0.471.06

Drawer for Hand Held ControlABS, blackm = 100 g1 pce. 0.0.471.11

286

Support Profile 160 ATAl, anodizedA = 6.14 cm2

m = 1.66 kg/m


Conduit Cap 160 ATPA-GF, blackm = 52 g1 pce. 0.0.409.22


Support Profile160 AT

Support Profile for completing an installation conduitbased on Profiles 8 80x80-45° (8 80x80) with ConduitProfile 8 W80-T40 (Section 7.1 Conduits).The Support Profile can be machined appropriately forholding switches and sockets. A groove is provided onthe visible side for securing labels, working instructionsetc. in A5 format.

Support Profile 160 AT can still be used even if ConduitProfiles 8 W80-T40 cannot run through because thereare horizontal rails preventing it. Conduit Cap 160 ATis then screw-connected to the tool rail profile.The cap must be counter bored and countersunk forthis purpose.Markings are provided on the inside to indicate theprecise location of the bore. The Support Profile issecured by means of Countersunk Screw DIN7991-M5x16 and T-Slot Nut 8 St/PA M5.

287

Foot Cap Cover, rounded on the end face, for the cut edges ofProfile 8 80x80-45°. Deburring is no longer required.A hole is provided for the outer core bore in order toaccommodate knuckle feet etc.

Foot Cap 8 80x80-45°PA-GF, blackm = 15 g

1 pce. 0.0.409.37

Beech Multi-Ply Beech Multi-Ply panels of thickness 30 mm (adhesiveinsensitive to moisture) for robust, impact-resistant andvibration-damping work surfaces in workshops and offices.The panels have been prepared for use in constructingstandard tables with Profiles 8 80x80-45° andaccessories.Customised panel dimensions for various tableshapes can be found in Section 5.3 Panels for WorkBench Design.

288

Table AdapterSet

The gaps resulting from diagonal saw cuts of the tabletop are easily filled with Table Adapter Set 40.Work benches, material trolleys and shelving oftenrequire through columns through the table top(for tool rails etc.) or shelves.Two Table Adapter Sets are needed for eachthrough column.


Coating (both sides): Phenolic resin film, transparent,scratch-resistant, oil-resisting, water-repellentEdge machining: rounded, sealedAdhesive: AW to DIN 68705 T2Wood tone: reddishm = 22.1 kg/m2

Beech Multi-Ply 30-800x400-45°1 pce. 0.0.409.33

Beech Multi-Ply 30-1000x400-45°1 pce. 0.0.409.41

Beech Multi-Ply 30-1600x8001 pce. 0.0.409.20

Beech Multi-Ply 30-2000x10001 pce. 0.0.424.08

Beech Multi-Ply

289

Wells Well for holding tools, pencils, pens etc. on table tops.

Well 80Mineral casting (quartz sand with polyester resin), blackm = 3.2 kg

1 pce. 0.0.409.31

Well 160Mineral casting (quartz sand with polyester resin), blackm = 2.4 kg

1 pce. 0.0.409.27

Table Adapter Set 401 Table adapter 40, PA-GF, black1 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M5x25, St, bright zinc-plated1 washer DIN 433-5.3, St1 T-Slot Nut 8 Zn M5m = 26.5 g1 set 0.0.438.03

The Well fills out neatly the gap on the table topresulting from the diagonal saw cut.The table column can take the form of a Profile 8 80x80-45°or a combination with Support Profile 160 AT.

The Wells are secured in position by using Multiblock 8PA and Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x30 in theouter stepped bores of the Well.

290

6. Special Elements 6.6 Lighting

6.6 Lighting For illuminating work areas and areas used by traffic.Light Fitting 11W is based on the installation elements.It can therefore be customised at will and is fullycompatible.Light Fitting 55W is a workplace light with integratedswivel device and parabolic reflector grid to ensureoptimum illumination.

Both Light Fittings are equipped with electronic Lamp-Control Units to ensure flicker-free operation and can berowed together to produce light strips.

Light distribution by the Light Fitting (front view)Distance Beam E(mm) width (mm) (Lux)

500 750 3500

900 950 1250

1300 1150 700

1700 1350 500

Light Fitting 55W Sturdy Light Fitting for flicker-free illumination ofworkplaces and machines. The integrated swivel profilewith Line 8 system groove supports 7 setting angles.The Light Fitting can be powered from a 230 V ACsource (120 V AC on request) and is VDE-ENEC safety-approved. When fitted with the impact-resistantPolycarbonate Protective Panel and sealing cap, theLight Fitting complies with IP 40-EN 60529.All electrical connecting elements are approved for arated voltage of 250 V AC with a rated current of 16 A.

To allow the Light Fitting to be adjusted to individualapplications, it can be locked in various positions overa swivel range of ±22.5° from 0°.

Light distribution by the Light Fitting (lateral view)Distance Beam E(mm) width (mm) (Lux)

500 1000 3500

900 1800 1250

1300 2600 700

1700 3400 500

291

The Connecting Cable is used to connect the powersupply to an earthed plug.The socket can be used to power the Light Fitting fromany line network which is in place. The wires are heldsecurely in the socket by means of a spring-forceconnection.If several Light Fittings are connected end-to-end, thepower is fed from one Light Fitting to another by meansof the Adapter. The dowel which is inserted into amounting hole in the cap provides a mechanical linkbetween the Light Fittings.If several Light Fittings positioned separately areconnected in series and share a common power supply,the Light Fittings are interconnected using the ExtensionCable which is available prefitted with appropriateconnectors in a standard length of 2 m, or alternatively acustomised version may be made using a plug and socket.

The Light Fitting can be sealed against dust by means ofthe Protective Panel. This panel also protects the LightFitting against soiling and damage. The open socketmust be sealed with a cap.

Light Fitting 55WOn/off switch55W compact fluorescent lampElectronic Lamp-Control Unit60° parabolic reflector gridSocket lockm = 3.7 kg1 pce., 230 V 0.0.417.34

1 pce., 120 V 0.0.417.58

Compact Lamp 55WTwin tubeTube diameter: 17 mmPower: 55 WattLight colour: natural white, 4800 lmm = 150 g

1 pce. 0.0.417.57

Connecting Cable, Socket / Earthed Plug *blackCable length 3 m (1.5 mm2),m = 370 g1 pce. 0.0.417.42

Socket, Spring-Force ConnectedPA, blackm = 25 g1 pce. 0.0.417.44

Adapter, Socket / PlugPA, blackincl. dowelm = 13 g1 set 0.0.417.45

* plug suitable for your local market to be fitted by your distributor

292


Light Fitting 11W Industrial duty light fitting of variable length and power.Each segment (360 mm long) of the Light Fitting isequipped with an electronic Lamp-Control Unit for lowvoltage (24 V DC) and a Compact Lamp (power 11 W,corresponds to a conventional 75 W filament lamp).

Extension Cable, Socket / PlugblackCable length 2 m (1.5 mm2),m = 234 g1 pce. 0.0.417.52

Socket, Spring-Force ConnectedPA, blackm = 25 g1 pce. 0.0.417.59

Polycarbonate Protective PanelPC, transparentincl. socket sealing capm = 195 g1 set 0.0.417.43

Light Fitting55W

The rear of the housing is ready for fastening withButton-Head Screws M5x14.Fully compatible with conduit profiles.

293

Light Fitting 11W, consisting of:Aluminium housingTransparent cover, PMMACaps, PA-GF, blackLamp-Control Unit, Compact Lamp,reflectors, installation material,fastening screws M5x14Rated voltage: 24 V DCProtection: IP 50, EN 60529

Light Fitting 11W 80x40x360m = 0.75 kg P = 11 W1 pce. 0.0.417.06










Fastening of Light Fitting 11W to any mounting surfaceor Profile 8 grooves.

294


Light Fitting Set For mounting a customised industrial Light Fitting fora 24 V DC connection.Particularly suitable for use in combination withconduit elements.

Light Fitting Set 11W1 Lamp-Control Unit 11, 24 V DC1 cover for Lamp-Control Unit Al1 Compact Lamp 11, 11 W at 24 V DC1 reflector 11 Al, metallized2 fastening clips PA-GF, blackm = 200 g1 set 0.0.417.32

Lamp-ControlUnit

Lamp-Control Unit for flicker-free operation of CompactLamps 5 - 11 W. Particularly suitable for use in LightFitting 11. Connection is via terminals.

Lamp-Control Unit 11WProtection class IIWith open-circuit and reverse polarity protection,short-circuit-proofVoltage: 24 V DC (21.0 - 29.0 Volt)Ambient temperature: –15°C to +60°CPower loss: 1.5 WInput current: 100 mAOperating frequency: 30 kHzm = 84 g1 pce. 0.0.417.16

295

Compact Lamp Lamp for Light Fitting 11W or Lamp-Control Unit 11W.The light output corresponds to a conventional 75 Wfilament lamp.

Compact Lamp 11WTwin tubeTube diameter: 12 mmPower output: 11 Wm = 70 g

1 pce. 0.0.417.17

Many products designed for one purpose are frequentlycapable of satisfying different, independent functions:> Impact Buffers and Parabolic Buffers, in a range ofsizes, are capable of absorbing impacts with differentultimate loads which are applied to linear axes, slidingdoors, swing doors and lifting doors or any othermoving components; certain sizes can also be used assimple, vibration-damping equipment feet.

6.7 GeneralAccessories

> Buffer strip for elastic sealing of gaps and as adoor rabbet.> Telescope profile for straightforward creationof adjustable fixtures, work benches and conveyorequipment.> Adapter plate system for mounting any chosenfunctional elements on profile constructions.

Impact BuffersParabolicBuffers

For absorbing impacts. Resistant to oil, water, sea waterand road salt solutions. Partially resistant to soapsolutions, vegetable fats and animal fats.

6. Special Elements 6.7 General Accessories

296

Impact BufferParabolic Buffer

max. F s

Impact Buffer M4 90 N 1.4 mm



Parabolic buffer with approximately exponentialforce profile.

NBR, blackHardness 55 Sh ASteel insert, St

Impact Buffer M4 D15x15a = M4 b = ø 15 mmc = 15 mm m = 5 g1 pce. 0.0.416.33



Parabolic Buffer M8 D30x36a = M8 b = ø 30 mmc = 36 mm m = 26 g1 pce. 0.0.416.39




max. F s




297

Flexible plastic strip with fastening geometry for Profiles8 and Clamp Profile 8 32x18.The strip can be used as a stop for swing, sliding andlifting doors, as a sealing profile or for similarapplications.

In enclosure and guard applications using Hanger 8 /Door Rabbet 8 (gap width 25/28 mm), Buffer Strip 820x18 can be used to reduce the gap width.

Buffer Strip 8 20x18TPE, blackHardness 73 Sh AOil, UV and water resistingm = 240 g/m

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.458.01

TelescopeProfile

Suitable for constructing profiles of variable length foradjusting the height or inclination of fixtures andequipment. For this purpose, Telescope Profile 8 40x40is combined with a Profile 6 30x30 and the ConnectionSet or Securing Set.

Buffer Strip

298


Telescope Profile 8 40x40Al, bright zinc-platedA =5.92 cm2 Ix = 10.52 cm4 Iy = 11.46 cm4

It =16.28 cm4

m =1.59 kg/m Wx = 5.26 cm3 Wy = 5.73 cm3


Telescope Securing Set 8 40x40T-Slot Nut 6 St M6, bright zinc-platedWasher DIN 9021-6,4, St, bright zinc-platedClamp lever, blackm = 86 g1 set 0.0.444.71

Telescope Connection Set 8 40x40Telescope cap 8 40x40, PA, blackTelescope sliding cap 8 40x40, PA, blackTelescope connecting plate 8 40x40, GD-Zn, white aluminium1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x16, St,bright zinc-plated2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M4x12, St, black1 square nut DIN 562-M8, St, bright zinc-plated2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M4x20, St, bright zinc-platedm = 138 g

1 set 0.0.440.54

Note: Profile 6 30x30 must be 14 mm shorter thanTelescope Profile 8 40x40 in order that it can be insertedcompletely in the assembled telescope.Max. load in telescope direction: 500 N.

TelescopeProfile

299

Adapter PlateProfiles

Adapter Plate Profile 80x16 N5Al, anodizedA = 12.36 cm2

m = 3.34 kg/m



m = 5.07 kg/m



m = 6.79 kg/m


For producing adapter plates and mounting plates ofany length.

Adapter PlateSystem

Mounting plates for universal attachment of machineelements and components to profile constructions.The Adapter Plates are matched to the connectiongeometry of the machine elements by machining.The plates can be secured by bolts and T-Slot Nuts orby laterally located clamping elements which allow sub-sequent adjustment.To ensure that the position of the Adapter Plate can beretained if it is assembled / dismantled frequently,a Locating and Clamping Set can be used whichfunctions in a similar way to a key to allow movementonly along the groove, while the rotational positionremains fixed. Highly stressed units can also be pinnedin position.All components are available as semi-finished productsfor individualised machining and with preliminarymachining for connection to the profile system.

300


Adapter Plate 8 80x16x40 1eAl, anodizedm = 128 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.440.80

Adapter Plate 8 80x16x40 2zAl, anodizedm = 125 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.440.81


1 pce., natural 0.0.440.82


1 pce., natural 0.0.440.83


1 pce., natural 0.0.440.84


1 pce., natural 0.0.440.85


1 pce., natural 0.0.440.86

Adapter PlateProfiles

Adapter Plates 8 are already provided with mounting boresand fixing bores for connection to the profile system.The Adapter Plates are secured to Profiles 8 by means ofHexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M8 orHexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6 and theappropriate sleeve.The number of locating sleeves should be chosen so asto permit the free movement of the Adapter Plate alongthe groove.

301


1 pce., natural 0.0.440.87


1 pce., natural 0.0.440.88


1 pce., natural 0.0.440.89


1 pce., natural 0.0.440.90


1 pce., natural 0.0.440.91


1 pce., natural 0.0.440.92

302


Adapter PlateClamps

The Adapter Plate Clamps can be used for fasteningAdapter Plates or sections of the Adapter Plate Profilewithout any need for machining. By making theattachment in the lateral groove of the Adapter Plate andthe groove of the profile construction, the plate can bemoved and aligned freely relative to the profileconstruction. This ensures that the attached machineelements can be adapted and adjusted with ease.The Adapter Plate Clamps should always be usedin pairs.

HexagonSocket HeadCap Screw MDIN 912

M5 4.5 NmM6 10 NmM8 25 Nm

Adapter Plate Locating and Clamping Set 82 T-Slot Nuts 8 St M6, St, bright zinc-plated2 sleeves, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers, St, bright zinc-plated2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6x20, St,bright zinc-platedm = 20 g1 set 0.0.440.93

Adapter PlateLocating andClamping set

By using two Adapter Plate Locating and Clamping Setsin selected bores of the Adapter Plates, it is possible toprevent the Adapter Plate twisting relative to the profileconstruction. The Adapter Plate can still be moved alongthe profile groove, however.

303

Adapter Plate Clamp 5 N5Al, anodizedm = 15 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.444.03


1 pce., natural 0.0.444.04


1 pce., natural 0.0.444.05

Adapter Plate Clamping Profile N5Al, anodizedA = 303 cm2

m = 0.82 kg/m1 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 0.0.444.09

Adapter PlateClampingProfile N5

The Adapter Plate Clamping Profile is used to constructclamps of any length for Adapter Plates 8 or anysections of the Adapter Plate Profiles.

305

The Installation Elements product group consists ofsimple conduits, the highly variable modular conduitsystems, profiles with integrated conduits, ElectronicBoxes and fasteners for cables and switches.A significant portion of the work related to the planningand construction of fixtures involves the supply of powerand compressed air to actuators, the connection ofsensors and many other operations for which cables,hoses and pipes need to be laid.The systematic integration of these solutions into theMB Building Kit System not only results in a clear,uncluttered and attractive design, it also offers greateroperating safety by virtue of the clearly laid outinstallation and the elimination of shear and abrasionpoints.

7.1.1 Conduits E Simple aluminium conduits for installation of cablesand hoses. The conduits are made from U-sectionConduit Profiles and a matching Lid Profile.They are available in the modular dimensions ofProfiles 6 and 8.

7. Installation Elements 7.1 Conduits 7.1.1 Conduits E

The clear Lid Profiles can be used as covers for theU-shaped Conduit Profiles and for the modular conduitsystem. The transparent design allows the user to seeinside the conduit.

7. InstallationElements

7.1 Conduits Conduits in the modular dimensions of the profile Linesfor integrating all supply lines in machines and systems.Their stable construction from extruded aluminiummeans that the conduits are self-supporting even overlong runs.

Installation conduits can be constructed from ConduitProfiles E with fixed modular dimensions or from Sup-port Profiles and Wall Profiles from the modular conduitsystem which makes customised construction possible.

Pneumatic control with separate installation of cables and hoses

306

Conduit Profiles

Conduit Profile U 30x15 EAl, anodizedA = 0.72 cm2

m = 0.19 kg/m



m = 0.30 kg/m



m = 0.27 kg/m



m = 0.45 kg/m


Conduit Profile U 60x30 D30 EAl, anodizedA = 2.78 cm2

m = 0.75 kg/m


Conduit Profiles E and the corresponding Lid Profilescan be used to construct installation conduits of sizes30x15 to 80x80.Self-Tapping Screws can also be used to secure theLid Profile. An electrically conductive connection isestablished at the same time.


For Lid Profiles D30 and D60, a Self-Tapping Screw St3.5x9.5 and a bore ø 3 mm is required in the markingguideline on the Lid Profile. Self-Tapping Screw St4.2x9.5 and a bore ø 3.5 mm is required for Lid ProfilesD40 and D80. The Self-Tapping Screws required can befound in the section Fastening Elements.

307


m = 0.41 kg/m



m = 0.91 kg/m



m = 1.25 kg/m



m = 0.82 kg/m



m = 1.52 kg/m


308


Lid Profile D30 EAl, anodizedA = 0.85 cm2

m = 0.23 kg/mCut-off max. 3000 mm, natural 7.0.002.85



Lid Profile D40 transparentPMMA zk 20A = 1.42 cm2

m = 0.15 kg/mCut-off max. 3000 mm, clear glass 0.0.404.80

Lid Profile D60 EAl, anodizedA =1.50 cm2

m =0.41 kg/mCut-off max. 3000 mm, natural 7.0.002.87



Lid Profile D80 transparentPMMA zk 20A = 2.66 cm2

m = 0.27 kg/mCut-off max. 3000 mm, clear glass 0.0.404.73

Lid Profiles The Lid Profiles can be used as covers for U-shapedConduit Profiles and the modular conduit system. TheConduit Cap must be fastened with screws into thealuminium conduit elements.Lid Profiles transparent allow the user to see inside theconduit. Used in conjunction with Wall Profiles andSupport Profiles (see Modular Conduit System) they aresuitable for constructing light-fitting housings of anylength.

Self-Tapping Screws can also be used to secure theLid Profile. An electrically conductive connection isestablished at the same time.For Lid Profiles D30 and D60, a Self-Tapping Screw St3.5x9.5 and a bore ø 3 mm is required in the markingguideline of the Lid Profile. Self-Tapping Screw St 4.2x9.5and a bore ø 3.5 mm is required for Lid Profiles D40and D80.

309

Manual control box constructed from conduit elements

7.1.2 Modular Conduit System The modular conduit system can be used to constructvarious sizes of conduit to accommodate cables andhoses. The combination of Wall Profiles, Support Profilesand Lid Profiles facilitates the construction of complex,branched conduit structures without time-consumingprocessing of the walls at the branch points. The conduitelements are simply locked into each other. Existingconduit structures can also be modified subsequentlywith ease. Even with branched systems, the cables andhoses can be installed or replaced at a later stagewithout the need for drilling etc.The possibilities of the modular conduit system comprise:> Wall Profiles, Support Profiles, with and withoutgrooves, in modular dimensions, for the construction ofany type of self-supporting conduits from 40x20 mm upto 160x160 mm> Variable positioning of the Support Profiles and WallProfiles for different conduit configurations; the conduitcan be opened from any side> Partitioning of individual sectors by incorporatingsupplementary wall elements within the conduit> Support Profiles with angular geometry and non-standard dimensions (19“, 3 HU, 6 HU) for constructingspecial installation conduits> High rigidity, inherent stability, load-bearing andscratchproof surface and low weight by virtue of theanodized profiles> Total compatibility thanks to integration into the MBBuilding Kit System

Separate installation of cables and hoses

Installation on a transfer system, using conduit elements

7. Installation Elements 7.1 Conduits 7.1.2 Modular Conduit System

310


Straightforward construction of the modular conduitsby moving the Wall Profiles into the Support Profiles.The Support Profiles can also be used as a lid. Beforeinstallation, it is advisable to clean the locking areas ofthe conduit elements with a cloth soaked in oil.The cable conduit can be opened with a screwdriver.

Various conduits for running cables and hoses, rangingfrom sizes 40x40 mm through all intermediate sizes to160x160 mm, can be constructed quickly and flexibly.

The fact that the Support Profiles and Wall Profiles haveidentical external dimensions means that differentconduits can be constructed by choosing the position ofthe profiles accordingly. The conduit can be opened andclosed from different sides.

By subdividing Wall Profiles and Support Profiles intosegments and machining accordingly (for e.g. cableglands, plug sockets, pushbuttons, etc.), it is possible toreduce the load involved in assembling, dismantling andrepairing installations.

The conduit and Conduit Caps can be screw-connectedby means of Self-Tapping Screw St 4.2x16 if required.A bore of ø 3.5 mm must be provided in the markinggroove of the Support Profiles.

Wall and Support profiles


311

Wall Profile 40Al, anodizedA = 0.76 cm2



m = 0.55 kg/m



m = 0.82 kg/m



m = 1.09 kg/m


Support Profiles with or without Line 8 grooves form thebase and lid of the modular conduit system.

Wall Profiles

312


Support Profile 40Al, anodizedA = 1.74 cm2

m = 0.47 kg/m


Support Profile 40 with groove 8Al, anodizedA = 2.06 cm2

m = 0.55 kg/m




Support Profile 80 with grooves 8Al, anodizedA = 4.17 cm2

m = 1.13 kg/m





m = 1.68 kg/m





m = 2.23 kg/m


Support Profiles

313

Support Profile 80-45°Al, anodizedA = 3.53 cm2

m = 0.90 kg/m


Support Profile 80-45° can be used as a bottomor lid element.

Support ProfilesAngledGeometry

Particularly suitable for constructing operatingconsoles of any length, manual control boxes or similarapplications.The housings can be used to hold and secure printedcircuit boards of various sizes up to width 100 mm(90 mm in the case of the 80-45°).

314


Support Profile 3HUAl, anodizedA = 4.06 cm2 m = 1.10 kg/mCut-off max. 3000 mm, natural 0.0.398.13

Support Profile 3HU 84HPAl, anodizedA = 4.06 cm2 m = 0.48 kg1 pce., length 432.5 mm, natural 0.0.398.59

Support Profile 6HUAl, anodizedA = 7.30 cm2 m = 1.97 kg/mCut-off max. 3000 mm, natural 0.0.398.14

Support Profile 6HU 84HPAl, anodizedA = 7.30 cm2 m = 0.85 kg1 pce., length 432.5 mm, natural 0.0.398.61

Support Profile 3HU with grooves 8Al, anodizedA = 6.30 cm2 m = 1.70 kg/mCut-off max. 3000 mm, natural 0.0.265.92

Support Profile 3HU with grooves 8 84HPAl, anodizedA = 6.30 cm2 m = 0.74 kg1 pce., length 432.5 mm, natural 0.0.373.06

Support Profiles3HU/6HU

Support Profile 3HU/6HU can be used as a complete orsubdivided front or rear wall for housings 3HU/6HU.Used in conjunction with the conduit system elements,it can also be used as a floor or lid element (3HU/6HU).Support Profile 3HU with grooves is particularly suitableas the rear wall of housing 3HU suspended in profilegroove 8. Used in conjunction with the conduit systemelements, suspendable conduits can also be constructed.

Support Profile 160-20°Al, anodizedA = 4.29 cm2

m = 1.16 kg/m


Support ProfilesAngledGeometry

315

Conduit ProfileW80-T40

Profile for constructing installation conduits directlyon Profiles 8.The Conduit Profile snaps into the profile groove.Support Profiles of various widths and / or Lid Profilescan be used for closing the conduit. Conduit Profile 8W80-T40 or the Support Profile can be secured withSelf-Tapping Screw St 4.2x16 (reborable to ø 4.5 mm).

Conduit Profile 8 W80-T40Al, anodizedA = 4.41 cm2

m = 1.19 kg/m


Conduit Profile 8 W80-T40 on Profile 8 160x40 with lidmade from Support Profile 80.Conduit Profile 8 W80-T40 on Profile 8 80x80-45°light with lid from Support Profile 160.

Mounting and removal of Conduit Profile 8 W80-T40 onthe Profile 8 groove.

316

7. Installation Elements 7.1 Conduits 7.1.3 Accessories for Conduits

Conduit Caps The Caps are for use with the modular conduit system.Rounded coverings for profile edges and end faceclosures for conduits and operating consoles, whicheliminate deburring.

PA-GF, black

Conduit Cap 40x40m = 8 g1 pce. 0.0.196.88


7.1.3 Accessoriesfor Conduits

Conduit installation in processing fixture

The accessories for conduits allow a wider range ofapplications and uses.

317

PA-GF, black









Conduit Cap Set 80x80-45°Conduit Cap 80x80-45° leftConduit Cap 80x80-45° rightm = 50 g1 set 0.0.406.68

Conduit Cap Set 160x80-20°Conduit Cap 160x80-20° leftConduit Cap 160x80-20° rightm = 96 g

1 set 0.0.406.67

318

Conduit-Finishing Profile

Used for finishing off the edges of wall elements atopenings in Support Profiles and to protect cables andhoses at 90° conduit joints.


Conduit Edge ProfileTPE, blackm = 60 g/m1 roll, length 20 m 0.0.411.58

Conduit EdgeProfile

For covering the edges and openings in wall or lidelements in order to protect cable insulation.

319

Profile TS 35 For attaching electrical components withTS 35 mountings.The relevant regulations must be observed when layingelectrical conductors with basic insulation. In particular,all conduit elements which may become conductive inthe event of a fault must be included in the protective system.

Profile TS 35Al, anodizedA = 1.19 cm2


Conduit-Finishing ProfileAl, anodizedA = 0.81 cm2


Conduit-Finishing Profile in conjunction with theconduit elements and Angle Bracket Zn.Segments of the Conduit-Finishing Profile are used toreplace sections of the Support Profiles in order toconstruct cable protected conduit joints with AngleBracket Zn.

The profile can be locked into Support Profiles 80, 120and 160 with grooves and can be screw-connected.Can also be screwed onto any chosen panel element.

320

Flush-MountedSockets

Flush-Mounted SocketSocket, PA, blackCover frame, PA, blackInsulation box, PA, grey2-pin + earth, 16 A, 250 Vm = 50 g

1 pce. 0.0.465.82

Flush-Mounted Socket with LidSocket, PA, blackCover frame with swing lid and seal, PA, blackProtection IP44Insulation box, PA, greym = 57 g

1 pce. 0.0.465.84


Flush-Mounted Sockets are easily installed in WallProfiles, Support Profiles, panel elements, sheets etc.When using the supplied insulation box with strain reliefand shock-proof leads, the conduit elements do notneed to be connected to the protective conductorsystem. Electrical connection may only be performedby a fully qualified electrician.The sockets are VDE-compliant (German standards sockets).

Sequence for installing Flush-Mounted Socket with lid:1. Seal2. Insulation box3. Socket4. Cover frame with swing lid

Mounting operationsSocket housing is secured by means of 4 screws DIN7981 St-4.2x13 (Section 3.2 Screws and Nuts).

321

7.2 Profiles with IntegratedConduit

Lightweight Stand Profiles with integrated conduits oneither one or both sides can be used for lightweightapplications such as the frame construction for a rollerconveyor or transfer system. A special Lid Profile isused to seal the conduit.In the case of profiles with installation conduits on bothsides, the central web separating the conduits isprovided with pre-punched openings for routing cablesand hoses from one side to the other.A special lightweight Foot Plate is available for theStand Profiles (Section 2.1 Adjustable Feet).

Stand Profiles 8 80x40 are used in conjunction withCover Profile 60 and Stand Profile Connection Element8 for constructing transport sections, e.g. rollerconveyors with integrated conduits.Stand Profile 8 80x40 2xK60 with integrated conduits onboth sides is ideal for low-load structures.

By providing Stand Profile 8 80x40 with a ø 14 mm bore,the profile can be used for routing cables and hoses.

The openings are located at modular intervals and areused for running through cables and hoses.The position of the cable openings in the profile‘s longi-tudinal direction is arbitrary. The minimum profile lengthis therefore 160 mm.

Standard fastening is effected on the end face inconjunction with Stand Profile Connection Element 8and Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x20 (M = 25 Nm).

7. Installation Elements 7.2 Profiles with Integrated Conduit

The joint on the groove side is effected with a PneumaticUniversal-Fastening Set 8 or Automatic-Fastening Set 8or a Standard Fastener 8.

322

Stand Profile 8 80x40 K60Al, anodizedA =10.20 cm2 Ix = 69.02 cm4 Iy = 11.74 cm4

It = 2.72 cmm = 2.75 kg/m Wx = 17.26 cm3 Wy = 5.13 cm3


Stand Profile 8 80x40 2xK60Al, anodizedA = 7.84 cm2 Ix = 64.19 cm4 Iy = 7.75 cm4

It = 0.84 cm4

m = 2.05 kg/m Wx = 16.05 cm3 Wy = 3.67 cm3


Stand Profile Connection Element 8Al, anodizedm = 11 g

1 pce., natural 3.0.005.03

Cover Profile 60Al, anodizedm = 0.36 kg/m


Stand Profiles

7. Installation Elements 7.2 Profiles with Integrated Conduit

323

7. Installation Elements 7.3 Electronic Boxes

7.3 ElectronicBoxes

Sealed Electronic Boxes (IP 65, EN 60529) can beconstructed, in any length, using Electronic-Box Profilesand the corresponding lids:> Stable, anodized aluminium profiles with cooling ribsfor heat dissipation, special grooves (in 5.08 mm grid)to accommodate printed circuit boards in EuropeanStandard format (100x160 mm) and Profile 5 and 8grooves for integration into the MB Building Kit System> Electronic-Box Lid, smooth finish and knockouts forcable glands, together with bore grid for installing abackplane; sealing provided by matching, peripheralseals

Cooling ribs Grooves for securing boxes

Seal in box lid

Electronic-Box Profile 8 120x80Al, anodizedProtection IP 65, EN 60529 in connection withElectronic-Box Lid 8 120x80A = 20.50 cm2

m = 5.55 kg/m


Electronic-Box Profile 8 200x120Al, anodizedProtection IP 65, EN 60529 in connection withElectronic-Box Lid 8 200x120A = 36.51 cm2

m = 9.85 kg/m


Electronic-BoxProfiles

324

7. Installation Elements 7.3 Electronic Boxes

Electronic-BoxLids

Electronic-Box Lids 120x80 are provided with an all-round silicon seal and have a bore grid on the inside.Knockouts are provided for cable glands.

Electronic-Box Lid 8 120x80PA-GF, blackSealProtection IP 65, EN 60529 in connection withElectronic-Box Profile 8 120x804 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7981-4.2x13,St, bright zinc-platedm = 64 g

1 pce. 0.0.259.60

Electronic-Box Lid 8 120x80, plainPA-GF, blackSealProtection IP 65, EN 60529 in connection withElectronic-Box Profile 8 120x804 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7981-4.2x13,St, bright zinc-platedm = 59 g

1 pce. 0.0.259.61

8 120x80

325

Electronic-Box Lid 8 200x120PA-GF, blackSealProtection IP 65, EN 60529 in connection withElectronic-Box Profile 8 200x1208 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7981-4.2x13,St, bright zinc-platedm = 170 g

1 pce. 0.0.259.37

Electronic-Box Lid 8 200x120, plainPA-GF, blackSealProtection IP 65, EN 60529 in connection withElectronic-Box Profile 8 200x1208 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7981-4.2x13,St, bright zinc-platedm = 140 g

1 pce. 0.0.259.44

8 200x120

326

7. Installation Elements 7.4 Cable and Hose Fasteners

7.4 Cable andHose Fasteners

In addition to routing cables, hoses and leads in fullyenclosed insulation conduits, these can also be runalong the profile or other elements.

Universal HolderPA-GF, black1 washer DIN 9021-5.3, St, bright zinc-platedm = 3 g

1 set 0.0.418.24

Universal Holder For holding cable ties and similar components.The Universal Holder can be assembled at any angle.Fastening is performed in the profile groove of thepanel element using a Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M5and corresponding T-Slot Nut or in conjunction witha hexagon nut DIN 936-M5.

The Cable Ties are used for bundling and securingcables, lines, pipes and hoses. They can be closed andreleased without tools.

Cable Ties

327

Holder forCables andHoses

Fastening element with two separate pockets for openrouting of cables or hoses up to max. ø 12 mm onprofiles using Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN912-M4 and T-Slot Nuts 8 Zn or on panel elements etc.The cable is held in place by the O-ring.

Holder for Cables and Hoses 8PA, blackO-ring1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M4x10,St, bright zinc-platedm = 10 g

1 set 0.0.196.65

Cable Tie releasable 4.8x145PA, blackm = 79 g/100100 pce. 0.0.418.27

Cable Tie releasable 4.8x281PA, blackm = 120g/100100 pce. 0.0.418.29

Cable Tie releasable 9x140PA, blackm = 190 g/100100 pce. 0.0.418.89

Cable Tie releasable 9x249PA, blackm = 330 g/100100 pce. 0.0.418.92

328

7. Installation Elements 7.4 Cable and Hose Fasteners

For fastening Limit Switches to profiles or othercomponents.

Limit-SwitchHolders

Fastening Limit-Switch Holders D6.5, D8 and D12 withHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M4, springwasher and T-Slot Nut of the corresponding Line.

Without anti-torsion blocks for attachment at any angle.Limit-Switch Holders D6.5, D8 and D12 can be attachedwith anti-torsion blocks either parallel or at right-anglesto the Profile 5 or Profile 8 groove.With anti-torsion blocks, Limit-Switch Holders D18 and20 can be attached in 10° increments relative to theProfile 8 groove.

Limit-Switch Holder D6.5Housing and anti-torsion block, PA-GF, blackSpring washer, St, blackm = 8 g1 set 0.0.406.40

Limit-Switch Holder D8Housing and anti-torsion block, PA-GF, blackSpring washer, St, blackm = 7 g1 set 0.0.406.41

Limit-Switch Holder D12Housing and anti-torsion block, PA-GF, blackSpring washer, St, blackm = 6 g1 set 0.0.406.42

329

For fastening Limit-Switch Holders D18 and D20 withHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6 and T-Slot Nut of the corresponding Line.

Limit-Switch Holder D18Housing and anti-torsion block, PA-GF, blackHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x28,St, bright zinc-platedm = 23 g1 set 0.0.411.30

Limit-Switch Holder D20Housing and anti-torsion block, PA-GF, blackHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x28,St, bright zinc-platedm = 22 g1 set 0.0.411.31

331

8. Dynamic Elements

8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.1 Roller Guides

The Dynamic Elements product group of the MBBuilding Kit System contains components which enableprecise linear movement. The dynamic elements makefull use of the modular concept of the Building KitSystem - the components can be combined quickly andinexpensively without need for additional machining.The profiles of the basic frame are both constructionelements and guide rails. As a result, laboriousalignment work can be avoided in the majority of cases.The dynamic elements are subdivided into:> Linear slides- Roller Guides on shafts secured to the profile groove- Ball-bearing guide bushes on free-standing guiding

shafts- Linear guide systems on guide rails on the

profile groove

> Linear drives- Timing-belt drives in various Lines, for driving alllinear units- Ball-Screw Units for precise positioning- Chain drives where compactness and robustness

are paramount

> Mechanical drive elements such as couplings, BevelGear Boxes, Multi-Spline Shafts, adaption elements andfastening elements

> Accessories for linear movement such as ProximitySwitches, length measuring system and Slide Clamps

The modular Roller Guides feature ease of assembly,high load-bearing capacity, a choice of stroke length andhigh travelling speed.The low resistance and generous dimensions contributeto the long service life. Roller Guides consist of BearingUnits with ball-bearing mounted, prismatic rollers madefrom roller bearing steel, the Roller Profiles (bearingshell) and the End Cap and Lubricating Systems.The Roller Guides are mounted on Profiles 5 and 8, withthe Shaft-Clamp Profiles being secured by clipping orscrewing them (Roller Guide 8 D25) into the grooves.The hardened and polished steel shafts are then pressedinto the Shaft-Clamp Profiles along the entire length ofthe Guide. By selecting appropriate lengths and offsetsection joints for the supporting profile, the Shaft-ClampProfile and the shaft, it is possible to construct virtuallyany length of Roller Guide.The Shaft-Clamp Profiles Universal also allow theguiding shafts to be secured to any chosen supportstructures.The various available diameters of the guiding shaftstogether with suitable dimensioning of the supportingprofile mean that a wide variety of permissible loads canbe accommodated.In addition, any number of Bearing Units can be usedand, if necessary, they can be adjusted free from play bymeans of eccentric bolts.The Bearing Units offer a range of fastening optionsusing the grooves of Profiles 5 or 8; assembly andalignment on profiles or clamping plates are greatlysimplified.In conjunction with the End Cap and LubricatingSystems, the Roller Profile acts as a bearing shell andsafety cover, as well as providing protection againstsoiling. This ensures uninterrupted operation, evenunder adverse operating conditions.

8.1.1 Roller Guides

Roller Guide 5 D6 as a compound slide

Roller Guide 8 D6

Roller Guide 8 D14

Roller Guide 8 D25

Two Roller Guides 8 D14 on one Profile 8 80x40

Roller conveyor with adjustable longitudinal limit stop

8.1 Linear Slides

332

Guide Alternatives

8 D6


Basic construction of Profiles 5 with Roller Guide 5 onShaft D6.

5 D6

Basic construction of Profiles 8 with Roller Guide 8 onShaft D6.

333

8 D10 Basic construction of Profiles 8 with Roller Guide 8 onShaft D10.


334



335

Calculation ofService Life

The service life of Roller Guides can be assessed usingthe calculation method for roller bearings:

L = Service life in kmLh = Service life in hC = Dynamic

load factor in NP = Load in N– = Mean slidev

speed in m/min

C__P

Lh = ( )3. in h

C__P

L = ( )3. 100 in km

1666____v

S0 =Co__P

So = Staticload safety factor > 3

Co = Static load factor in N

Performance at max. load: 10,000 kmMax. speed: 10 m/s

LoadSpecifications

Roller Guide 5 D6 and 8 D6F1 = 125 NF2 = 500 NF3 = 250 N

F4 = 250 (N)

F5 = 250 (N)

M = 250 . l (Nm)

. l—l2

Roller Guide 8 D14F1 = 750 NF2 = 3000 NF3 = 1500 N

F4 = 1500 (N)

F5 = 1500 (N)

M = 1500 . l (Nm)


F4 = 6000 (N)

F5 = 6000 (N)

M = 6000 . l (Nm)

. l—l2

. l1—l2

. l1—l2

. l—l2

. l1—l2


F4 = 750 (N)

F5 = 750 (N)

M = 750 . l (Nm)

. l—l2

. l1—l2

Simplified method for determining the maximumpermissible load for Roller Guides:

336

Proceed as follows when mounting the guiding shafts:1. In order to prepare Shafts D10, D14 or D25 forpinning, drill blind holes into the Shaft and Shaft-ClampProfile (for further details, refer to Shaft-Clamp Profilesbelow).2. Clean the Shaft-Clamp Profiles and the groove in thesupporting profile.3. Grease the contact faces of the Shaft-Clamp Profiles,supporting profile and guiding shafts with rollerbearing grease.4. Press in the Shaft-Clamp Profiles as far as they will go.5. Press in the guiding shafts using the mounting aid.

5 D6 8 D6 8 D10 8 D14 8 D25Bearing Unit 28 mm 60 mm 60 mm 60 mm 120 mmDouble-Bearing Unit 68 mm 80 mm 140 mm 140 mm 300 mmSpecial Bearing Unit s + 50 mm s + 50 mm s + 85 mm s + 120 mm s + 235 mm

s = distance between centre of Roller and felt in mm

Assembly of Guiding Shafts

Where Roller Guides are longer than 3 m, the Shafts, theShaft-Clamp Profile and the supporting profile shouldbe assembled with joints offset to each other.

Minimum Stroke Lengths Possible arrangement of the End Cap and LubricatingSystems which are required in every instance.The spring-loaded end cap and lubricating felt can bere-lubricated via the hole provided. Recommendedre-lubricating cycle: every six months.In order to ensure adequate lubrication, the minimumstroke lengths required for the slides must be observed.

Frictional Forces

Roller Guides 5 D6 and 8 D6FR = 5 N

Roller Guide 8 D14FR = 15 N


Frictional losses must be taken into consideration whendesigning drive units. The quoted values refer to slides,each with 4 Rollers and 4 End Cap and LubricationSystems.



337

8 D6

Pinning Alternatives The Bearing Units and Double-Bearing Units 5 D6,8 D10, 8 D14 and 8 D25 are provided with bores whichcan be used as fastening and fixing bores when makingconnections.If the Bearing Units are to be mounted offset 90°, thefastening and fixing bores must be located inaccordance with the specified dimensions or in thedark-grey areas.

5 D6

8 D6

8 D10

Assembly Tips The appropriate Pin Spanners are available (Section 9Auxiliary Elements) for fastening Bolts 5 D6 e, 8 D10 e, 8D14 e, 8 D25 c and 8 D25 e with locking rings.

338

For connecting Shafts D6, D10, D14 and D25 with thegrooves of the corresponding Profile Lines.After pressing the Shaft-Clamp Profile into the profilegroove, the Shaft is then pressed in.Shafts D10, D14 and D25 must be fixed in position atthe chosen location using a dowel DIN 6325, one perlength of shaft.

8 D14

8 D25


Shaft-Clamp Profiles


339

Shaft-Clamp Profile 5 D6Al, anodizedA = 0.38 cm2

m = 0.10 kg/m



m = 0.12 kg/m



m = 0.22 kg/m



m = 0.36 kg/m




Fastening Set 8 for Shaft-Clamp Profile 8 D25Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M8x16, St, bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut 8 St M8, bright zinc-platedRecommended tightening torque M = 25 Nmm = 17 g1 set 0.0.350.17

Shaft-Clamp Profile 8 D25 is also screw-connected tothe profile groove using Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M8x16 and T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8 at intervals of 200 mm.The appropriate Shafts can be found in Section 8.1.6 Shafts.

340


Shaft-ClampProfiles D14Universal

Shaft-Clamp Profiles D14 Universal can be used toconstruct a Roller Guide 8 D14 for any chosen baseconstruction (machine beds, steel girders, work benchesetc.). Appropriate measures must be taken to ensure thatthe Shaft-Clamp Profiles are installed in parallel.Bearing Units 8 D14 must always be employed in pairsin both centric and eccentric constructions in order thatplay can be eliminated.

Example of Shaft-Clamp Profiles D14H as aninternal guide.

Example of Shaft-Clamp Profiles D14V on a T-shapedprofile or similar as an external guide.The Shaft-Clamp Profiles are designed to compensateangular deviations around the longitudinal axis of� = 1.5° between the mounting surface and BearingUnits 8 D14.

The Shaft-Clamp Profiles can be secured to the baseconstruction using pins. The Shafts should also bepinned into the Shaft-Clamp Profiles (once per lengthof shaft). The Combination Drilling Jig for Shaft D14(Section 9.2 Jigs and Tools) can be used for this purpose.

Shaft-Clamp Profile D14VAl, anodizedA = 2.98 cm2

m = 0.81 kg/m


The Shaft-Clamp Profiles are secured by means ofButton-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6. The through boresshould be no more than 100 mm apart.

341

Bearing Units For easy-running, covered Roller Guides with variableaspect ratios and fastening options.Bearing Units e (eccentric) and c (centric) differ in thegeometry of the bolts. The eccentric bolts can beadjusted subsequently so as to ensure that the guideunit is free from play. Bearing Units should thereforealways be used in pairs in both centric and eccentricversions.The Bearing Units must always be equipped withEnd Cap and Lubricating Systems in order to preventpremature wear.

Cap for Shaft-Clamp Profile D14VPA, blackm = 9.00 g

1 set 0.0.294.65

Shaft-Clamp Profile D14HAl, anodizedA = 4.81 cm2

m = 1.30 kg/m


Cap for Shaft-Clamp Profile D14HPA, blackm = 10.00 g

1 set 0.0.294.64


342

Bearing Unit 5 D6 cAl, anodizedBolt 5 D6 cRoller D6Mbolt = 3 NmC = 1620 NCo = 780 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M5x8, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-5.3, St, bright zinc-platedm = 47 g1 pce., natural 0.0.390.15

Bearing Unit 5 D6 eAl, anodizedBolt 5 D6 eRoller D6Mlocknut = 3 NmC = 1620 NCo = 780 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M5x8, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-5.3, St, bright zinc-platedm = 47 g1 pce., natural 0.0.390.16

Bearing Unit 8 D6 cAl, anodizedBolt 8 D6 cRoller D6Mgrubscrew = 3 NmC = 1620 NCo = 780 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 146 g1 pce., natural 0.0.356.30

Bearing Unit 8 D6 eAl, anodizedBolt 8 D6 eRoller D6Mgrubscrew = 3 NmC = 1620 NCo = 780 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 146 g1 pce., natural 0.0.356.31

Bearing Unit 8 D10 cAl, anodizedRoller D10Bolt 8 D10 cMbolt = 6 NmC = 4400 NCo = 2470 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 210 g1 pce., natural 0.0.442.10

Bearing Units


343

Bearing Unit 8 D10 eAl, anodizedRoller D10Bolt 8 D10 eMlocknut = 6 NmC = 4,400 NCo = 2,470 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 210 g1 pce., natural 0.0.442.09

Bearing Unit 8 D14 cAl, anodizedBolt 8 D14 cRoller D14Mbolt = 20 NmC = 7,800 NCo = 4,400 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 400 g1 pce., natural 0.0.294.14

Bearing Unit 8 D14 eAl, anodizedBolt 8 D14 eRoller D14Mlocknut = 20 NmC = 7,800 NCo = 4,400 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 400 g1 pce., natural 0.0.294.15

Bearing Unit 8 D25 cAl, anodizedBolt 8 D25 cRoller D25Mlocknut = 100 NmMlocking screw = 10 NmC. = 25,000 NCo = 15,300 N4 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated4 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 2.0 kg1 pce., natural 0.0.350.12

Bearing Unit 8 D25 eAl, anodizedBolt 8 D25 eRoller D25Mlocknut = 100 NmMlocking screw = 10 NmC = 25,000 NCo = 15,300 N4 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated4 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 2.0 kg1 pce., natural 0.0.350.11

344

Double-Bearing Unit 5 D6 cAl, anodized2 Bolts 5 D6 c2 Rollers D6Mbolt = 3 NmC = 3,240 NCo = 1,560 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M5x8, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-5.3, St, bright zinc-platedm = 110 g1 pce., natural 0.0.390.17

Double-Bearing Unit 5 D6 eAl, anodized2 Bolts 5 D6 e2 Rollers D6Mlocknut = 3 NmC = 3,240 NCo = 1,560 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M5x8, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-5.3, St, bright zinc-platedm = 110 g1 pce., natural 0.0.390.18

Double-Bearing Unit 8 D6 cAl, anodized2 Bolts 8 D6 c2 Rollers D6Mgrubscrew = 3 NmC = 3,240 NCo = 1,560 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 200 g1 pce., natural 0.0.356.32

Double-Bearing Unit 8 D6 eAl, anodized2 Bolts 8 D6 e2 Rollers D6Mgrubscrew = 3 NmC = 3,240 NCo = 1,560 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 200 g1 pce., natural 0.0.356.33

Double-Bearing Unit 8 D10 cAl, anodized2 Rollers D102 Bolts 8 D10 c2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedMbolt = 6 NmC = 8,800 NCo = 4,940 Nm = 450 g1 pce., natural 0.0.442.15

Double-BearingUnits


345

Double-Bearing Unit 8 D10 eAl, anodized2 Rollers D102 Bolts 8 D10 e2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedMlocknut = 6 NmC = 8,800 NCo = 4,940 Nm = 450 g1 pce., natural 0.0.442.14

Double-Bearing Unit 8 D14 cAl, anodized2 Rollers D142 Bolts 8 D14 cMbolt = 20 NmC = 15,600 NCo = 8,800 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 880 g1 pce., natural 0.0.294.26

Double-Bearing Unit 8 D14 eAl, anodized2 Rollers D142 Bolts 8 D14 eMbolt = 20 NmC = 15,600 NC0 = 8,800 N2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 880 g1 pce., natural 0.0.294.28

Double-Bearing Unit 8 D25 cAl, anodized2 Bolts 8 D25 c2 Rollers D25Mlocknut = 100 NmMlocking screw = 10 NmC = 50,000 NCo = 30,600 N8 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated8 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 5.2 kg1 pce., natural 0.0.350.19

Double-Bearing Unit 8 D25 eAl, anodized2 Bolts 8 D25 e2 Rollers D25Mlocknut = 100 NmMlocking screw = 10 NmC = 50,000 NCo = 30,600 N8 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x16, St, bright zinc-plated8 washers DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 5.2 kg1 pce., natural 0.0.350.18

346

End Cap andLubricatingSystems

End Cap and Lubricating System 5 D6PA-GF, blackEnd Cap and Lubricating System 5 D6, rightEnd Cap and Lubricating System 5 D6, left2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M5x10,St, bright zinc-platedm = 12 g1 set 0.0.390.12

End Cap and Lubricating System 8 D6PA-GF, blackEnd Cap and Lubricating System 8 D6, rightEnd Cap and Lubricating System 8 D6, left2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M4x10,St, bright zincplatedm = 20 g1 set 0.0.356.24



End Cap and Lubricating System 8 D25PA-GF, blackEnd Cap and Lubricating System 8 D25, rightEnd Cap and Lubricating System 8 D25, left6 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x10,St, bright zinc-platedm = 170 g

1 set 0.0.350.13

The end cap and lubricating felt is saturated with oilwhen it leaves the factory. Recommended re-oilinginterval: every six months.The End Cap and Lubricating Systems are essential inorder to protect and lubricate the Bearing Units.


347

Rollers

Roller D6St, 100 Cr 6, hardened, polishedDouble ball bearing with two washers,maintenance-freeC = 1,620 NCo = 780 NRPMmax. = 10,000 min-1

m = 8 g1 pce. 0.0.356.03

Roller D10St, 100 Cr 6, hardened, polishedDouble ball bearing with two washers,maintenance-free1 washer, St, bright zinc-platedC = 4,400 NCo = 2,470 NRPMmax. = 7,500 min-1

m = 28 g1 pce. 0.0.442.02

Roller D14St, 100 Cr 6, hardened, polishedDouble ball bearing with two washers,maintenance-freeC = 7,800 NCo = 4,400 NRPMmax. = 5,000 min-1

m = 100 g1 pce. 0.0.294.03

Roller D14KAlso corrosion-resistant and coated1 pce., black 0.0.294.52

Roller D25St, 100 Cr 6, hardened, polishedDouble ball bearing with two washers,maintenance-freeC = 25,000 NCo = 15,300 NRPMmax. = 2,500 min-1

m = 590 g

1 pce. 0.0.350.03

For constructing customised Bearing Units for easy-running Roller Guides adjustable free from play, inconjunction with the Shafts.

348

Bolt 5 D6 cSt, black, corrosion-resistantM = 3 Nmm = 5 g

1 pce. 0.0.390.03

Bolt 5 D6 eBolt and locknut, St, black,corrosion-resistantMlocknut = 3 Nmm = 5 g

1 set 0.0.390.19

Bolt 8 D6 cBolt and locking ring, St, black, corrosion-resistantGrub screw DIN 914-M6x10, StM = 3 Nmm = 6 g

1 set 0.0.356.04

Bolt 8 D6 eBolt and locking ring, St, black, corrosion-resistantGrub screw DIN 914-M6x10, StM = 3 Nmm = 6 g1 set 0.0.356.05


1 pce. 0.0.442.06

Bolt 8 D10 eSt, black, corrosion-resistantBolt and lock nutMlocknut = 6 Nmm = 10 g1 set 0.0.442.07


1 pce. 0.0.294.10

Bolt 8 D14 eBolt and lock nut, St, black,corrosion-resistantMlocknut = 20 Nmm = 46 g

1 set 0.0.294.12

Bolts


For securing Rollers in the Roller Profile or otherelements.

349

Roller Profiles Profiles for constructing Bearing Units of any length,using the appropriate Rollers, Bolts and End Cap andLubricating Systems.

Bolt 8 D25 cBolt and lock nut, St, black,corrosion-resistantMlocknut = 100 NmMlocking screw = 10 Nmm = 285 g

1 set 0.0.350.04

Bolt 8 D25 eBolt and lock nut, St, black,corrosion-resistantMlocknut = 100 NmMlocking screw = 10 Nmm = 285 g1 set 0.0.350.05

350

Roller Profile 5 D6Al, anodizedA = 4.30 cm2 Ix = 2.98 cm4 Iy = 3.05 cm4

It = 0.81 cm4

m = 1.16 kg/m Wx = 1.98 cm3 Wy = 2.05 cm3


Roller Profile 8 D6Al, anodizedA = 7.55 cm2 Ix = 4.53 cm4 Iy =24.15 cm4

It = 1.66 cm4

m = 2.03 kg/m Wx = 2.12 cm3 Wy = 8.05 cm3


Roller Profile 8 D10Al, anodizedA = 9.35 cm2 Ix =12.64 cm4 Iy =18.89 cm4

It = 5.18 cm4

m = 2.52 kg/m Wx = 6.52 cm3 Wy = 6.54 cm3


Roller Profile 8 D14Al, anodizedA =15.72 cm2 Ix =48.08 cm4 Iy =47.96 cm4

It = 11.14 cm4

m = 4.24 kg/m Wx = 15.74 cm3 Wy =14.23 cm3


Roller Profile 8 D25Al, anodizedA =44.19 cm2 Ix =508.41 cm4 Iy =331.49 cm4

It = 30.51 cm4

m =11.93 kg/m Wx = 79.98 cm3 Wy = 82.87 cm3



Roller Profiles

351

8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.2 C-Rail Systems

8.1.2 C-Rail Systems C-Rail Systems are specialized Roller Guides and areideal for constructing compact guides, lifting doors,sliding doors, movable guards and enclosures etc.

> C-Rail System K with slide consisting of plastic rollersrunning directly on the aluminium rail profile.This variant can accommodate low hanging loads asshown in the illustration opposite and is adequate forsimple guide operations.

The C-Rail Systems for Profiles 5, 6 and 8 are eachavailable in 3 versions:> C-Rail System 1R with slides on prismatic steel rollersmounted on ball bearings and a polished guiding shaft.This version can accommodate high loads in the verticaldownward plane as shown in the illustration on the leftand features particularly low-friction running. A secondguiding shaft can also be fitted in order to prevent thesliding door from tilting when moved.> C-Rail System 3R with guide slides that can beadjusted via eccentrics. The 3 steel rollers mounted onball bearings run free from play on 2 polished shafts andare ideal for very high loads and cases where particularrequirements are placed on the precision of the guides.

352


Line C-Rail System 3R C-Rail System 1R C-Rail System KSystem Variations

Load Specifications

C-Rail System 5 D6 3R C-Rail System 5 D6 1R C-Rail System 5 KF1 = 250 N, F2 = 125 N F3 = 125 N F4 = 50 NC-Rail System 6 D10 3R C-Rail System 6 D10 1R C-Rail System 6 KF1 = 750 N, F2 = 350 N F3 = 350 N F4 = 125 NC-Rail System 8 D14 3R C-Rail System 8 D14 1R C-Rail System 8 KF1 = 1500 N, F2 = 750 N F3 = 750 N F4 = 250 N

353

Guide Alternatives Examples of possible guide alternatives using theC-Rail System.The guides shown opposite are suitable for parallelguides (e.g. independent, overlapping sliding doors) orfor telescope guides (e.g. doors and pullouts which havelong strokes relative to the guide length). The C-Railsmust be interconnected at appropriate points.The profiles are designed so that the grooves arepositioned to accommodate other components.The slide profile is located offset with respect to the railprofile in order to prevent collisions between movingand stationary parts. The risk of other componentscolliding with rail or slide profiles must be countered byappropriate design measures (installation at a distancefrom the frame, spacers, etc.).

Installation of the GuidingShafts

The following points must be taken into account wheninstalling the guiding shafts:> Preparation for pinning Shafts D10 or D14 by drillingbase bores into the Shafts at any point using a carbide-tipped drill. Shaft D6 does not need to be pinned.The Shaft is best drilled using the Combination DrillingJig for Shafts.> Drill the through bores into the C-Rail Profile at thesame point.> Press a dowel pin DIN 1481-4x10 into Shaft D10 ordowel pin DIN 1481-5x14 into Shaft D14.> Shaft D6 in C-Rail Profile 5 is not pinned.

> Using the Mounting Aid for Shafts (Section 9 AuxiliaryElements), an appropriate round steel bar for a lever, anda profile for locating the Mounting Aid, the pre-greasedguiding shafts are pressed into the C-Rail Profiles.

System variant 6 System variant 8

354


Minimum Stroke Lengths The shaft-mounted versions with steel rollers must notbe run without lubrication.To ensure adequate lubrication, minimum stroke lengthsmust be complied with for the Bearing Units:

Bearing Unit Minimum stroke length

5 D6 1R 60 mm5 D6 3R 100 mm

6 D10 1R 90 mm6 D10 3R 150 mm8 D14 1R 120 mm8 D14 3R 200 mm

The lubricating systems are charged with oil at thefactory. They should be topped up with machine oilevery six months.

C-Rail, Bearing Units Complete Bearing Units for simple construction ofC-Rail Systems 5, 6 and 8.

355

C-Rail, Bearing Unit 5 D6 1RC-Rail, Slide Profile segment, Al, anodizedC-Rail, Slide Profile Cap Set 5C-Rail, Bearing Set 5 D6 1Rm = 64 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.460.31


1 pce., natural 0.0.460.30

C-Rail, Bearing Unit 5 KC-Rail, Slide Profile segment, Al, anodizedC-Rail, Slide Profile Cap Set 5C-Rail, Bearing Set 5 1R Km = 60 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.460.33


1 pce., natural 0.0.461.31


1 pce., natural 0.0.461.30

C-Rail, Bearing Unit 6 KC-Rail, Slide Profile segment, Al, anodizedC-Rail, Slide Profile Cap Set 6C-Rail, Bearing Set 6 1R Km = 209 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.461.33

356



1 pce., natural 0.0.462.31

C-Rail, Bearing Unit 8 D14 3RC-Rail, Slide Profile segment, Al, anodizedC-Rail, Slide Profile Cap Set 8C-Rail, Bearing Set 8 D14 3Rm = 1.1 kg

1 pce., natural 0.0.462.30

C-Rail, Bearing Unit 8 KC-Rail, Slide Profile segment, Al, anodizedC-Rail, Slide Profile Cap Set 8C-Rail, Bearing Set 8 Km = 492 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.462.33

C-Rail, BearingUnits

C-Rail, BearingSets

For constructing C-Rail slides using C-Rail, SlideProfiles 5, 6 or 8.

357

C-Rail, Bearing Set 5 D6 1R1 C-Rail, slide plate compl. equipped with1 Roller D6, centric2 C-Rail, Lubricating Systems 5 D62 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x10, St, blackm = 21 g1 set 0.0.460.35

C-Rail, Bearing Set 5 D6 3R1 C-Rail, slide plate compl. equipped with2 Rollers D6, centric1 Roller D6, eccentric2 C-Rail, Lubricating Systems 5 D62 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x10, St, blackm = 51 g1 set 0.0.460.34

C-Rail, Bearing Set 5 K1 C-Rail, slide plate compl. equipped with1 C-Rail, Roller 5 K2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x10, St, blackm = 21 g1 set 0.0.460.37

C-Rail, Bearing Set 6 D10 1R1 C-Rail, slide plate compl. equipped with1 Roller D10, centric2 C-Rail, Lubricating Systems 6 D102 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M6x12, St, blackm = 103 g1 set, natural 0.0.461.35

C-Rail, Bearing Set 6 D10 3R1 C-Rail, slide plate compl. equipped with2 Rollers D10, centric1 Roller D10, eccentric2 C-Rail, Lubricating Systems 6 D102 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M6x12, St, blackm = 214 g

1 set 0.0.461.34

C-Rail, Bearing Set 6 K1 C-Rail, slide plate compl. equipped with1 C-Rail, Roller 6 K2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M6x12, St, blackm = 79 g

1 set 0.0.461.37

C-Rail, Bearing Set 8 D14 1R1 C-Rail, slide plate compl. equipped with1 Roller D14, centric2 C-Rail, Lubricating Systems 8 D142 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M8x16, St, blackm = 257 g

1 set 0.0.462.35

358


C-Rail, BearingSets

C-Rail, Bearing Set 8 D14 3R1 C-Rail, slide plate compl. equipped with1 C-Rail, lock nut 8, St, black2 Rollers D14, centric1 Roller D14, eccentric2 C-Rail, Lubricating Systems 8 D142 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M8x16, St, blackm = 576 g

1 set 0.0.462.34

C-Rail, Bearing Set 8 K1 C-Rail, slide plate compl. equipped with1 C-Rail, Roller 8 K2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M8x16, St, blackm = 158 g

1 set 0.0.462.37

C-Rail, Rail Profile 5Al, anodizedA = 2.62 cm2 Ix = 0.91 cm4 Iy = 4.67 cm4

m = 0.71 kg/m Wx = 0.76 cm3 Wy = 1.78 cm3


C-Rail, Rail Profile 6Al, anodizedA = 6.23 cm2 Ix = 4.84 cm4 Iy =26.26 cm4

m = 1.68 kg/m Wx = 2.74 cm3 Wy = 6.22 cm3


C-Rail,Rail Profiles

For constructing C-Rail Systems, suitable for guidesboth with and without guiding shafts D6, D10 or D14.

359

C-Rail, Rail Profile 8Al, anodizedA =11.41 cm2 Ix =17.35 cm4 Iy =84.78 cm4

m = 3.10 kg/m Wx = 7.39 cm3 Wy = 14.35 cm3


C-Rail,Slide Profiles

For constructing slides for C-Rail System 5, 6, or 8using Bearing Sets.The positions of the holes are identified by markinggrooves in the profiles.

The relevant holes (a) for the lock nuts and countersinksDIN 74 (b) for the Countersunk Screws must be providedfor securing the Bearing Sets.

Slide Profile5 6 8

a ø 14.5 mm ø 16.5 mm ø 22.5 mm

b DIN 74-Bf5 DIN 74-Bf6 DIN 74-Bm8

c 30 mm/42 mm 46 mm/66 mm 64 mm/90 mm

d 32.4 mm 47.9 mm 63.3 mm

360


C-Rail, Slide Profile 5Al, anodizedA = 2.46 cm2 Ix = 0.92 cm4 Iy = 2.86 cm4

m = 0.67 kg/m Wx = 0.81 cm3 Wy = 1.11 cm3


C-Rail, Slide Profile 6Al, anodizedA = 5.44 cm2 Ix = 4.00 cm4 Iy =13.08 cm4

m = 1.47 kg/m Wx = 2.79 cm3 Wy = 3.24 cm3


C-Rail, Slide Profile 8Al, anodizedA = 9.81 cm2 Ix =16.08 cm4 Iy =41.91 cm4

m = 2.65 kg/m Wx = 6.71 cm3 Wy = 7.63 cm3


C-Rail,Slide Profiles

C-Rail, Slide Profile Cap Set 5PA-GF, blackC-Rail, Slide Profile Cap rightC-Rail, Slide Profile Cap leftm = 2 g1 set 0.0.460.38

C-Rail, Slide Profile Cap Set 6PA-GF, blackC-Rail, Slide Profile Cap rightC-Rail, Slide Profile Cap leftm = 5 g

1 set 0.0.461.38

C-Rail, SlideProfile Caps

361


1 set 0.0.462.38

C-Rail, Slide Profile Cap Set 5PA-GF, blackC-Rail, Slide Profile Cap rightC-Rail, Slide Profile Cap leftm = 2 g1 set 0.0.460.39


1 set 0.0.461.39


1 set 0.0.462.39

C-Rail,Slide ProfileCaps

362

8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.3 Linear Guide Systems

8.1.3 Linear Guide Systems Four-row linear guide systems (with full complement)on profiled rails. The individual linear guide systemcarriages can be loaded from all directions and canabsorb moments around all axes. The key features oflinear guide systems PS are high carrying capacity,rigidity and compact design. Each linear guide systemcarriage can be freely combined with every Linear GuideRail within a given Line, so that one, two or morecarriages are possible per rail and carriages can beexchanged.In a number of application cases, particularly involvinghigh forces and moments that need to be absorbed bygreater support distances, the carriages should not beused individually, but rather in combination. Solutionsinvolving several carriages on a single rail and severalcarriages on parallel rails are also possible.

Rail Attachment

A guide PS 4-25 with one or more guide carriages, oneguide rail and one rail clamp on a Support Profile.The self-centring rail clamp also serves as a support forthe guide rail and secures this to any Support Profile 8with a minimum width of 80 mm. Profile 8 lightweightand 8E should not be used for the support profiles.

Guide rail PS 4-15 is attached to the Profile 8 groove.The rail has been shaped for this purpose and centresautomatically when screwed against GrooveProfile 8 Al M4-60.

Guide systems with parallel rails on a single supportingprofile can be constructed on the profile groove withoutelaborate alignment measures due to the specialfastening geometry employed by the rail. The use ofparallel rails on independent profiles or different supportconstructions will require the amount of alignment andfastening which is typical for profile rail guides(machining of location surfaces, use of parallelsegments etc.).

Linear guide system PS 4-15

Linear guide system PS 4-25


InnovationGermanutility modelpending

363

Load Specifications

The static and dynamic load factors and static momentcharacterise the rolling-ball contact between the carriageand rail and are used for calculating the service lifebased on the rules for the roller bearing calculation:

Linear guide systemPS 4-15 PS 4-25

C0 = Static load factor 14,500 N 37,000NC = Dynamic load factor 7,200 N 17,900 NM0x = Static moment 150 Nm 510 NmM0y=M0z= Static moment 100Nm 395 Nmvmax. = Speed 5 m/s 5 m/st = Temperature range -40 to +100 °C -40 to +100 °Ch = Min. stroke length 40 mm 60 mm

Calculation of Service Life

L = Service life in kmLh = Service life in hC = Dynamic

load factor in NP = Load in N– = Mean slidev

speed in m/min

C__P

Lh = ( )3. in h

C__P

L = ( )3. 100 in km

1666____v

S0 =Co__P

So = Recommendedload safety factor 4...10


The permissible load for a linear guide system alsodepends on the strength of the screw connections andthe construction of the profile frame.The minimum stroke length (h) is required if the rolling-ball contact is to be adequately lubricated. The carriageis charged at the factory with lithium-based grease.Lithium-based greases with a mineral-oil base can beused for re-lubrication.Given the contact pressure of the wipers, a displacementforce of 10 N must be taken into account irrespective of load.

364

8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.3 Linear Guide Systems

BearingCarriages

The Bearing Carriages can be used either individually orin various combinations on one or more rails.The Bearing Carriage has four polished tracks on whichthe bearings are in linear rolling-ball contact (similar toan O-arrangement) with the profiled rail. The bearingsare recirculated through the end-face reverse units andclosed return conduits. The carriages are fitted with end-face wiper systems and additional longitudinal wipers inorder to minimise sensitivity to external influences.Proiles 8 can be secured to the Bearing Carriage bymeans of Button-Head Screws ISO 7380 and LocatingWashers 8 (Section 3.2 Screws and Nuts).

Bearing Carriage PS 4-15Housing, St, hardenedWiper system, PA, black2 lubricating nipplesm = 140 g1 pce. 0.0.443.06

Bearing Carriage PS 4-25Housing, St, hardenedWiper system, PA, black2 lubricating nipples DIN 3405 A M6-120°m = 545 g

1 pce. 0.0.443.16

Bearing WiperSet

The elastic wiper and seal element is used to retainlubricant and to clean the guide tracks. The correctfunctioning of the guide tracks is a critical factor for theservice life of the linear guide system. The wipers canalso be exchanged when the carriage is still fitted, aspart of the maintenance process.

365

Linear Guide Rail PS 4-15St, Cf53, hardened, polishedCaps, PAm = 1.3 kg/m

Cut-off max. 2000 mm 0.0.443.05

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.443.04

Groove Profile 8 Al M4-60Al, anodizedm = 590 g/m


Bearing Wiper Set PS 4-152 wiper units, TPE, blackm = 2 g

1 set 0.0.443.09

Bearing Wiper Set PS 4-252 wiper units, TPE, blackm = 4 g

1 set 0.0.443.28

Linear GuideRailPS 4-15

Profiled Linear Guide Rail with special fasteninggeometry for grooves of Profile 8 at the base of the rail.The rails are provided with fastening bores andcountersinks for Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN912-M4. Following installation, the countersinks mustbe covered flush using the caps provided in order toincrease the service life of the end-face wiper systems.

The rails are best fastened to the Profile 8 using GrooveProfile 8 Al M4/60 and Hexagon Socket Head CapScrews DIN 912-M4x16 (Section 3.2 Screws and Nuts).

366

8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.3 Linear Guide System

Linear Guide Rail PS 4-25St, Cf53, hardened, polishedm = 2.5 kg/m

Cut-off max. 2000 mm 0.0.443.15

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.443.14

Guide Rail Mounting Profile PS 4-25Al, anodizedm = 940 g/m


Guide Rail Clamping Profile PS 4-25Al, anodizedm = 529 g/m


Profiled Linear Guide Rail with special rail basegeometry for use of Linear Guide Rail clamp PS 4-25.

Linear Guide RailPS 4-25

Fastening profiles for clamping the Linear Guide Rail PS4-25, complete with drill holes and threads.A Guide Rail Mounting Profile, Guide Rail ClampingProfile and an appropriate number of Hexagon SocketHead Cap Screws DIN 6912-M6x40 (Section 3.2 Screwsand Nuts) are required for securing each guide rail.Recommended tightening torque MA = 10 Nm.

367

8.1.4 Ball-Bearing GuideBushes

Ball-bearing guide bushes can be integrated as compactlinear slides in profile constructions.The length of the guide is determined solely by thelength of the guiding shaft.The Ball Bushes themselves do not restrict the strokelength; they offer low friction and are characterised byhigh linearity of motion.The heart of a ball-bearing guide bush is therecirculating ball bearing which runs on a hardenedsteel guiding shaft. Ball Bushes and guiding shafts areintegrated into the profile cavities with the minimum ofancillary components.An important requirement for satisfactory functioning isthat the guide housing and clamp blocks for securingthe guiding shafts should be made from immediatelyadjacent sections of the profile.Under no circumstances should they be assembled withthe incorrect rotational alignment. For this reason, theprofile sections should be marked, in the groove forexample, before they are cut to length.Two sizes, based on shaft diameters 14 and 25, aredesigned to withstand slide loads of 500 and 1500 N.The maximum travelling speed is 2 m/s.The double-sided seal of the Ball Bush, together with ahigh-quality grease filling, guarantee a long service lifefor the guide units, even under unfavourable operatingconditions.It is recommended that an evaluation should be made ofthe load-bearing capacity and service life, together withan allowance for deflection of the guiding shafts in thecase of longer strokes.

Ball-bearing guide bushes in an indexing transport system

8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.4 Ball-Bearing Guide Bushes

Slide and Shaft-Clamp Block

Clamp Block with Shaft-Clampng BushSlide with Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Unit

Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Set

368

Guide Alternatives The Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Sets can be used for avariety of applications:Arrangement of the shafts with fixed shaft distance(2 shafts in one profile).

Vertical guide with fixed shafts.Vertical guide with fixed guide slide and moving shafts.


S0 =Co__P

So = Staticload safety factor > 3


L = Service Life in kmLh = Service Life in hC = Dynamic load

factor in NP = Load in N– = Mean slidev

speed in m/min

C__P

Lh = ( )3. in h

C__P

L = ( )3. 100 in km

1666____v


Any selected shaft distance (1 shaft per profile).

369

Ball-BearingGuide BushSets

Complete guide systems based on Shafts D14 or D25with variable slide (S) and stroke lengths (H) (pleaseindicate when ordering). Shaft length W = 80 + H + S.The slightly shorter shaft length allows adjustmentsduring installation.The maximum length of guide is 2000 mm.The load factors of the slides are governed by the type andnumber of Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Units used.

Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Set 8 80x40 D14Fully machined and pre-assembled2 slides 8 80x40 D14, Al, natural anodized4 Clamp Blocks 8 80x40 D144 Caps 8 80x404 Clamp-Block Caps 8 80x40 D144 Slide Caps 8 80x40 D144 Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Units 8 D144 Shaft-Clamping Bushes 8 D144 grub screws DIN 914-M8x10, St, bright zinc-plated4 grub screws DIN 913-M8x14, St, bright zinc-plated2 Shafts D141 set 0.0.386.11

Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Set 8 80x80 D25Fully machined and pre-assembled2 slides 8 80x80 D25, Al, natural anodized4 Clamp Blocks 8 80x80 D254 Caps 8 80x804 Clamp-Block Caps 8 80x80 D254 Slide Caps 8 80x80 D254 Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Units 8 D254 Shaft-Clamping Bushes 8 D254 grub screws DIN 914-M8x22, St, bright zinc-plated4 grub screws DIN 913-M8x27, St, bright zinc-plated2 Shafts D251 set 0.0.387.11

Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Set 8 160x40 D14Fully machined and pre-assembled1 slide 8 160x40 D14, Al, natural anodized2 Clamp Blocks 8 160x40 D142 Caps 8 160x402 Clamp-Block Caps 8 160x40 D142 Slide Caps 8 160x40 D144 Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Units 8 D144 Shaft-Clamping Bushes 8 D144 grub screws DIN 914-M8x10, St, bright zinc-plated4 grub screws DIN 913-M8x14, St, bright zinc-plated2 Shafts D141 set 0.0.386.10

Recommended arrangement for a fixing or mounting hole.


370

Shaft-Clamping Bush 8 D14St, black1 grub screw DIN 913-M8x14, St, bright zinc-platedm = 22 g

1 pce. 0.0.386.03

Shaft-Clamping Bush 8 D25St, black1 grub screw DIN 913-M8x27, St, bright zinc-platedm = 85 g

1 pce. 0.0.387.03

Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Set 8 160x80 D25Fully machined and pre-assembled1 slide 8 160x80 D25, Al, natural anodized2 Clamp Blocks 8 160x80 D252 Caps 8 160x802 Clamp-Block Caps 8 160x80 D252 Slide Caps 8 160x80 D254 Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Units 8 D254 Shaft-Clamping Bushes 8 D254 grub screws DIN 914-M8x22, St, bright zinc-plated4 grub screws DIN 913-M8x27, St, bright zinc-plated2 Shafts D251 set 0.0.387.10

Shaft-ClampingBushes

For clamping Shafts D14 and D25.The Shaft-Clamping Bushes are fixed in the cavities ofProfiles 8 using grub screw DIN 913-M8.


Ball-BearingGuide Bush Sets

371

Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Unit 8 D14Steel sleeve, St, blackBall Bush D14, sealed both ends, maintenance-free1 grub screw DIN 914-M8x10, St, bright zinc-platedC = 620 NCo = 520 NMax. speed = 2 m/sm = 62 g1 pce. 0.0.386.12

Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Unit 8 D25Steel sleeve, St, blackBall Bush D25, sealed both ends, maintenance-free1 grub screw DIN 914-M8x22, St, bright zinc-platedC = 1,990 NCo = 1,670 NMax. speed = 2 m/sm = 300 g

1 pce. 0.0.387.12

Ball-BearingGuide BushUnits

Complete unit consisting of steel sleeve with press-fittedBall Bush. For high loads, re-greasing of the bearings isrecommended.

The Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Units are secured in thecavities of Profiles 8 by means of grub screw DIN 914-M8.The load on the slide must be applied from the directionopposite the grub screw.

372

Slide Cap 8 80x40 D14PA-GF, blackm = 13 g

1 pce. 0.0.386.08


1 pce. 0.0.387.08


1 pce. 0.0.386.06


1 pce. 0.0.387.06

Clamp-Block Cap 8 80x40 D14PA-GF, blackm = 14 g

1 pce. 0.0.386.09


1 pce. 0.0.387.09


1 pce. 0.0.386.07


Rounded face covering for cut profile end of the slidesor Clamp Blocks with appropriate bore.

Caps

Slide Caps

Clamp-BlockCaps

373


1 pce. 0.0.387.07

8.1.5 Ball-BushBlock Guides

Ball-bush block guide, size 40x40, Shaft D14

In terms of application and characteristics, the modularball-bush block guides are similar to those of the ball-bearing guide bushes. By separating the shafts, thedistance between the points of support can be selectedin accordance with the applied loads.Two special profiles, in sizes 40x40 and 60x60,enable the easy manufacture of Shaft-Clamp Blocks forshaft diameters 10, 14, 20, 25 and 30 mm.Matching Ball-Bush Blocks are produced from the sameprofiles by machining holes and press-fittingrecirculating Ball Bushes.The range of sizes and the different shaft diameters aredesigned to withstand applied loads ranging from 400 to2250 N at a maximum travelling speed of 2 m/s.The double-sided seal of the Ball Bush, together with ahigh-quality grease filling, guarantees a long servicelife, even under unfavourable operating conditions.It is recommended that an evaluation should be made ofthe load-bearing capacity and service life, together withan allowance for deflection of the guiding shafts in thecase of longer strokes.

Ball-bush block guides, size 40x40, Shafts D10 and D14

Ball-bush block guides, size 60x60, Shafts D20, D25 and D30

8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.5 Ball-Bush Block Guides

374

Ball-Bush Block GuidesGuide Alternatives

The ball-bush block guides allow versatile design.Dimension s can be adjusted for different supportwidths.


Mounting Levels8 40x40

The asymmetric structureof the Bearing Blocks andthe use of various screw-attachment areas offer aselection of constructionheights.

375

S0 =Co__P


So = Static load safety factor > 3Co = Static load factor in N

L = Service life in kmLh = Service life in hC = Dynamic load factor in NP = Load in N– = Mean slidev

speed in m/min

C__P

Lh = ( )3. in h

C__P

L = ( )3. 100 in km

1666____v

Load Specifications The various sizes permit slide loads of between 400 and2250 N. The maximum travelling speed is 2 m/s.

Assembly Tips Connection of Bearing Blocks with Profiles 8 or othercomponents is possible from the outside with the helpof T-Slot Nuts 8 St.

8 60x60

376

X

The Bearing Blocks can be secured to other profilesusing Direct Fastener 8 without any machining.Access to the fastener is from the profile end face.Where it is desired to attach to other components theymust be drilled and tapped M6.

An individual Ball Bush is unable to absorb any moment.It is therefore always necessary to use two shafts for aguide system, with at least two Ball Bushes beinglocated one after the other on a single shaft.The distances must be appropriate for the moment loads.


The blocks can be pinned in the areas marked(depending on requirements).

Bearing Blocks Individual components for constructing a ball-bushblock guide.

Ball-Bush Block GuidesAssembly Tips

The Shaft-Clamp Blocks hold and clamp the shafts.The shafts are clamped by means of appropriate grubscrews.

The Ball-Bush Blocks serve as the guide elements withintegral press-fitted recirculating Ball Bushes.

377

Shaft-Clamp Block 8 D10Shaft-Clamp Block Al, anodizedGrub screw DIN 913-M8x8, St, bright zinc-platedGrub screw DIN 913-M8x10, St, bright zinc-platedm = 100 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.401.01


1 pce., natural 0.0.401.03


1 pce., natural 0.0.402.01

Shaft-Clamp Block 8 D25Shaft-Clamp Block, Al, anodizedGrub screw DIN 913-M10x10, St, bright zinc-platedGrub screw DIN 913-M10x12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 240 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.402.03

Shaft-Clamp Block 8 D30Shaft-Clamp Block, Al, anodizedGrub screw DIN 913-M10x8, St, bright zinc-platedGrub screw DIN 913-M10x10, St, bright zinc-platedm = 220 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.402.05

378

Ball-Bush Block 8 D10Ball-Bush Block, Al, anodizedBall Bush D10, sealed both ends, maintenance-freeC = 500 NCo = 370 Nm = 105 g

1 pce. 0.0.401.02


1 pce., natural 0.0.401.04


1 pce. 0.0.402.02


1 pce., natural 0.0.402.04


1 pce., natural 0.0.402.06


Bearing Blocks

379

Block Caps

Block-End Cap Set 8 40x40PA-GF, blackBlock-end cap 8 40x40 rightBlock-end cap 8 40x40 leftm = 14 g1 set 0.0.401.11

Block-End Cap Set 8 60x60PA-GF, blackBlock-end cap 8 60x60 rightBlock-end cap 8 60x60 leftm = 30 g1 set 0.0.402.17

Block-Cap Set 8 D10PA-GF, blackBlock cap 8 D10 rightBlock cap 8 D10 leftm = 12 g

1 set 0.0.401.12


1 set 0.0.401.13


1 set 0.0.402.18


1 set 0.0.402.19


1 set 0.0.402.20

1 Block-End Cap Set and 3 Block-Cap Sets of theappropriate shaft diameter are required for each ball-bush block guide.

380

Ball Bushes Ball Bushes for the construction of ball-bushblock guides.

Sealed both ends, maintenance-free

Ball Bush D10d = 17 mm l = 26 mmm = 14.5 g1 pce. 0.0.401.19





Ball-Bush BlockProfiles

For use in constructing ball-bush block guides, inparticular with the item Ball Bushes. Also suitable forself-construction of pedestal bearings.

Ball-Bush Block Profile 8 40x40Al, anodizedA = 9.58 cm2 Ix =14.22 cm4 Iy =14.38 cm4

It = 9.95 cm4

m = 2.58 kg/m Wx = 6.77 cm3 Wy = 6.94 cm3


Ball-Bush Block Profile 8 60x60Al, anodizedA =23.05 cm2 Ix =76.03 cm4 Iy =75.65 cm4

It =77.49 cm4

m = 6.18 kg/m Wx =26.77 cm3 Wy =26.27 cm3



381

8.1.6 Shafts Can be used as guiding shafts for Roller Guides, C-RailGuides, ball-bearing guide bushes and ball-bush blockguides.Shaft D14 K is intended for special applications and iscorrosion-resistant black coating.

St, Cf 53, hardened, polishedHardness HRc 60 ± 2Roughness Ra = 0.3 μm, Rz = 1.6 μm

Shaft D6Hardening depth min. 0.4 mmRoundness 4 μmParallelism 5 μm/1000 mmm = 0.22 kg/mCut-off max. 3000 mm, bright 0.0.356.01



Shaft D14 KAlso corrosion-resistant coatingCut-off max. 3000 mm, black 0.0.294.55




8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.6 Shafts

382

8.1.7 Accessoriesfor Linear Slides

Slide Clamp 8 heavy-duty is used for securing guideslides on a supporting profile. It can be screw-connected under any carriage of item‘s linear slideswhere there is a clearance of 20 mm between the top ofthe supporting profile and the underside of the carriage.It is advisable to additionally pin Slide Clamp 8 heavy-duty to the sliding profile (dowel DIN 6325-5m6 x 30).

The special design of Slide Clamp 8 heavy-dutyprevents undue force being applied to the bearings as aresult of the clamping action.

Slide Clamp 8 heavy-dutyCompletem = 385 g

1 pce. 0.0.463.65

8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.7 Accessories for Linear Slides

Holding force for maximumClamping elements tightening torque of 15 Nm

dry Approx. 1500 N

oily Approx. 1000 N

Slide Clamp 8heavy-duty

Components for expanding the range of applications ofitem linear slides:> Slide Clamps for hand-operated linear slides> Limit stop for limiting mechanical movement> Magnetic Strip Cover Profile for integrating distancemeasuring systems into linear slides

383

Slide Clamp 8 S16Clamping jaw GS, bright zinc-platedClamping wedge GS, stainless, slide coatingClamp lever, blackWasher DIN 9021-5.3, St, bright zinc-platedm = 93 g1 pce. 0.0.356.35



Slide Clamp 8 S16 (S16 = thickness of the slidingprofile) is suitable for Roller Guides with a profile8 80x16 as the sliding profile.Slide Clamps 8 S28 and 8 S40 can be used incombination with Roller Guide 8 D14 and a Profile8 160x28 or Profile 8 160x40 as the sliding profile.

Typical arrangement of Slide Clamps over a groove inthe guide profile

Holding force for maximumClamping elements tightening torque of 5.5 Nm

dry Approx. 500 N

oily Approx. 200 N

Slide Clamps


384

Limit Stop A Limit Stop is required for each terminal position.The Limit Stop can also be located in the area of thegroove covered by a Timing Belt. Arrangement of theplastic buffer in the groove of the supporting profile.Grub screw M8x44 is secured in the opposing groove ofthe guide slide.

Limit Stop 8T-Slot Nut St M8, bright zinc-platedGrub screw DIN 916-M6x12, St, bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut M6x8 with thrust piece, St, bright zinc-platedNut DIN 508-M6x8, St, bright zinc-platedPlastic buffer ø 10x40 mm, PUR yellow, 90 Shore AGrub screw M8x44, St, bright zinc-platedWasher DIN 6340-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedHexagon nut DIN 6331-M8, St, bright zinc-platedm = 65 g

1 set 0.0.337.11

8. Dynamic Elements 8.1 Linear Slides 8.1.7 Accessories for Linear Slides

385

Magnetic Strip Cover Profile 8 AlAl, anodizedA = 0.17 cm2

m = 45 g/m1 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 0.0.337.52

Magnetic Strip Clamping Cord 8 D6NBR, blackm = 34 g/m1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.3.004.60

Magnetic StripCover Profile

To attach and protect distance measuring systems.The Magnetic Strip Cover Profile can be used asattachment and complete protection for commerciallyavailable magnetic strips (nominal width 5 mm (max.5.5 mm), nominal thickness 1.5 mm (max. 1.7 mm)in the groove of Profiles 8.Customised linear instrumentation and control systemscan be constructed by combining the Magnetic StripCover Profile with appropriate magnetic sensors andevaluation electronics.

The magnetic strip is inserted into the Magnetic StripCover Profile and is clamped along its length bypressing in the Magnetic Strip Clamping Cord. Thepreassembled unit can now be pressed into the grooveof Profiles 8. Compared with the technique for securingthe magnetic strip by means of adhesive bonding, theabove fastening technique is less susceptible to soiling,temperature changes etc.

As a result of the low shielding effect of the aluminiumprofile between the magnetic strip and the sensor, theprofile thickness (1 mm) can be included in thepermissible gap recommended by the manufacturer(dimension a).

386

Within the MB Building Kit System, power can besupplied to the slides of the Roller Guides, ball-bearingguide bushes and linear guide systems or any otherlinear-guided structural elements, such as doors etc.,using timing-belt drives, ball screws or chain drives.The drive elements allow flexible design of anynumber of axes of movement when combined with itemlinear slides.

8.2 Mechanical DriveElements

Timing-belt drives are particularly suitable for highspeeds and extended stroke lengths. A range of sizes,with flexible and heavy duty Timing Belts of differentwidths and different pulley diameters, are designed tosatisfy virtually any load and speed requirements.

Linear units driven by a Timing Belt mainly consist of asupporting profile with the corresponding linear slide,the sliding carriage and the components of the timing-belt drive mechanism.The Timing Belt is secured to the slide by means of aTiming-Belt Tensioner, turned through 180° by aTiming-Belt Reverse Unit at the end of the supportingprofile, routed back inside or outside the profile, turnedthrough 180° once again by a second Timing-BeltReverse Unit, and is then linked or clamped with theother end of the Timing Belt on the sliding carriage.

8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.1 Timing-Belt Drives

8.2.1 Timing-Belt Drives

387

In addition to acting as a guide for the belt, the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit can also be used as a coupling for anytype of shaft-driven mechanism. For this purpose, thepulley is in the form of a multi-spline hub or it can beindividually processed for a shaft-hub joint.The choice of suitable Timing-Belt Reverse Unit dependson the required forces and speeds or on the combinationof drive mechanism and gearbox.

Timing-Belt Reverse Units

Possibilities for combining linear guides andmechanical drive elements:

388

General function of bore and belt covers (exception:Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II)> Top belt cover (a) can be detached when used as belt drive> Timing pulley (b) with multi-spline hub or bore> Bores in basic shell (c) for mounting CouplingHousings, Adapter Flange, Bevel Gear Box and Ball ScrewUnit or for interconnecting Timing-Belt Reverse Units> Bottom belt cover (d) can be detached where space isrestricted

Reversal of the Timing Belt around 180°. The TimingBelt can be returned either inside or outside the profile.The timing pulley is provided with multi-spline toothingfor attaching drive units or Multi-Spline / AdapterShafts, or with a bore which can be machined for othershaft / hub connections. The housings of the Timing-Belt Reverse Units feature grooves for connecting toprofiles of the relevant Lines.

Possible parallel arrangement for double timing-beltdrive with double loading capacity.


Timing-Belt Reverse Units The special apertures in the Timing-Belt Reverse Unitcan also be used to turn the belt through 90°, with thereturn path being located at any distance from thesliding carriage. If necessary, an additional slide canalso be powered, offset at 90° from the first, using thesame drive mechanism.

Connection of Timing-Belt Reverse Units eitherwith Multi-Spline Shafts or, for distances in excess of500 mm, with Adapter Shafts, hollow shafts orSynchroniser Shafts.

389

Timing-BeltReverse Units 5

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 5 40 R10 VK 14Timing-Belt Reverse Unit, GD-Al, blackBall-bearing timing pulley with multi-spline hub,hub geometry VK14 for Multi-Spline Shaft VK14DIN ISO 14 - 6x11x14, hub length 18 mmOne revolution corresponds to 140 mmTiming Belt width 10 mmFrictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioningof the Timing Belt: MR = 0.05 NmMax. load: MD = 4 NmTiming Belt length in the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit for90° reversal : 110 mm180° reversal (outer dimension 64) : 150 mm180° reversal (outer dimension 80) : 135 mm2 Universal-Fastening Sets 5, bright zinc-platedPitch p = 5 mm Number of teeth z = 28m = 262 g1 pce. 0.0.410.01

The profiles must be rounded at the joint to the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit.

Mounting at a height of 40 mm in the groove of Profile 5with Universal-Fastening Set 5.

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 5 40 R10 can be used toreverse and drive Timing Belt R10 T5 in conjunctionwith Profiles 5.The housing of the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit has beenprepared for attaching Adapter Plates and CouplingHousings D30 and for accommodating Centring PieceD50-D22.

390

Timing-BeltReverse Units 840 R25

The profile edge must be rounded at the joint to theTiming-Belt Reverse Unit.

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 5 40 R10 with BoreTiming-Belt Reverse Unit, GD-Al, blackBall-bearing timing pulley with bore ø 8H7,reborable up to max. ø 15 mmHub length 18 mmOne revolution corresponds to 140 mmTiming Belt width 10 mmFrictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioningof the Timing Belt: MR = 0.05 NmMax. load: MD = 4 NmTiming Belt length in the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit for90° reversal : 110 mm180° reversal (outer dimension 64) : 150 mm180° reversal (outer dimension 80) : 135 mm2 Universal-Fastening Sets 5, bright zinc-platedPitch p = 5 mm Number of teeth z = 28m = 277 g1 pce. 0.0.410.06

Timing-BeltReverse Unit 5


Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 is suitable forreversing and driving Timing Belt R25 T10 for linearunits of Profiles 8. The emergence dimension of theTiming Belt is 40 mm.The housing of the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit has beenprepared for attaching Adapter Plates and CouplingHousings D55 and for accommodating Centring PieceD55-D22.

391

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 mounted at a heightof 40 mm in the groove of the Profile 8 using UniversalFastener 8 and special T-Slot Nut or in the core boreusing Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8 and washerDIN 125-8.4.

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 VK14Timing-Belt Reverse Unit, GD-Zn, blackBall-bearing timing pulley with multi-spline hub,hub geometry VK14 for Multi-Spline Shaft VK14DIN ISO 14 - 6x11x14, hub length 30 mmOne revolution corresponds to 150 mmTiming Belt width 25 mmFrictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioningof the Timing Belt: MR = 0.30 NmMax. load: MD = 20 NmTiming Belt length in the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit for90° reversal : 140 mm180° reversal (emerg. on 100 mm side) : 160 mm180° reversal (emerg. on 80 mm side) : 200 mm2 Universal Fasteners 82 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x20, St, bright zinc-plated1 special T-Slot Nut G-St M81 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x20, St, bright zinc-plated1 washer DIN 125-8,4 St, bright zinc-platedPitch p = 10 mm Number of teeth z = 15m = 1.3 kg1 pce. 0.0.337.26

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 with BoreTiming-Belt Reverse Unit, GD-Zn, blackBall-bearing timing pulley with bore ø 8H7,reborable up to max. ø 15 mmHub length 30 mmOne revolution corresponds to 150 mmTiming Belt width 25 mmFrictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioningof the Timing Belt: MR = 0.30 NmMax. load: MD = 20 NmTiming Belt length in the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit for90° reversal : 140 mm180° reversal (outer dimension 80) : 160 mm180° reversal (outer dimension 100) : 200 mm2 Universal Fasteners 82 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x20, St, brightzinc-plated1 special T-Slot Nut G-St M81 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x20, St, brightzinc-plated1 washer DIN 125-8.4, St, bright zinc-platedPitch p = 10 mm Number of teeth z = 15m = 1.3 kg1 pce. 0.0.337.34

392

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R25 VK14Timing-Belt Reverse Unit, GD-Zn, blackBall-bearing timing pulley with multi-spline hub,hub geometry VK14 for Multi-Spline Shaft VK14DIN ISO 14 - 6x11x14, hub length 29 mmOne revolution corresponds to 280 mmTiming Belt width 25 mmFrictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioning of theTiming Belt:(Emergence dim. 40) MR = 1.05 Nm(Emergence dim. 80) MR = 0.55 NmMax. load: MD = 28 NmTiming Belt length in the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit for90° reversal : 190 mm180° reversal (emergence dim. 40) : 360 mm180° reversal (emergence dim. 80) : 340 mm2 Universal Fasteners 82 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x30, St, brightzinc-plated2 special T-Slot Nuts GS M8Pitch p = 10 mm Number of teeth z = 28m = 3.3 kg1 pce. 0.0.366.02

Timing BeltReverse Units 880 R25


Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R25 mounted at a profileheight of 40 mm in the groove of Profile 8 using Univer-sal Fastener 8 and special T-Slot Nut or at a profileheight of 80 mm by splitting the special T-Slot Nut at thespecified break point.

The variation in the emergence dimensions from 80 mmto 40 mm is achieved by internal rerouting of the TimingBelt.The Timing Belt is routed with its smooth reverse sideover the reversing pulleys.

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R25 is suitable forreversing and driving Timing Belt R25 T10 for linearunits of Profile 8. The emergence dimension of theTiming Belt is 80 m or 40 mm.To protect the Timing Belt against damage, the profilesmust be rounded at the joint to the Timing-BeltReverse Unit.The housing of the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit has beenprepared for attaching Adapter Plates and CouplingHousings D80 and for accommodating Centring Piece D60.

393

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R25 VK32Timing-Belt Reverse Unit, GD-Zn, blackBall-bearing timing pulley with multi-spline hub,Hub geometry VK32 for Multi-Spline Shaft VK32DIN ISO 14 - 6x26x32, hub length 29 mmOne revolution corresponds to 280 mmTiming Belt width 25 mmFrictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioning of theTiming Belt:(Emergence dim. 40) MR = 1.05 Nm(Emergence dim. 80) MR = 0.55 NmMax. load: MD = 60 NmTiming Belt length in the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit for90° reversal : 190 mm180° reversal (emergence dim. 40) : 360 mm180° reversal (emergence dim. 80) : 340 mm2 Universal Fasteners 82 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x30, St, brightzinc-plated2 special T-Slot Nuts GS M8Pitch p = 10 mm Number of teeth z = 28m = 3.2 kg1 pce. 0.0.366.11

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R25 with BoreTiming-Belt Reverse Unit, GD-Zn, blackBall-bearing timing pulley with bore ø 11H7,reborable up to max. ø 50 mmHub length 29 mmOne revolution corresponds to 280 mmTiming Belt width 25 mmFrictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioning of theTiming Belt:(Emergence dim. 40) MR = 1,05 Nm(Emergence dim. 80) MR = 0,55 NmMax. load: MD = 60 NmTiming Belt length in the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit for90° reversal : 190 mm180° reversal (emergence dim. 40) : 360 mm180° reversal (emergence dim. 80) : 340 mm2 Universal Fasteners 82 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x30, St, brightzinc-plated2 special T-Slot Nuts GS M8Pitch p = 10 mm Number of teeth z = 28m = 3.3 kg1 pce. 0.0.366.07

394


The profiles must be rounded where they join theReverse Unit in order to protect the Timing Belt.

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II is a particularlycompact Timing-Belt Reverse Unit for driving TimingBelt R50 T10. It is fastened to the core bores of Profiles8 (cross-sections of 80x80 and above).The timing pulley of Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50II VK32 features a multi-spline hub for accommodatingMulti-Spline Shaft VK32.The housing allows connection of coupling D80 VK32.The hub of the version with the bore can be machined toa maximum diameter of ø 36 mm or diameter ø 30 mmwith key.

Timing-Belt Reverse Units8 80 R50 II

Connection of Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 IIbased on a profile height of 120 mm (return of the Ti-ming Belt in the profile cavity) or a profile height of 80mm with Standard-Fastening Sets 8. To do this, the Ti-ming-Belt Reverse Unit is partially dismantled, securedto the profile and then refitted.The emergence dimension of the Timing Belt is 80 mm.

90° reversal of Timing Belt R50 T10.The opening for the Timing Belt is marked out on theinside and must be removed from the cap.If for design reasons the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit isfitted without a cap, the length of the Timing Belt in theReverse Unit reduces by 10 mm.

395

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II VK32Timing-Belt Reverse Unit, Al, blackBall-bearing timing pulley with multi-spline hub,Hub geometry VK32 for Multi-Spline Shaft VK32DIN ISO 14 - 6x26x32, hub length 75 mmOne revolution corresponds to 280 mmTiming Belt width 50 mmFrictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioning of theTiming Belt: MR = 1.05 NmMax. load: MD = 100.00 NmTiming Belt length in the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit for90° reversal : 220 mm180° reversal : 300 mmPitch p = 10 mm Number of teeth z= 28m = 3.9 kg1 pce. 0.0.426.19

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II with BoreTiming-Belt Reverse Unit, Al, blackBall-bearing timing pulley with bore ø 16H7,reborable up to max. ø 36 mmHub length 75 mmOne revolution corresponds to 280 mmTiming Belt width 50 mmFrictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioning of theTiming Belt: MR = 1.05 NmMax. load: MD = 100.00 NmTiming Belt length in the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit for90° reversal : 220 mm180° reversal : 300 mmPitch p = 10 mm Number of teeth z = 28m = 4.2 kg1 pce. 0.0.426.21

396

Timing-Belt Counter-ReverseUnit 8 R25

Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Unit 8 R25 is asupplementary drive element for Timing-Belt ReverseUnits 8 40 R25 and 8 80 R25. It is used to reverseTiming Belt R25 T10 with an emergence dimension of40 mm around 2x90°. The Counter-Reverse Unitrelocates the axis drive from the end of the axis to thecarriage. The carriage and drive assembly is thenintegrated into the profile construction, while the axisitself becomes the moving element. This arrangement,often in the form of a vertical axis, can often partlyincrease the travelling speed and useful load.The unit is already provided with bores for fittingProximity Switch 8.

Possible connection to Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40R25 / 80 R25.

Moving support profile with stationary carriage unitand drive.

Carriages arranged at right angles with central drive.


If the Counter-Reverse Unit is used, the Timing-BeltTensioner is employed to attach and tension the TimingBelt on the supporting profile.

397

Timing-BeltCounter-ReverseUnit 8 80 R50

Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 guidesTiming Belt R50 T10 with an emergence dimension of 80mm towards Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II.

Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Unit 8 80 R50Housing Al, black2 caps, PA, black2 ball-bearing reverse rollers, for Timing Belt width 50 mmFrictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioning of theTiming Belt:MR = 0.75 NmTiming Belt length in the Counter-Reverse Unit: 2x202 mmm = 4.7 kg

1 pce. 0.0.362.07

Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Unit 8 R25Counter-Reverse Unit, Al, blackBall-bearings, for Timing Belt width 25 mmFrictional moment with 1‰ pre-tensioning of theTiming Belt:Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 MR = 0.30 NmTiming-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R25 MR = 0.60 NmTiming Belt length in Counter-Reverse Unit: 2x105 mmm = 770 g

1 pce. 0.0.362.00

398


Timing Belts Timing Belts are positive driving elements which areused to perform precise linear movements. Theirfeatures include low noise, low maintenance and lowplay. The fact that they are made of polyurethane-moulded steel wires mean they are also sufficientlyelastic to absorb and dampen impacts.item Timing Belts are finely stranded, giving them highflexural strength. They are therefore ideal for use inTiming-Belt Reverse and Counter-Reverse Units and arenot compatible with standard (commercially available)Timing Belts.The overall length of the Timing Belt is calculated fromthe length of the supporting profile and the Timing Beltsegments located in the Timing-Belt Reverse Units.The pre-tensioning should be larger than or equal to theexpected load.The pre-tensioning and operating load together shouldnot exceed the maximum permissible load. To set thecalculated pre-tensioning, it is advisable to measure theelongation during the tensioning process.

Timing Belt R10 T5PUR, black with integrated steel wiresMax. load 300 N1‰ expansion (1 mm over 1000 mm length)corresponds to a pre-tensioning of 75 Nm = 23 g/mCut-off max. 50 m 0.0.400.04

Timing Belt R25 T10PUR , black with integrated steel wiresMax. load 2400 N1‰ expansion (1 mm over 1000 mm length)corresponds to a pre-tensioning of 500 Nm = 125 g/mCut-off max. 50 m 0.0.337.10

Timing Belt R50 T10PUR , black with integrated steel wiresMax. load 4200 N1‰ expansion (1 mm over 1000 mm length)corresponds to a pre-tensioning of 1000 Nm = 250 g/mCut-off max. 50 m 0.0.426.03

Timing Belt No. of teeth h1 h2p

R10 T5 5 1 mm 2.2 mm

R25 T10 10 2 mm 4.5 mm

R50 T10 10 2 mm 4.5 mm

399

Timing-Belt Tensioner

Fastening and tensioning the Timing Belt on a slidingcarriage using Tensioning Blocks and Fixing Block andthe appropriate bolts.Where high loads are involved, Tensioning Block 8 andFixing Block 8 will need to be pinned (dowel ISO 2338-ø 6 mm). The position of the dowels is indicated by theprepared bores ø 5.5 mm.

For fastening and tensioning the Timing Belt on asliding carriage or support profile (Line 8 only) usingCounter-Reverse Unit 8.A Tensioning Block is required for each end of theTiming Belt.The number of Fixing Blocks is determinedby the application.

5 R10

8 R25

5 R10 8 R25 8 R50

a = hexagon nut DIN985 M3 M6 M6

b = Hexagon Socket Head M3x50 M6x80 M6x100Cap Screw DIN912

c = Hexagon Socket Head M3x60 M6x100 M6x140Cap Screw DIN912

400

Timing-Belt Tensioner, Tensioning Block 5 R10Tensioning Block, GD-Al, blackInterlocking fixing piece, GD-Al, blackm = 8.5 g1 set 0.0.400.07

Timing-Belt Tensioner, Fixing Block 5 R10Fixing Block, GD-Al, black1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M4x10, St,bright zinc-plated1 T-Slot Nut 5 St M4, bright zinc-plated2 hexagon nuts DIN 985-M3, self-locking,St, bright zinc-plated2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M3x50, St,bright zinc-platedm = 13 g1 set 0.0.400.06

Timing-Belt Tensioner, Tensioning Block 8 R25Tensioning Block, GD-Zn, blackInterlocking fixing piece, GD-Zn, black

m = 136 g1 set 0.0.337.07

Timing Belt Tensioner, Fixing Block 8 R25Fixing Block, GD-Zn, black1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x25, St,bright zinc-plated1 T-Slot Nut 8 St M6, bright zinc-plated2 hexagon nuts DIN 985-M6, self-locking,St, bright zinc-plated2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6x80, St,bright zinc-platedm = 128 g1 set 0.0.337.09

Timing-Belt Tensioner, Tensioning Block 8 R50Tensioning Block, Al, black anodizedInterlocking fixing piece, Al, black anodizedm = 205 g

1 set 0.0.426.04

Timing-Belt Tensioner, Fixing Block 8 R50Fixing Block Al, black anodized2 hexagon nuts DIN 985-M6, self-locking,St, bright zinc-plated2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6x100, St,bright zinc-platedm = 119 g

1 set 0.0.426.05


Timing-BeltTensioners8 R50

401

8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.2 Chain Drives

8.2.2 Chain Drives The chain drive is ideal for a whole range ofmechanical drives. The compact design of the driveelements is a particular feature. The fact that the chainruns in the groove of the Profile 8 throughout meansthat the drive force can be transmitted with completeprotection and reliability.

Possible applications for chain drives in the MBBuilding Kit System include:> as a traction device for linear axis slides (chain drive)> as a roller conveyor drive (chain-driven conveyorrollers, see also section 6.4, Chain Driven ConveyorRollers)> as a transfer medium for workpiece carriers andproducts located directly on the chain (chain transfer)

An item chain drive essentially consists of the followingcomponents:> Chain ½“> Chain Link (removable)> 2 Chain Reverse Units> Chain Guide Profile 8> Chain Counter-Reverse Unit, an optional device whichallows the motor to be mounted at any desired position(if drive is not possible directly at the Chain Reverse Unit)Profiles 8 in either light or standard grade with a sectiondimension of 80 mm provide ideal frames for chaindrives, particularly Stand Profile 8 80x40 K60 withintegrated cable conduit.

Chain Guidance in theProfile Groove

The chain is guided in the profile groove. It can beaccessed through the groove and can be used to transferdrive forces.No connection elements can be fitted in the profilegrooves where the chain is run.

InnovationGerman patentpending

402


Chain Guidancein the ProfileGroove

Chain ½“St, nickel-platedPitch p = 12.7 mm corresponding to ½“Operating load = max. 1.400 NElongation at 1,400 N = 2.5 - 3 ‰m = 215 gCut-off max. 100 m in 1“ intervals 0.0.465.17

Chain Link ½“ (removable)St, nickel-platedm = 2 g

1 set 0.0.465.39

Chain Guide Profile 8PA, blackm = 22 g/m

1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.463.50

Calculating the chain length:1. Chain drive with two Chain Reverse Units 8 80:Lchain = 2 x L + 472.6 mm2. Chain drive with two Chain Reverse Units 8 80 andone Chain Counter-Reverse Unit 8:Lchain = 2 x L + 665.1 mmThe exact length and precise number of chain links isarrived at by dividing the calculated chain length by 12.7mm (= ½“) and rounding up to an even number. Onechain link is then subtracted, such that the cut chainalways has an odd number of links. Overall length of thechain = cut chain plus removable link.Note: In view of the fact that the chain stretches underload during operation, it may be necessary, dependingon the length involved, to use a chain which is shorterthan calculated. This adjustment can be performed at theinstallation stage.

Chain Guide Profile 8 encloses the Chain. The profile isinserted into the profile groove.

The Chain Reverse Units are screw-connected into thecore bores in the end faces of the frame profiles.The Chain Guide Profile must be cut 50 mm longer thanthe aluminium profile, since it must project 25 mm intothe Reverse Unit at each end.

403

The Chain Reverse Unit incorporates integrated chaintensioning block and clamp.

It is possible to fit motors and couplings directly to theChain Reverse Unit.The Chain can be driven directly using the ChainReverse Units or the Chain Counter-Reverse Unit. Thesprocket wheels on the Chain Reverse Units areavailable with multi-spline hub VK14 or with a bore forindividual machining.

Chain Reverse Unit 8 80 VK14Chain Reverse Unit, GD-Zn, black, pre-assembledBall-bearing sprocket wheel, z = 16 (z = number of teeth)One revolution corresponds to 203.2 mmHub with multi-spline DIN ISO 14-6x11x14, hub length 30 mmMax. load: MD = 20 NmTensioning Block, GD-Zn, black, pre-assembledFastening screws, St, black2 caps, PA, blackChain length in Reverse Unit 236.3 mmm = 1.1 kg1 pce. 0.0.463.37

Chain Reverse Unit 8 80 with BoreChain Reverse Unit, GD-Zn, black, pre-assembledBall-bearing sprocket wheel, z = 16 (z = number of teeth)One revolution corresponds to 203.2 mmHub with bore D8, reborable up to max. ø 15 mm,Hub length 30 mmMax. load: MD = 20 NmTensioning Block, GD-Zn, black, pre-assembledFastening screws, St, black2 caps, PA, blackChain length in Reverse Unit 236.3 mmm = 1.1 kg1 pce. 0.0.463.75

Chain ReverseUnits 8 80

Chain Reverse Units 8 80 are used for reversing anddriving Chain ½“.They are screwed into the end faces of Profiles 8 at aheight of 80 mm.

404

The Chain Counter-Reverse Unit is screwed directly tothe Support Profile. The Chain Guide Profile must beinterrupted at this point in order to remove the chainfrom the profile groove.Drive motors can be fitted using the Adapter Plate.The sprocket wheel hub and the Adapter Plate of theChain Counter-Reverse Unit must be machinedindividually. The sprocket wheel is fitted directly ontothe motor gearbox output shaft which also provides thenecessary bearing arrangement.

Chain Counter-Reverse Unit 8Housing GK-Al, black, pre-assembled2 reversing wheels, St, with ball bearingsDrive wheel with centric bore, St, c =16reborable up to ø 24 mm or ø 20 mm with parallel keywayto DIN 6885Adapter Plate with clamping elements, Al, naturalFastening screws, St, blackT-Slot Nut 8 St 2xM8-50, St, bright zinc-plated4 caps, PA, blackMax. load: MD = 35 NmChain length in Counter-Reverse Unit 306.8 mmm = 3.0 kg

1 pce. 0.0.463.91

The Chain can be tensioned by moving the motor andsliding Adapter Plate Assembly within the ChainCounter-Reverse Unit.

Chain Counter-Reverse Unit 8

The Chain Counter-Reverse Unit provides a means ofmoving the drive to any position on the chain guide.


405

Chain Carrier 8Connecting block, St, blackChain pick-up, St, black2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6x55, St, black2 hexagon nuts DIN 985-M6, St, blackm = 300 g1 set 0.0.463.46

Chain Drives forLinear Slides

A chain guided in the profile groove is a highly compactdesign for driving a linear slide. The supporting profileaccommodates both the drive chain and the Shaft-ClampProfiles. The carriage is connected to the drive chain inthe groove by means of the Chain Carrier.

Chain Carrier 8 connects the drive chain and thecarriage of the linear slide.The connecting block is fastened to the carriage andthe chain pick-up is inserted into the chain. After thecarriage has been mounted onto the slide, thecomponents are screwed together.

Options for fastening the Chain Carrier.The connecting block must also be pinned (dowel ISO2338-ø 6 mm) under high loads. The position of thedowels is determined by the ø 5.5 mm holes which havebeen prepared.

Chain Carrier 8

406

8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.3 Ball Screw Units

8.2.3 Ball Screw Units Ball Screw Units KGT are suitable for use as a drivemechanism for linear slides, particularly for low speedsand short strokes. They feature high precision, highefficiency, high rigidity of the drive system and lowmechanical wear:> For use in linear units, conveyors, handling devices,work bench design and any other fixtures> Powered by crank handle, hand wheel, AC/DC motors,stepping motors and hydraulic or pneumatic drivemechanisms> Choice of power input end> Can be combined with any type of guide> Individual components are replaceable> Full compatibility with MB Building Kit System products

Suitable for combination with all item linear slides.The necessary guidance for the yoke must be providedby the external linear slide.The driving nut is suspended on gimbals to preventstrains and allow for slight errors in alignment with the load.The Ball Screw Unit KGT can be driven from the fixed orfloating bearing end.The Ball Screw Unit should be so positioned as toensure that the main load is a tensile load from the fixedbearing end (i.e. fixed bearing at the top in a vertical unit).The maximum stroke velocities of the Ball Screw Unitdepend on the spindle length (see diagram opposite).Under axial compression, the buckling behaviour of thespindle must be taken into consideration.

407


The service life of the spindle / drive nut combinationcan be calculated as a function of the axial load anddrive speed.

Direct drive connection with Adapter Plate 120x80.Various drives adaptable using the Adapter Shaft andAdapter Flange Universal (far left).Direct connection of Bevel Gear Box WG with AdapterPlate 80x80. Drives can then be connected with theCoupling Housings (Section 8.3 Accessories forMechanical Drive Elements) to Bevel Gear Box WG(immediate left).

Direct connection of Timing-Belt Reverse Units 8 40R25 or 8 80 R25 in connection with Fastening SetsU40-WG and U80-WG (far left).Parallel arrangement of Ball Screw Units in connectionwith Bevel Gear Boxes (immediate left).

The yoke adapter can be matched to the height of theslide by means of grub screws DIN 913-M5x5.The position of the connecting thread M8 for securingthe slide can be either central or offset relative to theslide depending on the position the yoke adapter is used in.It is important to ensure that the yoke adapter is alignedto the spindle and profile. The maximum permissibleangular deviation must not be exceeded.

Connection dimensions of the Bearing Blocks at thefloating (L) and fixed (F) bearing ends. Depending onthe drive type selected, the Bearing Blocks and driveholders may need to be machined.The hub is reborable up to max. ø 17 mm orø 14 mm and insertion of a parallel keyway as perDIN 6885 T1.

408

Supporting profile with integrated lip seals, fixed andfloating bearing blocks, specially designed ball-bearingcollet mechanism for holding the spindle, end of strokedamping, secure yoke, playminimized drive nut suspendedon gimbals, rolled spindleGreasing: GLEITMO 810,Lubrication interval: every 400-500 service hours withlithium-basedball-bearing grease (not general purpose grease)Accelerationmax .= 5 m/s2

Stroke lengthmax. = 2762 mmThrust loadmax. = 1000 N

Ball Screw Unit KGT 20x5Pitch p = 5 mmStroke velocitymax. = 0.25 m/sEfficiency of overall unit = 80 %Backlashmax.(spindle/drivenut) = 0.04 mmm = 5 kg + H · 0.011 kg/mm1 set, hub for Multi-Spline Shaft VK14 0.0.414.33

1 set, bored and keyed to cust. specif. 0.0.414.51

Ball Screw Unit KGT 20x20Pitch p = 20 mmStroke velocitymax. = 1.00 m/sEfficiency of overall unit = 85 %Backlashmax.(spindle/drivenut) = 0.08 mmm = 5 kg + H · 0.011 kg/mm1 set, hub for Multi-Spline Shaft VK14 0.0.414.32

1 set, bored and keyed to cust. specif. 0.0.414.50

Ball Screw UnitsKGT

8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.3 Ball Screw Units

409

The Bevel Gear Boxes with special kinematics and theability to combine several Bevel Gear Boxes allows flexi-ble positioning of drives and linear units.

The geometry for connecting multi-spline hub to Multi-Spline Shaft or solid shaft ø 30 mm can be changed byusing Connecting Shaft U-WG or the Adapter Shaft.

8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.4 Bevel Gear Boxes

8.2.4 Bevel Gear Boxes

The diagram opposite is used for calculating thepermissible torques M and speeds n of the Bevel GearBoxes. For loads in the continuous rated zone,continuous operation is permissible.In the intermittent rated zone, operating times must bereduced accordingly.

Modular design of Bevel Gear Box with aluminium housing and Bearing Blocks

Bevel Gear Boxes can be used between a particular drivemechanism and a linear axis, consisting of a guide andeither a timing-belt drive or a Ball Screw Unit. In thisarrangement, the induced torque is turned through 90°.In addition to this reversing action, alternative versionswith different kinematics also permit distribution of theinput torque with the choice of direction of rotation ofthe output shafts.Subsequent changeover to other kinematics is also possible.Bevel Gear Boxes feature high efficiency, have lowbacklash gears and low mechanical wear.> For use in conjunction with linear and rotary units,conveyors, handling devices, lifting systems andother fixtures> Powered by crank handle, hand wheel, AC/DCmotors, stepping motors and hydraulic or pneumaticdrive mechanisms> Can be combined with timing-belt drives andBall Screw Units> Can be connected to any external drive mechanism> Individual components are replaceable> Facility for subsequent conversion to other kinematics> Compact external dimensions> Full compatibility with MB Building Kit System products

Bevel Gear Box between a drive mechanism and a linear axis

410

Box, box lid and Bearing Blocks,Al, black anodizedStraight-toothed ball-bearing bevel gear pairs, made ofhigh strength steel with minimal backlash andwear-resistant surfacePrelubricated, maintenance-freeGear ratio i = 1 : 1Nominal torque Mnom = 10 NmNominal speed nnom = 400 min-1

Nominal power Pnom = 0.419 kWTorque Mmax. = 28 NmSpeed nmax. = 1000 min-1

Power Pmax. = 1.173 kWService life L = 10,000 hPlay angle �max. = 20 ’

Bevel Gear Box WG 90°Efficiency = 93 %m = 2.0 kg1 pce. 0.0.408.10

Bevel Gear Box WG 180°Efficiency = 90 %m = 2.65 kg1 pce. 0.0.408.20

Bevel Gear Box WG 180° DEfficiency = 91 %m = 2.77 kg1 pce. 0.0.408.25

Bevel Gear Box WG 360°Efficiency = 87 %m = 3.40 kg

1 pce. 0.0.408.26

Bevel Gear Box WG 360° DEfficiency = 88 %m = 3.41 kg

1 pce. 0.0.408.27

Bevel GearBoxes WG

8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.4 Bevel Gear Boxes

411

8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.5 Accessories for Bevel Gear Boxes

Bearing Blocks WG Bearing Blocks for changing or extending the Bevel GearBox to other kinematics.The Bearing Block can be pinned to the gear housing(dowel DIN 7-4m6x20).

Bearing Block H-WG used as bearing and connectionpoint when relocating the drive / output point.

Extending the Bevel Gear Box WG 90° by Bearing BlockK-WG to produce a WG 180°.Bearing Block K-WG gives an output by meshing withthe internal bevel gear.

Conversion of a WG 90° into a WG 180° by means ofBearing Block H-WG and Synchroniser Shaft WG.Bearing Block H-WG in combination with SynchroniserShaft WG provides a continuous connection with theopposing bevel gear.

8.2.5 Accessories for BevelGear Boxes

These system elements simplify the use of Bevel GearBoxes. They enable changes to be made to thekinematics and allow modular combination of BevelGear Boxes with other dynamic elements.

412


SynchroniserShaft WG

For torque transmission between two Bearing Blocks(1xK-WG, 1xH-WG).Sealing Plugs for sealing the Bevel Gear Box.Grease the Multi-Spline Shaft.

Synchroniser Shaft WGMulti-Spline Shaft DIN ISO 14 - 6x11x14, St, C 45 k2 Snap Rings W2 Sealing Plugs NWm = 85 g

1 pce. 0.0.408.22

Bearing Block K-WGAl, blackBall-bearing bevel gear2 connecting pinsSeal and Sealing PlugTightening torque Mmax. = 14 Nmm = 700 g

1 set 0.0.408.00

Bearing Block H-WGAl, blackBall-bearing hollow shaft2 connecting pinsSeal and Sealing PlugTightening torque Mmax. = 14 Nmm = 630 g

1 set 0.0.408.13

Bearing BlocksWG

413

Fastening Setsfor Bevel GearBoxes

Fastening Set U40-WGLocating profile 80x80x9, Al, blackCentring piece D50-D22Connecting Shaft U-WG3 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M6x55, St, blackCirclip Nm = 185 g

set 0.0.408.23

Fastening Set U80-WGAdapter Plate 120x80Centring Piece D60-D60Centring Piece D50-D50Connecting Shaft U-WGCirclip N4 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x16, St, bright zinc-plated2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x50, St, black2 hexagon nuts DIN 936-M8, St, blackm = 320 g

1 set 0.0.408.24

Direct attachment of drives and Timing-Belt ReverseUnits 8 40 R25, 8 80 R25 and 8 80 R50 inconjunction with Fastening Sets U40-WG and U80-WGor Adapter Plates 120x80 and 80x80. Various drivesadaptable using the Adapter Shaft or the couplings.

414

ConnectingShaft

Connecting Shaft U-WG allows the torque to betransferred between two multi-spline hubs. Particularlysuitable for connecting Bevel Gear Boxes and Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 or 8 80 R25. Grease theMulti-Spline Shaft.

Connecting Shaft U-WGMulti-Spline Shaft DIN ISO 14 - 6x11x14, St, C 45 kSnap Ring Wm = 39 g

1 pce. 0.0.408.21


Axial movement is prevented by a Snap Ring W14 fittedto the Bevel Gear Box and by a Circlip N14 fitted in thepulley of Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 or 8 80 R25.

Sealing Plug for sealing the Bevel Gear Box to preventlubricant emerging.Axial movement of Sealing Plug NW is prevented bySnap Ring W14. (Section 8.3 Accessories forMechanical Drive Elements)

Sealing Plug N with sealing effect in the bevel gear hub.Sealing Plug NW with sealing effect in the bevel gearhub and on the Multi-Spline Shaft.

Sealing Plug NNBR, blackHardness 70 Sh Am = 3 g1 pce. 0.0.408.17

Sealing Plug NWNBR, blackHardness 70 Sh Am = 3 g

1 pce. 0.0.408.18

Sealing Plugs

415

8.3 Accessories forMechanical Drive Elements

8. Dynamic Elements 8.3 Accessories for Mechanical Drive Elements 8.3.1 Couplings

The accessories for the mechanical drive elements include:> Couplings, Shafts and Adapter Plates for connectingmotors and drive elements> Limit Switches for integrating the mechanical driveelements in controllers

Between the mechanical drive elements (Timing-BeltReverse Units, Ball Screw Units, Bevel Gear Boxes) andthe drive, it is possible to use couplings for suppressingand compensating angular errors and radial or axial offset.The use of coupling means that a plug-type connectionis possible between the drive and mechanical driveelements, thereby facilitating assembly and maintenance.The various output shafts of the gears and / or drivesare easily matched by machining the Coupling Half onthe drive side.Proven, plug-type Multi-Spline Shafts are used betweenthe second Coupling Half and the mechanical driveelements in order to provide a shaft-hub connection.There is no need to machine the relevant Coupling Halfor the mechanical drive elements.In addition to the connection of the rotating elementsdescribed above, the casings of the mechanical driveelements must have a static connection to the drives.This is achieved by various Coupling Housings whichare adapted in length and diameter to the variouscouplings. Universal Coupling Adapter Plates, whichhave to be provided with fastening bores and centringdiameters for the relevant drives, enable the drive to besecured to the Coupling Housing.

The connection dimensions and the permissible torquerange (MD < 8 Nm) make Coupling D30 ideally suited foruse with Ball Screw Units (Ball Screw Units KGT; Cent-ring Piece D50-D50), Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 5 40R10 with multi-spline VK 14 (Centring Piece D50-D22)and (optionally) Bevel Gear Boxes WG (Centring PieceD50-D50).

The connection dimensions and the permissible torquerange (MD < 50 Nm) make Coupling D55 ideally suitedfor use with Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 withmulti-spline VK 14 (Centring Piece D50-D22) and(optionally) Bevel Gear Boxes WG (Centring Piece D50-D50; note torque limit 28 Nm!).

Coupling D80 is used with an appropriately sizedCoupling Housing for the purpose of transferring thehigh torque (MD = 100 Nm) of Timing-Belt Reverse Units8 80 R25 and 8 80 R50 II with multi-spline VK 32.The Coupling Housing has a corresponding CentringPiece (ø 60 mm) for the Timing-Belt Reverse Units.

8.3.1 Couplings

416

Coupling D30

MD < 8 Nm

Coupling D55

MD < 50 Nm

Ball Screw Units KGT

20x5: MD < 1 Nm20x20: MD < 4 Nm

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit5 40 R10 with VK14

MD < 4 Nm


MD < 20 Nm


MD < 60 Nm

Timing-Belt Reverse Unit8 80 R50 II with VK32

MD < 100 Nm

Bevel Gear Box WG

MD < 28 Nm

Connecting Shaft VK14 R10/KGTCoupling Half D30 VK14Coupling Insert D30Coupling Half D30 D6

(Machining required)

Centring Piece D50-D50Coupling Housing 8 D30Coupling Adapter Plate D30/D55 Uni-versal 80x80 or 120x120


2 x Button-Head Screw ISO 7380 M6x16






Only for MD < 8 Nm (in conjunctionwith Ball Screw Units KGT or Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 5 40 R10):






Connecting Shaft VK14 R25/WGCoupling Half D55 VK14Coupling Insert D55Coupling Half D55 D8





Only for MD < 28 Nm:

Connecting Shaft VK14 R25/WGCoupling Half D55 VK14Coupling Insert D55Coupling Half D55 D8





Connecting Shaft VK32 R25Coupling Half D80 VK32Coupling Insert D80Coupling Half D80 D12


Coupling Housing 8 D80Coupling Adapter Plate D80 Universal

120x120 or 160x160(Machining required)


Connecting Shaft VK32 R50Coupling Half D80 VK32Coupling Insert D80Coupling Half D80 D12


Coupling Housing 8 D80Coupling Adapter Plate D80 Universal

120x120 or 160x160(Machining required)


The table of options shown below shows the requiredcomponents for combining couplings and mechanicaldrive elements.

Possible Combinations

Coupling D80

MD = 100 Nm


417

Coupling Half D30 D6Al1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M3x12,St, blackReborable up to max. ø 16 mmm = 25 g1 pce. 0.0.337.69

Coupling Half D30 VK14Al1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M3x12,St, blackm = 22 g1 pce. 0.0.337.67

Coupling Half D55 D8Al1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x20,St, bright zinc-platedReborable up to max. ø 28 mmm = 132 g1 pce. 0.0.337.68

Coupling Half D55 VK14Al1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M6x20,St, bright zinc-platedm = 130 g1 pce. 0.0.337.66

Coupling Half D80 D12Al1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M8x30,St,bright zinc-platedReborable up to max. ø 45 mmm = 455 g

1 pce. 0.0.337.86

Coupling Half D80 VK32Al1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M8x30,St, bright zinc-platedm = 420 g

1 pce. 0.0.337.65

Coupling Halves The Coupling Halves with multi-spline hubs VK14 andVK32 can be connected with the correspondingConnecting Shafts or mechanical drive elements withoutneed for machining.In the case of Coupling Halves with bores, simplemachining (reboring, parallel keyway, etc.) is requiredfor matching to the drive output shaft of gearboxes/motor drives.Before machining the plain bore and keyway, the slotmust be bridged by means of suitable spacers (washersetc.) and the tension screw tightened. In principle,parallel keyways should lie at an angle of 90° relative tothe slot, preferably on the side of the thread for thetensioning screw.

418

Coupling Insert D30PU, hardness 80 Sh A, blueTorque range: MD < 8 NmElasticitydyn. = 0.952 °/ NmElasticitystat. = 3.0 °/ NmPerm. offsetaxial = 1.00 mmPerm. offsetradial = 0.21 mmPerm. offsetangle = 1.1 °m = 5 g1 pce. 0.0.463.20

Coupling Insert D55PU, hardness 98 Sh A, redTorque range: MD < 50 NmElasticitydyn. = 0.028 °/ NmElasticitystat. = 0.087 °/ NmPerm. offsetaxial = 1.40 mmPerm. offsetradial = 0.10 mmPerm. offsetangle = 0.9 °m = 18 g1 pce. 0.0.463.19

Coupling Insert D80PU, hardness 98 Sh A, redTorque range: MD < 200 NmElasticitydyn. = 0.008 °/ NmElasticitystat. = 0.025 °/ NmPerm. offsetaxial = 1.80 mmPerm. offsetradial = 0.12 mmPerm. offsetangle = 0.9 °m = 49 g1 pce. 0.0.463.18

Coupling Inserts The flexible Coupling Inserts designed specifically forthe driven linear slides based on the MB Building KitSystem are used to connect two Coupling Halves in eachcase. This takes the form of a plug-type connection andis used to compensate for angular errors and radial andaxial offset.In conjunction with Ball Screw Units which are drivenwith stepping motors, the flexible couplings make itpossible to decouple the moving masses from spindleand drive.The process of inserting the Coupling Insert into theCoupling Halves can be facilitated by using spray oil.


419

Coupling Housing 8 D30Profile 8 80x80-45° D60, Al, anodizedCoupling Adapter Plate D30/D55 ZU40/WG/KGT,Al, anodizedCoupling end plate D30/D55, Al, anodized2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M8x40,St, black2 hexagon screws DIN 933-M8x22, St, blackm = 300 g

1 set, black 0.0.463.23

Coupling Housing 8 D55Profile 8 80x80-45° D60, Al, anodizedCoupling Adapter Plate D30/D55 ZU40/WG/KGT,Al, anodizedCoupling end Plate D30/D55, Al, anodized2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M8x100,St, black2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M8x20,St, blackm = 590 g

1 set, black 0.0.463.22

Coupling Housing 8 D80Profile 8 120x120-45° D87, Al, anodizedCoupling Adapter Plate D80 ZU80, Al, anodizedCoupling end Plate D80, Al, anodized8 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M8x25, St, black4 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M8x20,St, blackm = 1480 g

1 set, black 0.0.463.21

CouplingHousings

The Coupling Housings provide static connectionsbetween the mechanical drive elements and any selecteddrives / motors. On the side of the mechanical driveelements of the MB Building Kit System, the housingsare provided with appropriate connection geometries(Coupling Housings 8 D30 and 8 D55: Centring PieceD50-D22 or D50-D50 required). The Coupling HalvesUniversal which need to be machined with thedrive connection geometries can be used for securingdrives / motors.The coupling housings consist of profiles with Line 8 grooves.These grooves may be used to give additional support tothe motor/gearbox/coupling assembly (especially withheavy-duty drives) by using components of the MBBuilding Kit System (e.g. profile MW 80x80x8 E etc.).

420

Coupling Adapter Plate D30/D55 Universal 80x80Al, anodizedm = 160 g

1 pce., black 0.0.463.10

Coupling Adapter Plate D30/D55 Universal 120x120Al, anodizedm = 420 g

1 pce., black 0.0.463.11

Coupling Adapter Plate D80 Universal 120x120Al, anodizedm = 480 g

1 pce., black 0.0.463.07

Coupling Adapter Plate D80 Universal 160x160Al, anodizedm = 960 g

1 pce., black 0.0.463.08

CouplingAdapter Plates

Coupling Adapter Plates Universal are designed formounting onto the Coupling Housings. Additionalmachining operations, e.g. fastening bores and centringdiameters are required to suit the customer‘s drive /motor. Two sizes for two different Coupling Housingsallow different drives with different flange geometriesto be joined.The fastening screws for connecting the CouplingAdapter Plates Universal to the corresponding CouplingHousings are included in the scope of delivery of theCoupling Housings.


421

Connecting Shaft VK14 R10/KGTMulti-Spline Shaft DIN ISO 14 - 6x11x14, St, C 45 kSnap ring W14m = 44 g

1 pce. 0.0.463.17

Connecting Shaft VK14 R25/WGMulti-Spline Shaft DIN ISO 14 - 6x11x14, St, C 45 kSnap Ring W14m = 73 g

1 pce. 0.0.463.15

Connecting Shaft VK32 R25Multi-Spline Shaft DIN ISO 14 - 6x26x32, St, C 45 kSnap Ring W32m = 470 g

1 pce. 0.0.337.93

Connecting Shaft VK32 R50Multi-Spline Shaft DIN ISO 14 - 6x26x32, St, C 45 kSnap Ring W32m = 680 g

1 pce. 0.0.337.92

ConnectingShafts

The Connecting Shafts are used to provide a torsionallyrigid connection between the mechanical drive elementsand the corresponding Coupling Half. The ConnectingShafts are inserted into the drive elements until theycome up against the Snap Ring. The clampableCoupling Half is slipped onto the free end of the shaftand clamped in axial direction so that the length of thecoupling agrees with the length of the Coupling Housingand the Coupling Inserts are not under any axial load.The part of the spline which locates in other MB driveelements should be greased prior to assembly.

422

The Multi-Spline Shaft is used to provide a torsionallyrigid connection between drive elements and multi-splinehubs. The plug-type connection must be lubricated withmulti-purpose grease or similar suitable lubricant.

Multi-Spline Shaft VK14Multi-Spline Shaft similar to DIN ISO 14 - 6x11x14, St, C 45 kPolar resistance moment: Wt = 261 mm3

a = 500 mmm = 916 g/mCut-off max. 3000 mm 0.0.337.05

Multi-Spline Shaft VK32Multi-Spline Shaft similar to DIN ISO 14 - 6x26x32, St, C 45 kPolar resistance moment: Wt = 3450 mm3

a = 1000 mmm = 5 kg/m

Cut-off max. 3000 mm 0.0.337.63

Suitable for use in combination with Timing-BeltReverse Units for generating synchronous movementsup to a distance "a".

8. Dynamic Elements 8.3 Accessories for Mechanical Drive Elements 8.3.2 Miscellaneous

8.3.2Miscellaneous

Multi-SplineShaft

423

a b[mm] [mm]

W14 1,3 +0.1 13,5 -0.1

W32 1,6 +0.1 30,8 -0.2

Snap Ring W14Spring steel, phosphatisedm = 5 g/1010 pce. 0.0.408.31

Snap Ring W32Spring steel, phosphatisedm = 34 g/1010 pce. 0.0.463.13

Snap Rings Snap Ring for axially securing sections of Multi-SplineShafts which can be used e.g. as Connecting orSynchroniser Shafts between mechanical drive elementsand couplings etc.

Circlip For limiting the axial movement of Multi-Spline Shaftsin the multi-spline hub DIN ISO14-6x11x14.Axial fixing of Multi-Spline Shafts or Connecting ShaftU-WG by means of Circlip N in the groove of the pulleyof Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25 or 8 80 R25.

Circlip N14Circlip DIN 472-11x1, spring steel, phosphatisedm = 3 g/1010 pce. 8.0.000.46

424

d

Adapter Plate 80x80Al, anodizedm = 91 g

1 pce., black 0.0.408.16

Adapter Plate 120x80Al, anodizedm = 164 g

1 pce., black 0.0.408.06


Possibilities for butt fastenings with Adapter Plates andAutomatic Fasteners.

Adapter Plates Adapter Plates for universal connection between drives,Bevel Gear Boxes, Reverse Units and profiles.Functions of the mounting holes and threads:> 2 x holes for M8 (a) for securing Timing-Belt ReverseUnit 8 80 R25 or 2 Adapter Plates> 4 x holes for Countersunk Screw M8 (b) for the centralprofile bores> 4 x countersinks ø 11. 6 deep (c) for Button-HeadScrews ISO 7380-M6x16 for connecting Timing-BeltReverse Unit 8 40 R25, bearing profile 8 80x80 orBevel Gear Boxes> Holder (d) for Centring Pieces> 4 x holes for M6 or 4 x thread M6 (e) for connectingthe Adapter Plates to each other or for connection toprofiles (Automatic Fastener)

Attachment of drives (possibly with Adapter Flange Uni-versal) and Timing-Belt Reverse Units to the Bevel GearBoxes with Adapter Plates.Where space is restricted, hexagon screws DIN 931-M8can be used.

425

Centring Pieces Centring Pieces for locating mechanical driveelements in the corresponding centring bores of theAdapter Plates, Coupling Adapter Plates etc.Example:> Centring Piece D50-D50Adapter Plate 80x80 -> Bevel Gear Box or Ball Screw Unit> Centring Piece D60-D60Adapter Plate 120x80 -> Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80R25 or Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II> Centring Piece D50-D22Bevel Gear Box -> Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25or Coupling Housing 8 D55 -> Timing-Belt Reverse Unit8 40 R25> Centring Piece D60-D50Adapter Plate 120x80 -> Bevel Gear Box or Ball Screw Unit

Centring Piece D50-D50St, blackm = 21 g

1 pce. 0.0.408.12

Centring Piece D60-D60St, blackm = 48 g

1 pce. 0.0.408.11

Centring Piece D50-D22St, blackm = 26.9 g

1 pce. 0.0.379.17

Centring Piece D60-D50St, blackm = 46.7 g

1 pce. 0.0.379.18

426

Adapter Flange UniversalAl, anodizedm = 635 g

1 pce., black 0.0.337.32


Adapter Flange For adapting any desired drives to the Timing-BeltReverse Units, Bevel Gear Boxes and Ball Screw Unitswithout use of couplings. The Adapter Flange Universalcan be machined to suit the connection geometry (holepattern, centring) of the drive.The part of the Adapter Flange extending beyond theTiming-Belt Reverse Unit may require an appropriateshortening of the Shaft or Shaft-Clamp Profile.

For connecting any drives to the Ball Screw Units, theBevel Gear Box or to profiles using the Adapter Shaft,the Adapter Plate 120x80 and the Adapter Flange Universal.

427

Adapter Shaft VK14St, black, surface-hardenedm = 275 g

1 pce. 0.0.337.25

Adapter Shaft For a torsionally rigid connection of any desired driveshafts to the Timing-Belt Reverse Units, Bevel GearBoxes and Ball Screw Units. Suitable in combinationwith Timing-Belt Reverse Units and an appropriate shaft/ hollow shaft (or other shaft-hub connections such aslocking rings etc.) for generating synchronousmovement over a distance of more than 500 mm.The splined connection must be lubricated with a multi-purpose grease or similar suitable lubricant.

The Adapter Shaft only uses half the hub width oftiming pulleys R25 for transferring the torque.With alternating loads, it is necessary to reduce thetorque values of the Timing-Belt Reverse Units withAdapter Shafts.

428


The Synchronising Shaft Profiles are used to constructsynchronising shafts using Multi-Spline Shaft sectionsVK14 or VK32.The synchronising shafts can be used to connect andthus to synchronise dynamic elements such as Timing-Belt Reverse Units, Ball Screw Units and couplings etc.By using Multi-Spline Shaft sections which arecorrespondingly longer, it is possible to transfer thepermissible torque of the Timing-Belt Reverse Units.

SynchronisingShaft Profiles

The clamping set contains all parts required forfastening the Multi-Spline Shaft sections to both ends ofa Synchronising Shaft Profile.

Use of a synchronising shaft for connecting two Timing-Belt Reverse Units.The length of a Multi-Spline Shaft section depends onthe minimum penetration depth (d), the constructionsizes of the connected dynamic elements and the gapbetween the rotating and fixed parts.

The mounting holes for the tensioning screws are drilledperpendicular to the profile's centre axis along themarking grooves.The tensioning screws are tightened through themounting holes drilled earlier.

Synchronising Shaft ProfileVK14 VK32

a ø 8 mm ø 10 mmb 10 mm 15 mmc 20 mm 30 mmd min. 40 mm min. 60 mm

Synchronising Shaft Profile VK14Al, anodizedA = 4.77 cm2 Ix = 7.17 cm4 Iy = 6.68 cm4

m = 1.29 kg/m IT =10.63 cm3


429

Clamping Set for Synchronising Shaft Profile VK148 standard connecting plates 5, St, bright zinc-plated4 T-Slot Nuts 6 St 2xM5-40, bright zinc-plated8 screws M5x20, St, bright zinc-platedm = 88 g1 set 0.0.463.72

Synchronising Shaft Profile VK32Al, anodizedA =11.62 cm2 Ix = 47.42 cm4 Iy = 45.09 cm4

m = 3.13 kg/m It = 69.95 cm3


Clamping Set for Synchronising Shaft Profile VK328 standard connecting plates 6, St, bright zinc-plated4 T-Slot Nuts 8 St 2xM6-60, bright zinc-plated8 screws M6x25, St, bright zinc-platedm = 196 g1 set 0.0.463.30

Proximity Switch for integration in the grooves of Profi-les 8 for limiting the terminal position or as reference onlinear units.The Proximity Switch can be retrofitted at any point inthe groove and can be secured in position from above.

Proximity Switch 8Inductive Proximity Switch, positive switchingCasing Al, natural anodizedFixing mechanism, fixing screwsVoltage = 10…30 V DCSwitching currentmax = 150 mASensing range = 2 mmCable, black l = 3 m d = 3 mmm = 51 g1 pce. 0.3.001.30

ProximitySwitches

430


Proximity-Switch Cam 8 is pressed into the Timing Beltat the required positions from the flat side.Options for fastening Proximity Switches 8 inconjunction with the Proximity-Switch Fastening Set.Depending on the application, the Proximity-SwitchFastening Set must be shortened accordingly.Proximity Switch 8 is particularly suitable in conjunctionwith Timing-Belt Reverse Units 8 or Timing-BeltCounter-Reverse Unit 8, Proximity-Switch Fastening Set8 and Proximity-Switch Cams 8. Timing-Belt ReverseUnits 8 are provided with openings for the ProximitySwitch at appropriate points in order to ensure compactinstallation.Proximity-Switch Connecting Cable 8 in plug-in designwith integrated LEDs for displaying the switch functionand operating voltage.

When using Proximity-Switch Cams 8 with reversing onthe flat side (Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Unit 8 R25/Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R25 with emergence 40mm), these must not pass through the Timing-BeltReverse Units. In this case, Proximity Switches 8 andProximity-Switch Cams 8 must be positioned to preventthis from happening.

Proximity Switches Proximity Switch M8 is a versatile device for limitingthe terminal position or for reference on linear units withtiming-belt drives. It is available with a permanent orplug-in connecting cable.The cam reaching the Proximity Switch signals theelectrical terminal position and/or the reference point ofthe unit on the Timing Belt.

Possible arrangement of Proximity Switches 8 andProximity-Switch Cams 8:The Proximity-Switch Cams run through the Timing-BeltReverse Units.Particularly suitable when used with the drive end Ti-ming Belt Reverse Unit for simplifying cable routingbetween the drive unit, Proximity Switch and motorcontrol unit.

Possible arrangement of Proximity Switches 8 andProximity-Switch Cams 8:The Proximity-Switch Cams do not run through theTiming-Belt Reverse Units.

The Proximity-Switch Fastening Set is used toposition and attach inductive Proximity Switches M8 onthe Timing-Belt Reverse Units.

431

Proximity Switch M8St, stainlessInductive Proximity Switch, positive switching,suitable for installation in thread M8x1Voltage = 10...30 V DCMax. switching current = 200 mASensing range = 1.5 mmLED control displayConnecting cable, black l = 3 m d = 3.5 mmm = 54 g1 pce. 0.0.337.14

Proximity Switch M8, Plug ConnectionSt, stainlessInductive Proximity Switch, positive switching,suitable for installation in thread M8x1Voltage = 10...30 V DCMax. switching current = 200 mASensing range = 1.5 mmLED control displayConnecting cable, black l = 3 m d = 3.5 mmm = 16 g1 pce. 0.3.001.24

Proximity-Switch Connecting CableOuter sheath PUR, blackConnecting cable l = 5 m d = 4.0 mmStructure LifY11Y, 3x0.25 mm2

Plug: integrated 3-pole plugwith metal collar M8x1Cable inlet angled by 90°LED control display:Green = Operating displayYellow/orange = Switch function displaym = 144 g1 pce. 0.3.001.25

Proximity-Switch Fastening Set 8St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 433-8.4, St, bright zinc-plated1 Button-Head Screw ISO 7380, M8x10,St, bright zinc-platedm = 37 g

1 set 0.0.337.31

Proximity-Switch Cam 8St, blackm = 0.2 g

1 pce. 0.0.337.15

433

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.1 Design and Ordering Software

The MB Quick&Easy modular software package isdesigned to assist users of the MB Building Kit Systemwith everything from project planning and the designphase to project implementation. MB for AutoCAD®, the core module of the MB Quick&Easysoftware package, is a 2D and 3D design environmentfor using the MB Building Kit System in the context ofAutoCAD® with parts list generator.The program enables the user to create design drawingson the screen, based on components from theMB Building Kit System, and to compile the associatedparts lists.All 3D components can be automatically incorporatedinto the parts list; they can be either transferredonto the drawing or included in the parts lists andordering program. By integrating the package into theAutoCAD® CAD software, simply pressing a key allowsa user to access the program from the standard menuand then to close it again.The self-explanatory graphical user interface, windowstechnology and pop-up menus ensure maximum ease ofhandling and rapid familiarisation. The package can beinstalled in networks. Customisation is possible.Other modules in the MB Quick&Easy software package:> The PARTviewer provides a rapid overview of the itemproduct range. All parts can be displayed in 2D andexported in DXF format. A search engine facilitateslocation of parts using keywords or catalogue numbers.> MB 2D and 3D Parts Library in DWG, DXF and IGESformat for the most frequently used CAD systems> The parts list and ordering program for generating theassociated tables on the basis of the item Product Ma-ster Guide; Product Master Guide files in ASCII, EBCDICand TXT formats are supplied and can be transferred toother programs.

MB for AutoCAD® CAD software

9.1 Design and OrderingSoftware

The Auxiliary Elements product group comprises> Special software for facilitating the design process andworking with the MB Building Kit System> Jigs and tools for cost-effective installation ofcomponents> A broad spectrum of services to support the user inhis work - from profile processing to complete solutions


434

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.1 Design and Ordering Software

MB Quick&Easy

MB Quick&Easy CD international

1. MB for AutoCAD®

> 2D and 3D Parts Library> Automatic Parts List GeneratorInstallation requirements:AutoCAD® Version 13 or laterWINDOWS ´95 / ´98 / NT / 2000Hard disk with approx. 145 MB free space2. Parts List and Ordering Program> Program for generating parts lists and order lists> Product Master Guide files in the following formats: ASCII,EBCDIC, TXT on CDInstallation requirements:WINDOWS ’95 / ’98 / NT/ 2000 or system withDOS emulationHard disk with approx. 12 MB free space

3. PARTviewer> 2D preview of products> DXF export> Search engine (keywords / catalogue numbers)Installation requirements:CAD system with appropriate interfaceWINDOWS ’95 / ’98 / NT / 2000Hard disk with approx. 40 MB free space

4. MB Parts Catalogue> 2D and 3D Parts Library for CAD systems in thefollowing formats: DWG, DXF, IGESInstallation requirements:CAD system with appropriate interfaceWINDOWS ´95 / ´98 / NT / 2000 or system withDOS emulationHard disk with approx. 200 MB free space

1 pce. 0.5.000.67

435

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.1 Fasteners for Basic Elements

9.2 Jigs and Tools

9.2.1 Fastenersfor Basic Ele-mentsDrilling Jigs andStep Drills

Drilling Jigs for precisely positioned machining ofprofiles with the required through holes for StandardConnection, or stepped bores for Universal Connection,with either hand-held or pillar drills.Drilling Jig 8 ensures easy machining on a pillar drill.

Drilling Jig 5St, blackDrill bushes, St, hardened and polishedSlewable longitudinal limit stopClamp attachment on the profileDepth limit stop for the Step Drillm = 390 g

1 pce. 0.0.370.19

Step Drill, Universal Connection 5High-performance, high-speed steel, nitridedShaft: ø 12 mmm = 80 g

1 pce. 0.0.370.35

Drilling Jig 6St, blackDrill bushes, St, hardened and polishedSlewable longitudinal limit stopClamp attachment on the profileDepth limit stop for the Step Drillm = 832 g

1 pce. 0.0.434.25

Special jigs and tools for processing elements of theMB Building Kit System.The necessary holes and threads for the fasteners usedfor basic, fastening and dynamic elements can be madeparticularly easily and cost-effectively using drilling jigsand other tools.

Special tools are available for installing Shaft-ClampProfiles and Bearing Units.General tools (keys) make working with fasteners easier.

436

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.1 Fastenings for Basic Elements

Drilling Jigs andStep Drills

Step Drill, Universal Connection 6High-performance, high-speed steel, nitridedShaft: ø 13 mmm = 150 g

1 pce. 0.0.431.19

Drilling Jig 8, small, Standard Connection 8St, blackDrill bushes, St, hardened and polishedSlewable longitudinal limit stopClamp attachment on the profilem = 420 g1 pce. 0.0.026.09

Drilling Jig 8, large, Standard Connection 8St, blackDrill bushes, St, hardened and polishedSlewable longitudinal limit stopClamp attachment on the profilem = 810 g

1 pce. 0.0.026.19

Drilling Jig 8Base plate, plastic, greenProfile, Al, natural anodizedDrill bush, St, hardened and polishedSlewable stopProfile-guide elementsm = 2.35 kg

1 pce. 0.0.026.91

Step Drill, Universal Connection 8High-performance, high-speed steel, nitridedShaft: MK 2m = 260 g

1 pce. 0.0.026.90

Step Drill, Universal Connection 8 D13High-performance, high-speed steel, nitridedShaft: ø 13m = 240 g

1 pce. 0.0.465.90

437

Drilling Unit The Drilling Unit is a profile machining jig. It is secureddirectly to the profile being machined and is thereforeparticularly easy to use on existing profile constructions.The profile Drilling Unit can be used to drill throughholes for Standard Connections, tap the profile ends forStandard Connections and produce stepped bores forUniversal Connections in Profiles 5, 6 and 8.A special adapter set is required for each Line. Inaddition, the profiles can also be drilled for variousother applications.The Drilling Unit can be operated with a commerciallyavailable drilling machine with European mount (ø43mm). A machine with electronic speed control, R/Loperation and 2-speed gearing is recommended.The Drilling Stand is attached with ease to the profilegrooves by means of a clamp attachment with eccentricclamping lever.The drill is advanced by means of a hand wheel.A compression spring is fitted to facilitate the returnstroke. The drilling depth can be limited by means of anadjustable depth limit stop.To tap into the profile core bores, an Angle Bracket issecured to the Adapter Plate which is used to arrangethe Drilling Unit on the profile‘s end face.

Drilling Unit, Drilling StandSt, blackm = 3.0 kg

1 pce. 0.0.465.88

Drilling Unit, Drilling Adapter Set 5Adapter Plate, St, blackAngle Bracket, St, blackStep Drill, Universal Connection 5, high-performance, high-speedsteel, nitridedDrill ø 4.3 DIN 338, high-performance, high-speed steelm = 1.2 kg

1 set 0.0.464.30

438

Drilling Jigs for precisely positioned machining(stepped bores) for 90° connection of Clamp Profiles 630x30 and 8 40x40.

Drilling Unit, Drilling Adapter Set 6Adapter Plate, St, blackAngle Bracket, St, blackStep Drill, Universal Connection 6, high-performance,high-speed steel, nitridedDrill ø 5.5 DIN 338, high-performance, high-speed steelm = 1.3 kg

1 set 0.0.459.33

Drilling Unit, Drilling Adapter Set 8Adapter Plate, St, blackAngle Bracket, St, blackStep Drill, Universal Connection 8, high-performance,high-speed steel, nitridedDrill ø 7 DIN 338, high-performance, high-speedm = 1.3 kg

1 set 0.0.465.89

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.2 Connections for Fastening Elements

Drilling Unit

9.2.2Connections forFastening Ele-mentsDrilling Jigs andStep Drills

439

Drilling Jig 6, Clamp Profile 6 30x30St, blackDrill bush, St, hardened and polishedSlewable longitudinal limit stopClamp attachment on the profileDepth limit stop for the Step Drillm = 388 g

1 set 0.0.434.23

Step Drill, Clamp Profile 6 30x30High-performance, high-speed steel, nitridedShaft: ø 11 mmm = 63 g

1 pce. 0.0.431.20

Drilling Jig 8, Clamp Profile 8 40x40St, blackDrill bush, St, hardened and polishedSlewable longitudinal limit stopClamp attachment on the profileDepth limit stop for the Step Drillm = 880 g

1 pce. 0.0.265.22

Step Drill, Clamp Profile 8 40x40High-performance, high-speed steel, nitridedShaft: ø 15 mmm = 150 g

1 pce. 0.0.265.21

440

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.3 Connections for Dynamic Elements

For precisely positioned drilling of fixing bores inshafts, Shaft-Clamp Profiles and Support Profiles forRoller Guides 8 D10, 8 D14 and 8 D25.A carbide-tipped drill must be used for drilling inhardened shafts.

Combination Drilling Jig for Shaft D10St, blackDrill bush, St, hardened and polishedClamp leverSlewable longitudinal limit stopm = 715 g

1 pce. 0.0.444.68

Combination Drilling Jig for Shaft D14St, blackDrill bush, St, hardened and polishedClamp attachmentm = 780 g

1 pce. 0.0.373.55

Combination Drilling Jig for Shaft D25St, blackDrill bush, St, hardened and polishedClamping leverSlewable longitudinal limit stopm = 1.43 kg

1 pce. 0.0.373.15

9.2.3Connections forDynamicElementsCombinationDrilling Jigs

441

Mounting Aid For press-fitting guiding shafts into Shaft-Clamp Profi-les 5 D6, 8 D6, 8 D10, 8 D14 and 8 D25 using a suitableround steel bar as a lever.

Mounting Aid for Shaft D6/D14/D25St, blackm = 270 g

1 pce. 0.0.265.38

Pin Spanners For tightening lock nuts in the Bearing Units of RollerGuides 5 D6, 8 D10, 8 D14 and 8 D25.

Pin Spanner 5 D6, 8 D10St, blackm = 40 g

1 pce. 0.0.390.13

442

9.2.4 GeneralToolsKeys

Ball-Headed Keys are particularly suitable for initialtightening and for screws which are difficult to reach(tightening angles up to 25°).Keys with T-Handle and L-Keys are suitable for themaximum tightening torques of the various screws.L-Keys are particularly suitable for tightening thescrews of Universal Connections.

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.4 General Tools

Pin Spanners

Pin Spanner 8 D14St, blackm = 90 g

1 pce. 0.0.294.41

Pin Spanner 8 D25St, blackm = 430 g

1 pce. 0.0.350.30

Wrench, chrome-vanadium steel, nickel-platedHandle, PA-GF, black

Ball-Headed Key 3 A/Fa = 190 mm b = 100 mm c = 3 A/Fm = 20 g1 pce. 0.0.370.58



443



Key with T-Handle 3 A/Fa = 168 mm b = 150 mm c = 3 A/Fm = 15 g1 pce. 0.0.370.59




Wrench, chrome-vanadium steel, nickel-plated

L-Key 3 A/Fa = 93 mm b = 66 mm c = 3 A/Fm = 9 g1 pce. 0.0.440.73



444

Multi-PurposePliers

Pliers for cutting Cover Profiles or similar elementsmade from rubber, leather, plastic, wood or aluminium.

Multi-Purpose PliersScissor body, sheet steel, bright nickel-platedBlade, special steelAnvil, light steelHandle, plastic-coated, non-slip designm = 300 g1 pce. 0.0.265.63

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.4 General Tools

445

9.3 Services Local customer service centres provide support tothe user in the form of a wide range of services:> Faster delivery of all system elements> Ready-for-assembly processing on the most modernautomatic machinery> Provision of building kits> Turnkey solutions using system elements> Complete assembly and initial operation

> Tools, jigs and machines> Customer application software> User support in resolving special problems> Internal or external training in planning, designand production> CAD-assisted project planning, preparation ofquotations and tenders and design of plantand fixtures

14 Cap 8 160x28 0.0.026.8014 Cap 8 40x40 0.0.026.0114 Cap 8 80x16 0.0.265.98 6 Cap 8 80x80 0.0.026.3714 End Cap & Lubric. System 8 D14 0.0.294.46

8 Adapter Shaft VK 14 0.0.337.252 Profile 8 160x28 200 mm 0.0.026.852 Profile 8 160x28 270 mm 0.0.026.851 Profile 8 160x28 500 mm 0.0.026.852 Profile 8 160x28 562 mm 0.0.026.851 Profile 8 40x40 80 mm 0.0.026.032 Profile 8 80x40 516 mm 0.0.026.044 Profile 8 80x80 516 mm 0.0.026.276 Profile 8 80x80 944 mm 0.0.026.272 Profile 8 80x80 1280 mm 0.0.026.272 Profile 8 80x80 1292 mm 0.0.026.271 Profile 8 80x80 1344 mm 0.0.026.276 Profile 8 80x80 1440 mm 0.0.026.276 Profile 8 80x80 1525 mm 0.0.026.277 Double-Bearing Unit 8 14e 0.0.294.287 Double-Bearing Unit 8 14z 0.0.294.26

14 Limit Stop 8 0.0.337.117 Proximity-Switch Fastening Set 8 0.0.337.31

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services

14 Proximity-Switch Cams 0.0.337.157 Timing-Belt Tensioner

Fixing Block 8 R25 0.0.337.0928 T-Slot Nut 8 St M8 0.0.026.1828 Washer DIN 125-A8 8.0.000.5114 Timing-Belt Tensioner

Tensioning Block 8 R25 0.0.337.076 Knuckle Foot D80, M16x100 0.0.265.296 Base Plate/Transp. Plate 8 80x80,M16 0.0.406.23

52 Button-Head Screw M8x18 0.0.196.7226 Universal-Fastening Set 8 0.0.026.92

132 Standard-Fastening Set 8 0.0.026.071 Multi-Spline Shaft VK14 1300 mm 0.0.337.054 Shaft D14 944 mm 0.0.294.014 Shaft D14 1220 mm 0.0.294.012 Shaft D14 1280 mm 0.0.294.012 Shaft D14 1292 mm 0.0.294.014 Shaft-Clamp Profile 8 D14944 mm 0.0.294.344 Shaft-Clamp Profile 8 D141220 mm 0.0.294.342 Shaft-Clamp Profile 8 D141280 mm 0.0.294.342 Shaft-Clamp Profile 8 D141292 mm 0.0.294.34

15 Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 40 R25with multi-spline 0.0.337.26

Qty. Designation Order No. Qty. Designation Order No.

Design Example

Parts List

446

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services 9.3.1 Saw Cuts / 9.3.2 Connection Processing

9.3.1 Saw Cuts Square and burr-minimised saw cuts, bores andthreads (tolerances to DIN ISO 2768 - mK).The saw cut required for the cut-off is specifiedindividually for each profile in the price list.

Saw Cut for Small Cross-Sections1 pce. 0.0.026.30

Saw Cut for Medium Cross-Sections1 pce. 0.0.026.66

Saw Cut for Large Cross-Sections1 pce. 0.0.265.55

Connection Processing, End Face, Thread M5x12(Thread for Standard Connection 5)1 pce. 0.0.370.45



Profile processing for Standard or UniversalConnections. The position of the bores and threads mustbe specified when ordering.

9.3.2ConnectionProcessingConnectionProcessing, EndFace

447

Connection Processing, Drilled Hole D4.3(Access hole for tool when processing aStandard Connection 5)1 pce. 0.0.370.51


Connection Processing, Drilled Hole D7(Access hole for tool when processing aStandard Connection 8)1 pce. 0.0.026.96

ConnectionProcessing,Drilled Hole

Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D12x8.5(Stepped bore for Universal Fastener 5)1 pce. 0.0.370.55

Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D16x12.7(Stepped bore for Universal Fastener 6)1 pce. 0.0.419.75

ConnectionProcessing,Stepped Bore

448

Connection Processing, End Face, Thread M5x16(Thread for the bolt of the Line 8 Clamp-Profile Connection,Clamp Profile 8 32x18)1 pce. 0.0.404.13

Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D11x13(Stepped bore for the bolt of the Line 6 Clamp-Profile Connection,Clamp Profile 6 30x30)1 pce. 0.0.431.17

Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D15x17(Stepped bore for the bolt of the Line 8 Clamp-Profile Connection,

Clamp Profile 8 40x40)1 pce. 0.0.196.67

Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D20x16(Stepped bore for Universal Fastener 8)1 pce. 0.0.026.97

Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D20x5(Stepped bore for Pneumatic-Universal Fastener 8)1 pce. 0.0.373.17

ConnectionProcessing forClamp Profiles

Profile processing for interconnecting ClampProfiles. The position of the holes must be specifiedwhen ordering.

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services 9.3.2 Connection Processing


449

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services 9.3.3 Counter Boring and Tapping

Connection Processing, End Face, Thread M5x321 pce. 0.0.391.18



Connection Processing, End Face, Counter Boringand Tapping M10x451 pce. 0.0.026.99

9.3.3 CounterBoring andTapping

Machining a larger core bore in profiles, e.g. for KnuckleFeet. Specify the depth and position of the core bore forthe thread when ordering.

450

Fixing Bore forShafts

Square and precisely positioned fixing bore for theshafts of Roller Guides 8 D10, 8 D14 and 8 D25.Specify the position of the bore when ordering.

Fixing Bore for Shafts D10/D14/D251 pce. 0.0.294.32

9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services 9.3.4 Processing Shafts

9.3.4ProcessingShaftsSaw Cuts forShafts and Rails

Square, burr-minimised saw cut for all Shafts andMulti-Spline Shafts and the guide rails of linear guidesystems.

Saw Cut for Shafts1 pce. 0.0.294.06

Saw Cut for Guide Rails1 pce. 0.2.000.96

452

Alphabetical RegisterA

B

General Information Alphabetical Register

Accessories for Adjustable Feet, Threaded 140

Accessories for Bevel Gear Boxes 411

Accessories for Conduits 316

Accessories for Floor Elements 153

Accessories for Linear Slides 382

Accessories for Mechanical Drive Elements 415

Accessories for Panel Elements 257

Accessories for Profiles 89

Acrylic Glass 248

Adapter Flange (for motors and drives) 426

Adapter Plate Clamping Profile 303

Adapter Plate Clamps 302

Adapter Plate Locating and Clamping set 302

Adapter Plate Profiles 299

Adapter Plates 424

Adapter Plates (for motors and drives) 299

Adapter Shaft 427

Adapter, Socket / Plug (for Light Fitting 55W) 291

Adjustable Ball Foot 145

Adjustable Feet 143

Aluminium profiles -> Profiles 49

Angle Bracket Caps (for Angle Bracket Zn) 112

Angle Bracket Zn 112

Angle Brackets 177

Angle Clamp Brackets 127

Angle Elements 122

Angle Hinge Bracket 127

Angled connections 103, 122

Angled profiles 86

Anti-Vibration Insert (for Knuckle Foot) 141

Arm Rests 283

Automatic-Butt-Fastening Sets 130

Automatic-Fastening Sets 110

Auxiliary Elements 433

Ball Bushes 380

Ball Latches 239

Ball Screw Units 406

Ball Screw Units KGT 408

Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Sets 369

Ball-Bearing Guide Bush Units 371

Ball-Bearing Guide Bushes 367

Ball-Bush Block Guides 373

Ball-Bush Block Profiles 380

Ball-Bush Blocks (for Ball-Bush Block Guides) 378

Ball-Headed Keys 442

Base Plates 149

Base Plates -> Base Plates / Transport Plates 154

Basic Elements 49

Bearing Blocks (for Ball-Bush Block Guide) 376

Bearing Blocks WG (for Bevel Gear Boxes) 411

Bearing Carriages 364

Bearing Set (for Conveyor Rollers) 273

Bearing Units (for Roller Guides) 341

Bearing Wiper Set 364

Bed Plate Profiles 80

Beech Multi-Ply (customised panel dimensions) 256

Beech Multi-Ply (fixed panel dimensions) 287

Belt -> Timing Belts 398

Bevel Gear Boxes 409

Block-End Caps (Ball-Bush Block Guide) 379

Bolts (for Roller Guides) 348

Bores -> Connection Processing 446

Box -> Electronic Boxes 323

Bracket flat 177

Buffer -> Parabolic Buffers 295

Buffer Strip 297

Butt Connections 104, 129

Button-Head Screws ISO 7380 171

Button-Head Screws T4 (for plastics) 168

Cable Conduits -> Conduits 305

Cable Ties 326

CAD Software -> MB Quick&Easy 434

Calculations (profiles) 52

Caps PA (for Bores/Holes) 101

Caps PA (for Cover Profiles Al) 99

Caps PA (for Profile End Face) 89, 197

Caps Zn (for Profile End Face) 95

Captive Nuts 132, 194

Castor PA 224

Castor Unit 8 PA 225

Castors 150

Castors POM 224

Castors, Fixed 150

Castors, Swivel 150

Catch -> Security Lock 269

C

453

C Centring Pieces 425

Chain ½“ 402

Chain Carrier 405

Chain Counter-Reverse Unit 404

Chain Drives for Linear Slides 405

Chain Drives 401

Chain Guidance in the Profile Groove 401

Chain Guide Profile 402

Chain Link ½“ (removable) 402

Chain Reverse Units 403

Chain Transfer End Ramp 277

Chain Transfer Slide Strips 277

Chain Transfer Unit 277

Chain-Driven Conveyor Rollers 274

Chequer Sheet 251

Circlip 423

Clamp Multiblocks 187

Clamp Profiles (for Panel Elements) 196, 202

Clamp-Block Caps (for Ball-Bush Block Guides) 372

Clamping Sets (for Synchronising Shaft Profiles) 429

Clamping Springs (for Clamp Profile) 197

Clamp-Profile Cross Connector 204

Clamp-Profile Fastener 199

Clamp-Profile Fastening Set 197Clamp-Profile Hangers E 200

Clamp-Profile Hinge E 201

Clamp-Profile Strips 199

Clamp-Profile System E 198

Clip 8 St 227

Clip PA (for Double Panel Profile) 191

Combination Drilling Jigs 440

Compact Lamps 291, 295

Compound Material 249

Conduit Edge Profile 318

Conduit Profile W80-T40 315

Conduit Profiles U 306

Conduit-Finishing Profile (for installation conduits) 318

Conduit-Finishing Profiles (for profile groove) ->Cover Profiles 96

Conduits 305

Conduits Caps 286, 316

Conduits, fixed sizes 305

Connecting Cable, Socket / Earthed Plug(for Light Fitting 55W) 291

Connecting Shafts 414, 421

Connection Processing 446

Connection Processing for Clamp Profiles 448

Connection Processing, Drilled Holes 447

Connection Processing, End Face 446

Connection Processing, Stepped Bores 447

Connection Profile Braces 133

Connection Profiles 132

Construction profiles -> Profiles 49

Container Mounting 282

Conveyor Roller TRA50 (Chain-Driven) 275

Conveyor Rollers 273

Conveyors 270

Corrugated Mesh Al 253Corrugated Mesh St 254Counter Boring and Tapping 449

Counter-Reverse Unit -> Chain Reverse Unit 403

Counter-Reverse Unit -> Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Unit 396

Countersunk Screw SF 95

Countersunk Screws DIN 7991 175

Counter-Weight Bottom Plates for cable conduits(for Lifting Doors Guide Set) 223

Coupling Adapter Plates 420

Coupling Halves 417

Coupling Housings 419

Coupling Inserts 418

Couplings 415

Cover Profile 32 (for Connection Profile 8) 132

Cover Profile 60 (for Stand Profile) 322

Cover Profiles Al (for Profile Groove) 96

Cover Profiles Al (for profile side face) 98

Cover Profiles NBR (for profile side face) 100

Cover Profiles PP 97, 180

C-Rail Systems 351

C-Rail, Bearing Sets 356

C-Rail, Bearing Units 354

C-Rail, Rail Profile Caps 360

C-Rail, Rail Profiles 358

C-Rail, Slide Profile Caps 361

C-Rail, Slide Profiles 359

Cross-Profile Connnections 103, 126

454

Alphabetical Register


D Design Software 433

Direct-Fastening Sets 121, 126

Door catches 238

Door locking -> Security Lock 269

Door Locks 241

Door Rabbet 208

Double Hinges 210

Double Panel Profiles 189

Double-Bearing Units 344

Dowels -> Floor-Fastening Sets 153

Drawer for Hand Held Control (for Lifting Column) 285

Drill -> Step Drill 435

Drilling Jig 436

Drilling Jigs 435

Drilling Unit 437

Drilling Unit, Drilling Adapter Sets 437

Drilling Unit, Drilling Stand 437

Dynamic Elements 331

E Earthing Terminals 259

Edge Profile 257

Electrical Discharge 259

Electronic Boxes 323

Electronic-Box Lids 324

Electronic-Box Profiles 323

Enclosure and Guard Systems (examples) 35

Enclosure and Guard Systems (General Information) 16

End cap -> Caps 89

End Cap and Lubricating Systems 346

Extension Cable, Socket / Plug (for LightFitting 55W) 292

F Fastener Caps (for corner connections) 116

Fasteners 102

Fasteners (for corner connections) 116

Fasteners for Lines and Switches 326

Fasteners for Panels in Special Profiles 196

Fasteners for Panels in the Groove 182

Fasteners for Panels on the Groove 180

Fastening Elements 157

Fastening Frame Elements 205

Fastening Screw (for Caps PA) 94

Fastening Sets (for corner connections) 115

Fastening Sets WG (for Bevel Gear Boxes) 413

Fences -> Enclosure and Guard Systems 16

Fixed Castors 150

Fixing Bore for Shafts 450

Fixing Pin (for Slide Strip) 271

Flange -> Adapter Flange 426

Flat profiles 86

Floor Elements 137

Floor-Fastening Sets 153

Floor-Fixing Plate 148

Flush-Mounted Sockets 320

Foot Cap 287

Foot Clamps (for Adjustable Feet) 142

Foot Plate 144, 147

G Gear Boxes -> Bevel Gear Boxes 409

General Accessories 295

General Tools 442

Glass -> Acrylic Glass 248

Grab Trays -> Parts Containers 279

Grip Cover Profiles 237

Grip End Caps 237

Grip Rail Caps 236

Grip Rail Profile 236

Grip Systems 234

Grips -> Handles 231

Groove cover -> Cover Profiles PP 97

Groove Profiles 165, 276, 365

455

H

I

Hand-Grip Elements (for Handles) 235

Hand Held Control (for Lifting Columns) 285

Handle, light duty 234

Handles 231

Handles Al 232

Handles and Locks 231

Handles PA 231

Hangers (for Frame Elements) 205

Hexagon Nut DIN 934 175

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws 170

Hinge St 212

Hinges 209

Hinges PA 209

Hinges Zn 213

Hinges, heavy-duty 124

Holder for Cables and Hoses 327

HPL panels -> Plastics 250

Impact Buffer 295 Installation Elements 305

J

K

Jigs (for profile processing) 435

Joining Plate Caps 120

Joining Plates 119

L

Key with T-Handle 443

Keys 442

Knuckle Feet 137

M

Labelling Cards (for Parts Containers) 281

Lamp-Control Unit (for Light Fitting 11W) 294

Lamps -> Light Fittings 290

L-Based Feet 145

Lid Profiles (for Installation Conduits) 308

Lifting Columns 8 200x170 284

Lifting-Door Guide Set 222

Light Fitting Set (for Light Fitting 11W) 294

Light Fittings 290, 292

Lighting 290

Limit Stop (for Linear Slides) 384

Limit-Switch Holder 328

Linear ball bearings -> Ball Bushes 380

Linear Guide Rails 365

Linear Guide Systems 362

Linear Slides 331

L-Keys 443

Locating Washers 176

Lock System 6-8 243

Locking Systems 240

Locks -> Door Lock / Locking Systems / Locks andCatches 238

Locks and Catches 238

Lubricating Systems -> End Cap and LubricatingSystems 346

Magnetic Catches 238

Magnetic Strip Clamping Cord 385

Magnetic Strip Cover Profile 385

Material flow 270

MB Quick&Easy 434

Mechanical Drive Elements 386

Mechanical Engineering (examples) 29

Mechanical Engineering Applications (GeneralInformation) 14

Mesh Panels 253

Miscellaneous 422

Modular Conduit System 309

Modular Panels 251

Mounting Aid (for Shafts) 441

Movable Panel Fasteners 209

Movable Fasteners 216

Multiblocks PA 182

Multiblocks Zn 184

Multi-Purpose Pliers 444

Multi-Spline Shafts 422

456


R


N

P

Nuts 168

O Operating consoles -> Conduits 305 Ordering Software 433

Panel Clamp (for Panel Elements) 195

Panel Elements 247

Panel Fasteners 179

Panel Segments 251

Panel-fixing profiles -> Cover Profiles PP 97

Panel-Fixing Strip (for Double Panel Profile) 192

Panels 247

Panels -> Panel Elements 247

Panels for Work Bench Design 256

Parabolic Buffers 295

Parallel-Profile Connnections 104, 132

Parts Container Covers 281

Parts Container Fasteners 281

Parts Containers 279

Perforated Sheet Al 255

Pin Element 135

Pin Spanner 441

Plastics 250

Plexiglass -> Acrylic Glass 248

Pliers -> Multi-Purpose Pliers 444

Pneumatic Applications 261

Pneumatic Connecting Plates 265

Pneumatic Connectors 266

Pneumatic Joining Plates 263

Pneumatic Universal-Butt-Fastening Set 262

Pneumatic Universal-Fastening Set 262

Polycarbonate 248

Polycarbonate Protective Panel (for LightFitting 55W) 292

Potential Equaliser 260

Processing -> Connection Processing 446

Profile Bars 165

Profile Cylinder with Knob 243

Profile Cylinders 245

Profile Edging 86

Profile fastening -> Fasteners 102

Profile TS 35 319

Profiles 49

Profiles 5 51, 68

Profiles 6 56, 72

Profiles 8 62, 75

Profiles M (unfinished elements, flat material,angular profiles) 87

Profiles with Integrated Conduit 321

Proximity Switches 429

Proximity-Switch Cam 431

Proximity-Switch Connecting Cable 431

Proximity-Switch Fastening Set 431

Rebate Profiles 193

Reverse Unit -> Chain Reverse Unit 403

Reverse Unit -> Timing-Belt Reverse Units 387

Right-Angled Connections 102, 106

Rigid Panel Fasteners 179

Roller Conveyor -> Chain-Driven Conveyor Rollers 274

Roller Elements (for conveyor applications) 272

Roller Guides 331

Roller Profiles 349

Roller Shutter System 226

Rollers (for Roller Guides) 347

Rollers -> Conveyor Rollers 273

RS Curved Guide Set 45° 227

RS End Strip 229

RS Flat Profiles 228

RS Guide Profile 8 227

RS Locking System 8 229

RS Slide Strip 227

Rubber buffer -> Impact Buffer 295

Rubber Inserts (for Knuckle Feet) 140

Runner 279

457

T

U

S Saw Cut for Guide Rails 450

Saw Cut for Shafts 450

Saw Cuts 446

Screw Strips Al 167

Screws 168

Sealing Plugs (for Bevel Gear Boxes) 414

Sealing Profiles 181

Sealing Strip 191

Seals PE (for pneumatic applications) 264

Secure Connections 104, 135

Security Limit Switches 268

Security Lock 269

Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7981 169

Services 445

Shaft-Clamp Blocks (Ball-Bush Block Guide) 377

Shaft-Clamp Profiles 338

Shaft-Clamping Bushes 370

Shafts 381

Sheet Material Al 249

Slide Caps (for Ball-Bearing Guide Bush) 372

Slide Clamps 382

Slide Guide Strips 220

Slide Strip Wedges 271

Slide Strips 270

Slides -> Linear Slides 331

Sliding-Door Guide Sets 216

Sliding-Door Lock 245

Snap Rings 423

Socket, Spring-Force Connected (for LightFitting 55W) 291

Sockets -> Flush-Mounted Sockets 320

Software -> MB Quick&Easy 433

Solid panels 249

Sound-Insulating Material 257

Special Adjustable Feet 143

Special Elements 259

Special Fastening Elements 176

Socket, Spring-Force Connected (for LightFitting 55W) 292

Stand Profile Connection Element 322

Stand Profiles 322

Standard-Fastening Sets 106

Steel bracket -> Angle Bracket 177

Steel Mesh 254

Step Drill 435

Support Profiles (for installation conduits) 286, 310, 312

Swing-Door Lock 245

Switches -> Proximity Switches 429

Switches -> Security Limit Switches 268

Swivel, Castors 150

Synchronising Shaft Profiles 428

Synchroniser Shaft WG (Bevel Gear Box) 412

Table Adapter Set 288

Table top -> Panel Elements 247

Table top -> Special elements 287

Tapping threads 446, 449

Telescope Connection Set 298

Telescope Profile 297

Telescope Securing Set 298

Timing Belts 398

Timing-Belt Counter-Reverse Units 396

Timing-Belt Drives 386

Timing-Belt Reverse Units 387

Timing-Belt Tensioner 399

Tools 435

Transparent Panels 248

Transport Plates -> Base Plates / Transport Plates 154

T-Slot Nut Profiles 165

T-Slot Nuts 157

T-Slot Nuts PA 159

T-Slot Nuts St 161

T-Slot Nuts St/PA 161

T-Slot Nuts Zn 159

T-Slot Roller 219

T-Slot Slider 218

Tubes D50 276

Universal Holder (cables, hoses) 326

Universal-Butt-Fastening Sets 129

Universal-Fastening Sets 108

458



V

W Wall Profiles (for installation conduits) 310

Wells 289

Work Bench Design 278

Vibration Absorber -> Anti-Vibration Insert 141

Work Bench Systems (Examples) 41

Work Bench Systems (General Information) 18

MB Building Kit SystemNew Products 04/2001

April 2001 EditionMB Building KitSystem

item Industrietechnikund Maschinenbau GmbHFriedenstraße 107-109D-42699 Solingen

Postbox 12 01 64D-42676 Solingen

Phone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]

© item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH 2001Technical modifications and errors reserved. All rightsreserved. Use of texts and illustrations all reprints of anykind only permitted with our prior written consent. Thisalso applies for reproduction, translation or use inelectronic systems.

is a registered trademark ofitem Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH.

4

Index

1. Basic elements

1.1 Profiles


1.3 Fasteners



6. Special Elements



Alphabetic Register

4

1.1.2 Profiles 6

Profiles 6 R 5

1.2.1 Caps for Profile End Faces

Caps 6 6

1.2.2 Cover for Profile Groove

Cover Profiles Al 6

1.3.2 Angled Connections

Hinges 5, heavy-duty 7

4.3.2 Locking Systems

Locking Systems 5 and 6 8

6.4.3 Conveyor Rollers

Conveyor Roller TR32 10

Lifting Columns 8 200x170 11

Lifting Column Connection Profiles 13

15

Contents

New Products 04/2001 Contents Index

5

Profiles 6 R are ideal for constructing angled protectivehoods, racks, tables or other fixtures from Line 6Profiles.


Profiles 6 R also offer a simple means of fitting bracingstruts in profile constructions. The length of the strut iscalculated as follows based on the 6 R Profiles used:

Connection at 45°

Profile 2 Profile 6 R30/60-45°

b (a - 45). ��2

Connection at 30°



c 2(a - 45)/��3

d 2(a - 45)/��3 + 45


m = 0.88 kg/m Wx = 1.16 cm3 Wy = 1.57 cm3



m = 1.22 kg/m Wx = 2.42 cm3 Wy = 2.31 cm3



m = 1.43 kg/m Wx = 3.48 cm3 Wy = 2.86 cm3


Profile 6 R30/60-90°A = 8.06 cm2 I = 22.94 cm4

m = 2.17 kg/m W = 7.57 cm3


New Products 04/2001 1. Basic Elements 1.1 Profiles

6






PA-GF, black

Cap 6 R30/60-30°��= 30° m = 2.0 g1 pce. 0.0.459.39

Cap 6 R30/60-45°��= 45° m = 3.0 g1 pce. 0.0.459.40

Cap 6 R30/60-60°��= 60° m = 4.0 g1 pce. 0.0.459.41

Cap 6 R30/60-90°��= 90° m = 6.0 g1 pce. 0.0.459.42

Caps 6RadiusedOutside Surface

Cover Profile Al Aluminium Cover Profiles cover the profile groove toensure easy cleaning and prevent dust entering.

New Products 04/2001 1. Basic Elements 1.2 Accessories for Profiles

7

Hinges 5,heavy-duty

For connecting profiles at various angles up to 180° andfor use as heavy-duty hinges (adjustment range ± 90°).When used in conjunction with the spacer rings, theycan be used as freely movable hinges. If the spacer ringsare removed, they can be used as rigid angle elements,e.g. bracing, and can also be pinned.

Calculation of the strut length L:L = x2 + y2 - 2z

The Hinges with Clamp Lever can be locked in positionor released. Particularly suitable for adjustable holders,swivel-type booms for Parts Containers and othersimilar equipment.

Hinge functionrigid connection movable connection

F1 F2 F1 F2

500 N 200 N 200 N 100 N

Dowel Hex. Socket NutHead Cap Screw

a b c d e

2m6x20 7.0 mm M5 M5 3.3 mmDIN 6325 DIN 912 DIN 557

New Products 04/2001 1. Basic Elements 1.3 Fasteners

8

Hinge 5 20x20, heavy-duty2 hinge halves, GD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium2 fixing elements, PA-GF, black2 thread bushes M4, St, bright zinc-plated, black2 spacer rings, St, stainless2 hexagon screws, St, blackm = 39 g1 pce. 0.0.464.39

Hinge 5 20x20, heavy-duty with Clamp Lever2 hinge halves, GD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium2 fixing elements, PA-GF, black1 thread bush M4, St, bright zinc-plated, blackBush liner, St, bright zinc-plated, blackSpacer collar, St, blackClamp lever M4x20, blackMax. holding torque = 5 Nmm = 81 g1 pce. 0.0.464.43

Hinges 5,heavy-duty

As well as the latching function, Locking Systems alsoprovide security against unauthorised entry via swing orsliding doors constructed from inherently stable panelelements.The Locking Systems 5 and 6 are available for right-hand and left-hand application (the figure shows right-handed application).

LockingSystems 5 and 6

New Products 04/2001 4. Handles and Locks 4.3 Locks and Catches

9


1 set, right-hand application 0.0.391.16

1 set, left-hand application 0.0.464.50

Locking System 5, Double-Beard LockDouble-beard insertKey, locking bar, nabm = 120 g1 set, right-hand application 0.0.391.17



1 set, right-hand application 0.0.459.21


Locking System 6, Double-Beard LockDouble-beard insertKey, locking bar, nabm = 118 g1 set, right-hand application 0.0.459.23


The panel elements will need to be machined (ø 22 mm)for Locking Systems 5 and 6.Nab, with two different mounting positions for slidingand swing doors.

10

Multifunctional Conveyor Roller ideal for interlinkingmanual working stations where slim diameter rollers arean advantage. The ball bearing Conveyor Rollers TR32are simply pushed on and engage in the Bearing Blockswhich are screw fitted in the groove of Profiles 8. Thedistance between the rollers can be selected as a functionof the load. A Conveyor Roller TR32 of any requiredlength can be customized using a Bearing Set and a TubeD32. (Please note load specifications in the table below).

Conveyor RollerTR32

New Products 04/2001 6. Special Elements 6.4 Conveyors and Material Flow

F Xmin. Xmax.

Tube D32 Al 100 N 50 mm 600 mm

Tube D32 KU 50 N 50 mm 400 mm

Conveyor Roller TR32, Bearing SetPA, blackball-bearing support, sealed2 bearing flangesm = 16 g1 set 0.0.472.08

Conveyor Roller TR32, Bearing Block Set 82 bearing blocks, PA, black2 bearing clamps, PA, black2 Button-Head Screws T4x18, black2 T-Slot Nut 8 PA, black2 washers DIN 433-4.3, Stm = 18 g1 set 0.0.472.04

Tube D32 AlAl, anodizedl = 1.50 cm4

W = 0.94 cm3


Tube D32 KUPVC, blackTemperature range 0 - 60°Cl = 2.00 cm4

W = 1.22 cm3

m = 0.27 kg/mCut-off max. 3000 mm 0.0.472.25

11

The Lifting Columns 8 200x170 are designed forconstructing variable height workbenches, and is alsosuitable for many different applications where heightadjustment is required in the factory or office. Highcapacity roller guides in conjunction with rack andpinion drive permit rigid constructions using only acentral telescopic column, which have the capacity towithstand considerable bending moments from anydirection.All parts of the drive including the power supply areintegrated into the column and protected against dustingress.

Lifting Columns 8 200x170

The “electronic” and “synchro/memory” versions arecontrolled by means of a Hand Held Control, which canbe stored in a special drawer for easy access.In addition to the motor-driven columns, there is amanual version available (with cranked handle).

New Products 04/2001 6. Special Elements 6.5 Work Bench Design

The “electronic”- and “synchro/memory”-columnsfeature a soft-start /-stop function.The “synchro/memory” version has an integratedelectronic control for parallel operation of several LiftingColumns and a memory function. Up to 9 positions canbe stored and retrieved by the user. The Hand HeldControl of this type includes an LED-display whichshows the current height of the column.

Line 8 profiles grooves on all sides of the outer profileenable easy integration of the Lifting Column into anyproject using elements of the item MB System.

12

Lifting column basis h stroke s bendingmoment

FxL

1000N 515 mm 200 mm 220 Nmmanual



1000N 585 mm 490 mm 220 Nmsynchro/memory

Voltage: 230V~ 50/60 Hz(Version 120V~ on request)Operating temperature range: -20°C to 60°CMaximum lifting force: 1000N / 2000NLifting speed: 50 mm/s / 30 mm/sContinuous duty: 15% at rated loadProtection: IP 30Conformity: CE

Lifting Column 8 200x170, 1000N, manualColumn, Al, natural anodizedCap, PA, blackHandle, Stm = 14 kg1 pce. 0.0.471.01

Lifting Column 8 200x170, 1000N, electronicColumn, Al, natural anodizedCap, PA, blackHand Held Control, ABS, blackPower cord, 2 mm = 21 kg1 pce. 0.0.471.07

Lifting Column 8 200x170, 2000N, electronicColumn, Al, natural anodizedCap, PA, blackHand Held Control, ABS, blackPower cord, 2 mm = 21 kg1 pce. 0.0.471.05

Lifting Column 8 200x170, 1000N, synchro/memoryColumn, Al, natural anodizedCap, PA, blackPower cord, 2 mLink cable, 6 mm = 21 kg1 pce. 0.0.471.04

Hand Held Control synchro/memoryABS, blackm = 150 g1 pce. 0.0.471.06

Drawer for Hand Held ControlABS, blackm = 100 g1 pce. 0.0.471.11


Lifting Columns8 200x170

13

Lifting ColumnConnection Profiles

Lifting Column Connection Profiles 240x32 and 100x32are designed for ensuring stable connections to LiftingColumn 8 270x170. They can be used to create bothbase constructions and table top support structures. TheLifting Column Connection Profiles prevent access tothe functional elements located inside the LiftingColumns and support the applied lifting forces.

The marking grooves on the underside of Lifting ColumnConnection Profile 240x32 ensure easy location of thethrough hole for screw connection with Lifting Column8 200x170.To screw fit Connection Profiles 100x32, M8 threadsmust be drilled into the end faces of the ø 6.8 mm screwchannels of Connection Profiles 240x32.

Lifting Column Connection Profiles 100x32 (a) are usedwith Lifting Column Connection Profiles 240x32 (b) toform a rigid stable base.Connection Profiles 100x32 require two holes machinedfor screw fitting to Connection Profiles 240x32.

The screw channels already prepared in the liftingcolumn profiles are used to secure these elements to theLifting Column. Each Lifting Column Connection Profile240x32 is screwed into the end face of the LiftingColumn using four M10 screws (inner profile) or fourM8 screws (outer profile)

a: Lifting ColumnConnection Profile 100x32b: Lifting ColumnConnection Profile 240x32c: Lifting Column8 200x170

14

Lifting Column Connection Profile 100x32A = 16.20 cm2 Ix = 13.31 cm4 Iy = 186.31 cm4

m = 4.37 kg/m Wx = 6.44 cm3 Wy = 30.87 cm3


Lifting Column Connection Profile 240x32A = 32.94 cm2 Ix = 25.85 cm4 Iy = 1746.20 cm4

m = 8.89 kg/m Wx = 11.96 cm3 Wy = 145.51 cm3


Cap 100x32PA-GF, blackm = 12 g1 pce. 0.0.471.17

Cap 240x32PA-GF, blackm = 30 g1 pce. 0.0.471.18


Lifting Column-ConnectionProfiles

The solid rib of the Lifting Column Connection Profilesis designed for securing adjustable feet. Exampleshowing use of Knuckle Foot D30 M8x29 AT an Cap 8 D7on Connection Profile 100x32.

The Caps are fitted in the Lifting Column ConnectionProfiles using Self-Tapping Screws St 4.2x16.

15

If you require additional information material, pleasecontact your item sales and service partner. You can findthe address on the back of the brochure or you cancontact us on our web site:

www.item-international.com

The following documents are currently available:> MB Building Kit System, Comprehensive Catalogue> MB Quick & Easy CD ROM Version 4.0 international

Alphabetic Register

C

D

L

H

P

T

Caps 6 (for profile end face) 6Caps for Lifting Column Connection Profile 14Conveyor Roller TR32 10Cover Profile Al (for profile groove) 6

Drawer for Hand Held Control (for Lifting Column) 11

Hand Held Control (for Lifting Column) 11Hinge 5, heavy duty 7

Lifting Column 8 200x170 10Lifting Column Connection Profiles 13Locking Systems 5 and 6 8

Profiles 6 R 5

Tubes D32 10

New Products 04/2001 Alphapetic Register

0.4.

110.

27 0

4/20

01



Phone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]

Your distribution and service partner

Concept, design and realisation

item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH,Technical Documentation Department

Photographs

item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH

Notes

PatentsMany of the components and products contained in thiscatalogue are subject to industrial property rights. Anycopying of protected products is a violation of theserights and, as such, shall be liable to compensation.Data and illustrations in this catalogue do not dischargethe user of the obligation to carry out his own checks todetermine whether the industrial property rights of thirdparties are infringed.Product liabilityitem shall be liable, within the framework of the applicablelegal provisions, for the promised characteristics of theproducts shown in this catalogue. Any claims forliability above and beyond such - in particular relating toproducts created by third parties using productsincluded in this catalogue - are expressly excluded.Conditions of useThe products in the item MB Building Kit System aresuitable for use in dry conditions and over thetemperature range -20°C to +70°C. item must beconsulted where products are to be used for applicationsoutside these limits.

September 2001 EditionMB Building KitSystem



Phone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]

© item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH 2001Technical modifications and errors reserved.All rights reserved. Use of texts and illustrations allreprints of any kind only permitted with our prior writtenconsent. This also applies for reproduction, translationor use in electronic systems.


4

Contents


Inhalt

1. Basic Elements

1.1 Profiles


1.3 Fasteners


3.1 T-Slot Nuts


3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners


4.1 Handles


6. Special Elements

6.1 Electrical Discharge

6.3 Door Security



6.6 Lighting

8. Dynamic Elementes

8.3 Accessories for Mechanical Drive Elements


4

1.1.3 Profiles 8

Profiles 8 200 and 240 5

1.2.1 Caps for Profile End Faces

Caps 8 6

1.3.2 Angled Connections

Angle Elements 6 T1 and T2 7

3.1.1 T-Slot Nuts

T-Slot Nuts 6 St with 2 Threads 9

3.3.2 Fastening Panels to the Groove

Clamp Strip Profile 8 PP / Clamp Strips PP 10

Rebate Profile 8 Al M6 11

Dual-Rod Mesh System 12

Dual-Rod Mesh Hanger 12

Dual-Rod Mesh Lock System 13

Dual-Rod Mesh Clamping Element 14

Dual-Rod Mesh 15

3.3.3 Fastening Panels in Special Profiles

Textile Clamp Profile 6 30x30 16

Textile Clamp Profile, Clamp Strip and Lid Profile16

Button-Head Screw, self-threading St 4x12, TX 20 17

Textile Mesh 17

3.4.2 Movable Fasteners

Sliding-Door Guide Profile 8 40x20 18

Sliding-Door Catch Set 19

Recessed Grip D50 19

4.3.1 Door Catches

Door Latch Zn 20

6.1.2 Potential Equaliser

Potential Equaliser 5 and 6 21

6.3.1 Security Limit Switch/Lock compact 22

Actuators, fixed and movable 23

Fastening Set 6-8 for Security Limit Switch/

Lock compact 23

6.3.3 Rotary Security Switch 6-8 24

Plain Hinge 6-8 24

6.4.3 Conveyor Rollers

Groove Profile 8 Al M8-60 25

Foot Cap 8 40x40 light 26

Lamp 35W / with flexible tube 27

Lamp 35W; 3-Way Distributor Block

Electronic Transformer 105W 28

8.3.2 Miscellaneous

Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser Couplings 29

30

5

Profiles 8


Profile 8 200x40Al, anodizedA = 39.60 cm2 Ix = 65.62 cm4 Iy =1411.47 cm4

m = 10.69 kg/m Wx = 32.81 cm3 Wy= 141.14 cm3


Profile 8 240x40Al, anodized A = 47.21 cm2 Ix = 78.54 cm4 Iy =2400.72 cm4

m = 12.69 kg/m Wx = 39.27 cm3 Wy= 200.22 cm3


ModularDimensions(Basis 40 mm)

Flat Cross-Sections


m = 10.32 kg/m Wx = 18.35 cm3 Wy = 137.74 cm3



m = 12.29 kg/m Wx = 21.71 cm3 Wy = 194.74 cm3


Profiles with a flat cross-section can be used particularlyeffectively as a clamping surface or as slideconstructions for linear units.

These profiles augment Line 8.Because of the high moments of inertia Iy, they areespecially suitable for rigid constructions where there isan appropriate loading direction.

6

Radiused caps for the end faces of the various profilegeometries; the cut face does not need to be deburred.

Caps 8for Profiles 8ModularDimensions(Basis 40 mm)Flat Cross-Sections

PA-GF, black

Cap 8 200x28m = 22.0 g1 pce. 0.0.474.07

Cap 8 200x40m = 29.0 g1 pce. 0.0.474.01

Cap 8 240x28m = 27.0 g1 pce. 0.0.474.10

Cap 8 240x40m = 36.0 g1 pce. 0.0.474.04


7

Connection elements for fastening a profile at an angleof 45° when working with bracing and latticework.The Angle Elements are screw-connected with Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x12 and washers DIN 125-6.4. The profile to be connected can be attached usingtwo Universal Fasteners 6 (without anti-torsion pins)and Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x20.Covering of the profile ends with Caps 6 30x30-45°(Section 1.2 Accessories for Profiles).

Angle Elements6 T1


1 pce., natural 0.0.459.70


1 pce., natural 0.0.459.74


8


Angle BracketElements 6 T2

Connection elements for fastening two profiles at anangle of 45° when working with bracing and latticework.The Angle Elements are fastened to the profile usingButton-Head Screws ISO 7380.The profiles are screw-connected using two UniversalFasteners 6, two Button-Head Screws M6x22 and aspecial T-Slot Nut 6 St 2xM6-28 or 58 or using twoAutomatic Fasteners 6, two Hexagon Socket Head CapScrews DIN 912-M5x35 and a special T-Slot Nut 6 St2xM5-28 or 58.

Covering of the profile ends with Caps 6 30x30-45°.


1 pce., natural 0.0.459.72


1 pce., natural 0.0.459.76

Button-Head Screw ISO 7380 M6x22St, bright zinc-plated; property class 10.9l = 22 mmm = 445 g/100

100 pce. 8.0.002.49

9

T-Slot Nuts 6 Stwith 2 Threads

T-Slot Nuts 6 St with 2 threads are best used inconjunction with Angle Elements 6 T2 and UniversalFasteners or Automatic Fasteners for securing profiles at45°, but can also be used for all other profileconnections.


T-Slot Nut 6 St 2xM5-28a = M5 b = 28.0 mmm = 8 g c = 19.0 mm1 pce. 0.0.459.78




New Products 09/2001 3. Fastening Elements 3.1 T-Slot Nuts

10

New Products 09/2001 3. Fastening Elements 3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners

PP

Clamp Strip Profile 8 PPA = 1.81 cm2

m = 164 g/m

1 pce. length 2000 mm, black, similar to RAL 9005 0.0.458.67

1 pce. length 2000 mm, grey, similar to RAL 7035 0.0.474.13

Clamp Strip PP 0-6 mmA = 0.76 cm2

m = 70 g/m1 pce. length 2000 mm, black, similar to RAL 9005 0.0.458.69








Clamp StripProfiles 8 PPClamp Strips PP

Used for fastening panel elements in a closed profileframe. The Clamp Strips and the panel elements can beretrofitted into the profile frame and can also bedismantled again.The panel element does not require any furtherprocessing and is fastened near the outer edge of theprofile. Important for clean room applications: TheClamp Strip Profile smoothly bridges the transitionbetween panel surface and main profile, thus largelypreventing eddies of air current.The Clamp Strip Profile 8 is fitted in the profile groove,and the panel element fixed into it by locking it inposition using a suitable Clamp Strip.The elasticity of the Clamp Strip Profile and the ClampStrip enable an essentially tight fitting for the panelelement.

Fitting and dismantling the Clamp Strip in order to fixthe panel element into position.

The choice of a suitable Clamp Strip is governed by thethickness of the panel element (s):s = 0-6 / 5-11 / 10-13

11

Rebate Profile for universal fastening of variouselements to Profiles 8. Suitable as a continuous screwstrip for essentially dust and dirt-tight constructions, incombination with panel elements and Sealing Strips oras a rebate strip for doors.

Rebate Profile

The Rebate Profile is inserted into the groove and fixedin position with grub screws M6.

Connection dimensions for the Rebate Profile 8 Al toProfiles 8.

Rebate Profile 8 Al M6Al, anodizedFully machined with 20 threads M6incl. grub screws DIN 913-M6x12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 540 g


12

New Products 09/2001 3. Fastening Elements 3.3 Rigid Panel FastenersNew Products 09/2001 3. Fastening Elements 3.3 Rigid Panel Fasteners

Dual-Rod MeshSystem

Dual-Rod MeshHanger

Protective fence system for freestanding machineguarding. The Dual-Rod Mesh, made of welded high-strength steel wire, is screwed at any angle to the profilegroove of Line 8 Stand Profiles using Dual-Rod MeshHangers.This creates a customisable and stable protective fenceinto which swing door elements can also be integrated,if required.

The Dual-Rod Mesh Hanger accommodates the Dual-Rod Mesh elements on the cross-rods (ø 8 mm) at anyangle between 0° - 270° to the Stand Profile.Even after the fastening screws have been tightened, thefastening can still be rotated. This also forms a hinge fora swing door.

The Dual-Rod Mesh is first hung from a preassembledDual-Rod Mesh Hanger, and then screwed into positionwith further Hangers. Recommended spacing ofHangers: 3 panel heights, corresponding to 600 mm.

Average dimensions for connecting the Dual-Rod Meshto the Stand Profile.Corner zones at any angle can easily be constructedthanks to the Dual-Rod Mesh Hanger’s ability to tilt.

The inherently stable dual-rod mesh elements are usedwithout frames. The two fixed panel widths makeprocessing of the mesh largely unnecessary, with thenarrower design (width: 958 mm) being particularlysuitable for door elements.

The slotted hole fastening on the Stand Profile enablesadjustment of the position and angle.The ability to move the mesh horizontally (depending onthe mesh width) in the Dual-Rod Mesh Hanger helpscompensate for minor assembly errors.

13

Dual-Rod Mesh HangerBody, St, blackClamping elements, GD-Zn, black2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x10, St, bright zinc-plated2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x22, St, bright zinc-plated4 Washers DIN 9021-6.4, St, bright zinc-platedm = 279 g

1 set 0.0.446.04

Dual-Rod MeshLock System

The Dual-Rod Mesh Lock System is used to constructdoors in dual-rod mesh protective fences.The lock housing is screwed in position to the swingdoor, and the lock case is screw-connected to a rigidmesh element. The lock housing rabbet also serves as adoor rabbet and a lock cover. The lock housing can beused with mortise locks that meet DIN 18251 with pindimension 65 mm (e. g. Swing-Door Lock Order No.0.0.458.35 with Profile Cylinder 0.0.458.42).

Thanks to its multiple fastening options, the Dual-RodMesh Lock System allows left-handed or right-handedfitting. A hole may need to be made in the Dual-RodMesh to allow the door handle to be fed through.

14


Dual-Rod Mesh Lock SystemLock housing, PA-GF, blackLock case, PA-GF, black with nab, StLock housing rabbet, St, black2 Dual-Rod Mesh Adapter Plates, St, black4 Dual-Rod Mesh Clamping Elements4 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M6x6, St, bright zinc-plated2 door handles, PA, black1 spacer sleeve, PA, black2 square nut inserts M4, St, black2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M4x12, St, bright zinc-platedNotes on Use and Installationm = 1.74 kg

1 set 0.0.446.09

Dual-Rod MeshClampingElement

Dual-Rod Mesh Clamping ElementSt, blackm = 11 g

1 pce. 0.0.446.10

Dual-Rod Mesh Clamping Elements for universalfastening of any components to Dual-Rod Meshelements.Also suitable for fastening cylindrical components(ø 8 mm) to profiles or panel elements.

Dual-Rod MeshLock System

15

St, zinc-plated, black powder-coated

Dual-Rod Mesh 25x200Mesh width: 25x200 mmWire diameter: 6/8 mm

m = 22.0 kg1 pce., 1830x 958 mm 0.0.446.08

m = 45.0 kg1 pce., 1830x2008 mm 0.0.446.07


m = 14.5 kg1 pce., 1830x 958 mm 0.0.446.06

m = 30.0 kg1 pce., 1830x2008 mm 0.0.446.05

Dual-Rod Mesh The Dual-Rod Mesh elements are available in twodesigns and two sizes: various mesh widths can beused, depending on the distance to the danger zone thatis to be guarded.The narrow mesh width is particularly suitable for doors.

The narrow openings of the mesh prevent people fromreaching through (as required by EN 294).

Mesh Opening Distance towidth dimension danger zone

a b

25 19 > 120

50 44 > 850

16

Textile Clamp Profile 6 30x30Al, anodizedA = 2.76 cm2 Ix = 1.28 cm4 Iy = 2.18 cm4

m = 0.74 kg/m Wx = 0.93 cm3 Wy = 1.33 cm3


Textile Clamp Profile, Clamp StripAl, anodizedA = 0.37 cm2 Ix = 0.005 cm4 Iy =0.078 cm4

m = 0.10 kg/m Wx = 0.016 cm3 Wy =0.091 cm3


Textile Clamp Profile, Lid ProfileAl, anodizedA = 1.51 cm2 Ix = 1.04 cm4 Iy = 0.78 cm4

m = 0.40 kg/m Wx = 0.53 cm3 Wy = 0.34 cm3


Textile ClampProfile

Special profiles for clamping thin (max. 1.5 mm) panelelements that are not inherently stable such as textilegrids, fabric webs, paper webs and films.The textile clamp profiles are combined into a profileframe using Clamp-Profile Fastener 6 30x30 E; thewhole assembly can then be suspended on standprofiles.Textile Clamp Profiles comprise the Clamp Profile, theClamp Strip and a Lid Profile. Using the Button-HeadScrew St 4x12 TX 20, the textile panel element isclamped between the Clamp Profile and the Clamp Strip,and cut to size after clamping.Finally, the Lid Profile provides an easy-clean closurefor the clamped area.

The Button-Head Screw St 4x12 TX 20 is self-threadingin the Clamp Profile’s screw channel.The Clamp Strips already feature through holes. The tex-tile panel element must be pierced with the screw ifnecessary.The maximum thickness of the panel element is 1.5 mm.

Assembly sequence for a Panel Segment:> Join the Clamp Profiles using Clamp-Profile Fastener6 30x30 E (Art. No. 0.0.441.80)> Position the textile panel element (which is not yet cutto size)> Screw-fit the Clamp Strips while the panel element isclamped> Cut off the overhanging textile edge> Fit the Lid Profiles


17

The Textile Mesh is used for guards, enclosures andpartitions.It is supplied in rolls, making it easier to handle duringtransport.Any lengths and sizes can be cut easily using scissors.

Textile MeshPET, black, flame-retardant to DIN 75200Min. tear resistance (DIN 53857T2) : 1800 N/100mmMesh width: 21 mm Textile thickness: approx. 1 mmRoll width:1620 mm Roll length: 10 mMax. internal frame width 1500 mmm = 220±20 g/m2

1 roll 0.0.436.73

Textile Mesh

Button-Head Screw, self-threading St 4x12, TX 20St, bright zinc-platedm = 145 g/100

100 pce. 0.0.473.69

18

Sliding-DoorGuide Profile

The Sliding-Door Guide Profile is retrofitted into aprofile frame.Frameless, inherently stable panel elements made ofplastic (thickness 8 mm) can be used as sliding doors.The weight of the panel element, its inherent stabilityand the friction on the aluminium profile must all betaken into account in such cases.

Clip 8 St snaps the top and bottom of the Sliding-DoorGuide Profile into the surrounding frame profiles.1. The panel element is first lifted into the required trackat the top of the Sliding-Door Guide Profile.2. It is then placed in the corresponding guide track atthe bottom of the Sliding-Door Guide Profile.3. Positioning the catch correctly and securely at the topwill avoid the doors from being pulled out accidentally.

The sliding-door catches are attached directly to thepanel element if two or three sliding-door panels are tobe moved together. Their position can be selectedindividually, in order to determine the required openingpath of the accompanying door panels and the overlap ofthe doors (X; Xmin. = 23 mm).

Typical arrangement of a3-part sliding door withequal-sized doorsegments.

New Products 09/2001 3. Fastening Elements 3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners

19

Sliding-Door Guide Profile 8 40x20, TopAl, anodizedA = 2.76 cm2 Ix = 1.00 cm4 Iy = 4.39 cm4

m = 0.75 kg/m Wx = 0.83 cm3 Wy = 2.19 cm3


Sliding-Door Guide Profile 8 40x20, BottomAl, anodizedA = 3.43 cm2 Ix = 1.07 cm4 Iy = 4.99 cm4

m = 0.93 kg/m Wx = 0.90 cm3 Wy = 2.49 cm3


Clip 8 StSt, bright zinc-platedRecommended number: 5 per 1 mm = 2.5 g

1 pce. 0.0.428.97

Sliding-Door Catch SetPA-GF, black2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M3x12, St,bright zinc-plated2 nuts DIN 934-M3, St, bright zinc-platedm = 4 g

1 set 0.0.473.81

Recessed Grip D50PA-GF, blackm = 9 g

1 set 0.0.473.51

The Recessed Grip D50 is particularly suitable forsliding doors with a door thickness of 6 - 8 mm. Theyare inserted into holes in the panel element.The sliding-door catches must be fitted correctly, so asto avoid any areas where hands may become trapped.

20

Door Latch Zn Slimline Door Latch for swing doors for fitting in thedoor gap between the Stand Profile and the door. Thanksto its small construction height, a door gap of 12 mm ispossible.The Door Latch locks onto the head of a Hexagon SocketHead Cap Screw DIN 912 M6, which is screwed into theopposite groove against the T-Slot using a T-Slot Nut.

The Door Latch Zn can be attached to any combinationof Line 6 and 8 Profiles.The length of the Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw (s)depends on the profile range.The T-Slot Nuts (n) with thread M4 for fastening theDoor Latch Zn should be selected according to theprofile range.

Door Latch ZnGD-Zn, bright zinc-platedCap PA-GF, black2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991 M4x16, bright zinc-platedm = 66 g

1 set 0.0.473.62


Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912 M6x12l = 12 mmm = 507 g/100100 pce. 8.0.007.18

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912 M6x14l = 14 mmm = 544 g/100100 pce. 8.0.007.98

Profile n s

T-Slot Nut Screw DIN 912 M6x126 St M4 T-Slot Nut 6 St M6

T-Slot Nut Screw DIN 912 M6x148 Zn M4 T-Slot Nut 8 St M6


21

New Products 09/2001 6. Special Elements 6.1 Electrical Discharge

PotentialEqualiser

Potential Equaliser 5GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedGrub screw DIN 916-M3x12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 1 g

1 pce. 0.0.464.45

Potential Equaliser 6GD-Zn, bright zinc-platedGrub screw DIN 916-M4x16, St, bright zinc-platedm = 4 g

1 pce. 0.0.459.65


Ball-Headed Key 3 A/F1.5m = 29 g1 pce. 0.0.473.79

Ball-Headed Key 3 A/F2m = 32 g

1 pce. 0.0.473.78

The Potential Equaliser ensures that possible chargebuildups are balanced out between the individualprofiles of a construction. Fitted at joints, it destroys theinsulating anodized layer and creates an electricallyconductive connection.The Potential Equaliser cannot be considered anelectrical connection suitable for forming part of a safetycircuit.

Potential Equalisers 5 and 6 are swivelled into the Profi-le Groove and then pushed against the joint.

The grub screw must be screwed in with light pressureon the key, until it rests against both profiles and nudgesthe Potential Equaliser out of its original position.

22

New Products 09/2001 6. Special Elements 6.3 Door Security

Security LimitSwitch / Lockcompact

Compact Security Limit Switch and Security Lock forelectrical and mechanical securing of swing, lifting andsliding doors.When the actuator is pressed in, the contact is closed.The Security Lock, working on the zero-currentprinciple, also locks the actuator at the same time whenappropriately wired. This mechanically prevents thedoors from being opened even in the event of a powerfailure or impermissible operating states. In the event ofan emergency, the Security Lock can be opened withoutpower using the supplied triangular socket wrench.

Fastening Set 6-8 is suitable for universal fastening ofthe Security Limit Switch, Security Lock compact andthe actuator to Profiles 6 and/or 8. The slots allowcustomised adaptation to the direction of actuation andthe position of the elements in relation to each other.Fastening Set 6-8 can also be used for switches andsecurity locks of similar design.

The actuator is available in two models: The fixed designis suitable for medium-sized sliding and swing doors(door width greater than 500 mm and smaller than 1000mm), while the movable actuator is recommended forswing doors of width < 500 mm and for particularlylarge doors (increases operating tolerance).

Both switching units are equipped with screw-securedplug connectors, which make the electrical connectionparticularly easy. In the case of Security Limit Switchcompact, this is done using Proximity SwitchConnecting Cable Code A, Art. No. 0.0.473.25. In thecase of Security Lock compact, the Proximity SwitchConnecting Cable Code B, Art. No. 0.0.473.93 is alsorequired.

Wiring diagrams and illustration of circuits:

Security Lock compact

Security Limit Switch compact

23

Security Limit Switch compactCasing, PA-GF, blackPositive breakRated voltage: 24 V AC/DC / 230 V AC, 4AProtection: IP 67, EN 60529Test certification to BG-GS-ET-15Washersm = 80 g1 pce. 0.0.473.90

Security Lock compactCasing, PA-GF, blackPositive breakRated control supply voltage: 24 V AC/DC or 230 V ACProtection: IP 67, EN 60529Test certification to BG-GS-ET-151 triangular socket wrench DIN 22417 M5m = 305 g

1 set, 230 V AC 0.0.473.27

1 set, 24 V AC/DC 0.0.473.26

Fixed Actuator for Security Limit Switch / Lock compactSt, corrosion-resistant2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912 M4x10,St, bright zinc-plated2 square nuts similar to DIN 557 M4-5, St, bright zinc-platedm = 16 g1 set 0.0.473.23

Movable Actuator for Security Limit Switch /Lock compactPA-GF / St, corrosion-resistant3 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912 M4x14,St, bright zinc-plated3 square nuts similar to DIN 557 M4-5, St, brightzinc-platedm = 22 g1 set 0.0.473.24

Security Switch Connecting Cable M12x1PVCConnecting cable 4x0.75 mm2 l = 5 m d = 6 mmm = 317 g1 pce., Code A 0.0.473.25

1 pce., Code B 0.0.473.93

Fastening Set 6-8 for Security Limit Switch /Lock compactAngle bracket 6-8, GD-Zn, similar to RAL 9006Angle bracket, cap 6-8, PA-GF, blackFastening plate 6-8, GD-Zn, similar to RAL 90062 T-Slot Nuts 8 Zn M4, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 Zn M5, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 6 St M4, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 6 St M5, bright zinc-plated2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M4x14,St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 125-5.3, St, bright zinc-plated2 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M5x18,St,bright zinc-plated2 adapter washers DIN 988-4x8x1, St, bright zinc-plated2 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M4x35,St, bright zinc-plated2 square nuts similar to DIN 557 M4-5, St, bright zinc-platedm = 349 g1 set 0.0.473.22

24

Rotary SecuritySwitch

The Rotary Security Switch is a hinge for hoods and fordoors of enclosures featuring an integrated securityswitch. Its compact design and integrated switchingelements give it exceptional protection againstmechanical influences. This also means it is extensivelyprotected against tampering.The switch point is set between 0° and 180° and fixed inposition by tightening the snap-off-head screw only afterassembly is complete. Once set, the action cannot beundone!The slotted fastening enables the Rotary Security Switchto be used on Line 6 and 8 Profiles. The connectingcable with plug, Code A (Art. No. 0.0.473.25) isconnected axially, thereby affording the cable a protectedposition as it lies in the profile groove.A geometrically identical Plain Hinge is also available.

Permissible loading forces on Rotary Security Switch:F1 = max. 750 NF2 = max. 1000 N

Width of the door gap (a) when the Rotary SecuritySwitch is used

Profile a

0 - 22 mm

0 - 12 mm

Rotary Security Switch 6-8GD-Zn, RAL 9006 white aluminiumRated voltage 60V DC; 0.5 ACertified to DC 13 (EN 60947)m = 346 g

1 set 0.0.473.66

Plain Hinge 6-8GD-Zn, RAL 9006 white aluminiumm = 322 g

1 set 0.0.473.67

Wiring diagram and illustration of circuits

New Products 09/2001 6. Special Elements 6.3 Door Security

Setting the switch point after the protective equipmenthas been successfully assembled: Snapping off thescrew headImportant:Subsequent changes are no longer possible!

25

The Groove Profile 8 Al M8-60 is used for fasteningelements with a constant spacing in modular dimension60 mm for e.g. Conveyor Rollers or similar.

Groove Profile 8 Al M8-60Al, anodizedThreaded bore M8 in modular dimension 60 mmm = 510 g


Groove Profile 8 Al M8-60a b

60 mm 120 mm

The Groove Profile 8 Al M8-60 is used for fasteningelements with a constant spacing of 60 mm. It is idealfor Conveyor Rollers (ø 50 mm) which can be positionedwith minimal axial spacing.

Groove Profile

New Products 09/2001 6. Special Elements 6.4 Conveyors and Material Flow

26

Foot Cap


Foot Cap 8 40x40 lightPA-GF, blackm = 6 g

1 pce. 0.0.473.03

For end-face covering of a Profile 8 40x40 light, wherethe core bore is used as a socket for an adjustable footor similar.The Foot Cap is clamped in the outer profile cavities ofthe Profile 8 40x40 light.

27

Lamp 35W

New Products 09/2001 6. Special Elements 6.6 Lighting

Lamp 35WON/OFF switchHalogen reflector 35WProtective panel of hardened glassProtection: IP 67, EN 60529Protection class IIIm = 600 g

1 set 0.0.417.60

Lamp 35W with Flexible TubeON/OFF switchHalogen reflector 35WProtective panel of hardened glassProtection: IP 67, EN 60529Protection class IIIm = 1220 g

1 set 0.0.417.71

Dust-tight and water-tight industrial spotlight (IP 67) ina low-voltage (12 V) design. The aluminium housing forthe light fitting is equipped for fastening with Profile 8grooves or the version with the flexible tube can be setto any position.Lamp 35W comes with a 2 m connecting cable, which islinked to the electronic transformer using a codedsystem plug.Up to 3 Lamps can be attached to this power pack viathe distributor block.The voltage supply to the electronic transformer isprovided via the Connecting Cable, Socket / EarthedPlug (Art. No. 0.0.417.42) to a 230 V safety contactsocket.The housing of Lamp 35W can be fitted with HandlePA 80.

Fixed Lamp 35W, adjustable with Hinge 8 40x40,heavy-duty with clamp lever.

28

Lamp 35W, Halogen Reflectorm = 25 g

1 pce. 0.0.417.77

Lamp 35W, 3-Way Distributor Blockm = 20 g

1 pce. 0.0.417.74

Electronic Transformer 105WPrimary voltage: 230/240 V ACSecondary voltage: 12 V ACm = 167 g1 pce. 0.0.417.75

Lamp 35W

New Products 09/2001 6. Special Elements 6.6 Lighting

29

VK14 VK32

L 80 120

a 1 - 1.5 2 - 3

b min. 40 min. 60

SynchroniserShaft EqualiserCouplings

New Products 09/2001 8. Dynamic Elements 8.3 Accessories for Mechanical Drive Elements

Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser Coupling VK142 half shells, St, bright zinc-plated8 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M8x20,St, bright zinc-plated and waxedm = 745 g

1 set 0.0.472.28

Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser Coupling VK322 half shells, St, bright zinc-plated8 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M10x30,St, bright zinc-plated and waxedm = 2.8 kg

1 set 0.0.472.29

When Synchroniser Shafts are used for transferringtorque, it must be possible to adjust the attached drivesduring assembly. The Synchroniser Shaft EqualiserCoupling enables the Synchroniser Shaft to beseparated, and then creates a power-lock connectionbetween the shafts.Snap Rings W should be used to secure the Synchron-iser Shaft axially between the drive elements.

The Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser Coupling is positionedat the ends of the Multi-Spline Shafts and power-lockconnected using clamping screws. The tightening torqueof the clamping screws is 25 Nm (Equaliser CouplingVK14) or 50 Nm (Equaliser Coupling VK32).The two halves of the coupling must be screwed ontodegreased shaft ends using the waxed screws supplied,so as to transfer the necessary torque.

30


New Products 09/2001 Alphapetical Register

A

B

D

E

F

G

H

L

M

P

T

S

Angle Elements 6 T1 7 Angle Elements 6 T2 8

Ball-Headed Key 21 Button-Head Screw, self-threading St 4x12, TX 20 17Button-Head Screw M6x22 8

Caps 8 200 and 240 6 Clamp Strip Profile 8 PP 10Clip 8 St 19 Clamp Strip PP 10

Distributor Block 3-Way; Lamp 35W 28 Dual-Rod Mesh 15Door Latches Zn 20 Dual-Rod Mesh Hanger 12Dual-Rod Clamping Element 14 Dual-Rod Mesh System 12Dual-Rod Lock System 13

Electronic Transformer 105W; Lamp 35W 28

Fastening Set 6-8 for Security Limit Switch/Lock Foot Cap 8 40x40 light 26compact 23Fixed Actuator for Security Limit Switch/Lockcompact 23

Groove Profile 8 Al M8-60 25

Halogen Reflector; Lamp 35 W 28 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 912 M6 20

Lamp 35W 27 Lamp 35W, with Flexible Tube 27Lamp 35W, Halogen Reflector 28 Lamp 35W, 3-Way Distributor Block 28

Movable Actuatorfor Security Limit Switch/Lockcompact 23

Plain Hinge 6-8 24 Profiles 8 200 and 240 5Potential Equaliser 5 and 6 21

Rebate Profile 8 Al M6 11 Rotary Security Switch 6-8 24Recessed Grip D50 19

Security Limit Switch, compact 22 Sliding-Door Guide Profile 8 40x20 18Security Lock, compact 22 Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser Coupling VK14 29Security Switch Connecting Cable M12x1 23 Synchroniser Shaft Equaliser Coupling VK32 29Sliding-Door Catch Set 19

Textile Clamp Profile 6 30x30 16 Textile Mesh 17Textile Clamp Profile, Clamp Strip 16 T-Slot Nuts 6 St with 2 threads 9Textile Clamp Profile, Lid Profile 16

C

R

Information materialIf you require additional information material, please contact your itemsales and service partner. You can find the address on the back of thebrochure or you can visit us on our web site: www.item-international.com

The following documents are currently available:

Catalogue MB Building Kit System 5460 pages1 pce. 0.4.110.22

Brochure MB Building Kit SystemNew Products 04/200116 pages1 pce. 0.4.110.27

CD MB Quick & Easy / Version 4.0 international1 pce. 0.5.000.67

0.4.

111.

14 0

9/20

01M

ade

in G

erm

any



Phone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]




Photographs


Notes

PatentsMany of the components and products contained in thiscatalogue are subject to industrial property rights. Anycopying of protected products is a violation of theserights and, as such, shall be liable to compensation.Data and illustrations in this catalogue do not dischargethe user from the obligation to carry out his own checksto determine whether the industrial property rights ofthird parties are infringed.Product liabilityitem shall be liable, within the framework of the applicablelegal provisions, for the promised characteristics of theproducts shown in this catalogue. Any claims forliability above and beyond such - in particular relating toproducts created by third parties using productsincluded in this catalogue - are expressly excluded.Conditions of useThe products in the item MB Building Kit System aresuitable for use in dry conditions and over thetemperature range -20°C to +70°C. item must beconsulted where products are to be used for applicationsoutside these limits.




Phone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]

© item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbH 2002Technical modifications and errors reserved.All rights reserved. Use of texts and illustrations or allreprints of any kind only permitted with our prior writtenconsent. This also applies for reproduction, translationor use in electronic systems.


4

Contents


Index 4

1. Basic Elements

1.1 Profiles 1.1.3 Profiles 8

Profiles 8 8EN 5

1.1.2 Accessories for Profiles

Caps 8 6

1.3 Fasteners 1.3.2 Angled Connections

Face Fastening Set 8 7


3.2 Screws and Nuts 3.2.2 Special Fastening Elements

Angle Bracket Zn 8

3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners 3.4.1 Hinges

Hinge, St, light duty 9


4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.3 Door Catches

Sliding-Door Pin Lock 10

6. Special Elements


Column D110 11

Column Profile D110 11

Column Lid Profile D110 11

Profile 8 R26-270° 12

Support Arm 8 120 13

Spacer Element 8 D40 14

Flange 8 D130 14

Tool Holder 8 15


7.1 Conduits 7.1.3 Accessories for Conduits

Conduit Cap Fastener 40 E 16

Alphabetical Register 17

5


The sides of these profiles, with their large cross-sections, are essentially smooth. Located at each cornerare Line 8 grooves which can be used for connectingprofiles and for securing attachments. In addition to thestylish design, the outer surfaces of Profiles 8 are alsovery easy to clean.These Profiles are particularly well suited for relativelylight, but stable support structures and for constructingrigid frames.The joints between the profile structures can bereinforced using Angle Brackets 8 Zn.

Profiles 8

Profile 8 160x160 8ENAl, anodizedA =59.34 cm2 I = 1876.10 cm4

m =16.05 kg/m W = 234.51 cm3

Cut-off, max. 6000 mm, natural 0.0.474.58

Profile 8 240x160 8ENAl, anodizedA =74.00 cm2 Ix = 2492.10 cm4 Iy =5177.20 cm4

m =19.98 kg/m Wx = 310.60 cm3 Wy = 436.70 cm3


Profiles 8 EN have the same design as the externalprofile of Lifting Column 8 200x170. They are thereforeparticularly suitable for constructing tables.

6

Cap 8 160x160St, black4 dome-head screws M8x14, St, blackm = 624 g1 set 0.0.475.15

Cap 8 240x160St, black4 dome-head screws M8x14, St, blackm = 907 g1 set 0.0.475.16

Caps 8 Sturdy Caps for Profiles 8 8EN.The special screws enclosed are used to secure the Capsto the end faces of the profiles.An M8 thread must be tapped in the core bores of theprofiles for this purpose.


7


Face Fastening Set 8 is used to create a rigid angularconnection between two profiles whose grooved sidesface each other.It can also be used to connect the end face of one profileto the grooved side of another profile.The two halves of the Face Fastening Set are locatedbetween the profiles being connected.A clamp lever extending all the way through may beused with Face Fastening Set 8. This alternativefacilitates adjustment.

Face FasteningSet 8

The angle between the profiles can be selected in 5°increments. The toothing ensures that the two halves fittogether securely at the correct angle.The two halves must be pinned together if a moment ofM > 10 Nm is applied to the Face Fastening Set.The permissible load is Mmax. = 20 Nm.

Two Line 8 Profiles are screw-connected using screwISO 7380-M8x25, Washer DIN 125-8,4 and T-Slot Nut 8St M8.An access hole must be made in one of the profiles toaccommodate the Allen key.

The anti-torsion blocks must be removed when attachingto panel elements.Position of the fixing bores in the panel elements andprofiles.

Face Fastening Set 8GD-Zn, blackm = 71 g

1 set 0.0.474.44

8

a b c dProfile Screw T-Slot Nut

ISO 7380

M5x16 Locating Washer 6 D5 5 St M5

M5x20 Locating Washer 6 D5 6 St M5

M6x20 Washer DIN 9021-6.4 8 St M6

New Products 04/2002 3. Fasteners 3.2 Screws and Nuts

Brackets Zn are very versatile and can be used forsecuring various components in variable positions onMB Building Kit System profiles and panel elements.The slots can be used to adjust the position and angle ofthe Bracket over a broad range and have been designedfor screws up to size M6. Locating Washers 6 D5 or 6D4 are recommended for smaller screws.(Catalogue MB5, Section 3.2.2)

Angle BracketZn

Bracket 40x40x20 ZnGD-Zn, blackm = 63 g

1 pce. 0.0.474.60


1 pce. 0.0.474.61


1 pce. 0.0.474.62


1 pce. 0.0.474.63

9

a b c d

a b c dProfile T-Slot Nut Washer Screw

DIN 125 ISO 7380

5 St M4* 4.3 M4x16*

6 Zn M4* 4.3 M4x20

8 Zn M4* 4.3 M4x20

New Products 04/2002 3. Fasteners 3.4 Movable Panel Fasteners

Spring-loaded 90° hinge for screw attachment which isparticularly suitable when constructing lids andlightweight doors. There is no need to make any specialhole in the panel element to accommodate the hinge.Stackable spacer plates can be used to compensate fordifferent thicknesses in the panel elements and doorgaps. The adapter plate can be used to attach Hinge, St,light duty to all profile lines.

Hinge, St, lightduty

Hinge, St, light dutyHinge, St, blackAdapter plate, PA-GF, black3 spacer plates, PA-GF, blackFastening elementsm = 125 g1 set 0.0.474.38

Machining specifications for the panel element

Permissible load: F = 120 N

Tightening torque for the fastening screws:M = 1.5 Nm

Option for fastening the Hinge to the frame.The door / panel elements can be aligned flush to theframe using the spacer plates and the slot in the adapterplate:Line 5 Profile: Max. 4 mm thicknessLine 6 Profile: Max. 8 mm thicknessLine 8 Profile: Max.10 mm thickness

Choose the fastening elements that match the profilelines used for the surrounding frame.The components marked with an * are not included inthe scope of supply for Hinge, St, light duty.

Side of door

With transparent panelelements, a spacer plateattached to the outside ofthe element can be usedto conceal the Hinge.

10

Sliding-Door Pin LockGD-Zn/St, blackWasher, PA, black2 keys, identicalm = 86 g1 set 0.0.474.59


Integrated lock system for sliding doors which isinserted into the panel element of the door. Whenoperated a projecting pin locks the door against the oneimmediately behind it. To lock a sliding-door systemwith n door elements, n-1 Sliding-Door Pin Locks willbe required.The Sliding-Door Pin Lock should be installed in closeproximity to the guide profiles in order to offermaximum protection against the door being opened byforce.The different thicknesses of panel elements (4 to 8 mm)can be compensated using the spacer washer.

Sliding-Door PinLock

Mounting dimensions, locked and unlocked.

Washers are used to compensate the differentthicknesses (2 mm and 0.7 mm thick)

The panel elements are machined to take the Sliding-Door Pin Lock and the pin.

11

The special elements in this product series are highlysuitable for constructing modular and functionalsupporting elements of desks and tables. The tables canbe constructed with individual legs at each corner, with acentral column or with combinations of these.

Work BenchDesign


Column Profile D110 is equipped with two integratedconduits for protecting equipment cables, ensuring theyare routed safely from the floor to the table top.

Column D110 When used in conjunction with two Lid Profiles, ColumnProfile D110 can be used to create a column of circularcross-section which can form a central table leg or as astylish support for structures mounted on top of it.Profiles with grooves of modular dimension 40 mm canbe screw-attached using the core bores of Column Profi-le D110.

Located below the lid profiles are integrated conduits forequipment cables. Cables can be run in and out of thecolumn at any point through an opening in the lidprofiles.

12

Column Profile D110Al, anodizedA = 20.64 cm2

m = 5.57 kg/m


Column Lid Profile D110Al, anodizedA = 1.39 cm2

m = 0.37 kg/mCut-off, max. 3000 mm, natural 0.0.475.09


Profile 8 R26-270°Al, anodizedA = 6.45 cm2

m = 1.75 kg/m


Cap 8 R26-270°PA-GF, blackm = 5.6 g1 pce. 0.0.474.46

Profile 8 R26-270° Profile with round outer surface closed on three sides,with a Profile 8 light duty groove.This is particularly useful as a table leg attached to onecorner of a table structure. The Profile 8 groove can beused to connect the profile with any desired tablesupport structure made of standard system elements.The fact that its exterior surface is closed on three sidesmakes it both stylish and easy to clean. The cap can alsobe fitted at the bottom of the profile to protect the floor.There are also many other possible uses, e.g. as a handrail for installation on walls and profile structures.The profile groove on one side can be closed off bymeans of a Cover Profile 8 R40 in order to produce around profile contour without grooves.

Column D110

13


Support Arm 8 120GD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium2 fixing elements, GD-Zn, galvanizedm = 530 g

1 set 0.0.474.80

Support Arm Support Arm 8 120 can be used to support panelelements and to connect Line 8 Profiles.It provides a stylish means of connecting Profile 8 R26-270° to table tops, walls and other surfaces.

Positioning aids ensure that the Support Arm isconnected in the correct position on the profile side.These can be broken off in order to install the SupportArm at any chosen angle.Flange 8 D130 and Spacer Element 8 D40 are used forsecuring the Support Arm to surfaces.

14


Spacer ElementFlange

System elements for connecting-structures whenconstructing tables, shelves or hand rails.Spacer Element 8 D40 is fitted as a spacer elementbetween Support Arm 8 120 and Flange 8 D130.However, the flange can also be screwed directly to theSupport Arm.

The removable fixing elements prevent the Support Arm,Spacer Element and Flange from twisting.The length of the screws depends on the combinationselected.A: Button-Head Screw ISO 7380-M8x18 when

connecting Support Arm 8 120 with system groove 8B: Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M8x50 when fitting

Spacer Element 8 D40 between Flange 8 D130 andSupport Arm 8 120Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M8x30 whenconnecting Flange 8 D130 directly to Support Arm8 120 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M8x30

C: Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M6x(10 + t)Depending on the particular application

Flange 8 D130 can also be used as a mounting plate fortable columns made from Column Profile D110. It canbe used for connecting to the table top, to a Base Plateor directly to the floor.

Flange 8 D130 is screwed to Column Profile D110 bymeans of 2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7981-M8x25.To do this, M8 threads must be drilled into the corebores (ø 6.8 mm) in the Column Profile.

15

1.

2.

3. 4.


Tool Holder 8 can be fitted at any point in the groove ofProfiles 8. Its spring-loaded elements made of flexibleplastic enclose any inserted tools and pencils and holdthem securely. The Tool Holder can be extended at willby simply adding further elements. The clamping forceof the Tool Holder can also be varied by choosing theappropriate pre-tensioning.The flexible plastic loops ensure that the surfaces of thetools are not damaged.

Tool Holder 8

Tool Holder 810 loops, PA-GF, black10 compression springsm = 40 g1 set 0.0.474.50

Installation sequence:1. Insert the loop into the groove2. Turn it by 90°3. Insert the spring into the groove4. Secure the Tool Holder in the groove,

e.g. using T-Slot Nut 8 St/PA M6 and grub screwDIN 914-M6x8.

Spacer Element 8 D40GD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium4 fixing elements, GD-Zn, galvanizedm = 129 g

1 set 0.0.474.81

Flange 8 D130GD-Zn, RAL9006 white aluminium2 fixing elements, GD-Zn, galvanizedm = 399 g

1 set 0.0.474.82

16

New Products 04/2002 7. Installation Elements 7.1 Conduits

Conduit Cap Fastener 40 E is an adapter element forfitting Conduit Caps onto conduits E of modulardimension 40 mm.It forms the counterpart support for Self-Tapping ScrewsDIN 7981 St 4.2x9.5, which are used to attach theConduit Caps.For use with:> Conduit U 40x40 E, with Conduit Cap 40x40> Conduit U 80x40 D40 E, with Conduit Cap 80x40> Conduit U 80x40 D80 E, with Conduit Cap 80x40> Conduit U 80x80 E, with Conduit Cap 80x80

Conduit CapFastener 40 E

Conduit Cap Fastener 40 E2 fastening elements, PA-GF, black2 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7982-2.2x9.5, St, galvanizedm = 5 g1 set 7.0.003.04

The side walls of the conduits must be provided with acountersink which is used for screw-connecting theConduit Cap Fastener 40 E.

The Conduit Caps are then screw-connected with theend face against the Conduit Profiles in the usual way.

17



Angle Bracket Zn 8

Bracket 40x40x20 Zn 8Bracket 60x40x20 Zn 8Bracket 60x60x20 Zn 8Bracket 80x40x20 Zn 8

Cap 8 R26-270° 12Cap 8 160x160 6Cap 8 240x160 6Caps 8 6Column D110 11Column Lid Profile D110 12Column Profile D110 12Conduit Cap Fastener 40 E 16

Face Fastening Set 8 7Flange 8 D130 14

Hinge, St, light duty 9

Profile 8 R26-270° 12Profile 8 160x160 8EN 5Profile 8 240x160 8EN 5Profiles 8 5

Sliding-Door Pin Lock 10Spacer Element 8 D40 14Support Arm 8 120 13

Tool Holder 8 15

C

F

B

T

H

P

S

A

Information materialIf you require additional information material, please contact your itemdistribution and service partner. You can find the address on the back ofthe brochure or you can visit us at our web site: www.item-international.com


Comprehensive Catalogue MB Building Kit System 5460 pages1 pce. 0.4.110.22

Catalogue MB Building Kit SystemNew Products 04/200116 pages1 pce. 0.4.110.27


CD MB Quick&Easy / Version 5.0 international1 pce. 0.5.000.67

0.4.

111.

37 0

4/20

02M

ade

in G

erm

any



Phone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]




Photographs


Notes


September 2002 EditionMB Building KitSystem



Phone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]



4

Contents


1. Basic Elements


Profiles 6 30x12 and 6 60x12 light 5

1.1.3 Profiles 8

Profile 8 160x160 6

1.2 Profile Accessories 1.2.1 Cover for Profile End Face

Caps 6 5

Caps 8 6

1.3 Fasteners 1.3.1 Right-Angled Connections

Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M8 7

1.3.5 Parallel-Profile Connections

Parallel Fasteners 8 8

2. Floor Elements

2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.1 Adjustable Feet with Thread

Adjustable Feet, Stainless 9

2.1.3 Special Adjustable Feet

Base Plate 8 320x320 St 10


4.1 Handles

Cap for Handle PA 160 11

4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.1 Door Catches

Catch Mounting Bracket 11

5. Panel Elements

5.1 Closed Panels 5.1.1 Transparent Panels

Acrylic Glass 2mm 12

Polycarbonate 2mm 12

5.2 Mesh Panels

Dual-Rod Meshes 13

6. Special Elements


Document Holders 14

Cable Duct 18


Protective Profiles 8 40x16 21

Warning and Protective Profiles 8 40x16 21


5



m = 0.43 kg/m Wx = 0.39 cm3 Wy = 0.98 cm3



m = 0.81 kg/m Wx = 0.83 cm3 Wy = 3.34 cm3


Slimline Line 6 Profiles for fastening lightweightattachments.Automatic Fastening Set 6 is recommended for fasteningthese Profiles at right-angles.

Profiles 6

Cap 6 30x12PA-GF, blackm = 1 g1 pce. 0.0.478.09

Cap 6 60x12PA-GF, blackm = 2 g1 pce. 0.0.478.11

Caps 6 Caps for Profiles 6 30x12 and 60x12 light.

6

Profiles 8


Profile 8 160x160Al, anodizedA = 74.20 cm2 I = 2355.00 cm4

m = 20.04 kg/m W = 294.40 cm3


Cap 8 160x160St, painted, black4 dome-head screws M8x14, St, galvanized, blackm = 624 g

1 set 0.0.475.15

Profile 8 160x160 is particularly suitable for large gatesand heavy-duty machine structures.The grooves of Profiles 8, of modular dimension 40 mm,run all around the profile and support use of proven Line8 fastening elements (e.g. Universal Fasteners orAutomatic Fasteners). The new Angle Bracket 8160x160 St M8 is recommended for interconnecting twoProfiles 8 160x160.The end faces of the Profiles contain core bores ofdiameter 10.2 mm for taking M12 threads for e.g.adjustable feet or floor fasteners, in particular the newBase Plate 8 320x320 St.

M8 threads must be tapped in the screw channels(ø 6.8 mm) of the Profiles for securing Caps 8 160x160to the end face of the Profile.

7

Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M8High-strength cast iron, painted, blackm = 2.35 kg

1 pce. 0.0.475.21

Fastening Set for Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M81 Profile Bar 8 St M8-40, galvanized4 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M8x20, St, galvanized, black4 washers DIN 9021-8.4, St, galvanized, blackm = 132 g1 set 0.0.479.96

Angle Bracket8 St


Heavy-duty Angle Bracket for interconnecting profiles,and in particular heavy-duty Profiles 8 160x160, usinga power-lock connection without machining. Alsosuitable for fastening any desired components to Line 8Profiles or for reinforcing screw-connected profileconstructions.The Fastening Set facilitates installation of Angle Bracket8 160x160 St M8.Depending on the combination of profiles, up to 4Fastening Sets may be required for each Angle Bracket.

8

Parallel Fastener 82 clamping elements, Al, anodizedHousing, PA-GF, blackCompression springTensioning screw, St, galvanizedm = 21 g1 set 0.0.476.58

Parallel Fastener 8 Cover ProfileAl, anodizedm = 50 g/m1 pce., 2000 mm, natural 0.0.476.59

Parallel Fastener 8 Cover Profile End CapPA-GF, blackm = 2.5 g

1 pce. 0.0.476.60


ParallelFastener 8

Using the Parallel Fastener 8 Cover Profile:The gap (12 mm wide) between the profiles which isgenerated when Parallel Fastener 8 is used can becovered in full using this profile.The Cover Profile can be fitted over at least 2 ParallelFasteners 8.Parallel Fastener 8 Cover Profile Cap covers the end-face gap between the profiles when using ParallelFastener 8 Cover Profiles.

Element for fastening two parallel Line 8 Profiles at adistance of 12 mm.Parallel Fastener 8 is very easy to use: Both halves ofthe spring loaded fastener engage in the profile groovesfacing each other. This fixes the profiles in position.The fastener is then clamped by tightening an internalscrew.

Permissible loading force per Fastener:Fx = 2000 NFz = 200 N

Max. torque for the tensioning screw:M = 2.5 Nm

9

Knuckle Foot D20, M5x45 stainlessSpindle, St, stainlessFoot plate, St, stainlessHexagon nut DIN 934-M5, St, stainlessF = 1,500 N � = 7°m = 19 g1 pce. 0.0.464.81



Knuckle Foot D60, M12x75 stainlessSpindle, St, stainlessFoot plate, St, stainlessHexagon nut DIN 934-M12, St, stainlessF = 15,000 N � = 7°m = 185 g

1 pce. 0.0.478.13

New Products 09/2002 2. Floor Elements 2.1 Adjustable Feet

Adjustable Feet,Stainless

Knuckle feet in stainless steel for use in areas that are atrisk of corrosion.The fact that they are electrically conductive means thatthey can also be used for desks and devices in areas thatare susceptible to ESD.

Depending on the particular application, the knuckle feetcan be installed in the profile core bores or incombination with Base Plates / Transport Plates.A ball joint in the plate of the foot is used forcompensation.

Note:The protective conductor of a machine or device mustnot be connected via a conductive knuckle foot. An addi-tional Earthing Terminal (item Comprehensive CatalogueMB 5, Section 6.1) with a separate cable is required forthis purpose.

10


Base Plate 8320x320 St

Solid steel Base Plate, particularly suitable for floor andwall mounting of Profiles 8 160x160.

Base Plate 8 320x320 StSt, painted, black8 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M12x40,St, galvanizedm = 11.5 kg

1 set 0.0.476.67

Base Plate 8 320x320 St has been prepared forscrewing to the profile core bores (8 counterbores forHexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M12 inProfiles 8 160x160, and 4 counterbores for HexagonSocket Head Cap Screws DIN 912-M8 in Profiles 8160x160 8EN) and with through holes ø 20 mm for floormounting.

Knuckle Foot D80, M16x100 stainlessSpindle, St, stainlessFoot plate, St, stainlessHexagon nut DIN 934-M16, St, stainlessF = 20,000 N � = 7°m = 435 g

1 pce. 0.0.476.39

Adjustable Feet,Stainless

11

New Products 09/2002 4. Handles and Locks 4.1 Handles

The Cap fills out the cavity in Handle PA 160 to ensurethe Handle is comfortable in use. It is fitted after theHandle has been installed.

Cap for Handle PA 160PA-GF, blackm = 20 g

1 pce. 0.0.475.38

Cap for HandlePA 160

Catch MountingBracket

The Catch Mounting Bracket offers a simple means forsecuring Ball Latches and magnetic latches to profiles ofall lines. The catch housing and ball pin can be set tothe precise position by means of the slots.The Catch Mounting Bracket minimises the gap betweenthe doors and the Stand Profile.

Application examples of a Catch Mounting Bracket withBall Latch 8 for swing and sliding doors.Depending on the particular application, either the ballpin (Ball Latch 8 PA), the holding plate (magnetic catch)or the housings of the relevant latches can be secured tothe Catch Mounting Bracket.

12

New Products 09/2002 5. Panel Elements 5.1 Closed Panels

TransparentPanels

Acrylic Glass 2mmPMMA, clearThickness tolerance ± 10%m = 2.3 kg/m2

Panel size max. 3050x2030 mmCut-off, clear 0.0.476.21

Polycarbonate 2mmPC, clearThickness tolerance ± 10%m = 2.4 kg/m2

Panel size max. 3050x2030 mmCut-off, clear 0.0.479.61

Cast acrylic glass with scratch-resistant surface issuitable for doors and casings. The panels can bepolished to a high gloss.Polycarbonate is knock-resistant and will not fractureand is therefore ideal for doors and casings that need tomeet security requirements. If polycarbonate panels areto be used with coolants over a long period of time, thiscan result in the material becoming brittle and areduction in the strength of the safety glass.The 2 mm-thick transparent panels are particularly wellsuited for use as protective panels in the document hol-der system.

Catch Mounting BracketSt, blackm = 88 g

1 pce. 0.0.475.06

The connection is made on the profile side using M5screws fitted into slots. DIN 125 washers must be used.

Catch MountingBracket

By combining two Catch Mounting Brackets it is alsopossible to use latches to lock together profiles of thesame size, minimising the gap between them.

13

St, hot-dip galvanized


m = 20.5 kg1 pce., 1830x958 mm 0.0.476.47

m = 42.3 kg1 pce., 1830x2008 mm 0.0.476.46


m = 13.8 kg1 pce., 1830x958 mm 0.0.476.49

m = 28.6 kg1 pce., 1830x2008 mm 0.0.476.48

Dual-RodMeshes

Inherently stable panel element for constructing free-standing protective fence structures. Available in twodifferent mesh widths (25 and 50 mm).The Dual-Rod Meshes are hot-dip galvanized to protectagainst corrosion. They can also be painted to suit cus-tomers’ individual needs.

The mesh openings prevent access to dangerous partsin accordance with the following table (compliant withEN 294).

Mesh Size of Distance towidth opening danger zone

a b

25 19 > 120

50 44 > 850

New Products 09/2002 5. Panel Elements 5.2 Mesh Panels

14

The Document Holder Support Profile is fixed onto basicconstructions made up of Line 8 Profiles using Clip 8 St.


DocumentHolders

The Document Holder system is used for constructingdisplay and information panels of any size in theworkplace or the training area. The panels can beattached directly to a frame construction made ofaluminium profiles, e.g. to the work bench in theproduction area. The Document Holder can also be usedto construct fixed or moveable panels on appropriateframe structures.The system consists of two aluminium profiles that areinterconnected using an integrated spring-mounted hinge.The Document Holder Support Profile forms the fixedframe which also secures the rear panel. This frame isfixed onto basic constructions made up of Line 8Profiles using Clip 8 St. The spring-loaded Lid Profilecan be swung up to provide a secure clamp fordocuments and drawings and to hold an optional acrylicglass panel secure in order to protect documents.The simplest form of the Document Holder is theclipboard. When deciding on the profile dimensions aclamping allowance of at least 10 mm should takeninto account.Another design option consists of an all-round frameconstruction which, for example, enables documents tobe attached securely in industrial applications.A further application for the Document Holder system isto construct moveable or fixed panels which allowdrawings of up to A0 size and above to be held safely.The clamping force of the Lid Profile can be adapted tothe specific requirements by changing the number ofclamping springs. At least two springs are required foreach Lid Profile.The exposed end faces of the Support Profiles and LidProfiles share a single cap which is screw-connected tothe Support Profile.

The Support Profile can also be secured to any surfaceusing a Countersunk Screw.

A protective panel can be used in Document Holderframes that are enclosed on all sides. This too is held inposition by the Lid Profile.

Swivelling the Lid Profile to open and close theDocument Holder.The leaf springs hold the lid in place at its two extremepositions. The document is held in position by simplyfolding over the Lid Profile.

Complete and ready for use Holder Frames orclipboards are available for A4 and A3 documents.

15


Document Holder 8 A4Fully assembled (excluding protective panel)A = 210 mmB = 300 mmm = 0.65 kg

1 set 0.0.476.22

Document Holder 8 A3Fully assembled (excluding protective panel)A = 420 mmB = 300 mmm = 1.2 kg1 set 0.0.476.23

Document Holder 8 Frame A4Fully assembled (including protective panel PMMA)A = 210 mmB = 300 mmm = 2.2 kg

1 set 0.0.476.24

Document Holder 8 Frame A3Fully assembled (including protective panel PMMA)A = 420 mmB = 300 mmm = 3.2 kg1 set 0.0.476.25

16

Calculating the number and lengths of the individualcomponents for constructing Document Holder Frames.


The rear panel (thickness 2 mm) is clamped to theSupport Profile by driving the Self-Tapping Screws DIN7982 St 3.5x9.5 into it’s groove.If a protective panel is not used, Sealing Strip 3x2 skshould be bonded into the Lid Profile to prevent thedocument from moving.

Document

Calculating the number and lengths of the individualcomponents for constructing Document Holders in theform of a clipboard.

Document Holders can be constructed in any sizes aseither clipboards or frames for documents.item’s sales partners provide design assistance andsupply either individual components, complete framesor building kits.The tables below show the dimensions required forDocument Holders together with the various sizes.

DocumentHolders

Qty. Length LengthDocument dimensions A BRear panel (R) 1 A+20 mm B+26 mmSupport Profile 1 A+20 mmLid Profile 1 A+20 mmSealing Strip 1 A+20 mm

Leaf Spring A100

Self-Tapping Screw A3.5x9.5 50

Document

Qty. Length LengthDocument dimensions A BRear panel (R) 1 A+72 mm B+72 mmProtective panel (S) 1 A+56 mm B+56 mmSupport Profile, horiz. 2 A+100 mmSupport Profile, vert. 2 B+20 mmLid Profile, horiz. 2 A+100 mmLid Profile, vert. 2 B+20 mm

Leaf Spring A+B100

Self-Tapping Screw A+B3.5x9.5 50

17

Document Holder 8 Support ProfileAl, anodizedm = 0.77 kg/m


Document Holder 8 Lid ProfileAl, anodizedm = 0.34 kg/m


Document Holder 8 Cap2 Caps, PA-GF, black2 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7982 St 4,2x16m = 7.0 g1 set 0.0.476.19

Document Holder 8 Leaf SpringSt, stainlessm = 1.3 g1 pce. 0.0.476.11

Self-Tapping Screw DIN 7982 St 3.5x9.5St, galvanizedm = 65 g/100

100 pce. 8.0.008.11

Sealing Strip 3x2 skCellular rubber, adhesive on one side, blackm = 1.6 g/m

1 pce., length 1000 mm 0.0.479.98


18


Cable Duct Robust modular special-purpose conduit for use as acable duct on all types of work bench constructionsdesigned to withstand both office and factoryenvironment. The system elements are designed tocreate large cross-section Cable Ducts that are able tohold both adapter blocks and power packs. Lines canbe run in and out of the Cable Duct at any position.Cables can be installed or exchanged quickly byopening the swing-up cover. A flexible lip provides aseal between the cover and the Cable Duct and alsoprevents cables slipping out.The modular design means that Cable Ducts can bebuilt for almost all work bench geometries andconstructions. item’s sales partners provide designassistance and supply either individual components,complete Cable Ducts or building kits.

The robust Cable Duct can be secured at any positionon desks or work bench systems by means of holesprovided in Wall Profile KW and is inherently stable.When snapped into place Catch KW provides thenecessary stability for the cable duct despite the largeswing lid opening.At least two Catches KW are recommended per lidsection.

Depending on the intended purpose of the work bench,the Cable Duct can be used as an extension of thebench surface or can be hidden below the latter.When used below the work bench top, the Cable Ductcan be used without Lid Profile 160 KW, but not withoutCatch 160 KW.

19


Lip Seal KW is secured to Lid Profile 160 KW byinserting it into the appropriate groove. A centre punchor similar is then used on the underside of the groovein order to deform it and ensure that Lip Seal KW ispermanently held in position.

The design behind the modular duct system can be usedto construct segmented sections of any required length.The individual profile elements are simply lockedtogether. Openings of any size in the Wall and SupportProfiles are possible to each side.The profiles are locked in position relative to each otherusing the screws of Conduit Cap KW.The grooves of Profile 5 Support and Wall Profiles KWenable T-Slot Nuts 5 to be used to secure parts withinthe Cable Duct.

The space inside the Cable Duct is large enough tostow power packs even when plugged into adapterblocks.

The end face of the Cable Duct is closed by ConduitCaps 160-45° KW which are screwed to the Support andWall Profiles. These are equipped with feedthroughopenings for cables and plugs. An appropriate cover canbe fitted to these openings if they are not being used.The Conduit Caps are supplied in pairs.

The Cable Duct either provides an extension to thework bench top within the frame of the work bench or isfitted to a height-adjustable work bench top.

20


Support Profile KWAl, anodizedm = 1.50 kg/mCut-off, max. 3000 mm, natural 0.0.474.75

Wall Profile KWAl, anodizedm = 3.0 kg/m


Wall Profile 160-45° KWAl, anodizedm = 2.25 kg/m


Lid Profile 160 KWAl, anodizedm = 0.74 kg/mCut-off, max. 3000 mm, natural 0.0.474.78

Lip Seal KWNBR, blackm = 7.3 g/mCut-off, max. 20 m 0.0.479.64

Catch 160 KWPA-GF, blackm = 34 g1 pce. 0.0.474.70

Conduit Cap 160-45° KW2 Conduit Caps, St, black2 covers, St, black8 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M3x6, St, black8 washers DIN 125-3.2, St, black8 hexagon nuts DIN 439-M3, St, black8 Self-Tapping Screws DIN 7982-4.2x16, St, blackm = 0.54 kg

1 set 0.0.474.98

Cable Duct

21

New Products 09/2002 6. Special Elements 6.7 General Accessories

Warning andProtectiveProfiles

Protective Profile 8 40x16TPE, blackm = 334 g/m1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.474.72

Warning and Protective Profile 8 40x16TPE, black / yellow stripem = 334 g/m1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.476.28

Protective Profile 8 40x16 R16TPE, blackm = 435 g/m1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.474.71

Warning and Protective Profile 8 40x16 R16TPE, black / yellow stripem = 435 g/m1 pce., length 2000 mm 0.0.476.27

Cap for Protective Profile 8 40x16TPE, blackm = 6 g1 pce. 0.0.474.74

Cap for Protective Profile 8 R16-90°TPE, blackm = 2 g1 pce. 0.0.474.73

Flexible plastic cavity profiles with fastening geometryfor grooves of Line 8 Profiles, for protecting againstknocks on the side face of profiles or to cover profileedges.The profiles are available as Warning and ProtectiveProfiles 8 with a yellow / black warning marking tohighlight edges or corners that are in danger of beingimpacted or to identify danger zones.The ends of the Warning and Protective Profiles aresealed by flexible Caps.

The Protective Profiles have a modular dimension of40 mm.Large cross-sections of Line 8 Profiles can beprotected effectively by combining several ProtectiveProfiles.

22



A

B

D

F

P

S

T

Acrylic Glass 12

Sealing Strip 3x2 sk 17Self-Tapping Screw DIN 7982 St 3.5x9.5 17


Cap for Protective Profile 8 40x16 21Caps 6 5Catch 160 KW 20Catch Mounting Bracket 11Conduit Cap 160-45° KW 20

Document Holder 8 A3 15Document Holder 8 A4 15Document Holder 8 Cap 17Document Holder 8 Leaf Spring 17Document Holder 8 Lid Profile 17Document Holders 14

Knuckle Feet, Stainless 9Knuckle Foot D20, M5x45 stainless 9Knuckle Foot D30, M6x45 stainless 9

Document Holder 8 Frame A3 15Document Holder 8 Frame A4 15Document Holder 8 Support Profile 17Dual-Rod Meshes 13Dual-Rod Meshes 25x200 13Dual-Rod Meshes 50x200 13

Lid Profile 160 KW 20

Parallel Fastener 8 8Parallel Fastener 8 Cover Profile 8Paralle Fastener 8 Cover Profile End Cap 8Polycarbonate 2mm 12Profile 6 30x12 light 5

Profile 6 60x12 light 5Profile 8 160x160 6Protective Profile 8 40x16 21Protective Profile 8 40x16 R16 21

W

L

C Cable Duct 18Cap 6 30x12 5Cap 6 60x12 5Cap 8 160x160 6Cap for Handle PA 160 11Cap for Protective Profile 8 R16-90° 21

Transparent Panels 12

Fastening Set for Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M8 7

K


Knuckle Foot D40, M8x60 stainless 9Knuckle Foot D60, M12x75 stainless 9Knuckle Foot D80, M16x100 stainless 10

Lip Seal KW 20

Support Profile KW 20

Wall Profile 160-45° KW 20Wall Profile KW 20Warning and Protective Profile 21

Warning and Protective Profile 8 40x16 21Warning and Protective Profile 8 40x16 R16 21

Information materialIf you require additional information material, please contact your itemdistribution and service partner. You can find the address on the back ofthe brochure or you can visit us at our web site:www.item-international.com


Comprehensive Catalogue MB Building Kit System 5460 pages1 pce. 0.4.110.22




CD MB Quick&Easy / Version 5.2 international1 pce. 0.5.000.67

0.4.

411.

60 0

9/20

02M

ade

in G

erm

any



Phone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]




Photographs


Notes





Phone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]



4

Contents


1. Basic Elements


Profile 5 20x20 3N 5

1.1.2 Profiles 6

Profile 6 30x30 3N light 5

1.1.3 Profiles 8

Profile 8 40x40 3N light 5

Profile 8 320x160 6

1.2 Accessories for Profiles 1.2.1 Caps for Profile End Faces

Cap 8 320x160 6



Fastener 8 M12 7

2. Floor Elements

2.1 Adjustable Feet 2.1.1 Knuckle Feet

Knuckle Foot D20, M5x45 8

2.1.3 Special Adjustable Feet


Levelling Feet D80, M33x80 9


4.3 Locks and Catches 4.3.3 Door Locks

Integrated Lock System 8 10

6. Special Elements


Radius Seal 8 40x40 12

Radius Seals 8 80x40 12


7.1 Conduits 7.1.3 Accessories for Conduits

Cable Entry Protector Lid 40 13

Cable Entry Protector Lid 80 13

Cable Entry Protector Wall 40 13

Cable Entry Protector Wall 80 13

8. Dynamic Elements

8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements 8.2.1 Timing-Belt Drives

Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder 8 R25 14

Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder 8 R50 14

Mounting Plate 160x160 U80 R50 15


5


Profiles withClosed Grooves

Profile 5 20x20 3NAl, anodizedA = 1.92 cm2 Ix = 0.80 cm4 Iy = 0.77 cm4

m = 0.50 kg/m Wx = 0.80 cm3 Wy = 0.76 cm3


Profile 6 30x30 3N lightAl, anodizedA = 3.60 cm2 Ix = 3.14 cm4 Iy = 3.02 cm4

m = 1.00 kg/m Wx = 2.09 cm3 Wy = 1.98 cm3


Profile 8 40x40 3N lightAl, anodizedA = 6.96 cm2 Ix = 10.22 cm4 Iy = 9.62 cm4

m = 1.90 kg/m Wx = 5.11 cm3 Wy = 4.70 cm3


Profiles in modular dimensions of Lines 5, 6 and 8with closed grooves on 3 sides. These profiles are idealfor applications where appearance and cleanliness areparticularly important.

6

Profile 8320x160


Profile 8 320x160Al, anodizedA =125.55 cm2 Ix = 4.398.20 cm4 Iy =14,194.10 cm4

m = 33.90 kg/m Wx = 549.80 cm3 Wy = 887.30 cm3


Cap 8 320x160St, painted, black4 dome-head screws M8x14, St, bright zinc-plated, blackm = 1.2 kg1 set 0.0.476.64

Profile 8 320x160 is particularly suitable for largeportals and heavy-duty machine constructions.Profile 8 grooves in modular dimension 40 mm enablethe use of proven fastening elements of Line 8 (e.g.Universal-Fastening Sets or Automatic-Fastening Sets).The new Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M8 or M12 isrecommended for interconnecting two Profiles8 320x160.

The profile cross-section contains core bores ofdiameter 10.2 mm, into which M12 threads can bedrilled. Adjustable Feet or floor fixing units, for example,can be screwed directly into these core bores. This isparticularly true of the new Base Plate 8 320x320 St II.To secure Caps 8 320x160 to the profile end face, anM8 thread must be drilled into the outer four screwchannels (ø 6.8 mm) of the profiles.

7

Angle Bracket8 St


Fastener 8 M12


Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M12High-strength cast iron, painted, RAL9006 white aluminiumm = 3.5 kg

1 pce. 0.0.475.20

Heavy-duty fastening element for power-lock, non-machined connection of large Profiles 8 320x160 orProfiles 8 160x160 with innovative screw technology.Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M12 is used for screwattachment with Fasteners 8 M12. A particulary heavy-duty connection is possible for the profiles by using anM12 bolt with Profile 8 grooves.Angle Bracket 8 160x160 St M12 can also be used forscrewing profiles to floors and walls and for fasteningheavy parts that are not part of the MB Building Kit Sy-stem.Alternatively, Angle Bracket 8 St M12 can also be screwattached using bolts and T-Slot Nuts 8 St M8.

The tightening torque for the nut of Fastener 8 M12 isM = 80 Nm.

Two-part Fastener for heavy-duty securing of parts to theProfile 8 groove.The two halves of the Fastener are fitted into the grooveat any point where they are then slid together.The integrated sprung ball holds the Fastener in placeand facilitates screw attachment.

8


Knuckle Foot D20, M5x45Spindle, St, bright zinc-platedFoot plate, PA, blackHexagon Nut DIN 934-M5, St, bright zinc-platedF = 750 N α = 15°m = 7 g1 pce. 0.0.464.75

Knuckle FootD20

Fastener 8 M12

Fastener 8 M121 fastener half without clamp, G-St, stainless1 fastener half with clamp, G-St, stainless1 nut DIN 934-M12, St, bright zinc-plated1 washer DIN 125-12, St, bright zinc-platedm = 70 g1 set 0.0.473.02

Knuckle Foot for lightweight constructions, highlysuitable for Line 5 profiles.Spindle M5 can be screwed directly into a thread in theprofile core bores.

Unevenness of the floor is compensated for by means ofa ball and socket joint.

9

Base Plate 8320x320 St II


Base Plate 8 320x320 St IISt, painted, blackSt, lackiert, schwarz8 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 6912-M12x40,St, bright zinc-plated4 washers DIN 440-R22, St, blackm = 11.6 kg

1 set 0.0.476.70

Levelling Feet D80, M33x804 base plates, St, black4 hollow studs, St, black8 hexagon nuts DIN439-M33x2, St, blackm = 3.5 kg

1 set 0.0.480.91

New design of Base Plate 8 320x320 St. The holepattern for the countersinks can be used for end-faceconnection to Profiles 8 160x160, 160x160 8EN,240x160 8EN and 8 320x160.The Base Plate can be fastened to the floor in twoways - either by bolting it directly to the floor or byalso using Levelling Feet. These compensate for slightunevenness of the floor in the area of the base plate aswell as possible height differences.The floor anchors are fed through the bores in theLevelling Feet. When these are tightened the LevellingFeet are fixed in their preset position.

Base Plate 8 320x320 St II has been prepared forscrewing into the core bores of the profiles(8 countersinks for Hexagon Socket Head Cap ScrewsDIN 6912-M12 in Profiles 8 320x160 and 8 160x160,and countersinks for Hexagon Socket Head Cap ScrewsDIN 912-M8 in Profiles 8 160x160 8EN or8 240x160 8EN).It is fastened to the floor using bores ø 38 mm andwashers DIN 440.

The lower hexagon nut (50 A/F) is adjusted to set theheight of the Levelling Feet. The hollow stud must beprevented from twisting (30 A/F).Any unevenness is compensated for by means of a ballsocket in the base plate (α = ± 2.5°).

10


Tube D6.3x1.6 5.5 A/F

Integrated LockSystem 8

Integrated Lock System 8 is a modular door lock forguards and enclosures. The various configurationsusing pawl latches or rods enable doors to be locked inup to three directions.The lock is fully integrated into Profile 8 or Profile 8light - the rotating pawl latch swings into the lateralprofile groove and the rods are concealed in the profilecore bore.The basic version of a door lock equipped withIntegrated Lock System 8 consists of a Rotating PawlLatch 8 and at least one handle.The system can be operated from either one side or bothsides of the door (i.e. inside/outside). There is also theoption of locking the door from one side by using thelockable handle.

A Rod Latch 8 is required for each of the rods at the topand bottom of the door.The Rod Latch also contains the rod actuator pin neededfor actuating the rod with the Rotating Pawl Latch 8.Tube D6.3x1.6 5.5 A/F forms the connection between theRotating Pawl Latch and the Rod Latch.The length l of the tube for actuating the Rod Latch is:

l = a - 60 mm

A countersink of diameter 30 mm must be drilled intothe door profile for holding the Integrated Lock System.A commercially available countersinking drill (3-cutterwith guide pin ø 11 mm or larger) or Step Drill, Univer-sal Connection 12 is required for this purpose.Countersink ø 30 mm must be 25 mm deep.

Rotating Pawl Latch 8 with two handles:The pawl latch engages into the Profile 8 groove of thedoor frame adjacent.The gap between the door profile and the lateral doorframe must not exceed 6 mm.

The rods of the Rod Latches move out of the core borein the door profile and engage in the Profile 8 groove ofthe door frame profile adjacent.The gap between the door profile and the upper doorframe must not exceed 7 mm.

11


Rotating Pawl Latch 81 pawl, GD-Zn, bright-zinc plated2 alternating stops, GD-Zn, bright-zinc plated1 crank, GD-Zn, bright-zinc plated1 connecting plate, St1 glide bush, POM, black1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M3x5, St,bright-zinc platedNotes on Use and Installationm = 50 g1 set 0.0.476.96

Handle1 handle, PA, black1 square drive 56 mm long, St, bright-zinc plated1 square drive 112 mm long, St, bright-zinc plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 Al M52 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x16, St,bright-zinc platedm = 170 g1 set 0.0.476.92

Handle, Lockable1 handle, PA, black2 keys1 square drive 56 mm long, St, bright-zinc plated1 square drive 112 mm long, St, bright-zinc plated2 T-Slot Nuts 8 Al M52 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M5x16, St,bright-zinc platedm = 220 g1 set 0.0.476.94

Rod Latch 81 cap, PA-GF, schwarz1 locking pin, St, stainless1 rod actuator pin, St1 O-ring DIN 3771 5.5x1.5, NBR, black1 self-tapping screw DIN 7982-4.2x16, St, blackm = 30 g

1 set 0.0.476.98

Tube D6.3x1.6 5.5 A/FAl, anodizedm = 58 g/m


12

New Products 04/2003 6. Special Elements 6.7 General Accessories

The plastic Radius Seals ensure a continuoustransition for the external contour of 90° profileconnections. The gap between the straight end-facesaw cut of the profile and the profile edge radius isfilled by the seal. This simplifies cleaning andprevents dirt from entering the profile cavities. RadiusSeals can therefore be used particularly effectively inclean-room conditions.The Radius Seals can be used in combination with allknown connecting elements.Important:In the case of Standard, Universal and AutomaticFasteners, the power-lock connection with the RadiusSeal is achieved by means of an interlying plasticelement which reduces the load on the connection.Suitable reserves must be built in at the design stage.

Radius Seals

The designations R40 and R80 refer to the length of theside of the seal facing the profile radius.

In calculating the length of the cross profiles betweentwo profiles, the thickness of the Radius Seals on eachside must be taken into account.

Radius Seal 8 40x40PA, grey similar to RAL7042m = 2 g each10 pce. 0.0.480.39

Radius Seal 8 80x40 R40PA, grey similar to RAL7042m = 4 g each10 pce. 0.0.480.41

Radius Seal 8 80x40 R80PA, grey similar to RAL7042m = 4 g each10 pce. 0.0.480.95

13

New Products 04/2003 7. Installation Elements 7.1 Conduits

Cable Entry Protector, Lid 402 halves, PA-GF, blackm = 7 g

1 set 0.0.479.76

Cable Entry Protector, Lid 802 halves, PA-GF, blackm = 9 g

1 set 0.0.479.77

Cable Entry Protector, Wall 40PA-GF, blackm = 5 g

1 pce. 0.0.479.74

Cable Entry Protector, Wall 80PA-GF, blackm = 9 g

1 pce. 0.0.479.75

The Cable Entry Protectors enable hoses and cables tobe routed in and out of conduits without having todeburr the profiles or take other protective measures. Abreak is made at a suitable point in the Support Profilesand Wall Profiles (modular conduit system) or the LidProfiles (conduits E). A Cable Entry Protector covers thesharp cut edges of the profiles and protects cables andhoses as they emerge from the conduits.Cable Entry Protectors, Lid are suitable for use with LidProfiles and Support Profiles. Cable Entry Protectors,Wall are suitable for the appropriate Wall Profiles.

Cable EntryProtectors, Lidand Wall

Cable Entry Protectors, Lid consist of two parts in orderto avoid the tiresome business of having to threadcables and hoses through.

14

New Products 04/2003 8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements

Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder 8 R251 holder, Al, anodized1 Countersunk Screw DIN 7991-M6x40, St,bright-zinc plated3 adapter washers DIN 988, St, stainlessm = 160 g

1 set 0.0.426.33

Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder 8 R501 holder, Al, anodized2 Countersunk Screws DIN 7991-M6x40, St,bright-zinc plated6 adapter washers DIN 988, St, stainlessm = 360 g

1 set 0.0.426.36

The Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder is used for driven li-near axes with fixed Timing Belt. The holder counteractsthe tendency of the timing-belt tensioner to lift up off theprofile to which it is screwed by means of the fixingblock.The holder improves the running of the timing belt drive,particularly when operating at maximum load. The drivevibrates less and is more rigid. In reinforcing against thebending moment, the holder also reduces the load onthe tensioning screws of the timing-belt tensioner.The Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder is available in twoversions for Timing Belts R25 and R50.

Timing-BeltTensionerHolder

The Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder is screwed togetherwith the fixing block. The tensioning screws of thetiming-belt tensioner are accessed through the holesprovided.

Drawing of a linear drive with moving axis. A holderfixes each of the timing-belt tensioners in place.

15

New Products 04/2003 8. Dynamic Elements 8.2 Mechanical Drive Elements

Special Mounting Plate for fastening Timing-BeltReverse Unit 8 80 R50 II to large Profiles 8 160x160and 320x160.The plate features counterbores for fastening to the faceend of the profile and threaded holes for the screws tosecure the Reverse Unit.

Mounting Plate

The Mounting Plate can be used to fasten Timing BeltR50 to any face of the profile.

1. Fitting the Mounting Plate to the end face of theprofile:Securing to the profile core bores using four bolts DIN912-M8x40.2. Fitting the Timing-Belt Reverse Unit 8 80 R50 II tothe Mounting Plate:Assembling screws into the threaded bores of theMounting Plate using 3 Button-Head Screws M8x20 andwashers DIN 125-8.4.

Mounting Plate 160x160 U80R50Al, blackm = 1.02 kg

1 pce. 0.0.480.71

16

The building kit system – a vast array of parts and avirtually unlimited range of possibilities.Industrial building kit systems looking to cover a broadspectrum of cutting-edge fixtures must be able to deliverfunctionality, cost-efficiency, flexibility and many otherfeatures.The modular design of the item MB Building Kit Systemcan combine all the elements of the individual productgroups in order to create a huge spectrum of fixturesranging from assembly work benches and factoryequipment to automated production facilities.The components of the MB Building Kit System are

easily combined into customised solutions.

The following media are also available upon request:> Comprehensive Catalog MB Building Kit System - Ourproducts for your projects> CD MB Building Kit System - Our products in pdfformat for easy access> CD MB Quick & Easy - Our design support for yourprojects

The Philosophy of theMB Building Kit System

When item Industrietechnik und Maschinenbau GmbHwas established in Solingen in 1974, its initial areas ofoperation included the design and construction ofcustomised machines and assembly equipment.From the very outset, our company set itself a primegoal - to reduce the cost of building machines byrationalising machining and assembly operations and bystandardising components.item operates a decentralised sales structure worldwide.Sales and service centres close to the customer are ableto provide a full spectrum of services and offer anexcellent level of support for all tasks.

item - Company andServices

> Fast delivery of all system elements> Elements machined ready for assembly> Assembly of construction kits> Turnkey solutions with system elements> CAD software for project management> Internal and external training

17

International Sales With branches, sales partners and a comprehensivenetwork of service centres worldwide, item can assureusers of continuous support and rapid availability ofproducts in their direct vicinity.You can find item sales partners in the followingcountries:

> Australia

> Austria

> Belgium

> Brazil

> Canada

> Czech Republic

> Denmark

> Finland

> France

> Greece

> Hungary

> Ireland

> Israel

> Italy

> Japan

> Netherlands

> New Zealand

> Norway

> Poland

> Singapore

> Slovenia

> South Africa

> Spain

> Sweden

> Switzerland

> UK

> USA

18



A

B

H

F

P

S

T

R

L

C

K


Base Plate 8 320x320 St II 9

Cable Entry Protector Lid 40 13Cable Entry Protector Lid 80 13Cable Entry Protector Wall 40 13Cable Entry Protector Wall 80 13Cap 8 320x160 6

Fastener 8 M12 7

Handle 11Handle, lockable 11

Integrated Lock System 8 10

Knuckle Foot D20, M5x45 8

Levelling Feet D80, M33x80 9

Mounting Plate 160x160 U80R50 15

Profile 5 20x20 3N 5Profile 6 30x30 3N light 5Profile 8 320x160 6Profile 8 40x40 3N light 5Profiles with closed grooves 5

Radius Seal 8 40x40 12Radius Seal 8 80x40 R40 12Radius Seal 8 80x40 R80 12Rod Latch 8 11Rotating Pawl Latch 8 11

Step Drill, Universal Connection 12 11

I

Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder 8 R25 14Timing-Belt Tensioner Holder 8 R50 14Tube D6.3x1.6 5.5 A/F 11

M



Comprehensive Catalogue MB Building Kit System 51 pce. 0.4.110.22

Catalogue MB Building Kit SystemNew Products 04/20011 pce. 0.4.110.27




Catalogue MB Building Kit System Line 121 pce. 0.4.111.96

CD-ROM MB Quick&Easy / Version 5.2 international1 pce. 0.5.000.67

CD-ROM MB Building Kit System ComprehensiveCatalogue in pdf format1 pce. 0.4.111.84

0.4.

111.

86 0

5/20

03M

ade

in G

erm

any



Phone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]


MB Building Kit System

New Line 12 New Line 12 New Line 12 New Line 12 New Line 12



Photographs


Notes





Phone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]



4

Contents


1. Basic Elements Line 12


Introduction 6

Profiles 12 60x60 10





1.2 Accessories for Profiles 1.2.1 Caps for Profile End Faces

Caps 12 12

1.2.2 Cover for Profile Groove

Cover Profile 12 Al 13

Cover Profile 12 14


Standard Fastener 12 15

Universal Fastener 12 16

Automatic Fastener 12 17

Angle Bracket 12 Zn 18

1.3.4 Butt Connections

Universal-Butt Fastener 12 20

Automatic-Butt Fastener 12 21

2. Floor Elements

2.3 Accessories for Floor Elements 2.3.2 Base Plates/Transport Plates

Base Plates/Transport Plates 12 22


3.1 T-Slot Nuts 3.1.1 T-Slot Nuts

T-Slot Nuts 12 St 23

T-Slot Nuts 12 St, heavy-duty 24

3.1.2 T-Slot Nut Profiles

Profile Bar 12 St 25

Profile Bar 12 St, heavy-duty 25

3.2 Screws and Nuts 3.2.2 Special Fastening Elements

Adapter Profile 12/8 26


9.2 Jigs and Tools 9.2.1 Connections for Basic Elements

Step Drill, Universal Connection 12 27

9.2.4 General Tools

Ball-Headed Key 28

Key with T-Handle 28

L-Key 29

Screwdriver Socket 8 A/F-½“ 30

9.3 Services 9.3.2 Connection Processing

Saw Cuts 31

Connection Processing, End Face, Thread 31

Connection Processing, Drilled Hole 32

Connection Processing, Stepped Bore 32


55

Hit the mark with Line 12 -the alternative to steel inmechanical engineering

The new Line 12 - designed for very heavy loads inmechanical engineering.Based on the 60 mm modular dimension, Line 12 isone of the few systems on the market with a heavy-dutyM12 screw connection.The profile cross-sections up to 240x120 mm are theperfect alternative to steel girders. A comprehensiverange of accessories and stable fastening elementscomplete the system.The demand for rigid, heavy-duty aluminium profiles iscontinuing to grow worldwide. The convincingadvantages of profile technology are even beingrecognised and used in applications which, due to thehigh loads involved, were hitherto the sole reserve ofsteel constructions.Both simple frames with small footprints and supportingconstructions for heavy machinery can be built easilyand at low cost. The result is a load-bearing capacitywhich previously was only possible through intensivemachining in the steel construction sector.

Assembly of the standard connection in Line 12

Line 12 compared to Line 8

Heavy-duty and light-duty profiles

6


Core Bores

Tensile Loading

Profile 12Technical Data

Tolerances ofexternal dimensions andgroove position

Groove Dimensions

The positional tolerance of the bores depends on thenumber of core bores.

Number of bores z [mm]

1 0.42 to 4 0.6> 4 0.8

7

Torsion

Straightness Tolerancetransverse

Angular Tolerance

Straightness Tolerancelongitudinal

Torsional tolerance vat lengths l [mm]

b [mm] up to up to up to up to up to up to from up to 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

- 60 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.5 2.0 2.060 120 1.0 1.5 1.8 2.2 2.5 3.0

120 240 1.8 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5

Width b [mm] Angular tolerancefrom up to w ± [mm]

0 60 0.6060 120 0.80

120 240 1.5

Length Tolerancesl1 [mm] h1 [mm] h2

up to 1000 0.7up to 2000 1.3up to 3000 1.8up to 4000 2.2up to 5000 2.6up to 6000 3.0

For each length sectionl2 = 300 mm, the maximumdeviation h2 is 0.3 mm

Width a [mm] Straightness tolerancefrom up to t [mm]

0 60 0.260 120 0.3

120 240 0.5


8



Checking the bending stress

σ =Mb

________________________

W x 103

σ = Bending stress in N/mm2


Rp0.2 Al = 195 N/mm2

The calculated bending stress σ must be compared withthe permissible bending stress σperm .

σ perm =Rp 0.2

________________________

S


The following equations apply for calculating deflectionf:Example load 1

f =F x l3

______________________

3 x E x Ι x 104

Example load 2

f =F x l3

______________________

48 x E x Ι x 104

Example load 3

f =F x l3

______________________

192 x E x Ι x 104


f =F x l3

______________________

8 x E x Ι x 104

As example load 2

f =5 x F x l3

______________________

384 x E x Ι x 104

As example load 3

f = F x l3

______________________

384 x E x Ι x 104

F = Load in Nl = Free profile length in mmΙ = Moment of inertia in cm4


EAI = 70,000 N/mm2


Example:

Given:F = 10,000 Nl = 1,000 mmΙy = 509.70 cm4 (Profile 12 120x60, edgewise)Find:f = Deflection in mmResults:Example load 1f ≅ 9.34 mmExample load 2f ≅ 0.58 mmExample load 3f ≅ 0.15 mmFor an approximate calculation of the deflection causedby the dead weight, the dead weight is entered as F inthe nomogram and the resulting values should behalved.

9


10

Profile 12 60x60 lightAl, anodizedA = 14.50 cm2 I = 46.02 cm4

m = 3.91 kg/m W = 15.36 cm3



m = 5.55 kg/m W = 23.50 cm3


Profile 12 120x60 lightAl, anodizedA = 26.15 cm2 Ix = 88.15 cm4 Iy = 355.50 cm4

m = 7.10 kg/m Wx = 29.40 cm3 Wy = 59.40 cm3


Profile 12 120x60Al, anodizedA = 37.58 cm2 Ix = 135.40 cm4 Iy = 509.70 cm4

m = 10.15 kg/m Wx = 45.10 cm3 Wy = 85.10 cm3


Profile 12 120x120 lightAl, anodizedA = 44.45 cm2 I = 679.60 cm4

m = 12.00 kg/m W = 113.50 cm3



m = 16.30 kg/m W = 159.00 cm3



m = 13.25 kg/m Wx = 57.02 cm3 Wy = 215.90 cm3


Profiles 12ModularDimensions(Basis 60 mm),Open Grooves


Line 12 Profiles are particularly suitable for stable frameconstructions carrying high loads. The rigidity of theprofile flanks enables tensile loading of up to 10,000 Nper screw connection. Their inclination towards thegroove produces a high degree of security against lossof pre-tensioning.Areas of this basic frame which are subject to less loadcan be constructed from Profiles 12 light in order tosave material.

11


Profile 12 240x60Al, anodizedA = 72.60 cm2 Ix = 269.38 cm4 Iy = 3777.20 cm4

m = 19.60 kg/m Wx = 89.60 cm3 Wy = 314.80 cm3



m = 22.60 kg/m Wx = 221.80 cm3 Wy = 378.10 cm3


Profile 12 240x120Al, anodizedA =112.00 cm2 Ix = 1815.20 cm4 Iy = 6168.90 cm4

m = 30.24 kg/m Wx = 302.00 cm3 Wy = 514.10 cm3


12


PA-GB, black

Cap 12 60x60m = 14.7 g1 pce. 0.0.005.01

Cap 12 120x60m = 28 g1 pce. 0.0.005.02

Cap 12 120x120m = 54 g1 pce. 0.0.005.03

Cap 12 240x60m = 54 g1 pce. 0.0.005.05

Cap 12 240x120m = 106 g1 pce. 0.0.005.04

Caps Stable Caps made of 6 mm thick, glass fibre reinforcedplastic protect the end faces of Profiles 12 from damageand cover the cut edge. Deburring of the cut edge istherefore not necessary.

13

Cover Profile 12 AlAl, anodizedm = 62 g/m10 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 0.0.003.73

Cover Profile Al


Cover Profile 12 Al seals the grooves of the profile sidefaces so that they are dust-proof and easy to clean.Electric cables running along the groove of Profile 12can thus be protected and installed out of sight.

14


Cover Profile

Cover Profile 12PP/TPEm = 58 g/m10 pce., length 2000 mm, natural 0.0.005.16


A profile made of flexible plastic designed for twodifferent applications:As a Cover Profile, it seals the profile grooves andthereby prevents heavy soiling.With the open side facing outwards, it serves as apanel-fixing profile for panel elements that are thusheld securely in the broad profile groove.It is available in two material specifications:black and natural (opaque).

15


Right-angled, power-locking connections of Profiles 12with high-strength and minimum processingrequirement.The standard connecting plate ensures optimum loadapplication, with the profiles being correctly fixed relativeto each other.

Standard-Fastening Set

The standard connecting plates can be arranged in therequired direction to match the way in which the profilesare fitted.Large profiles with high load-bearing capabilities areconnected using a larger number of Standard Fasteners.

Standard-Fastening Set 12Standard connecting plate 12, St, bright zinc-platedButton-Head Screw ISO 7380-M12x30, St, bright zinc-platedM = 80 Nmm = 70 g

1 set 0.0.003.35


The required M12 thread can be tapped directly into thecore bore of Profiles 12.

Position of the through holes for Key 8 A/F.

16


Universal-Fastening Set

Universal-Fastening Set 12Universal Fastener 12, die-cast zinc, bright zinc-platedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 7984-M12x45,St, bright zinc-platedWasher DIN 433-13, St, bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut 12 St M12, bright zinc-platedM = 80 Nmm = 155 g

1 set 0.0.003.57


For universal power-lock connection of all profiles ofLine 12. Suitable for profiles which need to be movedsubsequently, since only one profile is processed. TheseFastening Sets can be installed easily into existingconstructions.

Universal-Fastening Sets should always be used inpairs.

The tightening torque for the screw (M = 80 Nm) isapplied using L-Key 8 A/F.

Step Drill, Universal Connection 12 (Art. No.:0.0.014.03) is available for machining the profiles.

17


Automatic-Fastening Set

Automatic-Fastening Set 12Automatic Fastener 12, St, bright zinc-platedHexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M8x60, St,bright zinc-platedT-Slot Nut 12 St M8, bright zinc-plateds = 8 A/FM = 34 Nmm = 125 g

1 set 0.0.003.50


For universal power-lock connection of all profiles ofLine 12. Suitable for profiles which need to be movedsubsequently, since the Fasteners are only screwed intoone profile. These Fastening Sets can be installed easilyinto existing constructions. The profiles do not need tobe machined in order to use the Automatic-Fastening Sets.

The Fastener is screwed into a profile groove in the endface, the thread being cut automatically. Use of a lubricantis recommended.Note: All Fasteners with a clearance bore for thefastening screw have a counter-clockwise thread on theoutside in order to prevent the Fastener twisting whenthe screw is being tightened.

Automatic-Fastening Set should always be used in pairs.

With Automatic-Fastening Set 12, twisting can beprevented by screwing out the Fastener (after the profilehas been assembled) until the head of the Fastenerprojects into the other profile groove.

L-Key 6 A/F (Order No.: 0.0.007.01) is available fortightening the screws of the Automatic-Fastening Set(tightening torque M = 34 Nm).

18

Angle Bracket12 Zn



1 pce. 0.0.003.20


1 pce. 0.0.005.06

Angle Bracket Set 12 60x60Angle Bracket 12 60x60 ZnAngle Bracket Cap 12 60x602 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M12x25,St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 433-13, St, bright zinc-plated2 T-Slot Nuts 12 St M12, bright zinc-platedm = 520 g

1 set 0.0.003.53

Angle Bracket 12 60x60 Zn F < 2000 N ^ Fxl < 100 NmAngle Bracket 12 120x120 Zn F < 4000 N ^ Fxl < 250 Nm

When used to reinforce the joints of large profiles,several Angle Brackets can be used in parallel.

The load-bearing capacity must be checked to determinewhether both conditions are met.

For power-lock connection (without machining) betweenprofiles, reinforcing profile connections or fastening arange of components to profiles.The anti-torsion lugs, which can be broken off, alsoenable fastening on surfaces without grooves.

Note: Ensure the maximum permissible tensile load onthe Profile Groove is not exceeded!

19



1 pce. 0.0.003.21


1 pce. 0.0.005.07

Angle Bracket Set 12 120x120Angle Bracket 12 120x120 ZnAngle Bracket Cap 12 120x1204 Button-Head Screws ISO 7380-M12x25,St, bright zinc-plated4 washers DIN 433-13, St, bright zinc-plated4 T-Slot Nuts 12 St M12, bright zinc-platedm = 1.2 kg

1 set 0.0.003.54

20


Universal-Butt-Fastening Set 122 Universal Fasteners 12, die-cast zinc, bright zinc-plated1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 7984-M12x60,St, bright zinc-plated1 washer DIN 433-13, St, bright zinc-plated1 Hexagon Nut DIN 934-M12, St, bright zinc-platedM = 80 Nmm = 200 g

1 set 0.0.003.61

Connection processing of the profiles is the same as forthe Universal-Fastening Sets.

The Universal-Butt-Fastening Sets can be used toconnect the end faces of two profiles from Line 12.Universal-Butt-Fastening Sets should always be used inpairs. Depending on the profile size and load, severalpairs may be necessary.


21

Automatic Butt-Fastening Set 121 Automatic Fastener 12 with through bore,St, bright zinc-plated1 Automatic Fastener 12 with threaded bore,St, bright zinc-plated1 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw DIN 912-M8x80,St, bright zinc-plateds = 8 A/FM = 34 Nmm = 140 g

1 set 0.0.003.51

Additional anti-torsion protection can be provided bydriving the Fastener with internal thread into the profileso that the end of the Fastener remains proud andprojects into the groove opposite. The Fastener withthrough bore must be screwed in the appropriatedistance.

The Automatic Butt-Fastening Sets can be used toconnect the end faces of two profiles from Line 12without mechanical processing.Automatic Butt-Fastening Sets should always be used inpairs. Depending on the profile size and load, severalpairs may be necessary.


The Fastener is screwed into a profile groove in the endface, the thread being cut automatically. Use of a lubricantis recommended.Note: All Fasteners with a through bore for the fasteningscrew have a counter-clockwise thread on the outside inorder to prevent the Fastener twisting when the screw istightened.

Automatic Butt-Fastening Sets

L-Key 6 A/F (Order No.: 0.0.007.01) is available fortightening the screws of the Automatic-Fastening Set(tightening torque M = 34 Nm).

22

New Products 04/2003 2. Floor Elements 2.3 Accessories for Floor Elements

GD-Zn, black

Base Plate/Transport Plate 12 120x60, M122 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 7984-M12x30,St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 433-13, St, bright zinc-platedm = 800 g1 set 0.0.007.34

Base Plate/Transport Plate 12 120x60, M162 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 7984-M12x30,St, bright zinc-plated2 washers DIN 433-13, St, bright zinc-platedm = 800 g1 set 0.0.007.37

Base Plate/Transport Plate 12 120x120, M124 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 7984-M12x30,St, bright zinc-plated4 washers DIN 433-13, St, bright zinc-platedm = 1.2 kg1 set 0.0.007.40

Base Plate/Transport Plate 12 120x120, M164 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws DIN 7984-M12x30,St, bright zinc-plated4 washers DIN 433-13, St, bright zinc-platedm = 1.55 kg1 set 0.0.007.43

Base Plates/Transport Plates

The Base Plates/Transport Plates can be screwed in thecore bores in the end faces of the profiles and incombination with T-Slot Nuts to the grooves of theprofile sides.Threads of different diameters accommodate ring bolts,adjustable feet, castors and other elements.

23

T-Slot Nuts St



T-Slot Nut 12 St M6Mmax. = 14 Nm Fmax. = 3,500 Nm = 31 g1 pce. 0.0.003.72

T-Slot Nut 12 St M8Mmax. = 34 Nm Fmax. = 6,000 N *m = 33 g1 pce. 0.0.003.63



* maximal zulässige Belastbarkeit der Profilnut auf Zug beachten!

T-Slot Nuts St are inserted into the profile groove wherethey are secured in position by means of spring-loadedballs.

T-Slot Nuts St - designed for fixing parts or for use infastening applications.The anti-torsion block in the groove makes precisealignment in the profile groove easier.

* maximum load achievable in standard Profile only.Check profile properties if using Profile Light!

24

T-Slot NutsSt, heavy-duty



T-Slot Nut 12 St M8, heavy-dutyMmax. = 34 Nm Fmax. = 6,000 N *m = 45 g1 pce. 0.0.003.66



* maximal zulässige Belastbarkeit der Profilnut auf Zug beachten!

T-Slot Nuts St, heavy-duty are inserted into the profilegroove in the end face where they are secured inposition by means of a thrust finger.

T-Slot Nuts St, heavy-duty, can be used for very heavy-duty fastening applications.Since their cross-section is adapted to the grooveshape, tensile forces are guided into the aluminiumprofile.They also have more supporting threads than theturn-to-insert T-Slot Nuts and thus allow greater screwtightening torques.

* maximum load achievable in standard Profile only.Check profile properties if using Profile Light!

25


Profile Bars

Profile Bar 12 StSt, bright zinc-platedThreaded bore max. M12m = 600 g1 pce., length 500 mm 0.0.003.74

Profile Bar 12 St, heavy-dutySt, bright zinc-platedThreaded bore max. M12m = 840 g1 pce., length 500 mm 0.0.003.75

The Profile Bar St can be turned into the profile groove.The Profile Bar St, heavy-duty is inserted into the profilegroove in the end face.

Profile Bars with the cross-section shapes of the T-SlotNuts. They can be machined as required and are used toproduce application-specific fastening elements.

26

New Products 04/2003 3. Fastening Elements 3.2 Screws and Nuts

Hinge 8 40x40,heavy-duty

Profile 12 60x60

T-Slot Nut 12 St M8

Adapter Profile 12/8 AlAl, anodizedm = 75 g/m


Adapter 12/8 Al-40Al, anodizedm = 3 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.003.92

Adapter 12/8 Al-80Al, anodizedm = 6 g

1 pce., natural 0.0.003.93

A special aluminium Adapter Profile, also available inthe form of pre-drilled Adapters made from it, forfastening various attachments from Line 8 onto ProfileGroove 12.Hinges, heavy-duty hinges, multiblocks and many otherelements are equipped with anti-torsion elements andcentring aids that are oriented to the Profile 8 groove.These can also be attached to Line 12 profiles using Ad-apters 12/8 without losing the centring effect.Adapters 12/8 already have through holes in the modulardimensions of Line 8. Further machining is not required.

Application example:Connecting a Hinge 8 40x40, heavy duty with Profile 12using Adapter 12/8 Al-40.The anti-torsion elements of the heavy duty Hinge in thegroove remain effective.

Adapter Profile

Adapter 12/8 Al-40

27

Step Drill

New Products 04/2003 9. Auxiliary Elements 9.2 Jigs and Tools

Step Drill, Universal Connection 12High-performance, high-speed steel, nitridedShaft: MT3m = 550 g

1 pce. 0.0.014.03

Special drill designed to produce the countersink forUniversal-Fastening Sets and Universal-Butt-FasteningSets 12. This tool is intended solely for use in pillardrills. It drills the centring hole and counterbore into theside faces of Profiles 12 in a single pass.

Note:Machining of the profiles with the Step Drill must beperformed on a pillar drill with a suitable taper mountMT3 or using suitable reducing adapters, e.g. MT4/MT3. It is important to ensure that the profiles aresecurely clamped!

28

Keys


Wrench, chrome-vanadium steel, matt chrome-platedHandle, PA/TPE, red/black

Ball-Headed Key 8 A/Fa = 268 mmb = 150 mmc = 8 A/Fm = 150 g1 pce. 0.0.480.34

Ball-Headed Key 10 A/Fa = 271 mmb = 150 mmc = 10 A/Fm = 211 g1 pce. 0.0.480.35

Wrench, chrome-vanadium steel, matt chrome-platedHandle, PA/TPE, red/black

Key with T-Handle 8 A/Fa = 330 mmb = 295 mmc = 8 A/Fm = 200 g1 pce. 0.0.480.36

Key with T-Handle 10 A/Fa = 330 mmb = 295 mmc = 10 A/Fm = 320 g1 pce. 0.0.480.37

Ball-Headed Key for fitting screws effortlessly in alltypes of fastening elements.L-Key is particularly suitable for tightening the screws ofUniversal and Automatic Connections.

29

Wrench, chrome-vanadium steel, matt chrome-plated

L-Key 6 A/Fa = 200 mmb = 160 mmc = 6 A/Fm = 150 g1 pce. 0.0.007.01

L-Key 8 A/Fa = 300 mmb = 200 mmc = 8 A/Fm = 300 g1 pce. 0.0.007.12


30


ScrewdriverSocket

Screwdriver Socket 8 A/F-½“ enables the use of a torquekey with ½“ square drive to check the tightening torquesof Standard and Universal Connections 12.

Screwdriver Socket 8 A/F-½“Chrome-vanadium steel, matt chrome-platedm = 200 g

1 pce. 0.0.007.47

31

New Products 04/2003 9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services

Saw Cuts Square and burr-minimised saw cuts (tolerances to DINISO 2768 - mK).The saw cut required for the cut-off is specifiedindividually for each profile in the price list.

Saw Cut for Small Cross-Sections1 pce. 0.0.026.30

Saw Cut for Medium Cross-Sections1 pce. 0.0.026.66

Saw Cut for Large Cross-Sections1 pce. 0.0.265.55

Saw Cut for Oversize Cross-Sections1 pce. 0.0.475.31

Profile processing for Standard or UniversalConnections. The position of the bores and threads mustbe specified when ordering.

ConnectionProcessing, EndFace


32

New Products 04/2003 9. Auxiliary Elements 9.3 Services


ConnectionProcessing,Drilled Hole


Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D30x24(Stepped bore for Universal Connection 12)1 pce. 0.0.015.03

33



A

B

P

L

C

K

Adapter 12/8 Al -40 27Adapter 12/8 Al -80 27Adapter Profile 12/8 Al 27Angle Bracket 12 60x60 Zn 18Angle Bracket 12 120x120 Zn 19Angle Bracket 12 Zn 18Angle Bracket Cap 12 60x60 18Angle Bracket Cap 12 120x120 19Angle Bracket Set 12 60x60 18Angle Bracket Set 12 120x120 19Automatic Butt-Fastening Set 12 21Automatic-Fastening Set 12 17

Ball-Headed Key 8 A/F 29Ball-Headed Key 10 A/F 29Base Plate/Transport Plate 12 120x60, M12 22Base Plate/Transport Plate 12 120x60, M16 22Base Plate/Transport Plate 12 120x120, M12 22Base Plate/Transport Plate 12 120x120, M16 22

Cap 12 60x60 12Cap 12 120x60 12Cap 12 120x120 12Cap 12 240x60 12Cap 12 240x120 12Caps 12 12Connection Processing, Drilled Hole D11.5 32Connection Processing, End Face, Thread M12x30 31Connection Processing, Stepped Bore D30x24 32Cover Profile 12 14Cover Profile 12 14Cover Profile 12 Al 13

Key with T-Handle 8 A/F 29Key with T-Handle 10 A/F 29

L-Key 6 A/F 29L-Key 8 A/F 29

Profile 12 60x60 10Profile 12 60x60 light 10Profile 12 120x60 10Profile 12 120x60 light 10Profile 12 120x120 10Profile 12 120x120 light 10Profile 12 240x60 11Profile 12 240x60 light 10Profile 12 240x120 11Profile 12 240x120 light 11

34



Universal-Butt-Fastening Set 12 20Universal-Fastening Set 12 16

T-Slot Nut 12 St M6 23T-Slot Nut 12 St M8 23T-Slot Nut 12 St M8, heavy-duty 24T-Slot Nut 12 St M10 23T-Slot Nut 12 St M10, heavy-duty 24T-Slot Nut 12 St M12 23T-Slot Nut 12 St M12, heavy-duty 24

Saw Cuts 31Screwdriver Socket 8 A/F-½“ 30Standard-Fastening Set 12 15Step Drill, Universal Connection 12 28

S

T

U

Profile Bar 12 St 25Profile Bar 12 St, heavy-duty 25Profiles 12 10

P



Comprehensive Catalogue MB Building Kit System 51 pce. 0.4.110.22






CD-ROM MB Quick&Easy / Version 5.2 international1 pce. 0.5.000.67

CD-ROM MB Building Kit System ComprehensiveCatalogue in pdf format1 pce. 0.4.111.84



Phone +49/212/65 80-300Fax +49/212/65 80-310

[email protected]


0.4.

111.

96 0

5/20

03M

ade

in G

erm

any

item

Documents

Transcript of item